Procedure #3.

200 GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title: 1.000

ORGANIZATION OF THE POLICE

Procedure:

DEPARTMENT MANUAL Date Issued: Revised:

2

I.PURPOSE

A. To provide employees with written documentation of various aspects of Department functionsandprocedures.

B. To keep written documentation of Department procedures, rules and policies in a format thataidstheemployeeingatheringinformationabouthowtoaccomplishacertaintaskintheirdaytoday activities.

II.POLICY

A. Clear written documentation of certain aspects of the police function is necessary. The Department will provide each employee and organizational component with a manual of procedures, policiesandrulestoaidthemincarryingouttheirduties.

III.PROCEDURE

A. The Department Procedure and Policy Manual is divided into five (5) Chapters. Each has a numberassignedtoit:

Chapter 1 - Organization, Management and Administration.

Chapter 2 - Law Enforcement Role, Responsibilities and Relationships.

Chapter 3 - Personnel Structure and Process.

Chapter 4 - Operations.

Chapter 5 - Support Services.

B. Procedures will be identified by the chapter number and an order number. The order is further divided into subsections that more narrowly define the chapter (ex. Procedure 5.103 would be foundinchapter5,section100,order3thatdealswithprisonerhandlingandholdingfacility).


C.Theorderassignedtothesectionsandchapterswithinthemanualortheordernumberofa particularproceduredoesnotindicateanyrankingororderofimportance.

D.Generally,eachsectionandeachindividualprocedurewillcontainthreebasicelements.

1.StatedPurposeAgeneralstatementusedtospecifyadevelopmentofaparticularpolicy
orprocedure.

2. Policy Statement - A statement, in broad terms, which supports the Department's basic missionanddirectspersonneltoageneralcourseofaction.

3.ProcedureOutline-Aspecificguideonthestepstobefollowedinaccomplishingatask.

E.Noteveryprocedurewillhaveitsownstatedpurposebutmayrelyonthoseof otherrelatedareas.

2 Procedure #1.001 GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title: WRITTEN 1.001 DIRECTIVES & PROCEDURES Procedure:

Date Issued: Revised:

I.PURPOSE

A.To provide guidelines for routine Departmental operations.

B.To establish a consistent format for written procedures.

C. To provide for the proper preparation, indexing and distribution of the Department procedures, rules, and regulations.

II.POLICY

A.It is the policy of the Granite City Police Department to provide Department personnel with a clear understanding of the policies and procedures which govern and guide their work. A written directive system is therefore established that is designed to encompass certain personnel policies, procedures, rules, and regulations.

III.PROCEDURE

A.

Authority and Responsibility.

1. The Chief of Police has the ultimate authority to issue, modify, or approve Department written directives. Supervisors may issue written directives that serve to direct some function or action. A copy of all written directives issued by a supervisor will be forwarded to the Chief of Police.

2.Department procedures are issued by the authority of the Chief of Police. Each member of the Department will be issued a Procedure Manual and/or a Compact Disc. Personnel will not deviate from established procedures except when absolutely necessary, or at the direction of a supervisor. In those circumstances, personnel must be able to justify and articulate their actions.

3. Supervisors will thoroughly acquaint themselves with each procedure issued and will discuss and explain these procedures to members assigned to their unit to ensure full understanding and compliance.

4. An acknowledgment of receipt form will accompany each procedure, rule, and regulation. Distribution of written directives to members of the Department will be through their immediate supervisor. Each member will be required to sign the Form to acknowledge receipt and review of the issued document. Written directives will be issued to all personnel unless otherwise directed.

5. Personnel will file the new or updated written directive in the appropriate section of their manual/CD using the decimal number as a guide. The table of contents will be adjusted accordingly.

6. Members of the Department are encouraged to note any procedure, rule, regulation, or part thereof that they feel needs to be reviewed or changed because of some revision in the law, is found to be no longer applicable, may have a negative impact upon the ability of the Department to provide police service in a contemporary environment, or some other justifiable reason. These corrections or suggestions should be documented and routed through the employee's supervisor to the Chief of Police.

7. New procedures, or revisions in existing procedures, will be distributed for review to selected personnel by the Chief of Police. Comments and suggestions will be returned to the Chief of Police.

8.Procedures will be indexed according to the numerical number assigned under the chapter classification. The front page of each procedure will indicate the date of issuance and the last date the procedure was revised. Supervisors will be provided with a memo explaining if the procedure is new or revised for correct purging of the manual.

9. Each Department Order Manual is serial numbered. All personnel will properly maintain their manual and ensure the contents are current and updated promptly. Department manuals will be maintained in accessible locations for easy reference and periodic inspection. Personnel manuals will be inspected upon request by a supervisor, and periodically by the division commander or Chief of Police.

10.Procedures will be reviewed every three years or sooner if necessary, from the date of issuance or, if the procedure had been revised, from the last date of revision. Members of the Department will be selected by the Chief of Police to review and make suggestions as to the current application of the procedure under review.

Procedure #1.002

GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title:DEPARTMENT GOALS AND OBJECTIVESProcedure:1.002 DateIssued: Revised:

I.PURPOSE A. To provide for the formulation, annual updating, and distribution to all personnel the goals and objectives of the Department. II.POLICY A. The mission of the Police Department is to: 1. Deter crime and apprehend criminals 2. Maintain strong police-community relations 3. To continually enhance the training and expertise of each member of the police department IIIPROCEDURE A. The goals of the Department are:
1. To identify criminal activity, pursue and apprehend criminal offenders, and proceed in the

prosecution of known offenders. 2. To maintain a proactive patrol and investigative force thereby reducing the opportunity for crime.
3. To facilitate the movement of people and vehicles through analysis and commitment of selective traffic enforcement resources.

4.To perpetuate a sound managerial environment that focuses upon Department goals and provides for career development through training, advancement and reward for exemplary performance. 5. To instill public confidence in the agency by maintaining a high degree of professionalism, dedication and expertise in the development of police service.

B. Information provided through staff meetings and general Department meetings will assist the Chief of Police in revising or setting new goals and objectives.

C. Supervisors are encouraged to solicit from their subordinates ideas and suggestions pertaining to Department goals, objectives and temporary units. Suggestions will be discussed at Staff meetings.

D. Statistical data gathered throughout the year will be used to measure the effectiveness and the attainment of the goals of the Department. Data sources shall include, but not be limited to:

1. Crime Reporting Systems; 2. Bureau of Identification; 3. Criminal Information Systems; and, 4. Monthly Department Reports.

Procedure 1.003

GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title:DEPARTMENT ORGANIZATIONProcedure:1.003 AND DIRECTION DateIssued: Revised:

I.PURPOSE A. To explain the organizational structure of the Police Department. II.POLICY A. The Department structure is designed to provide the most effective police service practical. The Department makes a commitment to allocate adequate staff positions in order to provide both efficient and effective delivery of police services. The structure of the Department is not rigid. It is subject to alteration based on the changing needs of the Department and the community it serves. III.PROCEDURE
A. Organizational Structure

1. The Department structure is illustrated in the organizational structure chart. The lines illustrating authority, direction, and responsibilities are designed specifically in explanation of the chain of command. Each person described in this chart is responsible for the next person in line. In turn, each person on this chart reports to, and is responsible to, the person before them. (see organizational chart) 2.Each organizational Division is under the direct command of only one supervisor. Each employee is accountable to only one supervisor at any given time. The Department will evaluate the number of subordinates reporting to a supervisor to ensure it is not excessive. When looking at this relationship, factors such as the supervisor's ability, experience, maturity of subordinates, and the sensitivity, volume or complexity of the work will be considered. As a general policy the number of employees under any one supervisor should not exceed eight. 3. The personal span of control of the

Chief of Police is grouped by function. IV.CHIEFOFPOLICE A. AUTHORITY: The ChiefofPolice is the chief executive officer of the Department and the final departmental authority in all matters of policy, operations, and discipline. He exercises all lawful powers of his office and issues such lawful orders as are necessary to assure the effective performance of the Department. B. RESPONSIBILITIES: Through the Chief of Police, the Department is responsible for the enforcement of all laws and ordinances coming within its legal jurisdiction. The Chief of Police is responsible for planning, directing, coordinating, controlling, and staffing all activities of the Department, for its continued and efficient operations, for the enforcement of rules and regulations within the Department, for the completion and forwarding of such reports as may be required by competent authority, and for the Department's relations with the citizens of the City, the City Government and other individuals or agencies as required to further Department objectives.

V.ASSISTANTCHIEFOFPOLICE A. The Investigative Division Commander is the responsibility of the Assistant Chief of Police. This position will be responsible for the management and supervision of the Investigative Division. As such, he is in charge of all members of the Division, both commissioned and civilian, including the Departmental undercover drug team. In addition to the following duties, he shall perform other duties as directed by the Chief of Police. He should maintain a high level of morale within the Division and be available on a twenty-four hour a day basis should an emergency arise. His duties require him to keep the Chief of Police fully informed on activities within the Division. 1. The Commander of Detectives is responsible for all investigations as conducted by all members of his Division. He shall preside over the daily operations of the Detective Division and he shall assume authority over and is to directly take charge of any major investigation. He shall assign case investigations, both felony and misdemeanor, to subordinates within the Investigative Division as well as misdemeanor assignments to the Patrol Division. He shall maintain a written record of all assignments and their dispositions. 2. The Commander of Detectives reviews all criminal and informational reports generated by the Patrol Division or other departmental member. He shall simultaneously inspect the reports for content and completeness.

3. The Commander of Detectives shall review case reports as generated by the Detectives. This shall include investigative reports, lab reports, missing persons, and reports of evidence. He shall be responsible for the processing and preservation of evidence and he is to insure that the proper chain of evidence is maintained. 4. The Commander of Detectives shall supervise, conduct and take charge of any Internal Investigations as directed by the Chief of Police and investigate and make recommendations on personnel and internal problems. The Commander of Detectives shall also review "Use of Force by Commissioned Officers." 5. The Commander of Detectives is also responsible for generating monthly and annual reports of the Detective Division's activity. 6. The Commander of Detectives is responsible for insuring that cases are trial ready and the investigating officer(s) are properly prepared, as well as creating a high moral atmosphere. 7. The Commander of Detectives shall insure that members of the Detective Division receive proper and ongoing training. He shall conduct staff meetings when needed to promote the development of subordinate's knowledge, ability and confidence. 8. The Commander of Detectives shall monitor expenditures from the Department's drug buy/ informant fund and shall on a periodic basis audit the Detective and Drug Unit's Informant Fund. 9. The Commander of Detectives shall prepare work schedules to maintain proper staffing. 10. The Commander of Detectives shall insure all subordinates under his command comply with Department rules, regulations and policy and implement disciplinary procedures when violations occur. He shall further insure that officers assigned to the Detective Division are properly attired and well groomed. 11. The Commander of Detectives shall create an operating budget for the Division and approve and monitor expenditures. He shall insure that equipment is upgraded and maintain an inventory to insure adequate supplies are available. 12. The Commander of Detectives shall coordinate activities with other Divisions and agencies when sharing information exchange and coordination of efforts. 13. The Commander of Detectives shall familiarize himself with the current Union agreement and interpret administration of its provisions. 14. The Commander of Detectives shall conduct performance appraisals and evaluations of his subordinates as required.
B.TheAssistantChiefofPolice will receive direction and supervision from, and is directly responsible to, the Chief of Police. The Assistant Chief will be considered the second in command of the Department and shall have all of the authority and responsibilities of the Chief of Police in the Chief's absence. The Assistant Chief will exercise

authority over all personnel, both civilian and commissioned.

C.TheAssistantChiefofPolice will assist the Chief of Police in the management functions of planning, organizing, directing, controlling and staffing the Department. D. In addition to the following duties, the Assistant Chief shall perform other duties as directed by the Chief of Police. 1. Shall serve as the Department Operations Officer, coordinating activities with other agencies and the Department divisions. 2. Shall investigate and make recommendations on internal problems. 3. Shall participate in the development and implementation of Department goals. 4. Shall participate in the development of a budget for the Department, forecast additional funds for staffing, equipment, etc. Assist in evaluating and purchasing material, supplies and equipment. 5. Shall write, revise, and distribute General Orders and Policies, keeping informed of new developments in law enforcement administration. 6. Shall participate in community meetings and ceremonies as Department representative. 7. Shall maintain personnel records on all members of the department, both commissioned and civilian.

8. Shall serve as the Department's media relations officer, as such he shall entertain the requests of the various media services, providing information regarding cases or incidents. The information released shall in no way interfere or hinder any departmental investigation. He shall not provide any personal information on departmental personnel or discuss departmental policy or discipline unless so directed by the Chief of Police. 9. Duties as the Media Relations Officer/Public Information Officer: a. Assist the news personnel in covering routine news stories. b. Assist the news media on an on call basis. c. Prepare and distribute news releases. d. Arrange for and assist at news conferences. e. Coordinate and authorize the release of information about victims, witnesses, and suspects.

f. Assist in crisis situations within the Department. g. Coordinate the release of authorized information concerning confidential agency investigations and operations.

10. Freedom of Information Act Officer a. The Assistant Chief of Police shall serve as the department Freedom of Information Act supervisor, overseeing the dissemination of police information and records as defined in Chapter 1.600 of this Manual.

VI.CAPTAIN 1.PATROLCAPTAIN A. The PatrolDivisionCaptain reports to the Chief of Police/Assistant Chief of Police. This position will be responsible for the management and supervision of the Patrol Division. As such, he assumes command of the Uniformed Patrol Division, Telecommunicators, High School S.R.O., Coordinated Youth S.R.O. and Elementary/ Middle School D.A.R.E. Officers. The Patrol Captain shall be physically fit and have a working knowledge to perform the duties required of his subordinates. He shall maintain a high level of morale within the Division and be available on a twenty-four hour a day basis should an emergency arise. His duties require him to keep the Chief of Police fully informed on activities within the Division. In addition to the following responsibilities he shall perform other duties as directed by the Chief of Police. The Captain of Patrol's responsibilities include, but are not limited to, the following. 1. The Patrol Captain shall manage the daily operation of the uniformed Patrol Division. He shall set operating goals for the Division, plan, prioritize, assign, supervise and review subordinate's work. The primary function of the Patrol Captain is to supervise and schedule the members of this division. It is his responsibility to insure that there are an adequate number of police persons on duty to provide service for the community. He shall receive and review requests for schedule changes and days off, vacation, etc. Involved in the scheduling to be taken into consideration are vacation, recreation days, sick leave, funeral leave, injury on duty, light duty, suspensions, training days and compensatory time. He shall insure that a minimum of one (1) ranking officer (i.e. Lieutenant or Sergeant) is present for and assigned to supervise each shift.

2. The Patrol Captain through the chain of command is responsible for transmitting instructions and departmental policy to the members of the Patrol Division. These instructions may range from daily memos to changes or additions to the departmental rules and regulations. 3. The Patrol Captain shall identify Patrol Division training needs. He shall assist and develop in administering training programs. He shall plan training schedules and arrange for training seminars to keep members current for certifications and proficiency. This is a major function of the Patrol Division Captain. With this comes record keeping concerning Departmental training. This Captain has available to him several sources of training including, but not limited to, Southwestern Illinois Law Enforcement Commission (S.I.L.E.C.), International Association of Chiefs of Police (I.A.C.P.) training programs, and Illinois State training programs. It is the Patrol Captain's function to determine the needs of the Department concerning training and provide the best possible training available. 4. The Patrol Captain shall coordinate and supervise the Field Training Officer program. In this realm of training comes the Field Training Officer program (F.T.O.), which the Captain oversees and is administered by the Field Training Lieutenant. He is responsible for the recruit's training and scheduling during this most important probationary period. Several officers in the Patrol Division are assigned as training officers and report their findings to the Patrol Captain. Based on these reports it is decided when the recruit is eligible for solo patrol. (It should be noted that the Patrol Captain does not oversee the firearms training of the Department.) 5. The security of the jail and the record keeping which accompanies this are also the responsibility of the Patrol Captain. 6. The Patrol Captain receives and investigates complaints from citizens concerning the conduct of members of the Patrol Division and reports these findings, often times with recommendations for discipline to the Chief of Police. 7. The Patrol Captain also identifies exceptional work from members under his command and makes recommendations for recognition to the Chief of Police. 8. The Patrol Division Captain shall supervise personnel performance evaluations. He shall conduct performance evaluations of those supervisors (Lieutenants) that fall immediately under his command. He shall review and discuss job performance individually with subordinates as needed. He shall counsel subordinates and strive to motivate those officers and improve morale. 9. The Patrol Captain is to make periodic inspections of the subordinates. He shall recognize deficiencies in uniform appearance and/or equipment. These are to be done in-house as well as in the field.

10. The Patrol Captain shall periodically review Patrol Division reports, Quasi and traffic generated by the Patrol Division for content and completeness. 11. The Patrol Captain shall insure all subordinates comply with all Department rules, regulations and policies, implementing disciplinary procedures when violations occur. 12. The Patrol Captain shall participate in development of the annual budget, approve and monitor expenditures and assist in purchasing materials, supplies and equipment. 13. The Patrol Captain shall familiarize himself with the current Union agreement and interpret the administration of its provisions. 14. The Patrol Captain shall assign, coordinate and schedule special assignments. 15. The Patrol Captain shall coordinate other activities with other Divisions and agencies, insuring information exchange and coordination of efforts, including intern and auxiliary programs. 16. In the absence of the Chief of Police/Assistant Chief, the Patrol Captain should have the working knowledge to carry on the policies of the Chief and run the Department accordingly.

2.ADMINISTRATIVECAPTAINand/orSPECIALSERVICESCAPTAIN A. The Administrative/Special Services Captain reports to the Chief of Police/Assistant Chief of Police. This position will be responsible for the management and supervision of the Administrative Division. As such, he assumes command of the Administrative and Special Services Lieutenant and members of the Nuisance Abatement Team when active. The Administrative / SS Captain shall be physically fit and have a working knowledge to perform the duties required of his subordinates. He shall maintain a high level of morale within the Division and be available on a twenty-four hour a day basis should an emergency arise. His duties require him to keep the Chief of Police fully informed on activities within the Division. In addition to the following responsibilities he shall perform other duties as directed by the Chief of Police. The Administrative Captains responsibilities include, but are not limited to, the following. 1. The Administrative / SS Captain shall manage the daily operation of the Administrative Division. He shall set operating goals for the Division, plan, prioritize, assign, supervise and review subordinate's work. He shall receive and review requests for schedule changes and days off, vacation, etc. Involved in the scheduling to be taken into consideration are vacation, recreation days, sick leave, funeral leave, injury on duty, light duty, suspensions, training days and compensatory time. 2. The Administrative/SS Captain through the chain of command is responsible for transmitting instructions and departmental policy to the members of the Administrative Division. These instructions may range from daily memos to changes or additions to the departmental rules and regulations.

3. The Administrative/SS Captain also identifies exceptional work from members under his command and makes recommendations for recognition to the Chief of Police. 4. The Administrative/SS Captain is to make periodic inspections of the subordinates. He shall recognize deficiencies in uniform appearance and/or equipment. These are to be done in-house as well as in the field. 5. The Administrative/SS Captain shall periodically review reports, Quasi and traffic generated by the Administrative Division for content and completeness. 6. The Administrative/SS Captain shall insure all subordinates comply with all Department rules, regulations and policies, implementing disciplinary procedures when violations occur. 7. The Administrative/SS Captain shall participate in development of the annual budget, approve and monitor expenditures and assist in purchasing materials, supplies and equipment. 8. The Administrative/SS Captain shall familiarize himself with the current Union agreement and interpret the administration of its provisions. 9. The Administrative/SS Captain shall assign, coordinate and schedule special assignments in the division as required to abate any nuisance identified, i.e. derelict vehicles, ordinance violations, business violations and any other issues to be handled alone or through an activation of the Nuisance Abatement Team. 10. The Administrative Captain/SS shall coordinate other activities with other Divisions, city departments and agencies, insuring information exchange and coordination of efforts. Including but not limited to Building and Zoning, Inspection, Mayors Office, Tow Companies and Neighborhood Watch groups. 11. The Administrative Captain/SS shall be the department grant officer actively pursing available grants and handling all reporting of grant monies as required. 12. In the absence of the Chief of Police/Assistant Chief, the Administrative Captain/SS should have the working knowledge to carry on the policies of the Chief and run the Department accordingly. 13. The Administrative/SS. Captain shall coordinate, supervise and maintain the New World System program with the cooperation of the IT Department. 17. The Administrative/SS Captain shall be the department coordinator and representative to the Illinois Law Enforcement Alarm System (ILEAS).

VII.LIEUTENANT

1. NATLIEUTENANT

The responsibilities of the NuisanceAbatementTeamLieutenant include, but are not limited to:
1. 2.

The NAT team will fall under the Special Services Captain The Nuisance Abatement Team shall be comprised of three (3) officers from the patrol division when operating at optimal manpower. A Sgt. or Lt. shall oversee this unit and be responsible for conduct, performance, and adherence to all state laws and departmental SOP's, Policy and Procedures. The NAT Team shall respond promptly to all nuisance related complaints by the public, police administrators, or public officials in reference to ongoing nuisance issues and problem areas throughout the city. The NAT Team shall keep all command staff notified of progress in these areas, as well as provide additional manpower support for patrol when needed.

3.

4.

5.

The NAT Team shall assist the detective division when requested by administrators, as well as assist other agencies when approved to do so. The NAT Team shall provide support for the Neighborhood Intervention Team (N.I.T) and provide security during covert operations. The NAT Team Supervisor shall assist with supervision during covert operations and make any recommendations needed or required to the NIT Team, Detective Lieutenant and or Chief of Detectives. The NAT Team shall attend roll calls when available, and establish open lines of communications with Patrolman, Sergeants, Shift Commanders, and the Patrol Captain in reference to NAT Activities and any areas of concern.

6.

7.

8.

9. NAT Lieutenant shall familiarize himself with Administrative policy and execute

department objectives within his area of responsibility, providing for:

1. Proper administration of Department Policy. 2. Administration of disciplinary policy. 3. Scheduling of work assignments and activities. 4. Supervision and management of first line supervisors and/or subordinates.

10. NAT Lieutenant should familiarize himself with all the duties and responsibility of the

Patrol Division Lieutenant.

2.PolicePatrolLieutenant Under the current organizational structure, (4) four Lieutenants are under the direction and report to the Captain of Patrol. These (4) positions are responsible for the supervision and management of Sergeants (first line supervisors), patrolmen, and civilian telecommunicators during their patrol watch/shift. In addition to the following duties, the Lieutenant shall perform other duties as directed by the Chief of Police/Assistant Chief of Police/Captain of Patrol. The responsibilities of the PolicePatrolLieutenant include, but are not limited to: 1. A Lieutenant shall familiarize himself with Administrative policy and execute department objectives within his area of responsibility, providing for: a. Proper administration of Department Policy. b. Administration of disciplinary policy. c. Scheduling of work assignments and activities. d. Supervision and management of first line supervisors and/or subordinates. e. The (4) four Lieutenants shall each be assigned responsibility over one of the following four programs: FTO, Range, Auxiliary, Neighborhood Watch. 2. A Lieutenant, at the direction of the Chief of Police, assumes command of the Department during the absence of the Chief of Police or other higher-ranking officer. 3. A Lieutenant shall at all times make himself aware of the affairs of the City and his assigned division. 4. A Lieutenant shall familiarize himself with Union agreements and interpret the administration of provisions. 5. A Lieutenant shall exercise authority commensurate with his responsibility. 6. A Lieutenant shall set an example to all subordinates in sobriety, dignity, courtesy, discretion, skill, diligence and the observance of proper discipline. 7. A Lieutenant shall be diligent in enforcing the observance of high ethical standards in the performance and conduct of personnel under his command. 8. A lieutenant is charged with exacting the proper performance of all personnel under his command.

9. A Lieutenant shall make himself thoroughly acquainted with the capabilities of his subordinates and impartially report in writing to the Chief of Police every case of misconduct, incompetence, neglect of duty, and serious or repeated violations of the Rules and Regulations and policy. He shall have the authority to temporarily relieve a subordinate who exhibits any of these behaviors, from duty, pending review by the Chief of Police or his designee. 10. A Lieutenant shall make recommendations of disciplinary action for department personnel within his command. He shall review citizen complaints and make determination of necessity to further investigation; make recommendations concerning internal problems. 11. Complaints by non-members or members regarding poor performance of duty or any other misconduct of the subordinates of a Lieutenant shall render that Lieutenant liable to a charge of neglect of duty, if he has not previously brought this to the attention of the Chief of Police via the chain of command. 12. A Lieutenant shall transmit legitimate orders, insuring uniform interpretation and full compliance by all personnel. 13. A Lieutenant shall periodically review department policy, rules and regulations, or other special orders or directives. 14. A Lieutenant shall hold periodic briefings concerning policy and procedure with personnel under his command. 15. A Lieutenant, as Watch Commander, shall conduct/supervise "Roll Call" briefings. He shall insure that orders, directives, or other pertinent police information be read in its entirety to members of his shift. 16. A Lieutenant shall insure that the Roll Call briefing book is maintained and that any information pertaining to: officer safety, wanted persons, business burglaries, stolen vehicles, robberies, etc or other such information of concern to patrol officers occurring during his watch, be immediately passed along to the following shifts via copy of report, memo, or notation containing all pertinent information. a. Unless emergency information to be passed along in Roll Call requires more time, the Lieutenant shall ensure all duty officers be in service no more than fifteen (15) minutes after the start of shift. 17. A Lieutenant shall check attendance and punctuality. He shall also see that the shift has adequate manpower. He shall further insure that the oncoming shift, following his tour of duty, has adequate manpower. 18. A Lieutenant shall see that time sheets are properly and correctly marked for those under his command.

19. A Lieutenant shall make certain the personnel under his command are properly inspected and are conducting inspections of their subordinates. 20. A Lieutenant shall keep accurate records necessary to the effective and efficient operation of his command. 21. A Lieutenant shall conduct personnel evaluations/appraisals for the personnel under his command and make recommendations thereto. 22. A Lieutenant shall counsel subordinates to motivate/improve performance and morale. 23. A Lieutenant shall, as time and manpower permits, see to ongoing training of subordinates, during Roll Call or at other times, utilizing his capabilities or the capabilities of other training officers within the Department. 24. A Lieutenant shall research, collect data and make recommendations on police matters to the Chief of Police. 25. A Lieutenant or his designee shall be responsible for the security of the jail and insure the civil treatment (i.e.: food and medical care) and protection of the rights of all persons within the scope of his authority. A Lieutenant may delegate this responsibility to a designee in his absence. 26. A Lieutenant or his designee shall insure all arrest booking/processing procedures are followed when persons are brought to the station. 27. A Lieutenant shall at his/her discretion assign a subordinate to the duties of the front desk, enabling him to tour the city, direct, evaluate, and supervise those officers under his command. 28. A Lieutenant shall insure that at least one (1) "9-1-1" emergency medical dispatch qualified person is working the telecommunications/dispatch or front desk position at all times during the shift. A Lieutenant also shall be 9-1-1 EMD certified as required in Madison County 9-1-1 Board Operating agreements. As Officer in Charge the Lieutenant shall assist dispatch with radio, phone, Fire, EMS and all other emergency communications and tasks. 29. A Lieutenant shall support an effective patrol effort by requiring the expeditious transaction of station business. 30. In cases of injury on duty incidents or accidents involving Department or City owned vehicles, the Lieutenant shall insure that all required forms and reports are completed and submitted to the office of the Chief of Police. 31. A Lieutenant shall be in regulation uniform during his hours of duty unless otherwise directed.

3. DetectiveLieutenant (1) Lieutenant is assigned as supervisor of Detective Division and reports to the Asst. Chief. The duties of the DetectiveLieutenant are as follows and also include familiarization with Patrol Lieutenant duties and the ability to perform them. 1. Detective Lieutenant position will be responsible for the management and supervision of the Investigative Division. As such, he is in charge of all members of the Division, both commissioned and civilian, including the Departmental undercover drug team. He is responsible for insuring that cases are trial ready and the investigating officer(s) are properly prepared, as well as creating a high moral atmosphere. 2. Detective Lieutenant shall handle all photo evidence, subpoenas/phone traces, business license checks, high dollar crime investigations and arsons. 3. Detective Lieutenant shall be the coordinator and oversee with the assigned detective the Sex Offender Registry and Crime Free Multi-Housing programs. 4. Detective Lieutenant shall handle all equipment and supply purchases related to investigations.

4. AdministrativeLieutenant (1) The Administrative Lieutenant is assigned to the Administrative Divison and reports to the Administrative/Special Services Captain. The duties of the Administrative Lieutenant are as follows and also include familiarization with Patrol Lieutenant duties and the ability to perform them. 1. Administrative Lieutenant shall assist the Administrative Captain in grant research, writing and reporting. 2. Administrative Lieutenant shall be the department representative to the 911 Emergency Telephone Board and act as PSAP Manager. This will include coordinating EMD/911 training with the Patrol Captain. 3. Administrative Lieutenant shall assist the Admin. Captain in being the evidence custodian for the department handling all aspects of evidence including logging, organizing and destruction. The records room and its maintenance shall fall under the evidence officers control. 4. Administrative Lieutenant shall coordinate the Community Policing programs instituted by the department. These shall include but not limited to Neighborhood Watch and any Public Relations duties of the department.

5. Administrative Lieutenant shall coordinate, supervise and document all activations of the Nuisance Abatement Team. 6. Administrative Lieutenant will assist the Admin. Captain in coordinating, supervising and maintaining the NewWorldSystem program with the cooperation of the IT Department.

VIII.PolicePatrolSergeant A. Under the current organization structure, (8) eight Sergeants are under the direction of and report to the Lieutenant/Watch Commander. This position is responsible for the direct supervision and management of patrol officers. He shall have the same duties as a patrol officer and perform other duties as directed by the Chief in addition to the following: 1. All Sergeants shall familiarize themselves with Administrative policies and execute departmental objectives within their area of responsibility. a. Prevention/suppression of crime. b. Protection of life and property. c. Apprehension and prosecution of offenders. d. Preservation of the peace. e. Enforcement of regulatory measures. 2. All Sergeants shall make themselves thoroughly acquainted with the capabilities of his subordinates and impartially report in writing to the Chief of Police, via the proper chain of command, every case of misconduct, incompetence, negligence of duty and serious or repeated violations of Department policy, Rules and Regulations; and shall have the authority to temporarily relieve a subordinate, who exhibits any of these behaviors, from duty, pending review by the Chief of Police or his designee (in the absence of a higher ranking officer). 3. All Sergeants shall at the direction of the Chief of Police shall act as Watch Commander, and assume command of the Department during the absence of the Chief of Police or higher ranking officer. 4. All Sergeants shall, at all times, acquaint themselves with the affairs of the City and their area of assignment, and be assured that the duties of their subordinates are properly discharged. 5. All Sergeants shall familiarize himself with Union agreements and interpret administration of provisions.

6. All Sergeants shall exercise authority commensurate with their responsibility. 7. All Sergeants shall set an example to all subordinates in sobriety, dignity, courtesy, dress, discretion, skill, diligence and the observation of proper discipline. 8. All Sergeants shall be diligent in enforcing the observance of high ethical standards in the performance and conduct of all personnel assigned to their command. 9. Complaints by non-members or members regarding poor performance of duties or any other misconduct of the subordinates of a Sergeant shall render that Sergeant liable to a charge of neglect of duty if that Sergeant has not previously brought this to the attention of the Chief of Police via the proper chain of command. 10. All Sergeants shall promptly obey and transmit all legitimate orders, insuring uniform interpretation and full compliance by all personnel assigned to their command. 11. All Sergeants shall make prescribed reports and keep records necessary to maintain the effective and efficient operation of their command. 12. All Sergeants shall examine all reports and citations to insure that they are legible, complete, neat, accurate and properly classified, and shall read, approve and initial all reports prepared by their subordinates. Offense reports shall contain the elements of the crime reported. 13. All Sergeants shall notify the Chief of Police via the proper chain of command of all serious incidents occurring during their tour of duty in the City or affecting the members assigned thereto in accordance with departmental general orders. 14. All Sergeants shall insure civil treatment and protection of the rights of all persons within the scope of their police authority. 15. All Sergeants shall promote fleet and personnel safety within their area of responsibility, exerting every effort toward the reduction of hazards and accidents. 16. All Sergeants shall supervise and direct subordinates in investigations and in effective case preparation and presentation. 17. All Sergeants shall give their attention to any violation of the law committed in their sight or reported to them. 18. All Sergeants shall be responsible for calls radioed to their car, unless they are out of service or on special assignment, to which they have notified the dispatcher; they shall respond to dispatcher's call when needed for assistance to another officer or call for service.

19. All Sergeants shall keep accurate records necessary to the effective and efficient operation of his command. 20. All Sergeants shall conduct personnel appraisals/evaluations of the subordinates. The Sergeant shall make recommendation to their immediate supervisor in completing personnel evaluations for personnel assigned to their command. 21. All Sergeants shall monitor training needs of subordinates and train or assist in training of subordinates or new officers. 22. All Sergeants shall counsel subordinates to motivate/improve morale. 23. All Sergeants shall check attendance and punctuality of subordinates. 24. All Sergeants shall perform other duties as directed by the Chief of Police or a commanding officer. B. SPECIFIC DUTIES OF A PATROL SERGEANT 1. Patrol Sergeants shall have the same functions and perform the same duties as a patrol officer in addition to the following: a. Patrol Sergeants shall make daily inspections of all personnel and squad cars assigned to their command. Personnel inspection shall be for the purpose of insuring that uniforms are clean, neat, in good repair and properly worn; that all leather items are properly polished, that all weapons are properly cleaned and in good working order. Patrol vehicle inspections shall be to insure emergency equipment is in good working order; vehicle is damage free; contains the requisite equipment and is free of contraband, litter, etc. b. Patrol Sergeants shall support an effective field effort by requiring the expeditious transaction of station business. c. Patrol Sergeants shall make daily inspections of the City during their tour of duty to observe conditions, efficiency of operations and conformity with regulations and orders, of members under his command, initiating necessary corrective action. d. Patrol Sergeants shall serve as back-ups for subordinates on vehicle stops, accidents, incident and crime report calls whenever possible. e. Patrol Sergeants shall not have a fixed schedule for meeting with the district patrolmen and shall, when practical, patrol in areas vacated when a regularly assigned patrol unit is out of service. f. Patrol Sergeants shall assume command at a scene during a use of force incident and respond to all calls which appear to be of major proportion.

g. Patrol Sergeants shall oversee and supervise major cases, investigations and arrests, approve and disapprove all questionable suspect arrests after reviewing the evidence, probable cause and/or reasonable suspicions (the on call Assistant States Attorney is a source available to the Sergeant in these cases). h. Patrol Sergeants shall investigate accidents involving departmental vehicles and investigate or supervise the investigation of accidents involving City vehicles, either taking photographs or causing same to be done as required and insuring that all required paperwork is completed. i. Patrol Sergeants shall familiarize themselves with the duties of a Lieutenant and when assigned to or directed to do so shall perform the duties of a Lieutenant. In the absence of the Watch Commander/Lieutenant the senior Sergeant on duty will assume charge of the shift. Acting in this capacity, he shall have all the authority and responsibility normally held by the Watch Commander during the period he is so acting. IX.PATROL/POLICEOFFICERGENERALLY A. Defines the authority, responsibilities, and duties for the position of police officer. The job description for Patrol Officer / Police Officer identifies the essential and important functions of all commissioned officers, regardless of rank or title. B. As defined by the ILCS 720 5/2-13: Any person who by virtue of his office or public employment is vested by law with a duty to maintain public order or to make arrests for offenses, whether that duty extends to all offenses or is limited to specific offenses. Every officer is authorized to direct or regulate traffic, or to make arrests for traffic violations. C. POLICY: A police officer shall familiarize himself with the State statutes, city ordinances, and department policy, rules and regulations, and execute department objectives within his area of responsibility: 1. Protection of life and property. 2. Prevention and suppression of crime. 3. Apprehension and prosecution of offenders. 4. Preservation of the peace. D. DEFINITION: The term Patrol Officer includes department members of this rank including Detectives, Service Division, Narcotics Officer, etc. E. GENERALLY 1. The patrol officer must be able to exercise sound independent judgment under stress without direct supervision in emergency situations.

2. Work assignments are general, and specific instructions are received from a supervisor who reviews work methods and results through reports, personal inspection and discussion. a. Analytically and objectively evaluate situations and quickly determine an effective response and take prompt action. b. Familiarize self with, understand, interpret and apply federal and state statutes, local ordinances, court decisions, department rules, regulations and policies and safety rules. c. Understand and respond quickly and accurately to written and oral directions, instructions, requests and inquiries. d. Work independently and effectively within the confines of operating procedures. e. Initiate appropriate interpersonal and intra/interagency communications. f. Act quickly, calmly, and decisively in emergencies and under stress; exercise sound independent judgment without direct supervision. g. Respond to situations firmly, courteously, tactfully and without partiality. h. Express oneself clearly and concisely, orally and in written form. i. Record information clearly and completely. j. Facilitate effective conflict resolution/arbitration. k. Maintain confidentiality in the performance of duties. l. Assimilate, retain and effectively use geographic knowledge concerning the City and surrounding vicinity. m. Regular, punctual and predictable attendance. F. PRINCIPAL DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES 1. Patrol Functions a. Attends Roll Call, making notations of information regarding daily patrol activities, officer safety information, stolen vehicles, wanted/missing persons, special details, orders, directives, scheduling, etc. b. Always available when on duty. c. Monitor and remain in constant radio communication contact.

d. Prompt response to assignments and Calls for Service. e. Patrol district assignment with vigilance until relieved or authorized by superior. f. Protect and preserve crime scene to prevent destruction, contamination or altering of scene. g. Complete reports in timely manner. 2. Crime Prevention a. Patrols assigned area via automobile, bicycle or on foot. b. Drive vehicle under emergency and non-emergency conditions. c. Responds to life and death calls. d. Observes for criminal activity, safety hazards, traffic violations, persons needing assistance and the like. e. Becomes and remains familiar with patrol districts, geographic locations, known police characters, neighborhood routines, potential problem areas. f. Conducts security inspections and surveys of buildings and other locations, makes recommendations regarding safety and security. g. Makes presentations to groups and individuals on subjects related to the job's tasks and functions. h. Physically checks the premises of businesses and residences for signs of break-ins, damage or other irregularities. i. Respond to animal complaints. j. Search and transport prisoners. k. Warn offenders in lieu of arrest or citation. l. Assist the elderly, disabled, homeless and persons in need. m. Evacuate persons from dangerous areas. n. Escort persons and/or vehicles.

3. Criminal Investigation and Apprehension a. Handles complaints filed by citizens. b. Observes, detects and investigates violations of laws and ordinances and documents and investigates reported violations. c. Conducts interviews and interrogations of victims, witnesses, suspects, offenders and other persons. d. Conducts preliminary and follow-up investigations. e. Identifies, collects, processes, packages, and logs physical evidence. f. Collects information and either acts upon it if within the scope of his authority or routes it to the proper authority or agency. g. Searches persons, vehicles, places and other items. h. Identifies and arrests offenders, including subduing resistive arrestee. i. Books, guards and escorts prisoners. j. Prepares and services criminal complaints, arrest warrants, search warrants, and other court documents. k. Prepares cases for trial. l. Appears and testifies in court, at coroner's inquests, at deposition sessions and at similar proceedings. 4. Traffic a. Engages in traffic and parking law enforcement including Driving Under the Influence detection and apprehension. b. Controls, regulates and directs traffic, vehicular and pedestrian. c. Utilizes barriers, lights, traffic wands or hand signals for safe and efficient movement of traffic. d. Investigates traffic accidents, including protection of the scene, aiding the injured, controlling traffic, clearing the scene, determining the cause, preparing reports and diagrams. e. Assists disabled motorists.

5. Testifying in Court a. Answer subpoenas for Department related cases. b. Give testimony on traffic, QUASI and criminal cases. c. Give testimony at inquests and hearings. 6. Juveniles a. Deals with all ages of children in a variety of situations such as delinquents, minors requiring authoritative intervention, neglected, abused, runaways, lost, found, victims of crimes, public relations and instructional functions, and informants. 7. Other Important Functions a. Deals with domestic disputes and other interpersonal and business conflicts. b. Observes for, recognizes and corrects or reports public hazards and inconveniences such as gas leaks, traffic signals out of service, traffic obstructions and other safety hazards. c. Responds to request for ambulance/fire service and assists as needed. d. Administers first aid to sick and injured persons. e. Investigates incidents involving dead persons resulting from criminal, accidental, suicidal and natural causes, including determination of the circumstances and handling/removal of the body and dealing with family, relatives, friends, witnesses, etc. f. Investigates reports of lost and found properties. g. Investigates reports of missing and found persons. h. Directs and/or supervises others (civilians and public employees) at the scenes of crimes, accidents, disasters, assemblies, etc. i. Generally assists persons in distress. 8. Organizational Support a. In the absence of a first line supervisor (Sergeant), the senior patrolman on duty will assume the first line supervisor's position. Unless specifically directed otherwise, he shall have all the authority and responsibility held by the first line supervisor (Sergeant), during that time.

b. May perform desk duties including telecommunications (telephone, computer terminal, and radio), assisting persons at the counter, processing and filing reports. c. Conducts background investigations. d. Attends training as assigned. e. Develops and maintains required skills and licenses/permits/certifications associated with areas of special instruction, expertise, etc. (Firearms Qualification, Breath Operator Certification, C.P.R., Evidence Technician, Accident Investigator, Juvenile Law, Criminal Investigations). f. Trains new officers, reserve officers and other officers/employees in areas of special skills or expertise. g. Prepares clear, accurate and complete reports, logs and documents on any and all activities engaged in. G. SCHEDULING 1. The position involves regular and irregular shift work necessary to provide police services. 2. Work shifts may be extended in the event of an emergency, disaster, manpower shortage, workload, or work-in-progress. Shifts and hours of work may be subject to change per Union Agreement. 3. Regular and predictable punctual attendance is required. H. ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS 1. The position involves exposure to and requires the employee to function in the presence of: a. Weather conditions: all inclement and extreme weather conditions. b. Lighting conditions: all conditions and extreme lighting conditions, daylight and darkness with and without artificial light available, indoors and outdoors. c. Fire, smoke, electrical and chemical leaks/spills: in close proximity as necessary to provide emergency service. d. Personal danger, including but not limited to: e. Armed and/or dangerous persons/animals. f. Persons and/or articles with contagious/communicable diseases.

g. Hazards associated with emergency driving, traffic control and working in and around traffic. h. Hazards associated with natural and man-made disasters. I. EQUIPMENT 1. The position requires the ability to operate the following equipment: a. Motor Vehicles: reasonably and safely under routine and emergency conditions, sometimes for lengthy periods of time. b. Firearms: with demonstrated proficiency in the care and use of the assigned/authorized weapons. c. Basic office equipment: including but not limited to typewriters, telephones, computer terminals, computer software etc. d. Writing implements and basic drawing templates: including the ability to write legible documents and produce simple diagrams. e. Basic tools and equipment necessary to perform job tasks and functions: including but not limited to speed detection radar, 2-way radios, first aid equipment, fire extinguisher, pepper mace, handcuffs and other personal restraining devices, flashlights, batons, tazers and other simple weapons, gas masks, helmets, standard police uniform, simple tools (pry bars, hydrant wrenches, tape measures, etc), cameras, fingerprinting equipment, etc. J. PHYSICAL CONDITION NEEDED TO: 1. Effect arrests of people of any mental or physical condition and strength. 2. Subdue resisting individuals who are under the influence of drugs and/or alcohol. 3. Chase fleeing suspects over barriers and rough terrain. 4. Run to persons requiring emergency assistance. 5. Lift and carry equipment and injured/deceased persons. 6. Force entry into buildings of multiple heights. 7. Climb ladders. 8. Walk, stand or sit for long periods of time 9. Endure exposure to extreme weather. (including driving).

10. Exposure to communicable diseases or other health hazards. 11. Perform life-saving procedures (CPR, first aid, etc.) 12. Communicate effectively, verbally and non-verbally. 13. Operate required equipment. 14. Perform other required job tasks and functions. 15. Provide assistance to citizens and co-workers in distress. 16. Must maintain personal fitness required to perform required physical and mental activities. K. EFFECTIVE AUDIO VISUAL DISCRIMINATION AND PERCEPTION NEEDED TO: 1. Make observations. 2. Read and write. 3. Drive and operate equipment safely. 4. Make color distinctions. 5. Normal depth perception. 6. Have normal hearing ability. 7. Have eyesight correctable to 20/50 binocular. L. EMOTIONAL AND PSYCHOLOGICAL STABILITY NEEDED TO:

1. Accept constructive criticism in a mature fashion. 2. Effectively communicate and interact positively with fellow employees and citizens. 3. Tolerate extreme and sudden stress. 4. Function effectively under stress. 5. Deal effectively with the morbid, the gruesome, the repugnant, the abnormal, the depressed, the psychotic, the neurotic and the otherwise unpleasant or unusual facets or results of human behavior. X.D.A.R.E.OFFICER

A. The D.A.R.E. officer is responsible for presenting the Drug Abuse Resistance Educational program and other preventative education programs in Granite City and in the community. The D.A.R.E. officer shall be attached to the Patrol Division and will usually work from 8:00 a.m. to 4:00 p.m., Monday through Friday, but the hours are subject to change depending upon workload. In addition to D.A.R.E. responsibilities, and when required, the D.A.R.E. officer shall perform police enforcement responsibilities identified and described in the police officer and police detective job descriptions of this manual. The D.A.R.E. officer's responsibilities may include occasional physical labor and endurance activity and be hazardous with regard to the physical and mental well being of the employee. B. In addition to the following duties, a D.A.R.E. officer shall perform any other duties as directed by the Chief of Police or Police Patrol Captain. C. ESSENTIAL FUNCTIONS 1. Present the D.A.R.E. curriculum and other preventative education programs in Granite City schools. 2. Be available for interaction and counseling with students. 3. Regular and predictable attendance; assigned to shift work, which may include overtime. 4. Work in uniform or civilian clothing as directed by division supervisor. 5. Check schools, playgrounds, parks, recreation centers. 6. Perform other duties as required or assigned. D. OTHER IMPORTANT FUNCTIONS 1. Perform liaison duties with local community leaders. 2. Educate law enforcement and educational officials by assisting in implementing or expanding crime prevention and prevention education programs. 3. Make presentations to community groups and serve as a resource for the community to contact in planning programs. 4. Administer first aid and render assistance. 5. Check condition/status of assigned equipment. E. ESSENTIAL PHYSICAL FUNCTIONS

1. Sit or stand for long periods of time.

2. Walk up and down flights of stairs. 3. Run to person requiring emergency assistance. 4. Lift, pick up and/or carry heavy objects or equipment. F. ESSENTIAL COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTIONS 1. Provide accurate oral descriptions. 2. Prepare lesson plans based on known needs of the community. 3. Conduct classroom presentations. 4. Establish rapport with students and answer questions. 5. Consult with classroom teacher(s) and respond to situations which require special services outside the classroom. 6. Mediate family disputes. 7. Comfort emotionally upset persons. 8. Conduct interviews. 9. Contact higher-level supervisors regarding problems. 10. Exchange information with other law enforcement officials. 11. Make presentations to groups.

G. ESSENTIAL COMMUNITY/PUBLIC RELATIONS FUNCTIONS 1. Organize/participate in Community Policing Activities, i.e.: parades, dances, camps. 2. Talk with people to establish rapport. 3. Interact and work with citizens. 4. Conduct parent/juvenile conferences. 5. Refer persons to agencies providing social services. 6. Attend meetings/ceremonies as department representative.

H. OTHER IMPORTANT COMMUNITY/ PUBLIC RELATIONS FUNCTIONS 1. Contact elected officials. 2. Contact community groups. I. ESSENTIAL PLANNING/ ORGANIZING FUNCTIONS 1. Participate in development and/or implementation of goals/policy. 2. Perform special duties as assigned by supervisors. J. ESSENTIAL PAPERWORK FUNCTIONS 1. Write or dictate reports. 2. Review and sign reports to insure completeness and accuracy. 3. Write memos. K. IMPORTANT TRAINING FUNCTIONS

1. Train other personnel and new officers. 2. Identify D.A.R.E. training needs. L. ESSENTIAL ADMINISTRATIVE FUNCTIONS 1. Protect and serve the citizens of the community. 2. Carry out orders given by superior officers. 3. Make all reports required in an expedient and efficient manner. 4. Determine whether incidents are criminal or civil matters. 5. Place children in protective custody. 6. Request assistance from other agencies. 7. Inform other units of major incidents. M. ESSENTIAL EQUIPMENT 1. D.A.R.E. training materials.

2. Writing instrument. 3. Automobile. N. MINIMUM QUALIFICATIONS 1. Successfully complete the 80-hour D.A.R.E. officer-training course. 2. Ability to effectively and courteously interact with the public. 3. Be well versed on various statutes related to drug abuse and juvenile law. 4. Have a working knowledge of evaluation techniques. 5. Possess good oral and written communication skills and be able to speak to a variety of individuals and groups. 6. Possess positive personal interaction skills. 7. Ability to follow oral and written instructions. 8. Knowledge of court procedures. 9. Possess judgment and tact during volatile 10. Clerical ability. 11. Ability to maintain professional standards. 12. A demonstrated history of self-initiated personal program for improving himself within the profession of law enforcement. XI.SCHOOLRESOURCEOFFICERPROGRAM A. The purpose of the School Resource Officer Program. is to provide an on duty uniformed police officer on the campus of the Granite City High School and the Coordinated Youth Educational Facility during the school year. The Granite City Police Department recognizes the potential outstanding benefits to the citizens of Granite City and particular the students of the public school system by providing a more safe and secure campus. The school resource officer, working together with school officials, will assist in the enforcement of local and state laws, criminal investigations, conflict resolution and mediation, eradication of drugs, weapons and violence from the campus and promote positive programs within the school. B. POLICY situations.

1. It is the policy of the Granite City Police Department to provide a safe, violent free and drug free learning environment for the students and staff of the Granite City schools. C. PROCEDURE 1. The Police Department shall assign one (1) regularly employed uniformed police officer to the Granite City High School and (1) to the Coordinated Youth Educational Facility. 2. The School Resource Officer office of Operations will be based at the Granite City Senior High School and Coordinated Youth Offices. 3. The School Resource Officer shall be assigned to the school on a full time basis of eight (8) hours on those days and during those days that the school is in regular session. The officer may be temporarily reassigned by the Police Department during school holidays and school summer vacation, or during a period of police emergency. 4. The Resource officer shall remain an employee of the Granite City Police Department and shall not be employed by the Granite City School Board or Coordinated Youth. The School Board, Coordinated Youth director and the Police Chief acknowledge that the School Resource Officer shall remain responsive to the chain of command and the policies of the Granite City Police Department. The SRO shall be assigned to the Patrol Division Commander. While assigned to the schools the SRO shall work as an extension of the principal's office in dealing with a variety of situations as outlined in the duties and responsibilities. D. DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES 1. The SRO shall coordinate all of his/her activities with the principal and staff members concerned and will seek permission, advice and guidance prior to enacting any program within the school. 2. Conduct investigations and take law enforcement action as may be required and permitted pursuant to the provisions of the Illinois Compiled Statutes (including the Juvenile Court Act), the Ordinances of the City of Granite City and other legal mandates. a. Take appropriate action against intruders and trespassers on school property. b. Provide reasonable protection for the academic environment and assist toward the maintenance of an atmosphere of safety which is conducive to teaching and learning. 3. Assist the school administration in the development of plans and strategies which minimize dangerous situations including those related to student or community unrest which impact the schools. 4. Provide and encourage programs and presentations designed to promote student understanding of the law and other public safety issues with the intended goal of allowing young people to become better informed and effective citizens within and outside the

academic environment. 5. Provide students and their families, administrators, staff and faculty with information concerning various community support agencies, including: a. Family counseling services b. Drug and alcohol treatment facilities c. Psychological services d. Legal assistance e. Others 6. When requested by the principal, the SRO shall attend parent/faculty meetings to solicit support and understanding of the program. 7. The SRO shall make himself/herself available for conference with students, parents and faculty members in order to assist them with problems of law enforcement or crime prevention nature. 8. Provide the students with a confidential source of counseling regarding various social problems, especially those relating to the criminal justice system (e.g. drug abuse, sexual abuse, domestic violence, physical or mental abuse, neglect). 9. Work in cooperation with other law enforcement and various agencies of government including the State's Attorney and the Department of Children and Family Services. 10. Other duties as may be assigned by the Police Chief or school authorities. 11. Attend school functions, including athletic events, concerts and plays, so as to achieve the purpose of this policy. 12. The SRO shall take law enforcement action as required. As soon as practicable, the SRO shall make the principal of the school aware of such action. At the principal's request, the SRO shall take appropriate law enforcement action against intruders and unwanted guests who may appear at the school and related school functions, to the extent that the SRO may do so under the authority of law. Whenever practicable, the SRO shall advise the principal before requesting additional police assistance on campus. 13. The SRO may be assigned investigations relating to runaways, truancy, thefts, acts of violence, illegal drug activities, or other offenses, provided such investigations relate to the students attending the school to which the SRO is assigned.

14. The SRO shall maintain detailed and accurate records of the operation of the School Resource Officer Program and shall submit other reports of an instructional nature as required by the principal or school staff.

15. The SRO shall not act as a school disciplinarian, as disciplining students is school responsibility. However, if the principal believes an incident is a violation of the law, the principal may contact the SRO and the SRO shall then determine whether law enforcement action is appropriate. School Resource Officers are not to be used for regularly assigned lunchroom duties, hall monitors or other monitoring duties. If there is a problem area, the SRO may assist the school until the problem is solved. 16. The SRO shall become familiar with all community agencies which offer assistance to youths and their families, such as health clinics, drug treatment centers, etc. The SRO shall make referrals to such agencies when necessary, thereby acting as a resource person to the students, faculty and staff of the school. XII.TELECOMMUNICATORS A. This policy is intended to establish and define the duties, requirements and responsibilities for the position of telecommunicator, the 9-1-1 emergency medical dispatch and radio operations. This position will be responsible for the police emergency communications center. The police telecommunicator will receive immediate direction and supervision from the on duty Watch Commander. Telecommunicators are under the Administration and general direction of the Patrol Captain. In addition to the following duties and responsibilities, a telecommunicator shall perform any other duties as directed by the Captain of Patrol, Assistant Chief of Police or Chief of Police. B. REQUIREMENTS AND DUTIES 1. Personal and Interpersonal Communication Skills a. Ability to communicate verbally in a clear, concise and understandable voice. b. Ability to be empathetic and establish rapport with people. c. Be courteous yet firm and controlling. d. Be objective and make decisions without outside influences. e. Ability to cope with stress and pressure while completing work on schedule, in a timely manner and under the time constraints. f. Ability to think clearly. g. Ability to understand and follow oral and written instructions.

h. Ability to communicate accurately, effectively and efficiently in written form; compose letters, memos and reports. i. Ability to plan and have strong organizational skills. j. Ability to read with comprehension, draw conclusions and make evaluations. k. Ability to process, retain and recall information. l. Ability to establish and maintain good working relationships with other divisions, departments and agencies. m. Ability to direct, lead, train subordinates and peers. 2. ESSENTIAL FUNCTIONS a. Provide accurate written and oral descriptions. b. Receive and prioritize incoming telephone calls (9-1-1 calls, non-emergency, and calls for information); obtain sufficient information to assign the appropriate departmental and/or personnel response. c. Monitor multiple radio frequencies and dispatch proper personnel. d. Monitor the telephone device for the deaf (TDD). e. Maintain radio log for Calls for Service, documenting all calls and pertinent information. f. Maintain and revise record file system to facilitate maintenance and retrieval of data/ information. g. Maintain both computerized and hard copy files in an orderly manner. h. Maintain other files as required by New World Systems, LEADS, REGIS, or other support services. i. Receive and prioritize phoned in alarms, such as Business and Residential, Robbery, Panic, Lift Stations, Medical Assist, etc insuring proper response by personnel, department, or agency. j. Monitor National Weather Service Emergency Broadcast System and activate Emergency Services Disaster Agency (ESDA) warning systems.

k. Promptly send and receive teletype messages, including but not limited to, HIT confirmations, requests for Wanted information (CHF), license/registration information and directed messages to other jurisdictions. 3. ADMINISTRATIVE FUNCTIONS a. Regular and predictable punctuality and attendance. b. Shift work which may require overtime. c. Ability to plan and prioritize work and work assignments. d. Monitor and control access to secured areas of the police building. e. Assist persons entering the police building by providing information or directing to the proper division. f. Enter Calls for Service, make inquiries, into New World Systems and perform other functions as prescribed by the IT Department. g. Receive and disseminate information to authorized personnel. h. Be familiar with jurisdictional, geographical and district boundaries. i. Maintain Communications Center in a professional manner, paying particular attention to safety, cleanliness, and prevention of damage to equipment. j. Ability to acquire and maintain skills necessary to use, become certified in the use of Emergency Medical Dispatch, the 9-1-1 telephone system, LEADS, and REGIS systems. k. Attend ongoing training, both in-house and elsewhere, as provided. 4. SCHEDULE a. Due to the complexities of telecommunications the need for trained personnel in the Communications Center at all times is essential for the benefit and protection of the citizenry, officer safety, as well as defraying civil liability. Utilizing untrained personnel is unacceptable. The following policy is incorporated into the job description as follows: (1) Communications personnel, i.e.: telecommunicators will not be allowed to leave the station premise once their tour of duty has commenced. Any breaks during the workday, whether for personal time or for meals, must be taken in the station. The only exception will be when two (2) telecommunicators are assigned to the same shift. The Watch Commander, at his discretion, may allow one (1) telecommunicator to leave on break at a time.
XIII.COMMANDPROTOCOL

A. Command protocol in operations involving personnel of different units normally will be determined by rank. The following will apply during joint Patrol/Investigation cases: 1. The officer assigned the call will be in charge unless relieved by an investigator called to the scene, or relieved by a supervisor. 2. The investigator assigned the case will be in charge of the crime scene unless relieved by a supervisor. 3. In all instances where a supervisor relieves the officer or investigator at the scene, that supervisor will then assume control of the situation. B. A personnel distribution table will be maintained which depicts allocated strength to the various unit components of the Department. C. The organizational structure of the Department will be reviewed at least annually as part of the budget review process and reorganized as necessary. XIV.AUTHORITYANDRESPONSIBILITY A. All members of the Department are delegated the authority to make decisions relative to their position, and to execute their responsibilities accordingly. B. Members delegated the authority to make decisions relative to their positions, in order to execute their responsibilities, shall be held fully accountable for the use of, or failure to use, this delegated authority.
XV.DIRECTION

A. The Chief of Police is the chief executive officer of the police department and is responsible for the protection of lives and property through the supervision of all police functions. The Chief of Police is responsible for organizing, controlling, and directing the personnel and resources of the Police department. B. In the event that the Chief of Police becomes incapacitated, unavailable, out of town, or otherwise unable to command, the Assistant Chief of Police will be in charge. If he is unavailable the Senior Division Commander will be in charge. If no Commander is available, the Watch Commander is in charge. For anticipated absences, the Chief of Police may appoint a designee to act in his absence. C. The on-duty supervisors will be held accountable for the performance of the employees under the supervisors' immediate control. Although supervisors may free themselves of the actual performance of a given task, a supervisor cannot rid himself of the responsibility or accountability for the accomplishment of the task.

D. Employees are required to obey and fully execute any lawful order, written or oral, given by a superior, or relayed by a designee of a superior. E. Any employee who receives an order that conflicts with any previous order or instruction will advise the person who issued the second order. The responsibility for counteracting the original order rests with the supervisor who issued the second order. In the event neither issuing supervisors can be readily advised, the employee will carry out the most recent order and advise a supervisor of the conflict as soon as practical. F. To ensure that lines of communication are maintained and utilized throughout the organizational structure, staff meetings shall be scheduled. All supervisory personnel are required to attend unless otherwise excused. Each member in attendance will have the opportunity to bring up and discuss matters of interest. Supervisors will solicit, from their personnel, items for discussion.

Procedure #5.500

GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title:GraniteCityPoliceDepartment

SpecialResponseTeam(SRT)Procedure:1.004
DateIssued: Revised:

PURPOSE:
The purpose of this policy is to establish the governing regulations in the selection, training, equipping, and use of the GraniteCityPoliceDepartmentSRT Team.
1. POLICY:

Recognizing that the presence of a highly trained, highly skilled police tactical unit has been shown to substantially reduce the risk of injury or loss of life to citizens, police officers and suspects; and recognizing that a well managed team response to critical incidents usually results in successful resolution of critical incidents, it is the intent of the GraniteCityPolice DepartmentSpecialResponseTeam(SRT) to provide a highly trained and skilled tactical team as a resource for the GraniteCityPoliceDepartmentin the handling of critical incidents. Critical incidents are defined as follows: 1. Hostage Situations: The holding of any person(s) against their will by an armed or potentially armed suspect. 2. Barricade Situations: The standoff created by an armed or potentially armed suspect in any location, whether fortified or not, who is refusing to comply with police demands for surrender. 3. Sniper Situations: The firing upon citizens and/or police by an armed suspect, whether stationary or mobile. 4. Apprehension: The arrest or apprehension of armed or potentially armed suspect(s) where there is the likelihood of armed resistance. 5. Warrant Service: The service of search or arrest warrants where there is a likelihood of armed or potentially armed suspect(s) and there is the potential of armed resistance. 6. Personal Protection: The security of special persons, such as VIPs, witnesses, or suspects, based on threat or potential threat to the well being of those persons. 1. Special Assignments: Any assignment, approved by the Chief of Police or SRT Commander, based upon the level of threat or the need for a special expertise.
2. COMPOSITIONANDSTRUCTURE:

It is the intent of the Granite City Police Department Special Response Team to maintain a team of not less than 7 members, all sworn police officers from within the ranks of the Granite City Police Department. The unit shall be composed of the following positions: TeamLeader: A Sergeant or Lieutenant who has completed, at a minimum, a basic tactical operators course (SWAT training). He or she will be responsible for deployment of the SRT Team, tactical decision-making and tactical resolution of the incident. He or she will assign duties to members of the team pertaining to the tactical resolution of an incident. He or she will

also assign duties to members of the team pertaining to the operation of the team in training, administrative or other endeavors directly related to the Granite City Police Department Special Response Team. He or she will be responsible for ensuring that all team members are in compliance with policy. He or she will be responsible for additional duties that are assigned by the Chief of Police. AssistantTeamLeader: A patrol officer, Sergeant or Lieutenant who has completed, at a minimum, a basic tactical operators course (SWAT training). He or she will be responsible for assisting the Team Leader in duties prescribed by the Team Leader to include deployment of the SRT Team, tactical decision-making and tactical resolution of the incident. He or she will also assist the Team Leader in ensuring that all team members are in compliance with policy. In the Team Leaders absence, the Assistant Team Leader shall assume all duties of the Team Leader. He or she will be responsible for additional duties that are assigned by the Chief of Police. TacticalOperator: A patrol officer, Sergeant or Lieutenant who has completed, at a minimum, a basic tactical operators course (SWAT training). Tactical Operators are responsible for those duties prescribed by the Team leader or Assistant Team Leader pertaining to the training and/or deployment of the tactical team. Tactical operators are required to remain in compliance with policy. Tactical operators will be responsible for additional duties that are assigned by the Chief of Police.
3. COMMANDANDCONTROLSTRUCTURE:

The GraniteCityPoliceDepartmentSRT Team is commanded by a Sergeant or Lieutenant who has completed, at a minimum, a basic tactical operators course (SWAT training). When activated for an operation, the SRT Team Leader, or the Acting Team Leader when the Team Leader is absent, reports directly to the Incident Commander, where one has been designated, or to the on-scene supervisor. The SRT Team Leader is responsible for deployment of the SRT Team, tactical decision-making and tactical resolution of the incident. The SRT Team Leader is subordinate to the Incident Commander only in terms of when and if the tactical option will be initiated, not how it will be performed. After the team has been activated, unless the SRT Team Leader relinquishes his control to another person outside the SRT Team, no other person, who is not in a leadership position within the SRT Team, will attempt to direct, supervise, or control any element or member of the SRT Team.
IV.SELECTIONPROCESS:

The GraniteCityPoliceDepartmentSRTTeam will select all prospective members from a valid selection roster created through applicant testing. Criteria for application will be based on the following: a. Two years time in service; b. satisfactory job performance in present and previous assignments; and 3. Satisfactory physical fitness levels. Testing will consist of a SRT specific and validated test. (See SRT SOP)

Once accepted and assigned to the GraniteCityPoliceDepartmentSRTTeam, all operational team members, regardless of rank or position, must maintain acceptable standards of performance as delineated in (title of written document detailing minimum standards of performance). Failure to meet the minimum acceptable standards will result in the team member being placed in a temporary, non-deployable status, for 14 days. Failure to meet the minimum acceptable standard within the designated period of time will result in immediate removal from the team. Being placed in a temporary, non-deployable status twice within 3 years will result in immediate removal from the team. A team member may voluntarily withdraw from the team at any time, for any reason. A team member may be removed from the team, without cause, when deemed necessary for the good of the team by a consensus of the leadership elements of the team and approved by the Chief of Police or his designee.
V.TRAININGSTANDARDS:

The GraniteCityPoliceDepartmentSRTTeam will conduct training a minimum of 16 hours per month. The GraniteCityPoliceDepartmentSRTTeam will train on appropriate subjects related to the mission of the GraniteCityPoliceDepartmentSRTTeam. All training will be documented and training records will be maintained by the SRT Team Leader and remain on file permanently. All training will be performance-oriented and SRT Team task specific. The GraniteCityPolice DepartmentSRTwill maintain a current task manual that lists the standards of performance for each task, individual and team level. Individual team members will be re-certified once per year on all individual skills, and the team will be re-certified once per year on all team level skills. Failure to re-certify, at either level, will result in an immediate focus on remedialization of basic skills. Continued failure to re-certify, after appropriate remedialization, will be dealt with as a failure to meet minimum standards. The training program will also include regular updates on legal issues facing SRToperations, such as warrant service, knock and announce and hours for service issues. Deadly force policy and legal issues will also be a regular part of firearms training.
VI.EQUIPMENTSTANDARDS:

The GraniteCityPoliceDepartmentSRTTeam will supply their team members with at least the following safety equipment: 1. Ballistic Helmet 2. Safety glasses and goggles 3. Hearing protection 4. Complete coverage ballistic entry vest with Threat Lever IV insert 5. Load bearing vest or duty belt for tactical equipment 6. Special weapons as authorized 7. Appropriate amount of ammunition for weapons training and qualification

SRT Team members will utilize appropriate utility type uniforms of an approved color/pattern, and footwear. Uniforms will utilize clearly visible and identifiable placards, patches, badges, or lettering that identifies the wearer of the uniform as a law enforcement officer. The SRT Team Leader must approve all other items of personal wear or equipment. SRT Team members, to whom any item of equipment is issued, are responsible for the care and maintenance of the equipment. Failure to appropriately care for or maintain the equipment in full mission readiness will be grounds for removal from the team. SPECIALEQUIPMENT: The GraniteCityPoliceDepartmentSRTTeam recognizes that missions are performed in a hazardous environment. In addition, we recognize that the safety of innocent citizens, officers, and suspects is often jeopardized by the hazardous conditions. It shall be the intent of the GraniteCityPoliceDepartmentSRTto utilize special equipment, as listed below, in an attempt to lessen the risk of injury or death to all involved during the performance of a SRT operation. TheGraniteCityPoliceDepartmentSRTTeamrecognizes,however,thattheuse ofthespecialequipmentinnowayimpliesorguaranteesthatinjuryordeathwillnotoccur duringaSRToperation. 1. Primary Entry Weapons: Example: entry shotguns, M-4 type rifles and submachine guns; a short-barreled weapon which enables the team member to acquire rapid target acquisition, enhances high levels of accuracy, and provides maneuverability, reliability, stopping power, and sustained fire capability. 2. High caliber rifles: Commonly referred to as counter-sniper rifles. These weapons allow the team member to place highly accurate rounds where needed to help resolve life threatening incidents. 3. Less Lethal Weapons or Ammunition: Weapons or ammunition, which propel a round or device that is not normally lethal in nature. Designed to offer an alternative to the use of deadly force when appropriate. 4. Noise/Flash Diversionary Devices: Designed to save lives and reduce the potential for shooting situations by providing for a diversion for the entry of SRT Team members into a hazardous area. Utilizes a bright flash of light followed immediately by a loud noise. 5. Breaching Tools and Ammunition: Items such as rams, pry bars, hydraulic or electronic machines, special frangible shotgun rounds, etc. which are designed to force entry into barricaded or secured areas. 6. Explosives: Tactical explosives used to force entry into barricaded or secured areas, or to create an entry point for tactical teams where appropriate speed and surprise can only be accomplished through the use of the explosive. Also used to create large exterior distractions. The SRT Team Leader will insure that only those Team members properly trained and certified in the use of the special equipment will utilize the equipment. The SRT Team Leader will be responsible for establishing the certification standards and criteria for the team.
VII.ACTIVATIONPROCESS:

SRT Team activation takes precedence over all other assignments within the GraniteCity PoliceDepartment. SRT Team members assigned to the GraniteCityPoliceDepartment SRT Team becomes subordinate to the SRT Team Leader until the SRT Team Leader determines that the activation is over.

The Watch Commander, with the approval of The Chief of Police or his designee, has the authority to immediately activate the team for any critical incident within jurisdictional boundaries. If no one from the command staff is available, the on-duty supervisor has the authority to activate the tactical team. The activation will commence when the responsible Watch Commander contacts the SRT Team Leader or the next in the chain-of-command if the Team Leader is unavailable, and briefs him on the incident. The Team Leader or Acting Team Leader will then take responsibility for the conduct of the activation. The GraniteCityPoliceDepartmentSRTTeam is available, with the approval of The Chief of Police or his designee to any requesting law enforcement agency. When a request for the team is received it shall be immediately forwarded to the Chief of Police or his designees who will determine if in fact the situation warrants the activation of the team. If the situation warrants the activation of the team, the SRT Team Leader will be contacted by The Chief of Police or his designee and will request activation of the team. The activation will follow standard procedures. Any Division or Bureau within the GraniteCityPoliceDepartment, such as the Detectives, or Patrol Division, may request the assistance of the SRT Team in planning or conducting appropriate operations. The Division Commander or his representative will contact the SRT Team Leader with the request. Requests should be made as soon as possible so that, if necessary, additional personnel can be scheduled in advance.

ResponsibilitiesatCriticalIncidents A. The patrol supervisor at the scene will establish: 1. Inner perimeter 2. Outer perimeter 3. Command post 4. Staging area to include press liaison, press area 5. Develop appropriate intelligence information 6. Begin evacuation B. The patrol supervisor will brief the tactical Team Leader of the situation upon his arrival at the scene outlining known factors. C. Control of the inner perimeter will be released to the tactical Team Leader, who will be responsible for containment and apprehension of the suspect(s). D. After the situation is resolved, it will be the responsibility of the tactical team leader or his designee to forward a written report to the Chief of Police on the next working day. The report will include a critique of actions taken by the tactical team to include: 1. Injuries to any persons 2. Use of weapons or chemical agents 3. Any property damage E. Press relations at the scene and issuance of a timely press release will be the responsibility of the incident commander or his designee. PreparationPriortotheArrivaloftheSRTTeam:

In order to ensure a coordinated effort with minimum expenditure of time, it is suggested that the following preparations be made prior to the arrival of the SRT Team: A. Obtain as much information as possible about the suspect(s), including name, physical description, military background, and mental state. A record check should be made to determine if the suspect is wanted. Station and other files should also be checked to develop the suspect(s) criminal background. B. Obtain, if possible, firsthand information concerning all locations involved. A diagram of these locations should be prepared showing entrances, exits, windows, inside rooms, adjacent buildings, and any additional information about the location(s) which might prove useful to the team, i.e., dogs, security alarms, etc. If possible, a drive or walk-by should be conducted. Information should also be gathered as to the occupants of the residence, to include suspects, bystanders, children and elderly occupants. C. Develop a comprehensive plan covering the above information, as well as unit personnel assignments and duties. Copies should be prepared for all personnel. The SRT Team Leader will be responsible for developing the tactical deployment plan for his personnel. D. Ensure that someone is prepared to brief the SRT Team Leader. A formal briefing should be conducted for all personnel prior to commencing the operation. E. Advise the Patrol Commander and any concerned independent agencies that the SRT Team has been requested and will be responding to assist in their jurisdictional areas. F. If possible, ensure that warrants are obtained, or are in the process of being obtained, prior to the teams arrival. G. When the first report describing the operation is available, send a copy to the Tactical Unit for inclusion in the activation file. (NOTE: If sufficient prior notice is received, a team leader can be assigned to contact the concerned patrol/detective supervisor and participate in applicable stages of planning. In this way, the patrol/detective supervisor can be made aware of team capabilities, and the team leader can obtain firsthand information prior to the arrival of the team.)

VIII. MISSIONPLANNING:
The GraniteCityPoliceDepartmentSRTTeam will utilize a written planning process for all operations that are proactive or anticipatory in nature, such as warrant service. All operations that are proactive or anticipatory in nature must have a "Threat Assessment" completed prior to service of the warrant unless exigent circumstances exist for immediate service. Threat assessments should be completed by the investigating officer/detective and should include the actual warrant (or hit confirmation), CCH on the suspect and any other pertinent information used in completing the "Threat Assessment" for that case. The threat assessment shall be given to and reviewed by the SRT Team Leader as soon as possible. It will be the responsibility of the SRT Team Leader (or designee) to review the threat assessment with the Chief of Police (or designee). The Chief of Police or his designees will determine if in fact the situation warrants the activation of the team. If the situation warrants the activation of the team, the written planning process will include a format that will document how the operation is to be: a. Conducted b. Command c. Control d. Communication

e. Support required All operations plans will be stored and maintained in a file for a time set by statute depending on the criminal offense central to the teams activation. The SRT Team Leader will cause a log of events to be recorded on all SRToperations, and will also cause all planning or decision-making documents to be recorded. These documents will be stored and maintained in a file for a time set by statute depending on the criminal offense central to the teams activation. IX.DOCUMENTATIONOFACTIVATION: The GraniteCityPoliceDepartmentSRTTeam Leader will cause an agency incident report to be generated detailing the activation and use of the team. This report will be a standard police report type documents which details the operation and pertinent information required for followup investigators, prosecutors, etc. X. AFTERACTIONCRITIQUE: At the completion of all operations and significant training events the SRT Team Leader will conduct an after action review. The purpose of this review will be to create a forum for team members to offer information for the improvement of the team. The after action review will be formatted to develop the following information: a. Positive factors b. Negative factors 3. Solutions for the negative factors XI. PERIODICPOLICYREVIEW: The SRT Team Leader will annually review and, when necessary, update this policy. The SRT Team Leader will then cause the policy to be annually reviewed and approved, by signature, by the approval authority for the agency. XII.MUTUALAID: Other law enforcement agencies may request assistance from the departments tactical team. When this occurs, the watch commander shall inform their representatives of our policies and the following operational guidelines: A. Mutual aid requests require approval of the Chief of Police or, in his absence, a member of the departments command staff. B. The request for aid is from the agencys Chief of Police of his designee. 1. Primary Assistance: Primary assistance denotes that the tactical team shall assume the entire responsibility involved in resolving a situation. The personnel utilized in the inner perimeter shall be limited to members of the tactical team or other officers the tactical Team Leader feels are appropriate. The Team Leader shall respond to the scene and take charge of personnel. This does not preclude consultation between the Team Leader and the representative of the outside agency. The requesting agency must agree to this criteria or the tactical team will decline primary assistance.

2. Secondary Assistance: Secondary assistance denotes that the tactical team will assume a support role to the requesting agencys tactical team. The requesting agency will retain complete operational responsibility and control of the incident. The Team Leader will respond to the scene and will accept mission assignments from the incident commander of the requesting agency. The integrity of the tactical team will remain intact and under the direct supervision of the Team Leader.

B.Responsibilityofrequestingagency:
1. The on-duty supervisor from the requesting agency will establish:

a. Inner perimeter b. Outer perimeter c. Command post d. Staging area including press contact, assigned press area e. Begin to develop intelligence information relative to the situation f. Begin necessary evacuation 2. The requesting agency will assign a supervisor or command level officer to the command post during the length of the situation.

procedure #1.100

GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title:ADMINISTRATIVE REPORTS DateIssued: Revised:

Procedure:1.100

I.PURPOSE A. To provide for an efficient and accurate flow of information within the Police Department. B. To provide management information to administrative personnel as an aid in the decision making process. II.POLICY A. Written reports permit the formal exchange of information between various operating components of the Police Department, as well as between the Department, City Government and the Public. The Police Department will make every effort to record and publish all relevant information which will reflect current trends in criminal activity, and utilize management information for the good of the Department, personnel and community. III.PROCEDURE
A. MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEM

1. The Department will continually gather data on various unit activities. This data will include, but not be limited to, the following: Part I and Part II Criminal Offenses I-UCR Service Codes Traffic Violations Traffic Crash Reports New World System Arrest Reports Crime Prevention Activities Criminal Investigation Reports Juvenile Unit Reports Shift Summary Reports UCR Incident Summary Reports Dispatch Detail Report/Radio Logs

2. It is the responsibility of all supervisors to ensure the accuracy of the information and data gathered by members under their supervision. Additionally, staff inspections of source documents will be conducted to verify the integrity of reported statistics. 3. The information gathered will be utilized to prepare administrative reports, to assist in the decision making process, for determining manpower allocation, equipment needs, training requirements, predicting work load and preparing budgets. 4. Daily, monthly and annual reports are necessary to provide management information on the activities of the Department. The following are source documents and necessary reports:

REPORT TITLE
DAILY Officers / Shift Daily Activity Report Sick Leave Comp Time/Overtime MONTHLY Criminal Investigations Monthly Report Juvenile Booking Monthly Report Department Monthly Report ANNUAL Department Annual Report Criminal Investigations Annual Report Crime Prevention Annual Report Firearms Qualification and Training Annual Report Offense Summary UCR Arrest Summary

2 Procedure #1.101 GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title:

DEPARTMENT REPORTS AND FORMS

Procedure: 1.101

Date Issued:

Revised:

I.PURPOSE

A.To establish and maintain procedures to ensure the accountability of all Department forms.

B.To provide for various reporting requirements within the Department.

II.POLICY

A. The proper use, preparation and processing of required forms is vital to the effective and efficient operation of the Department. Every employee will utilize only those forms authorized by the Department and promptly complete and submit all required forms.

III.PROCEDURE

A.

ACCOUNTABILITY

1.The Detective Division Commander is responsible for developing, modifying, reviewing and approving new forms.

2.The Service Division Officer is responsible for ordering and storing all Department forms.

3. Only those forms authorized by the Chief of Police, or required by law, shall be utilized by Department personnel.

4. A master file containing an original copy of each form in use shall be maintained by the
Records Clerk.

5. The Service Division Officer will check the inventory of forms used by the Department personnel monthly. Supervisors should check that the appropriate number of forms are available in the report room. Additional forms are stored in the storage room.

6. Personnel removing forms from the storage room must inform the Service Division Officer whenever it appears the inventory of any form appears to be low. A memo should advise the Service Division Officer as soon as possible, the need to reorder.

7. The Service Division Officer is responsible for placing printing orders for all Department
and other required forms.

B. REPORT PREPARATION AND PROCESSING

1. All reports and forms requiring a supervisor's signature should be accurately, completely and promptly submitted for approval.

2. Supervisors are required to check each report and form submitted to ensure that all the proper data and information is completely and accurately provided.

3. All field reports cleared by the patrol shift supervisor will be submitted to the Data Entry Clerk for entry into New World System. The Data Entry Clerk is responsible for entering/merging reports into the database. .

4.Once all reports have been entered/merged into the database the records clerk shall file all reports in the records section and distribute copies to appropriate units.

5. The Records section is responsible for all original reports submitted to the unit and will ensure all originals are properly filed.

6. The Detective Division supervisor shall review all submitted reports and forms to ensure they are complete and all required information has been provided. Incomplete reports will be returned/ rejected to the reporting Officer and/or their supervisor with the request for the necessary additional data or correction.

7. Only authorized personnel are authorized to enter or remove any original reports or forms from the files or control of the Records unit.

8. Requests for copies from outside the Department shall be provided according to law and as outlined by the Assistant Chief of Police.

9. The secretarial staff will be responsible for scanning any and all forms and/or information that should to be attached to reports in the New World System.

Procedure #1.103

GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title:CHIEF'S OFFICE INFORMATIONProcedure:1.103 DateIssued: Revised:

I.PURPOSE A. To establish a control system for correspondence from the Chief of Police. II.POLICY A. The efficient and accurate flow of information is vital to any organization. Accountability for Departmental correspondence is a necessary requirement for all informational systems. Administrative Orders and Memorandums are an effective way to seek input from personnel and keep open available lines of communication. III.PROCEDURE A. The Chief's Office administrative order will be assigned numbers in the following manner: 1. Administrative #00-1 Administrative - identifies the information as in administrative order. 00 - indicates the year. 1 - indicates the specific chronological number. 2. Memorandum Memorandum - identifies the information as a memorandum: and concerns in house information.

B. All administrative orders and memorandums will be maintained by the Chief's secretary containing the following information:
1. Chronological control number (administrative orders). 2. Date issued. 3. Subject. 4. Person(s) addressed to.

C. The Chief's administrative order will generally be issued to reflect a change in policy or procedure. This order may stand-alone or result in a change to the Procedure Manual.

D. The Chief's memorandum will generally be advisory in nature or issued to indicate that a type of action and/or response is required of the addressee(s). E. When an action or response of the addressee is required, it shall be acted upon and a report returned to the Chief's Office, as otherwise indicated on the memorandum.

2 Procedure 1.501 GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title: 1.501

SEIZURE & ASSET FORFEITURE

Procedure:

Date Issued:

Revised:

I.PURPOSE

A.To establish guidelines for the seizure and forfeiture of assets.

II.POLICY

A.It is the policy of the Police Department to utilize to the fullest extent the forfeiture provisions available in state and federal drug laws. This effort is intended to have a direct impact on the individuals dealing with narcotics arrested by the Police Department, while providing the Police Department with the maximum amount of economic benefits provided for in various laws.

III.DEFINITIONS

A. Asset seizure is the confiscation by the government of tainted property or assets used to commit a crime or gained as a result. Forfeiture is the legal process by which the title to the seized property is turned over to the government.

B. Asset forfeiture drug cases can be accomplished through either civil or criminal proceedings. Federal criminal forfeiture is pursued under two laws, the Racketeer Influenced and Corrupt Organization (RICO) Act (18 U.S. 1962) or the Federal Drug Abuse Prevention and Control Act (21 U.S.C. 881)

C. Civil forfeiture proceedings are brought against property, not a person. Possession of the property may not be illegal, but the property may be subject to seizure and forfeiture because of the way it was used.

D. Criminal forfeiture proceedings do not necessarily depend on the outcome of the criminal case against the owner of the property. The defendant does not have to be convicted of the crime for the department to be successful in the forfeiture proceeding.

IV.PROCEDURE

A. Each supervisor is responsible for reviewing offense reports and arrests by members of their units to determine whether the possibility exists for the seizure and forfeiture of property.

B. If a supervisor feels that the property seizure and forfeiture is warranted he will effect the seizure and initiate forfeiture proceedings. A copy of all case reports and other relevant documentation will be forwarded to the Detective Division for review.

C. The Detective Division supervisor will review the case and discuss the circumstances involved with the Prosecutors Office. If the legal requirements are met, and considerations have been given to the type, condition, and approximate value of the property, a recommendation will be made by the Detective Division supervisor through the chain of command to the Chief of Police. The Chief of Police must authorize all cases involving forfeiture of property.

D. If approved by the Chief of Police, the Detective Division supervisor will begin forfeiture proceedings. The Detective Division supervisor or his designee is responsible for ensuring that all receipts, tow reports, or inventory forms are marked, "Hold For Forfeiture."

E. All requests for information regarding property in forfeiture proceedings will be directed to the Detective Division supervisor.

F. Currency seized where state forfeiture proceedings have been started, will be placed into
a special bank account. Separate accounts will be maintained for money that is pending forfeiture and money that has been awarded to the Department by the courts. Separate accounts are also necessary depending on whether state or federal agencies are involved. State and federal funds, once awarded to the Department, will not be deposited into the same account.

G.The Detective Division Commander is responsible for the security, maintenance, accountability and recording of the funds seized through asset forfeiture. Only the Detective Division Commander and the Chief of Police are authorized access to these funds.

H. Money received and placed into the forfeiture account will be recorded. The Criminal Investigation Unit supervisor will log the following:

1.case report number;

2.defendants name;

3.date of deposit;

4.name of person making the deposit;

5.amount of deposit; and

6.date of transfer to permanent department account or returned to defendant.

I. The Detective Division supervisor is responsible for fiscal and procedural management of these funds, including:

1.authorization of only one person as responsible for these funds,


2.including acceptance of money into the fund account;

3.maintaining a record if funds are appropriated among organizational components;

4.maintaining the funds in a secure location; 5. maintaining a ledger that identifies the date, amount and purpose of transactions including
case number;

6.quarterly audit of funds; and 7.annual audit and report of deposits and transfers. J. Money awarded to the Department will be transferred to a separate account. These funds
will only be used as provided for by the applicable state or federal statute.

K. The Chief of Police must approve all requests for expenditures/transfers from the forfeiture account.

L. Periodic audits, both announced and unannounced, may be conducted as directed by the Chief of Police. The forfeiture account will be audited annually as part of the annual City audit. The accounting firm will provide the City with a financial statement for this fund. The Detective Division supervisor will make available all records necessary to conduct these audits.

M. Access to the forfeiture account will be limited to the Chief of Police and Detective Division supervisor.

N. Whenever the Department is involved in a case where several jurisdictions are involved,
the appropriate authority will determine the percentage of assets to be distributed, based upon those agency's involvement in the case.

Procedure #1.600 GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title: 1.600

FREEDOM OF INFORMATION ACT/

Procedure:

DISSEMENATION OF INFORMATION Date Issued: Revised:

3

I.PURPOSE

A. To establish a written directive governing the procedures

used to disseminate police information and records; and to establish a written directive governing the procedures used whenever the general public makes a request for, to inspect or copy public records that are accessible under the Illinois Freedom of InformationAct.

II.POLICY

A. Information released to the public shall be based pursuant to 5 ILCS 140/1, the Freedom ofInformationAct.TheprimaryresponsibilityforinformationstorageandreleaseshallbewiththeChief of Police. The daily responsibility shall be assigned to the Assistant Chief of Police as the Freedom of InformationOfficerfortheDepartment.

III.DEFINITIONS

A. PERSON: Any individual, corporation, partnership, firm,

organizationorassociation,actingindividuallyorasagroup.

B. PUBLIC RECORD: All records, reports, forms, writings,

letters, memoranda, books, papers, maps, photographs, microfilms, cards, tapes, recordings, electronic data processing records, recorded information and all other documentary materials, regardless of physical form of characteristics, having been preparedorhavingbeenorbeingused,received,possessedorunderthecontrolofthe Department.

C. CRIMINAL HISTORY RECORD INFORMATION: Data

identifiable to an individual and consisting of descriptions or notations of arrests, detections,indictments,informations,pre-trialproceedings,trials,orotherformalevents in the criminal justice system or descriptions or notations of criminal charges, including Federal,StateandlocalOrdinanceviolations.

IV.PROCEDURES

A.INFORMATIONREQUEST

1. Person requesting to inspect or receive a

copyofrecordsshallcompleteaPublicInformationRequestForm;

2. The Public Information Request Form is available through the Records Division between thehoursof8:00a.m.until5:00p.m.,MondaythroughFriday.

3. Upon completion of the Public Information

Request Form, the request form shall be submitted to the Records Division duringnormalbusinesshoursorthroughthemail.

4. TherequestwillbereviewedbytheFreedomofInformationOfficer,theAssistantChiefof Police.

B.RESPONSETOINFORMATIONREQUEST

1. All Public Information Request Forms must be completed and returned to the requesting personwithinseven(7)workingdaysoftheDepartmentreceivingthewrittenrequest.

2. A request can be deferred for an additional

seven (7) working days when extraordinary circumstances exist and it is not possible to have the request completed within the normal time allowed for respondingtoarequest.

3. Whenadditionaltimeisrequired,thepersonrequestingtheinformationwillbenotifiedby letterindicatingthereason(s)whytherecordscannotbeprovidedwithinthetimelimits.Thisletterwill bemailedwithinseven(7)workingdaysoftheDepartmentreceivingthewrittenrequest.

C.EXEMPTIONS:Thefollowingshallbeexemptfrom inspectionandcopying: 1. Information specifically prohibited from

disclosurebyfederalorstatelaw.

2. Information that, if disclosed, would

constitute a clearly unwarranted invasion of personal privacy, unless the disclosure is consented to, in writing, by the individual subject(s) of the informationrequested.Informationexemptedunderthissubsectionshallinclude butisnotlimitedto:

a.Personnelfilesandpersonalinformationmaintainedwithrespecttoemployees.

b. Information revealing the identity of

personswhofilecomplaintsorprovideinformationtotheDepartmentof PublicSafety.

 c. Records compiled by the

DepartmentofPolice,butonlytotheextentthatdisclosurewould:

(1) Interfere with pending or actually and reasonably contemplated law enforcement proceedings.

(2)Interferewithpendingadministrativeenforcementproceedings.

(3)Depriveapersonofafairtrialoranimpartialhearing.

(4) Unavoidable disclosure of the identity of a confidential source and/or confidential informationfurnishedonlybytheconfidentialsource.

5.5. (6) Endanger the life or

physical safety of law enforcement personnel or any other person.

(5) Disclose unique or specialized investigative techniques other than those generally usedandknown.

(7) Obstruct an ongoing

criminalinvestigation.

d.Criminalhistoryinformationexceptthefollowing:

1. Chronologically maintained
arrestinformation,suchastraditionalarrestlogsorblotters.

2. The name of a person in

custodyandthechargesforwhichthatpersonisbeingheld.

3.Courtrecordsthatarepublic.

4. Records that are otherwise

availableunderStateorlocallaw.

5. Records in which the requestingpartyistheindividualidentifiedasasuspect.

D.APPEALPROCESS

1.Whenanappealisreceived,theChiefofPoliceshallpromptlyreviewtheappealandeither overruleorupholdtheoriginaldenial.

2. If the original denial is overruled, the request for

informationshallbefurnishedtotherequestingpersonassoonaspossible.

3.Iftheoriginaldenialisupheld,theFreedomofInformationOfficer/AssistantChiefofPolice, shall notify the requesting person within seven (7) working days after receiving the appeal of the decisiontowithholdtheinformationrequestedandexplaintothepersontheirrighttoajudicialreview onthedecisionthroughthecircuitcourtoftheCounty.

E.REQUIREDFILES

1. The Freedom of Information Officer shall be held responsible for maintaining all records andfilesincludingbutnotlimitedto:

a.Allrequestsforinformation.

b.AlldenialsmadebytheFreedomofInformationOfficer.

c.AllappealstotheChiefofPolice. d.AllappealdenialsbytheChiefofPolice. e.Allothercorrespondenceconcerningtheabovementionedfiles. f.Allinformationavailableforinspectionbythepublic.

F.EXCEPTIONS

1. It should be noted this procedure is to be followed

only if the requesting person specifically requests information under the guidelinesoftheFreedomofInformationAct.

2. All other requests for reports shall be handled through the Records Division. These requests may include accident reports for insurance companies or reports for private firms and businesses.

a.StatesAttorneys,CityAttorneysandU.S.Attorneysarenotrequiredtopresentsubpoena orcourtorderspriortoobtainingrestrictedinformation.

b. Anyquestionsregardingtherelease of information shall be directed to the Chief of Police or

FreedomofInformationOfficer,theAssistantChiefofPolice.

c.Personsotherthanlawenforcement organizations,governmentalagencies,orpublic
workscompanies(IllinoisPower,IllinoisAmericanWaterCompany)are requiredtopaythesetcopyfees.FeesmaybewaivedbytheChiefof Police.

d.Allpersonsrequestingcopiesofreportsmustshowphotoidentificationpriortoreleaseof information.

3.FEES


a.Minimumcopyfeesforreportsshallbe:

(1)CrashReports$5.00

(2)OffenseReportCoversheet$5.00

(3)ArrestRecordCheck$5.00

(4)SexOffenderRegistration$5.00

(5) Case File copies, additional page fees, subpoena fees are established by the Freedom of InformationOfficer.

4.DISSEMINATIONOFCOMPUTERIZEDFILES

a. Members shall comply with the Rules and Regulations of the Law Enforcement AdministrativeDataSystem(LEADS).

Procedure #1.700 GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title: 1.700

SEX OFFENDER AND CHILD Procedure:

MURDERER REGISTRATION Date Issued: Revised:

2

I.PURPOSE

A. This policy is to assist employees with the proper registration of qualifying sex offenses under the Illinois Sex Offender Registration Act, 730 ILCS 150 et. Seq. and the proper procedure for Community Notification of offenders who are required to register under this act as it applies to the Sex
Offender and Child Murderer Community Notification Law, 730 ILCS 152/101, as they apply to the GraniteCityPoliceDepartment.

II.POLICY

A.ItisthepolicyofthisDepartmenttocomplywithStatestatutesinthecollectionofinformation and what information will be available to the mandated discretionary groups or individuals. There are the rules and regulations set forth in the Sex Offender Act manual which shall be followed for proper registration.

III.MANDATORY NOTIFICATION

A.ThisDepartmentisnolongerresponsibletomailoutanymandatedsexoffenderinformation, thisisnowthefunctionofthelocalcountyandIllinoisStatePolice.

IV.DISCRETIONARY NOTIFICATION

A. The Granite City Police Department may disclose the name, address, and offense of any sexoffenderwithinourjurisdictiontoallpersonswhoarelikelytoencountersexoffenders.Anentitymay requestamailingonayearlybasis,byrequestingviaaregisteredletter,whichincludestheentity'sname, addressandpersonresponsiblefortheinformation.UponapprovaloftheChiefofPolicethisagencymay beputonthemailinglist.

B. Information concerning these discretionary notifications and their access can be published usingthelocalpressandtelevision.

C.OfficersoftheGraniteCityPoliceDepartmentarepermittedindisclosingthenames,addresses,date ofbirthandchargeofoffenderswhoarelistedontheIllinoisStatePolicewebsiteasoffenders.


D. Names and other information regarding juvenile sex offenders shall not be placed on the internet or made available to the public with the exception that law enforcement agencies have the discretion to provide information to the public when public safety is threatened: however, the Detective Division Commander shall be notified prior to any disemination.Releaseofinformationwillbedeterminedon acase-by-casebasis

V.PUBLIC ACCESS

A. Thenames,addressesandoffensesofregisteredchildsexoffenderswithinourjurisdiction willbeopenforinspectionbythepublicattheRecordsDivisionfrom0830hoursto1630hours,Monday throughFriday.

B. A log will be maintained and the requester's name, address, date of birth and date informationwasreleasedshallbeenteredinthelog.Ifacopyofthechildsexoffenderlistisrequested,it willbeprovidedataminimumcosttotherequester.

VI.REGISTRATION OF SEX OFFENDERS

A. PersonsrequiredtoregisterundertheSexOffenderRegistrationActmaydosoatanytime at the OIC desk. The OIC and/or Sex Registration Detective/Officer will ensure the registration form iscomplete,thattheoffenderreadsandsignstheformandthatadigitalphotographintheNewWorld Systemaretakenoftheoffender.

B. The Officer who registers the offender will obtain all required information listed on the registration form.Theremaybetimeswhentheinformationdoesnotapplyandshallbemarkedaccordingly.

C. Officers, on initial registration will book the offender in the New World System and fingerprint the offender.Fingerprintswillnotbeneededonsubsequentrenewals.Officersshallcompletetheappropriate cautionalertsintheNewWordSystem.ThisinformationwillthenbeturnedovertotheSexRegistration Officer,designatedbytheChiefofPolice.

D.Ifanoffenderwishestoregisteranaddresschange,employmentchangeorachangeofschoolstatus thesameprocedurewillbefollowed.

E. When registering a Sex Offender, he must produce some form of identification indicating the residenceheiswishingtouseashishome,whereheisregistering.

F.IftheoffenderisrentingaparcelofpropertyinthecitylimitsofGraniteCity,theoffendermustobtain aleaseagreementandsignaGraniteCityCrimeFreeLeaseAddendum withtheowneroftheproperty. TheoffendershallthenobtainaGraniteCityoccupancypermitbytheGraniteCityBuildingandZoning Department.Iftheoffendercannotproducethisinformation,donotregisteratthistimeandreferhim/her tothesexoffenderregistrationofficer.

G.IfaSexOffenderismakinganaddresschangewithincitylimitshestillmustfilloutaregistration formcompletingtheshadedareaandinitialingandsigningsame.Thesameprocessmustbeusedfor annualrenewals.Onceinformationandphotographsarecollectedtheyshouldbeplacedinafilefolder intheSexOffenderRegistrationOfficerbasket.SexOffendersnowhavethree(3))daystoregisterafter they have been notified through the courts, Illinois State Police Sex Offender Registration Unit or any policeagencyortheyareliableforaClass4,Felonyarrest.

H. Offenders must register for ten (10) years from the date of conviction, if not incarcerated, or ten (10) years from date of release from DOC or Mental Health. There are other qualifying offenses that willrequireanoffendertoregisterforlifeasaPredatororevery(90)days,dependingonthenatureof offense,subsequentviolation(s)totheregistrationactorbeingconsideredassexuallydangerous/violent person.

VII.SEX REGISTRATION OFFICER

A. This Officer is responsible for collecting and maintaining the registration forms and photographs,ensuringtheinformationisenteredinLawEnforcementAgencyDataSystem(LEADS)by telecommunicationpersonnel,thatacopyoftheregistrationformandone(1)photographwillbeturned over to Illinois State Police Intelligence Bureau. Notification to the state police can be made though fax and/oremail,withthedocumentsbeingproperlyattachedinanemailHewillalsoprovidetheoffender informationtotheRecordsDivisionforpublicrelease.OnlyinformationcollectedbyaLEADSsummary willbereleasedtothepublic.Hewillalsobetheliaisonwiththeschools,childcarefacilitiesandDCFS.

VIII.TELECOMMUNICATOR

A. Telecommunicators are responsible for entering the registrations into the LEADS system cautionfileswithinthree(3)daysaftertheofficerregistersthesexoffender.Theyarealsoresponsible forupdatingthecautionfileswithaddresschangesandofficercontactswithoffenders.

IX.OFFICERS CONTACT WITH SEX OFFENDER

A. LEADShasbeenmodifiedtoidentifyandtrackcontactswithsexoffenders,ifanoffenderis runthroughtheLEADSsystem,aLEADShitwillindicatethefollowing:

1.Subjectisincompliance-registered.

2. Subjectnotincompliance-subjectnotifiedbutdidnotregister,offendershouldbeplaced
under arrest and held pending a class 4 felony (violation of 730 ILCS 150/3, Violation of Duty to Register)completeawrittenreport.

3. Subjecthasnotbeennotified-subjectisanoffenderbutwasnotnotifiedbytheState.If
theoffenderisfromourjurisdiction,escorthimtostationandhavehimregister;ifoffenderisoutsideof ourjurisdiction,collecthisinformationandforwardsametotheChief'soffice.

X.IMPORTANT NOTES

1. The name, address and offense of offenders to be released are from the list compiled by a LEADSsummaryinquiryonly.

2.Thelistschangesdailyandareonlyaccurateforthedateitisobtainedormailed.

3.Properidentificationofallrequestersisnecessarytoobtainlist.

4. Identification of all offenders shall be obtained, unless the officer knows the identity of the personneedingtoregister.

5. If an Officer comes into contact with an offender, i.e. traffic stop, call for service,suspicioussubjectoranyothercontact,aLEADSAdd-onmustbecompletedintheircaution filealert.TheTelecommunicatorwilldocumentthecontactwithabriefsynopsisofthetypeofcontact.

Procedure #2.000

GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title:USE OF FORCEProcedure:2.000 DateIssued: Revised:

I.PURPOSE A. To establish Department guidelines on using both lethal and less than lethal force. B. To provide for the proper documentation and investigation of incidents involving the use of force. II.POLICY A. It is the policy of the Police Department to provide clear procedures to sworn members regarding the use of lethal force in the performance of their duties. The safety of innocent persons and officers is of paramount importance. B. The use of less than lethal weapons is classified as a use of force and is governed by this policy. The officers of this agency are authorized to carry less than lethal weapons so that they may successfully defend themselves and others from combative, resisting and/or violent individuals. A less than lethal weapon is not necessarily a replacement or substitute for other authorized weapons, devices and/or techniques and therefore should be used when, in the officer's opinion, it is the best choice of weapon in a use of force situation. A less than lethal weapon is another tool that can be used at the discretion of the officer when the decision is made that the use of force is necessary and reasonable under the circumstances. As with any use of force, the officer is accountable to this agency for the use of a less than lethal weapon. C. Only force reasonably necessary to defend a human life, effect an arrest or control a person shall be used by sworn officers of the Police Department. The force used by an officer shall only be that which is necessary to overcome the resistance being offered by an offender and to effect lawful objectives. D. All sworn personnel must be issued copies of, and instructed in the Department's Use of Force procedure before carrying any firearm or other police weapon. IIILAW

A. Certain state statutes form the reference on which this Departments use of force policy is based. These laws are included in this procedure for reference purposes. Employees must be aware of prohibitions and restrictions in this procedure that place a higher standard on the use of force than are contained in state statute. B.720ILCS5/7-5 1. A peace officer, or any person he has summoned or directed to assist him, need not retreat or desist from efforts to make a lawful arrest because of resistance to the arrest. He is justified in the use of any force which he reasonably believes to be necessary to defend himself or another from bodily harm while making the arrest. However, he is justified in using forcelikelytocausedeathorgreatbodilyharm only when he reasonablybelieves that such force is necessary to prevent death or great bodily harm to himself or such other person, or when hereasonablybelieves both that: a. Such force is necessary to prevent the arrest from being defeated by resistance or escape; and, b. The person to be arrested has committed or attempted aforciblefelony which involves the inflictionorthreatenedinflictionofgreatbodilyharm, or is attempting to escape by use of a deadly weapon, or otherwise indicates that he will endanger human life or inflict great bodily harm unless arrested without delay. 2. A peace officer making an arrest pursuant to an invalid warrant is justified in the use of any force which he would be justified in using if the warrant were valid, unless he knows that the warrant is invalid. IV.DEFINITIONS A.720ILCS5/2-19 1. ReasonableBelief"or"ReasonablyBelieves means that the person concerned, acting as a reasonable man, believes that the described facts exist. B. 720 ILCS 5/7-8 Forcelikelytocausedeathorgreatbodilyharm. 1. Force which is likely to cause death or great bodily harm, within the meaning of Sections 75 and 7-6, includes: a. The firing of a firearm in the direction of the person to be arrested, even though no intent exists to kill or inflict great bodily harm; and b. The firing of a firearm at a vehicle in which the person to be arrested is

riding. (1) A peace officer's discharge of a firearm using ammunition designed to disable or control an individual without creating the likelihood of death or great bodily harm shall not be considered force likely to cause death or great bodily harm within the meaning of Sections 7-5 and 7-6. C.GreatBodilyHarm is serious bodily injury that creates a substantial risk of death, causes serious or permanent disfigurement, or results in long-term loss or impairment of the functioning of any bodily member or organ. D. 720 ILCS 5/2-8 1. Forcible felony means treason, first degree murder, second degree murder, aggravated criminal sexual assault, criminal sexual assault, robbery, burglary, residential burglary, aggravated arson, aggravated kidnapping, kidnapping, aggravated battery resulting in great bodily harm or permanent disability or disfigurement and any other felony which involves the use or threat of physical force or violence against an individual. V.PROCEDURE A. LEVEL OF FORCE CONTINUUM 1. When the use of force is necessary and appropriate, members shall, to the extent possible, use an escalating level of force and will not employ a more forceful measure unless it is determined that a lower level of force would not be adequate, or such level of force is attempted and actually found to be inadequate. a. LEVEL 1: Officers Presence - An officers appearance may be enough to dissuade some persons from engaging in resistive behavior. Factors which contribute to this level include perceptions of the officers attitude, ability, and self-confidence. b. LEVEL 2: Verbal Direction - Dialogue used by an officer can serve to diffuse potentially violent confrontations. It is important to observe that this level concerns WHAT an officer says and HOW he says it. The factors involved in this level include the officers language, tone of voice, and confidence and/or posture and body language. c. LEVEL 3: Empty Hand Control, Use of TASER or Use of O/C Spray -- Soft techniques which have minimal chance of causing serious injury. These techniques include some pressure point control techniques and joint manipulations. Hard techniques that have a probability of causing injuries. These techniques include punches and leg strikes. The use of the TASER or O/C spray is authorized if, in the opinion of the officer, the use of empty hand techniques would pose unnecessary risk of injury to the offender and or the officer or if empty hand technique would be ineffective in gaining control of the offender.

d. LEVEL 4: Impact Weapons - An officer may need to resort to the use of an impact weapon to control resistive behavior. These hard techniques have a probability of causing injuries. These techniques include impact weapon strikes. e. Impact Weapon: A weapon (e.g., straight baton, collapsible baton or flashlight) which causes blunt trauma upon striking the soft tissue or skeletal frame of the human body to impair an individuals mobility or motor functions. f. LEVEL 5: Lethal Force - Lethal force can be realized through the application of a variety of measures. Although commonly related to an officers use of a firearm, lethal force can also be applied by use of severe hard empty hand control or hard intermediate weapon control techniques. g.NOTE: It is not the intent of this part of this procedure to direct officers to try each of the level options before escalating to the next. Each situation will dictate at which level a member will start. B. DEADLY FORCE 1. Members of the Police Department shall, when feasible, exhaust all reasonable alternatives before resorting to the use of deadly force. 2. The use of deadly force must be based upon reasonablebeliefby the officer that such force is necessary. 3. Deadly force must never be used against any person based on mere suspicion alone. 4. An officer may use deadly force only when the officer reasonably believes that the action is in defense of human life, including the officer's life, or in defense of any person in immediate danger of great bodily harm. 5. Deadly force may only be used against a "fleeing felon" when the officer reasonably believes that the action is in defense of human life, including the officer's life, or in defense of any person in immediate danger of great bodily harm. 6. This directive is for internal use only and does not enlarge an officer's civil or criminal liability in any way. It should not be construed as the creation of a higher standard of safety or care in an evidentiary sense concerning third party claims. Violations of this directive, if proven, can only form the basis of a complaint by this Department and then only in a nonjudicial administrative setting. 7. Use of deadly force against a fleeing forcible felony suspect is prohibited unless the officer has probable cause to believe that the use of deadly force is warranted based on the limitations as set forth in this procedure.

a. United States Supreme Court decision U.S. 105 S. Ct. 1694 (1985) (Tennessee vs. Garner) ruled that the use of deadly force to prevent the escape of a suspected felon violates the Fourth Amendment prohibition against unreasonable seizure if used against an apparently unarmed, non-violent suspect (the case involved a burglary suspect). The Supreme Court further stated that deadly force may be used against an offender who has attempted or committed an offense involving the infliction or threatened infliction of great bodily harm. Deadly force may not be used against an unarmed, non-violent, property crime offender. b.TheUnitedStatesSupremeCourtdecisionwentontostatethatwhenanofficerisjustified intheuseofdeadlyforcehewill, if feasible,firstgiveaverbalwarning.(Example:"Police Officer,Halt"). C. PROHIBITIONS 1. No shots will be fired from moving vehicles or at moving vehicles unless the situation becomes one of self defense or defense of other lives. 2. No warning shots will be fired. 3. No shots will be fired into buildings or through doors, windows or other openings unless the situation becomes one of self defense or defense of other lives.

D. LESS-THAN-LETHAL FORCE 1. Officers are justified in the use of force they reasonably believe necessary to effect an arrest. They need not retreat or desist from efforts to make a lawful arrest because of resistance or threatened resistance to the arrest. 2. Officers are justified in the use of force against another when and insofar as the officer reasonably believes that such conduct is necessary to defend the officer or another person against the imminent use of unlawful force. 3. Only the amount of force reasonably necessary to effect an arrest or control a person shall be used. 4. Force shall not be used punitively and officers will always discontinue the use of force when the offender stops resisting. 5. A Department specified and approved TASER, a police impact weapon, or Oleoresin Capsicum chemical agent are the only authorized less-than-lethal weapons. Some examples of impact weapons are, but are not limited to, the police baton, the expandable baton, the PR 24 baton, the flashlight.

6. The baton may also be used as a barricade or repelling device in crowd control situations, or a temporary restraining device.
7. Officers using flashlights in low light conditions are considered to possess a defensive

tool. If a situation makes necessary the use of the flashlight as a defensive tool, it will be used in a manner consistent with the use of similarly approved less-than-lethal weapons. 8. Officers will provide for appropriate medical attention to any subject injured as a result of an officers use of physical force or a lethal or less-than-lethal weapon.

E.USEOFTASER
1. The TASER is considered to be a less-than-lethal weapon. a. An officer need not attempt empty-hand control before using the TASER. The officer need only justify that empty-hand skill would not be sufficient or practical to safely and effectively place an offender under control. b. A TASER is useful to incapacitate/ control a dangerous, violent, or potentially violent subject when reasonable expectation exists that physically engaging the subject would be unsafe for the officer, subject, or others present. c. A TASER may be useful when attempts to subdue a subject by other tactics have been, or likely will be, ineffective; or when deadly force would not be justified and/or necessary 2. Officers who employ the use of a TASER should do so as a means of obtaining control of and individual and a TASER shall never be used for any other unlawful purpose such as a means of dispensing punishment. a. The TASER shall only be deployed/ discharged the reasonable number of times to obtain control over a subject. Once the desired results have been achieved, the officer will stop the deployment/discharge of the TASER. b. The deployment of the TASER will not be intentionally aimed at the head, neck, or groin. It is permissible, in accordance with training, to discharge (touch stun) in the groin or sides of the neck. 3. The TASER will not be used a. near flammable materials, gasses or liquids; b. as a deadly force option; c. to threaten or gain information; d. to wake a suspected intoxicated subject;

e. as a prod: f. against a subject already restrained, unless physical aggression has to be overcome; g. on a subject who could fall from a height that would likely cause great bodily harm or substantial injury; h. on an animal, unless after deployment, the officer can quickly restrain/control the animal with another restraint device; or use of other force is not reasonable. 4. After a TASER has been deployed on a subject, there are the following medical considerations: a. TASER prongs and probes are to be treated as biohazard sharps. Officers shall be gloved prior to removal of any prongs/probes that have contacted the subject's skin. (1) TASER prongs and barbs will be inspected after removal from the skin to ensure complete removal. (2) Probes will be placed points down into the bores of the expended air cartridge and secured with tape. The cartridge will be disposed of in a plastic bag and placed in the biohazard container. b. After an individual has been subjected to a deployment or discharge of the TASER, they will be restrained and handcuffed as soon as safely possible, preferably by a backup officer. c. The officer will visually examine the area of the deployment or discharge for injury. The TASER projectile prongs will be removed when it is safe to do so and only by an officer who has received TASER training. (1) If examination of the affected area reveals that the probes require medical removal, or the subject exhibits other physical symptoms, the subject will be transported to the emergency room for treatment. (2) TASER prongs that have struck the face, groin, genitals, female breast(s), or other sensitive area shall be removed only by emergency medical personnel. d. Subjects on which the TASER has been deployed or discharged shall be monitored for up to four hours while in custody. Medical assistance/evaluation will be provided if the subject exhibits any adverse reactions.
F. USE OF O/C SPRAY

1. O/C Spray is considered to be a less-than-lethal weapon.

a. An officer need not attempt empty-hand control before using O/C Spray. The officer need only justify that empty-hand skill would not be sufficient or practical to safely and effectively place an offender under control. b. O/C Spray is generally useful against drug abusers, emotionally disturbed persons, intoxicated persons, violent individuals who have reduced sensitivity to pain, and animals. c. O/C may be used to effect the removal of a person(s) from a locked vehicle who refuses to exit when lawfully ordered to do so by an officer. d. O/C may be released into a building to effect the removal of a person(s) who refuses to voluntarily exit the building and may also be used when a forced exit is necessary. e. Officers should avoid the use of O/C Spray in situations where the use of O/C could reasonably cause panic (e.g., hospitals, dark crowded theaters, etc.). 2. Officers who employ the use of O/C Spray should do so as a means of obtaining control of an individual and shall never be used for any other unlawful purpose, such as a means of dispensing punishment. a. Only that amount of O/C Spray reasonably needed to obtain control of an individual should be used. Once the desired results have been achieved, the officer will stop dispensing O/C. b. Primary targets of O/C Spray are the face, eyes, nose and mouth. 3. Officers should consider the following, in addition to specific officer- subject factors, when deciding whether or not to use O/C Spray in a use of force situation: a. Distance from the individual to be sprayed (generally recommended to be between 3 and 12 feet); b. Environmental conditions (e.g., wind, rain, snow, etc.); c. Potential hazards to the individual after being sprayed with O/C that could cause injury (e.g., walking into traffic, falling off elevated surfaces or stairs, etc.); d. The presence of infants (birth to two years of age). If infants are in the immediate area the use of O/C Spray should be avoided if possible. 4. After spraying an individual with O/C, and control of that person has been obtained, the officer will make reasonable efforts to allow the individual relief from the discomfort associated with the application of O/C. Reasonable decontamination or relief efforts may include (as is practical under the circumstances of a situation); a. Calming the individual;

b. Removing the person from the affected area to an area of fresh air or other form of ventilation; c. Instructing the individual to blow his nose; d. Allowing the individual to flush affected areas with saline solution or clear water; e. Allowing the individual to wash exposed skin with soap and water; f. Allowing the individual to remove contact lenses; g. Removal of contaminated clothing if necessary; h. Advising the individual not to rub affected areas or to apply any type of salve to affected areas; i. Summoning paramedics if the person complains of injury, or if the officer reasonably believes that the person needs medical attention. 5. When an officer is attacked by an offender who is threatening the use of O/C Spray (or any other chemical agent), the officer should try to avoid being sprayed. Should an officer need to use force on an individual who is threatening the use of O/C Spray, such force should be necessary and reasonable. 6. The Granite City Police Department shall adhere to the Illinois Municipal Jail and Lockup Standards, Section 720.140, in the use of force on a detainee. The Department shall use an acceptable force continuum in the use of O.C. spray in the lockup area and provide proper treatment to minimize the effect of the chemical to detainees that have been exposed to O.C. spray. 7. Officers shall not employ the use of O.C. spray on a detainee except: a. in self-defense b. to prevent escape c. to prevent serious injury or damage to person or property d. to quell a disturbance e. to effect detention f. to establish control 8. If it becomes necessary to utilize O.C. spray within the lock-up area of the Jail, an exhaust fan shall be activated to remove O.C. spray residue in the air.

a. If deployment affects other detainees, they shall be removed to a safe environment until the O.C. spray residue has been removed.

G. USE OF IMPACT WEAPONS

1. Impact weapons are considered to be less-than-lethal weapons. a. An officer need not attempt empty-hand control or the use of a TASER O/C Spray before using an impact weapon. The officer need only justify that empty-hand control or the use of O/C Spray would not be sufficient or practical to safely and effectively place an individual under control. 2. Officers who employ an impact weapon should do so with the intent to temporarily disable an individual and not to cause permanent injury or dispense punishment. a. Primary targets of a strike from an impact weapon should be an individual's major muscle groups, motor points, abdomen, limbs and/or joints. b. Intentionally striking an individual with an impact weapon in the groin, any part of the body above the shoulders, or the back is permitted only in situations where deadly force would be justified. 3. After striking an individual with an impact weapon, and control of the person has been obtained, the officer will afford the individual medical treatment should, in the officer's judgment, medical treatment be required or if requested by the person himself. 4. Impact weapons are permitted to be used for other lawful purposes during an officer's duties (e.g., gaining entry to vehicles, gaining entry to residences, destroying animals, etc.). 5.If there is an emergency, other objects or pieces of equipment may be used as an impact weapon of necessity (e.g. flashlights, tree branches, metal or plastic pipes or tubes, etc.). H. HANDCUFFS AND RESTRAINTS 1. All persons taken into custody will be handcuffed with their hands behind their backs unless unusual circumstances such as injury, physical deformity, etc. dictates otherwise. 2. Except under exceptional circumstances, prisoners are not to be handcuffed to fixed objects, other than the cuffing rails provided in the booking area of the Police Department. 3. Handcuffs should not be used as "come alongs." 4. Prisoners will never be handcuffed to an officer.

5. Violent prisoners may be further restrained by use of leg restraints, hobble restraints, etc to prevent injury to the officer, suspect or damage to police vehicle. 6. As a minimum, any individual who resists arrest will remain handcuffed during the booking procedure. I. REPORTS AND INVESTIGATION: 1. A department memorandum will be submitted by any officer who discharges a firearm for other than training or recreational purposes. A report documenting the use of force will be submitted when an officer: a. takes any action that results in, or is alleged to have resulted in, injury or death of another person; b. applies force through the use of lethal or less-than-lethal weapons; c. applies force through the use of soft or hard empty hand techniques; and/or d. the deployment or discharge of an electronic stun device. 2. The report will fully document the incident and be submitted to the officer's immediate supervisor. 3. Use of force will be reviewed by the Watch Commander, Division Commander and Chief of Police. 4. Accidental firearms discharges will be documented by the officer and investigated by the supervisor in charge at the time. The officer's report should fully explain the circumstances surrounding the discharge and the supervisors report should include recommendations for disciplinary action or training. 6. When shots are fired the watch commander will immediately respond to the scene and, as soon as possible, notify the Chief of Police through the appropriate Division Commander. 7. In instances where use of force results in death or injury, the Detective Division Supervisor may conduct an independent investigation, if deemed necessary by the Chief of Police. 8. All findings, recommendations, and reports of the Detective Division Supervisor will be forwarded to the Chief of Police. 9. The following checklist may be used as a guide to ensure complete details of the incident: a. time and date of incident; b. place of occurrence; address and location;

c. officer involved; name, rank and adge number; d. suspect involved; address, name, D.O.B., sex, race and telephone number; e. person arrested; address, name, D.O.B., sex, race and telephone number; f. place of arrest; g. complainant's name, address, D.O.B., sex, race and telephone number; h. type of offense and case number; i. investigating supervisor, rank, badge number; j. original reason for contact with suspect by officer involved; k. injuries; be specific as to nature, extent, and how it was inflicted (e.g. three inch laceration, right side of head), where & who treated; l. witnesses to the fact; address, name, D.O.B., sex, race and telephone number; and m. statement of witnesses should be made a part of this report but need not be incorporated in its entirety. 10. Upon the review of a use of force incident the officer's Division Commander will assess: a. propriety of action taken; b. endorsement of action taken; and c. outline corrective measures taken or suggestions, if deemed necessary. 11. Any officer whose use of force results in a death or serious physical injury will be immediately detailed to a staff assignment pending an administrative review of the incident. The purpose of this assignment is to protect the interest of the community and the officer. 12. Whenever a member of the Department is involved in the Use of Force, of any kind, on or off duty, in another jurisdiction, he shall, as soon as possible, notify the watch commander and relay the details of the incident. The watch commander shall notify the Chief of Police, through the Division Commander, who may assign a supervisor to investigate the incident.

I.SUMMARY
1. Nothing stated in the procedure grants immunity to the officer involved since each case must be met and dealt with according to individual circumstances. Department personnel

are reminded that the safety of innocent persons and bystanders must be given primary consideration whenever the use of firearms is contemplated.

2 Procedure #2.001 GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title:

POST SHOOTING / TRAUMATIC INCIDENT

Procedure: 2.001

Date Issued:

Revised:

I.PURPOSE

A. It is the policy of the Police Department to provide guidelines that shall be uniformly applied following any officer-involved shooting or use of force incident that has resulted in death or serious physical injury, in order to minimize the chances that involved personnel will develop or suffer from posttraumatic stress disorder.

II.POLICY

A. Law enforcement duties can often expose officers and support personnel to mentally painful and highly stressful situations that cannot be resolved through normal stress coping mechanisms. Unless adequately treated, these situations can cause disabling emotional and physical problems. It has been found that officerinvolved shootings resulting in death or serious bodily injury to a citizen or a fellow officer may precipitate such stress disorders. It is the responsibility of the Police Department to provide personnel with information on stress disorders and to guide and assist in their deterrence. Therefore, it shall be the policy of the Police Department to take immediate action after such incidents to safeguard the continued good mental health of all affected personnel.

III.DEFINITIONS

A.PostTraumatic Stress Disorder: An anxiety disorder that can result from exposure to short-term severe stress, or the longterm buildup of repetitive and prolonged milder stress.

B. Officer Involved Shooting Incident: An incident where shooting causes death or serious
physical injury to an officer or other person.

C. Officer Involved Traumatic Incident: An incident where the use of force, (other than firearm) causes death or serious physical injury to an officer or another person.

D. Officer Involved Traumatic Traffic Crash: An incident where through the use of police vehicle, death or physical injury to an officer or another person occurs.

IV. PROCEDURE FOR THE HANDLING OF OFFICERS AT THE SCENE OF THE SHOOTING INCIDENT

A. A supervisor shall be dispatched to the scene of the incident, and shall assume primary responsibility in caring for involved personnel.

B.The supervisor shall make appropriate arrangements for all necessary medical treatment.

C. During any period where the involved officer(s) is required to remain on the scene, but has no immediate duties to fulfill, the officer(s) should be taken to a quiet area away from the scene of the incident. A peer counselor or other supportive friend or officer should remain with the officer(s), but should be advised not to discuss details of the incident.

D. The supervisor should arrange for the officer(s) directly involved in the incident to leave the scene as soon as possible, and be taken to a quiet, secure setting.

E.Where possible, the supervisor shall briefly meet with the involved officer(s).

1. No stimulants or depres-sants should be given to the officer(s) unless administered by medical personnel.

2. Only minimal, preliminary questions should be asked about the incident. The officer(s)
should be advised that a more detailed debriefing will be conducted at a later time. Any standard investigations that will occur concerning the incident should be discussed with the officer(s).

3.The officer(s) should be advised that they may seek legal counsel. 4. The officer(s) should be advised not to discuss the incident with anyone except a personal
or Department attorney, union representative, or departmental investiga-tor, until the conclusion of the preliminary investigation.

F. The supervisor shall require that the officer's duty weapon be taken for analysis. When the duty weapon is taken, the supervisor shall:

1.Take custody of the officer's weapon in a discrete manner; and 2.Replace it with another weapon, or advise the officer that it will be returned or replaced at a
later time, as appropriate.

V.POST-INCIDENT PROCEDURES

A. Involved personnel shall be removed from line duties pending evaluation, but shall remain available for any necessary administrative investigations.

B.All officers directly involved in a shooting or traumatic incident shall be required to participate in a critical incident response debriefing. Also, the involved officer(s) shall be required to contact a Department designated specialist for counseling and evaluation as soon as practical after the incident. Other affected support personnel should also be encouraged to contact such specialists after a shooting or traumatic incident. After the counseling sessions, the specialist shall advise the Department:


1. Whether it would be in the officers' best interest to be placed on administrative leave or light duty, and for how long;

2. if the officers were relieved of their duty weapons after an incident, at what point they
should be returned;

3.issues regarding the officer's physical and mental fitness for duty; and

4.what will be the best continued course of counseling. C. If the officer disagrees with the initial Department designated specialist he may seek two
additional opinions at Department expense.

D. The Department strongly encourages the families of the involved officers to take advantage of available counseling services. Affected employees may refer themselves or be referred to the Employee Assistance Program (EAP).

E. Any agency investigation of the incident shall be conducted as soon and as quickly as practical.

F. The Department should brief other agency members concerning the incident so that rumors are kept to a minimum. Agency members are encouraged to show the involved officer(s) their concern.

G. All personnel involved in a shooting or traumatic incident should be advised that they are not permitted to speak with the media about the incident. Officers shall refer inquiries from the media to a designated agency spokesperson.

H.In order to protect against crank or abusive calls, officers should be advised to have phone calls answered by another person for several days should their names be released to the public.

I. Officers directly involved in the shooting incident shall be required to re-qualify as soon as practical.

VI.DAILY STRESS RECOGNITION

A. As posttraumatic stress disorders may not arise immediately, or the officer(s) may attempt to hide the problem, each supervisor is responsible for monitoring the behavior of unit members for symptoms of the disorder.

B. The Chief of Police or his designee may order an officer to seek assistance or counseling from a mental health specialist upon a reasonable belief that stress may be disrupting the officer's job perfor-mance.

2 Procedure #2.002 GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title: 2.002

LIMITS OF AUTHORITY AND Procedure: POLICE DISCRETION POLICE DISCRETION Date Issued: Revised:

I.PURPOSE

A.To outline the limits of an officers authority.

B.To consider appropriate alternatives to arrest and confinement.

II.POLICY

A. Officers must be aware of the limits of their authority and shall not exceed them. Officers must ensure that an individuals constitutional guarantees are protected.

B. Discretionary power is the power of free decision, or latitude of choice within certain legal bounds. When this power is poorly exercised, discretionary power may be viewed by the public as favoritism, bias or corruption. It is imperative that officers consider the goals and objectives of the Department, and the ethical code of conduct, when exercising discretionary power.

C. Officers are encouraged to use discretion when their authority allows them to choose between possible alternatives of enforcement action.

III.PROCEDURE

A.

LIMITS OF AUTHORITY

1. The Federal Constitution, State Constitution and State Law define the scope and limits of law enforcement authority as it pertains to the enforcement of laws, statutes and ordinances.

2.State Law grants the authority to municipalities to create and define police powers.

3. The municipal code of the City establishes the Police Department and the powers and duties of its officers.

B. PROTECTION OF CONSTITUTIONAL RIGHTS

1. In order to assure compliance with constitutional requirements, all officers must advise suspects of their constitutional rights pursuant to Miranda during custodial interviews. This process specifically outlines that the statement is being given without coercion and is of a voluntary nature, and that the individual has been apprised of the appropriate constitutional rights. It is expressly recognized that there are circumstances where the use of a written Waiver of Rights form is either impractical or unrealistic.

2. In the event of an arrest, state laws governing the time elements of when an arrested
individual must appear before a magistrate will be adhered to.

3. In order to assure compliance with constitutional requirements regarding rights to counsel,

officers will earnestly protect a suspects right to counsel.

4. In an effort to control prejudicial pretrial publicity, authorized officers should seek the cooperation and advice of the Prosecutors Office before issuing news releases in major
investigations.

C.

ALTERNATIVES TO ARREST AND DISCRETION

1. Officers are expected to use discretion in their authority in compliance with law, public safety, in furtherance of Department goals and objectives, and in compliance with the Police Code of Ethics.

2. When confronted with situations involving minor traffic and ordinance violations, Officers should examine possible alternatives to arrest.

3. Enforcement for minor violations will be discretionary with the officer. Enforcement may
range from a verbal warning to a written complaint and arrest.

4.Discretion as to police action in matters between private citizens will require that the totality
of the circumstances surrounding the incident be evaluated and possible alternatives to arrest and confinement be considered.

5. Officers should be familiar with the procedure for issuance of all forms of written complaints, when circumstances allow for alternatives to pre-arraignment confinement.

6. The severity of enforcement action or Officer inaction shall not be influenced by malice, vengeance, or prejudice based upon race, sex, ethnic background, religious belief or political affiliation, nor shall preferential treatment be extended on any of the same conditions.

7. Police Discretion concerning enforcement of criminal law violations shall be construed to be narrow with enforcement action being taken in most cases.

Procedure 2.003

GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title:ARREST PROCEDURESProcedure:2.003 WITH OR WITHOUT A WARRANT DateIssued: Revised:

I.PURPOSE To specify legal procedures to be followed for an arrest. II.POLICY The power to arrest an individual is an important component of a police officers responsibility. This task must be accomplished within the limits of authority as set forth by the Constitution, State Law (ILCS 725/5 107 et. al.) and applicable court decisions. III.PROCEDURES/GENERAL A. Certain standards will be followed by all officers during any arrest whether the arrest is accomplished with or without a warrant. B. State Law provides that a Peace Officer may arrest a person when he has reasonable grounds to believe that a person is committing or has committed an offense. C. The use of force/physical force shall be restricted to circumstances specified by law when necessary to accomplish the police task of successful arrest. At no time shall an officer use force greater than is necessary to affect an arrest. D. When a lawful arrest is effected, with or without an arrest warrant, a law enforcement officer may reasonably search the person arrested and the area within such persons immediate presence, or under his immediate control, immediately during the arrest for the authorized purpose of: 1. protecting the officer from attack; 2. preventing the person from escaping; 3. discovering fruits of the crime; 4. discovering any instruments, articles, or things which may have been used in the commission of the offense; or

5. discovering any instruments, articles, or things that may constitute evidence of the offense (including contraband). E. It shall be recognized that the phrase arrestees immediate presence has been defined by the Supreme Court as that area within the arrestees immediate control, i.e., that area from which the arrestee might gain possession of or seize a weapon or other thing to assault the officer or effect an escape or seize concealable or destructible evidence. F. All arrestees shall be accorded the protections of the Rights of Accused as provided for in State Law. G. All prisoners taken into custody will be handcuffed and searched for weapons before placement in a police vehicle. Only necessary restraint to ensure safe custody and officer safety shall be employed. 1. Handcuffing of prisoners a. Officers shall handcuff all prisoners with their hands behind their back and palms facing outward. Exception: Officers transporting non-violent, non-felony prisoners to/from court or County Jail may handcuff the prisoners to each other. b. Officers may handcuff the prisoner with his/her hands in front, or utilize other appropriate restraining devices where the prisoner: ** is in an obvious state of pregnancy. ** has a physical handicap; or severely obese; or has injuries that could be aggravated by standard handcuffing procedures. c. Prisoners shall not be handcuffed to any part of the police vehicle during transport. d. Additional approved restraints/ devices may be used to secure a prisoner who violently resists arrest or who manifests mental disorders such that he/she poses a threat to himself or to the officer or public (Hobble restraints, leg irons, transport belts, leg restraints). e. Whenever practical, officers should make every attempt to double lock the handcuffs. H. Officers shall search the arrested person carefully and shall take immediate possession of all weapons, contraband and items of evidence. If for any reason a prisoner has not been searched, before turning him over to another officer, the arresting officer shall so advise the officer receiving the prisoner. I. The arresting officer is responsible for the safety and protection of the arrested person while in the officer's custody.

J. The arresting officer is responsible for the safeguarding of any personal property he removed from the prisoner while in his custody. K. Combative, belligerent and otherwise unruly prisoners shall be handcuffed/ restrained and secured in a squad car for transportation to the Police Department. For safety reasons, these subjects shall not be removed and transferred to another squad car at the scene. 1. If necessary, officers may temporarily trade squad car assignments to facilitate the transportation of combative, belligerent or otherwise unruly prisoners. L. The arresting officer(s) will transport arrested person(s) without delay, directly to the Granite City Police building except when a person in custody requires immediate medical attention. M. Prisoners requiring medical attention will be transported to the emergency room. The transporting officer shall be responsible for the security of the person in custody until properly relieved or otherwise directed by a ranking/supervisory officer. 1. Any prisoner required to be transported by ambulance will be accompanied by an officer when necessary and guarded until properly relieved or otherwise directed by a ranking/ supervisory officer. N. Female prisoners/suspects shall be handled only as is absolutely necessary in taking them into custody. When possible, a female will be searched by a female officer. If no female member is available, a male officer may search a female suspect for officer safety when: 1. there is reason to believe the female prisoner/suspect has in her possession a weapon and there is eminent danger to the officer; 2. or there is reason to believe that the female prisoner/suspect has evidence or contraband hidden about her person and there is danger that the evidence may be destroyed. O. Search of the female suspect/ prisoner will be made in all regard for decency and when possible in the presence of another officer. P. When transporting a female prisoner, when applicable, the officer will secure the prisoner's purse out of her reach. Q. The custodial search of a female prisoner will include the subject's purse and its content. IV.OFFDUTYARREST A. Off duty officers encountering situations involving criminal conduct are often neither equipped nor prepared to resolve the incident in the same manner as if they were on duty. This may lead to unnecessary injury to the off duty officer and/or confusion for on-duty personnel in response. In order to promote officer safety it is the policy of this Department to determine and regulate situations and locations which officers are permitted to make an arrest while off duty:

1. When off duty, an officer will have access to the badge and credentials of his office at all times. 2. A firearm of an acceptable type and caliber shall be on his person or accessible at all times while within the jurisdiction of this Department or the State of Illinois. Exceptions: when consuming alcoholic beverages, the firearm shall not be carried on his person. B. DEFINITIONS 1. Personally involved: When the off duty officer, a family member, or a friend, becomes engaged in a dispute or incident with the person to be arrested, or other person(s) connected with the incident. This does not apply if the officer himself is the victim of a crime. 2. Liability: Police officers of this Department have liability protection for on duty and off duty performance of official duties. Liability protection does not extend to willful acts to cause injury or damage, or to those actions that the officer knew, or should have reasonably known, were in conflict with the policies of this Department. 3. Permitted off-duty arrests: Officers may affect arrest off duty: a. within the legal jurisdiction of this Department. b. only when the officer is not personally involved in the incident. c. only when there is immediate need for the prevention of a crime or apprehension of a suspect. d. only when the crime would be charged as a jailable offense (misdemeanor or felony). e. only when the officer is in possession of appropriate police identification (badge and identification) and equipment (firearm and handcuffs/restraints). 4. OFF DUTY RESPONSIBILITIES While off duty, an officer has the responsibility and duty: a. to act as a witness and immediately report any suspected or observed criminal activity to on duty personnel. b. except as permitted by this policy, off duty officers should not enforce traffic offenses or minor violations. On duty personnel should be contacted to respond. c. When an arrest is necessary, the off duty officer shall abide by all Department policies, rules and regulations. 5. PROHIBITED ARRESTS/ACTS

Officers are prohibited to make an off duty arrest when: a. an arrest when an officer is personally involved. b. when engaged in off duty employment of a non-police nature, and the officers actions are only in furtherance of the interest of the private employer. c. When the consumption of alcohol is evident.

4 Procedure #2.004 GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title: 2.004

SEARCH AND SEIZURE

Procedure:

WITHOUT A WARRANT Date issued:

Revised:

I.PURPOSE

A.To provide general guidelines and procedures to follow in conducting any variety of searches that can be accomplished without a warrant.

II.POLICY

A. Searches of persons, places and things will be accomplished in a manner that provides protection of constitutional rights, minimizes intrusion, preserves evidence or fruits of the crime and provides for the safety of all parties. If practical, a search warrant should be obtained as it provides the detached scrutiny of a neutral judge.

III.PROCEDURE

A.

SEARCH BY CONSENT

1. Search by consent is a search performed by a police officer after the subject of the search, or person having privacy rights (standing) to the location to be searched, consents, provided that the consent is freely given, without coercion.

a.Consent may be given orally. b. Ideally, the consent should be in writing and documented on the Consent to Search
Form.

c.It is always preferable to have a witness to a consent search, if one is available.

B.

STOP AND FRISK SEARCH


1. Stop and frisk is referred to by several names, including a pat down search or a Terry Stop. It stems from the case of Terry v. Ohio which, in summary, allows an officer to conduct a cursory pat down of outer clothing to discover weapons.

2. The authority to search for and seize weapons is for the limited purpose of allowing an officer to protect himself and others. The authority is clearly NOT for the purpose of searching for and seizing evidence, although during the course of a frisk, evidence may on occasion be discovered and become the basis for an arrest.

3. The plain feel doctrine is described in Minnesota v. Dickerson. This doctrine allows an officer to seize evidence other than a weapon if, in conducting a frisk, the contraband nature of the evidence is immediately apparent to the officer based on his feel of the object through the persons clothing during the pat down.

4. Any officer who initiates a frisk must be able to articulate the reason(s) for suspecting that he or others in the immediate area are in danger. This information may be drawn from:

a.Training. b.Education. c.Information, facts or circumstances previously made available or known to the officer.

C.

MOVABLE VEHICLE EXCEPTIONS

1.There are two reasons given for allowing the search of a vehicle WITH probable cause, but no warrant. a. Vehicles do not share the same expectations of privacy as a home or other personal items, and

b.The obvious mobility of an automobile would make it impractical to require that the police first obtain a warrant.

c. Officers do not have to actually prove that a vehicle might or would be gone if they obtained a warrant before making the search.

d.The existence of probable cause alone justifies the exception. 2. The vehicle exception allows an officer to search the entire vehicle as long as he has
probable cause to believe evidence may be located where he is looking.

a.If probable cause is limited to a certain area, then the officer cannot go beyond the scope of that search.

b. This type of search should not be confused with a search incident to arrest
where immediate control becomes an issue.


D.

CRIME SCENE SEARCHES

a.Consent.

1.Crime scene searches may fall into several areas of warrantless searches, to include:

b.Plain view.

c.Search incident to arrest.

d.Exigent circumstances.

2. Officers should always consider seeking the advice of the State's Attorneys Office for
crime scene searches, particularly for residences where the suspect or offender has an expectation of privacy.

E.

EXIGENT CIRCUMSTANCES

1.The exigent circumstances exception to the warrant requirement allows an officer to search under situations where the officer recognizes that there is not enough time to obtain a warrant, and that if he does not conduct the search immediately, the evidence may be lost forever. Probably the two strongest justifications for conducting a search without a warrant are, probable cause to believe that someone is in need of immediate assistance because of injury, illness or other peril or probable cause to believe that an offense is in progress or being committed, particularly a crime of violence.

2. There are several factors to be considered in determining whether circumstances exist:

or not exigent

a.The gravity of the offense committed.

b.The likelihood that the suspect is armed, and therefore dangerous. c.Probable cause exists that a suspect committed the offense. d.There exists strong reason to believe that the suspect is on the premises. e.There is a likelihood that the suspect will escape if not immediately apprehended. f.The circumstances of entry and time delay. g.The likelihood that the evidence will be lost, destroyed or tampered with.

 h.The aforementioned factors will determine the totality of the circumstances. 3. A widely recognized exigent circumstances search is the well-being check. There are
situations in which the health and well-being of a person are involved. In most cases, there is no reason for police to suspect criminal activity. Entries are made into private premises solely to determine the well-being of the resident. Once the search has concluded and all officers leave the scene, the exigent circumstances may no longer exist. Re-entry into the scene would then require a search warrant.

F.

INVENTORY SEARCHES

a.An inventory search protects the property of the owner.

1. Inventory searches of property seized by police officers has been justified for three reasons:

b. It protects the law enforcement agency against claims that the property has been lost or
stolen.

c. It allows the police to discover any potential danger that may exist because of the contents of the property itself.

2. An inventory search of the property of an arrestee shall be in accordance with Department Procedure 5.100.

3.An inventory search of a vehicle should be conducted under the following circumstances:

a.When the vehicle itself is a crime scene.

b. A stolen vehicle that has been recovered after the reporting agency has informed our
Department of their intent not to process the vehicle.

c. The vehicle is impounded pursuant to a custodial arrest in accordance with Department

Procedure 4.608.

d. An inventory search should never be conducted when circumstances would dictate the
requirement that a warrant be obtained.

e. Officers should note that towing a vehicle to the police station or an otherwise secure area may negate the ability to search without a warrant. The State's Attorneys Office should be consulted in these types of situations.

4.Additional items of property subject to an inventory search include:

a.Found property. b.Property turned over to the police for safekeeping or destruction.


c.Abandoned property.

G.

SEARCHES INCIDENT TO ARREST

1. Searches conducted pursuant to an arrest are one of the most widely used exceptions to the warrant requirement. The Search Without a Warrant Law provides for this type of search upon making a valid arrest. Application of this section is typically applied to situations involving CUSTODIAL arrests, not the issuance of a routine traffic citation.

2. Officers may reasonably search the person arrested and the area within such persons immediate control for the purpose of:

a.Protecting the officer from attack. b.Preventing the person from escaping. c.Discovering the fruits of the crime. d. Discovering any instruments, articles, or other things which may have been used in the
commission of or which may constitute evidence of an offense.

3. Prior to transporting or confining a person under arrest an officer shall conduct a thorough search of the prisoner and outer garments.

a.Officers shall take and maintain custody of purses or bags carried by prisoners, checking for weapons.

b. The interior of the police vehicle shall be searched prior to and after transporting a
prisoner.

H.

PLAIN VIEW SEARCHES

1. Plain view searches have been upheld by the courts as long as the officer is legitimately on the premises and he has probable cause to believe the item is contraband or evidence. There are some limitations to the plain view doctrine which officers should be aware of:

a.There must be no pre-observation intrusion that violated constitutional rights. b.The items must have been discovered inadvertently. c. Artificial devices that aid in or enhance the ability of the officers view are not generally
considered plain view. However, a flashlight is generally acceptable, provided again, the officer has a right to be where he is when using the light source.

d. Moving items or the rearrangement of items to note serial numbers, for example, is not supported by the plain view doctrine.

2.The plain view doctrine also applies to searches conducted pursuant to a warrant, even if the item(s) to be seized were not noted on the warrant. The test will be:

a.Does the officer have a right to be where he is.

b. Does the officer have probable cause to believe the item(s) in plain view are evidence or
contraband.

I.

OPEN FIELD SEARCHES

1.Open field searches typically involve cannabis cultivation. Areas surrounding buildings and homes should not be considered open fields. Instead, the courts have tended to view these areas as curtilage, the equivalent of a yard.

a. Areas generally outside the curtilage that are viewed as open fields include: woods,
pastures and grassland.

b. If an owner has taken any steps to protect the area from trespass or observation, it may
not be considered open field.

J.

NIGHT TIME SECURITY CHECK SEARCHES

1.Night time security checks are another form of a warrantless search held by the court.

a. These searches are permissible only in a business and only if the officers intent is to
determine if any unauthorized people are inside.

b.The officer may also check for owner information so notification can be made.

Procedure #2.005

GRANTIE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title:STRIP SEARCHES Procedure:2.005 DateIssued: Revised:

I.PURPOSE A. To provide officers with guidelines for determining if and under what conditions the use of strip searches and body cavity searches are legally permissible; to establish guidelines for the appropriate conduct of such searches and to insure the rights of the individual are protected. II.POLICY A. The Department recognizes that the use of strip searches and body cavity searches may, under certain conditions, be necessary to protect the safety of officers, civilians and arrestees; to detect and secure evidence and to safeguard the security, safety and related interests of this agency's prisoner detention facilities. B. Recognizing the intrusiveness of these on individual privacy; however, it is the policy of the Department that such searches shall be conducted only with proper authority and justification, with due recognition and deference for the human dignity of those being searched, and in accordance with the procedural guidelines of conducting such searches as set forth in this policy. III.DEFINITIONS A.StripSearch: having an individual remove or rearrange some or all clothing to permit the visual inspection of genitals, buttocks, anus, female breasts or undergarments of the individual. B.Body Cavity Search: any search involving the internal physical examination of body cavities, other than the mouth, and organs such as the stomach cavity. C.Reasonablebelief: based upon, but not limited to, one (1) or more of the following criteria: 1. the nature of the offense charged. 2. the arrestee's appearance and demeanor. 3. the arrestee's criminal history of violence and narcotics offenses. 4. the circumstances surrounding the arrest.

5. the discovery of evidence of a major offense in plain view or in the course of a search incident to arrest. 6. the detection of suspicious objects beneath the suspect's clothing during a field search incident to an arrest. IV.PROCEDURE A. No person arrested for a traffic, regulatory or misdemeanor offense, except in cases involving weapons or a controlled substance shall be strip searched unless there is reasonable belief that the individual is concealing a weapon or controlled substance. B. All strip searches conducted under this Section shall be performed by persons of the same sex as the arrested person and on premises where the search cannot be observed by persons not physically conducting the search. C. Every peace officer or employee of a Police Department conducting a strip search shall: 1. Obtain the written permission of the shift commander designated for the purposes of authorizing a strip search in accordance with this section. The officer shall report in detail the reasonable belief to conduct the strip search. 2. Prepare a report of the strip search. The report shall include the written authorization required by Subsection C (1), the name of the person subjected to the search, the names of the persons conducting the search, and the time, date and place of the search; detailed description of the nature and extent of search, and any weapons, evidence or contraband discovered. A copy of the report shall be provided to the person subject to the search. E. No search of any body cavity other than the mouth shall be conducted without a duly executed search warrant; any warrant authorizing a body cavity search shall specify that the search must be performed under sanitary conditions and conducted either by or under the supervision of a physician licensed to practice medicine in all of its branches in this State. F. Any peace officer or employee who knowingly or intentionally fails to comply with any provision of this Section is subject to disciplinary action.

2 Procedure #2.100 GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title: 2.100

JURISDICTION &

Procedure:

GEOGRAPHIC BOUNDARIES Date Issued: Revised:

I.PURPOSE

A. To provide guidelines for the geographical boundaries and jurisdictional responsibilities of the Police Department.

II.POLICY

B. Within the corporate limits of the City, the Police Department has exclusive jurisdiction to enforce the ordinances of the City. In addition, the Department shall enforce the laws of the State, as provided by the State law and all other duties and responsibilities ascribed to it pursuant to the City Code of Ordinances.

III.PROCEDURE

A. GEOGRAPHICAL BOUNDARIES

1. All members of the Department should familiarize themselves with the geographical boundaries of the City, and the geographical boundaries of the police districts within the city.

2. The Communications Center is provided with a permanent map of the City. At any time
there is a question concerning geographical boundaries the Communications Center, or the on duty supervisor should be consulted.

3.The communications center map will be updated, as needed.

B.JURISDICTION

1.Within the City limits, the Police Department will enforce the ordinances of the City and the laws of the State, and carry out all duties and responsibilities attributed to the police department by the Chief of Police.

2. The Department will enforce the traffic ordinances of the City and the traffic laws, as
denoted in the State Vehicle Code, on all City streets and State or County highways within the City limits.

C.CONCURRENT JURISDICTION

1. Effective law enforcement is not a solitary effort, but requires the cooperation and interaction of many agencies. The Police Department supports this concept and will cooperate with other duly empowered agencies in the discharge of these duties.

2.Various Federal, State and municipal law enforcement agencies have police powers within
the corporate limits of the City. The origin of their office, federal, state, etc., will define the scope of their authority. Examples of concurrent Jurisdictional authority are:

a. State Police State Law establishes the powers and duties of the State Police which
includes, "...and as such have all powers possessed by policemen in cities and sheriff's, except that they may exercise such powers anywhere in the State ... "

b. County Police It is the policy of the County Sheriff's Police Department to assist and
cooperate with law enforcement agencies of the incorporated areas of County, whenever practical and possible. Nothing, however, prohibits members of the Sheriff's Department from taking police action in situations that occur in their presence.

c. Park District The Park District has enacted legislation granting all Police officers the
authority and jurisdiction to enforce Park District ordinances on Park District property.

3. Employees of this Department will offer complete cooperation, when situations arise where
these agencies must exercise their authority in the City of Granite City.

4. In any situation where a question arises concerning jurisdiction with another agency, the responding officer will make every effort to resolve the matter. If this is not possible the
matter will be turned over to the officer's supervisor.

5. Supervisors unable to resolve the matter should seek legal assistance from the
Prosecutors office.

6. In addition to other law enforcement agencies having jurisdiction, members of the Police Department have police powers in other jurisdictions as defined by State statute. The following are some examples of concurrent jurisdiction:

a.Police District
b.Serving Arrest Warrants

c.Serving Search Warrants

Procedure #2.101

GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title:

MUTUAL AID

Procedure: 2.101

Date Issued: Revised:

I. PURPOSE A. To outline the circumstances and procedures for requesting and seeking mutual aid from other police agencies. II. POLICY A. The City of Granite City recognizes that on occasion circumstances can develop that will overwhelm the resources of the police department, or other law enforcement agencies of neighboring communities. Under these circumstances the Police Department may be asked to provide assistance to another agency, or may request assistance from other agencies. This Department will aid participating communities when requested, and when necessary will request aid from these communities. The City of Granite City has resolved to participate in the Illinois Law Enforcement Alarm System and has adopted the National Incident Management System. III. PROCEDURE
A. MUTUAL AID AGREEMENTS

1. The Police Department and City have executed Mutual Aid Agreements with several political subdivisions. The purpose of these agreements are to provide assistance, in the form of manpower and equipment, to participating municipalities, as determined by the Chiefs of Police. 2. The Granite City Police Department is a member in good standing through the Illinois Intergovernmental Cooperation Act of the Illinois Law Enforcement Alarm System (ILEAS). a. See Appendix for ILEAS Mutual Aid Agreement 3. The decision to render or request emergency assistance, to or from another jurisdiction, is the responsibility of the Watch Commander. Whenever possible the Watch Commander should be the person making notification when requesting aid.

4. Requests for emergency assistance by police departments not participating in the Mutual Aid agreement shall be provided, manpower permitting. The Watch Commander will have an incident report completed for an assist to another agency. 5. The Chief of Police shall determine under what conditions assistance will be requested from mutual aid agencies for all planned or scheduled incidents or events.
B. REQUESTING MUTUAL AID

1. Mutual aid is to be used in times of emergencies, when occurrences may result in situations which are beyond the ability of the individual community to deal effectively, in terms of manpower or equipment, with the incident at hand, such as: a. Civil disobedience, whether planned protests or one that develops spontaneously. b. Extensive concentrated search for a dangerous criminal or a lost person. c. A disturbance call at a large function that requires additional officers. d. Any other emergency related to police work where extra aid is required. 2. Requests for assistance should be made, first, to those police agencies that currently or otherwise border the boundaries of the city. 3. Contact should be made with the highest ranking officer on duty with the assisting agency. 4. The Watch Commander should provide the following information to the Commanding officer of the other agency when requesting assistance: a. Nature of emergency. b. Number of men needed. c. Special resources, if any. d. Where to report, staging location or at scene. e. Supervisor in charge. f. Estimated time officers will be needed. 5. The Incident Commander shall assume full responsibility and command for operations at the scene. He will assign personnel and equipment, of the aiding agency, to positions when and where he deems necessary. Some suggested uses of mutual aid personnel are: a. Providing care and aid to injured.

b. Search and rescue operations. c. Evacuations. d. Traffic and crowd control. e. Perimeter security. f. Transporting prisoners. g. Mass processing of arrestees. 6. As a general rule mutual aid personnel will supplement the Department's forces and, as such, should not be assigned to respond to incident reporting or hazardous duties when adequate manpower from the Department is available. 7. A common mutual aid radio frequency such as IREACH or ISPERN should be utilized. Those officers not having a common radio frequency should be assigned to positions not needing immediate communications or assigned with officers having access to our frequency. 8. The Incident Commander shall ensure that mutual aid personnel are released and returned to duty with their own agencies as soon as the situation is restored to the point which permits the Police Departrment to satisfactorily handle with the Police Department's own resources. 9. Requesting aid also covers using an assisting members facility for operating a temporary detention facility in mass arrest incidents. Supplies from this Department should be used whenever possible.
C. PROVIDING MUTUAL AID

1. If the Department is contacted by another participating agency requesting mutual aid the Watch Commander on duty will be immediately notified. 2. The Watch Commander shall review the request and make a determination as to how many officers and what type of equipment can be spared, without leaving the City dangerously unprotected. 3. The Watch Commander shall document any request for mutual aid in an incident report.
4. The safety and security of the City is the Department's first concern and only that

manpower and equipment which can be spared will be sent.

5. If necessary the Incident Commander may hire back additional personnel to meet needs

and still comply with the request for aid.

6. Unless otherwise directed, each police officer assigned to respond to a request for aid will respond in uniform and in a marked vehicle. 7. Sworn police officers responding to a request for assistance from another municipality have all the powers of a sworn police officer employed by the requesting municipality. 8. No officer will respond to a mutual aid request unless directed by the Watch Commander. 9. Responding officers are subject to the direction of the Chief of Police or Incident Commander of the requesting municipality, or his designee.
D. REQUESTING EMERGENCY FEDERAL LAW ENFORCEMENT ASSISTANCE

1. In the event of an emergency, which requires immediate federal law enforcement assistance, the The Chief of Police and/or his designee will be informed, as soon as possible, to authorize any request for emergency assistance.
E. NATIONAL GUARD EMERGENCY ASSISTANCE

1. In the event of an extreme emergency, i.e., a great natural disaster or criminal activity, where a large number of personnel will be required for an extended period of time, it may be necessary to request assistance from the Illinois National Guard. The Watch Commander will contact the Chief of Police, who in turn will contact the City Mayor and initiate Illinois Emergency Management Agency protocol.

2 Procedure #2.300 GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title: 2.300

VICTIM/WITNESS ASSISTANCE

Procedure:

Date Issued:

Revised:

I.PURPOSE A. To establish guidelines that will assure that victims and witnesses will be treated with fairness, compassion and dignity. B. To establish guidelines concerning crime victims rights.

II.POLICY A. It is the policy of the Police Department to insure that crime victims and witnesses receive the highest level of professional service and assistance. The Police Department is committed to the development, implementation, and continuation of appropriate victim/witness assistance programs and activities. III.DEFINITIONS A. Victim - A person who suffers physical, financial, or emotional harm as the direct result of a crime committed upon his or her person or property. Also regarded as victims are a spouse, child, parent or legal guardian of a minor victim and a spouse, child, sibling, parent or guardian of a homicide victim. B. Witness - A person who has information relevant to an investigation of a crime. When the witness is a minor, this includes an appropriate family member. IV.PROCEDURE:

A. GENERAL PROVISIONS

1. Officers will provide assistance to the victims of a major or traumatic crime. These victims have the right and reasonable expectation to:

a. b. c. Act. d. of them.

Be treated humanely and understandingly. Have their self-respect and privacy protected whenever possible. Be advised of available counseling and victim benefits through the Victims Compensation

Have explained to them the working of the criminal justice system and what is expected

e. Have a thorough, professional and timely investigation conducted and have the details of that investigation given to the Prosecutors Office for consideration. f. Expect the courts to order restitution for their losses and have the court enforce payment in a timely manner in all cases where restitution is a possibility. g. Be consulted once complaints have been signed and the case begins its way through the criminal justice system. h. Expect that the trial will be conducted in a reasonable period of time without lengthy and unnecessary delays and continuances. i. Expect that upon the finding of guilty, consideration during sentencing will be given to the trauma and loss suffered by the victim. j. Expect that their rights and feelings as victims be given at least as much consideration as is given to the offender.

B. OPERATIONS

1. The members and associates of the Police Department will provide information and resources to victim/witness to include: a. b. Victim/witness assistance by the Department directly. Services offered by other agencies for victim/witnesses in need of assistance.

2. Officers conducting a preliminary investigation involving a victim/witness should, at a minimum: a. Provide information about applicable counseling, medical attention, emergency financial assistance, and victim advocacy services. b. Advise the victim/witness of available options, if the suspect directly or indirectly engages in threats or intimidation. c. Provide the case report number, officer's name, and information on follow-up procedures.

d. Provide the telephone number of the police department for the victim/witness to report additional information or receive information about the status of the case. e. Inform the victims of domestic violence of their rights as defined by the Domestic Violence Act Preprinted forms are available and will be given to domestic violence victims. The officer conducting the initial investigation will note in the incident/offense report that this information was provided. f. Inform the victims of violent crimes of their right to file a claim as provided for by the Victims Compensation Act. Preprinted forms are available and should be given to the victims of those specific violent crimes covered by the Act. Victims should be advised to contact the Attorney General's Office for additional information. The officer conducting the initial investigation will note in the incident/offense report that this information was provided. 3. Officers conducting follow-up investigations should, at a minimum when possible and feasible without hindrance to the prosecution of the case: a. Determine if the victim/witness's needs are being met considering the impact and severity of the incident, re-contacting the victim/witness if appropriate. b. If not an endangerment to the successful prosecution of the case, explain to the victim/ witness their involvement and procedures for prosecution of their case. d. Return property held as evidence as soon as permitted by laws and rules of evidence.

e. Work with the victim/witness Assistance Program, assign a victim advocate to the victim/ witness during the follow-up investigation. f. Update the victim/witness as to arrest, charges, custody status and court dates of the offender.

2 Procedure 2.303 GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title: 2.303

RELATIONSHIPS WITH

Procedure:

OTHER AGENCIES Date Issued: Revised:

I.PURPOSE

A. To develop and maintain an effective working relationship with other law enforcement, criminal justice, social and peripheral support agencies.

II.POLICY

A.Establishing and maintaining effective channels of communication between law enforcement agencies and other agencies are essential first steps in improving cooperation. The Police Department shall attempt to develop a liaison with other agencies interested in similar concerns involving the criminal justice system.

III.PROCEDURE

A.LIAISON WITH CRIMINAL JUSTICE AGENCIES

1. The goals and objectives of the Police Department cannot be achieved without the assistance and cooperation of other criminal justice agencies.

2. Assistance and cooperation can only be achieved by positive exchange with local juvenile
and adult courts; prosecutors; probation and parole agencies; and adult and juvenile correctional agencies.

3. Officers of this Department are expected to cooperate fully with members of the States
Attorneys Office in the preparation and prosecution of criminal cases. However, should a Prosecutor decline to prosecute a case, or cause a case to be dismissed, because of alleged mishandling by a member of this Department, that case will be reviewed by the Chief of Police.

4. Officers shall bring to the attention of their supervisor any case the Prosecutor declines to
prosecute because of alleged mishandling. Supervisors shall forward all documentation to the Chief.

If necessary, a meeting between the Chief and the supervisor of the States Attorneys Office will be held to review the case.

5. The Chief of Police, or his designee, shall attend meetings hosted by the Courts and
Prosecutor to discuss matters of mutual concern. Information regarding any changes in policy, procedures or the law will be disseminated to all personnel.

B.LIAISON WITH LAW ENFORCEMENT AGENCIES

1. Law enforcement agencies should assist and cooperate with other federal, state and local police departments. Such cooperation facilitates the exchange of information needed in criminal investigations, helps develop joint plans for dealing with matters of common concern and the sharing of statistical and support services.

2. The Chief of Police, or his designated representative, will attend regularly scheduled
meetings of criminal justice and public safety agencies. These meetings enable participants to discuss matters of mutual concern, review policies and procedures, and to plan for events of a multijurisdictional nature.

C.LIAISON WITH THE FIRE DEPARTMENT

1. The Chief of Police and Fire Chief, or their designees, will meet on an as needed basis, to discuss mutual problems and concerns about the operation of the Communications Center, joint policies and procedures for mutual response to fires, medical emergencies or disaster calls.

2. Members of the Police Department shall, during joint operations, cooperate fully with
members of the Fire Department. Should any problems arise the on scene supervisor should attempt to resolve the issue immediately. All matters that create operational problems between the Police and Fire Departments will be documented and brought to the attention of the Police Chief.

D.

LIAISON WITH COMMUNITY SOCIAL SERVICE AGENCIES

1. Law enforcement officers, in the course of performing their duties, often encounter people in need of help that can best be provided by another criminal justice agency or a social service agency.

2. Exercising sound discretion based on one or more of the following criteria should guide
those in need of help to the appropriate agencies.

a.Assessment of the persons need through discussion or observations. b.Request by the person, or relative for specific help. c.The necessity of immediate aid. 3.A list of Social Agencies serving Madison County is located in the Communication Center.
These agencies include assistance for family crisis intervention, detoxification, drug dependency, family and individual counseling and shelter care for domestic violence victims.

4. Criminal justice and social service diversion programs are viable and appropriate alternatives in the disposition of certain cases involving both juveniles and adults. Personnel are reminded that referrals must be consistent with legal restrictions and Department procedures regulating officer discretion.

E.REGIONAL SERVICES

1. This Department shall participate in the statewide law enforcement radio systems, (ISPERN/IREACH) which provide for designated communications between inter - jurisdictional police departments.

2. This Department shall participate in and submit to the State Bureau of Identification
required fingerprints of arrested persons.

3.This Department shall participate in the centralized Law Enforcement Agency Data System
(LEADS). This provides information on criminal suspects, stolen property and can assist in the apprehension of wanted subjects and recovery of property.

4. This Department shall participate in the Uniform Crime Reporting system. This provides
information on trends in crime and arrest rates, and increases the accuracy in the Uniform Crime Report as compiled by the FBI.

Procedure #2.304 GRANTIE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title: 2.304

JUDICIAL HEARINGS AND

Procedure:

COURT APPEARANCES Date Issued: Revised:

2

I.PURPOSE

A. To establish guidelines and responsibilities of Department members appearing as witness(es)inmattersarisingoutoftheirofficialcapacity/duties.

II.POLICY

A. It is the policy of the Department that members shall respond to all orders and processes of the court to appear as a witness and give testimony before any official investigative body, judicial or quasi-judicialhearing,judicialtribunal,hearingboardorcourtoflaw.

III.PROCEDURES

A.COURTAPPEARANCES

1. Amembers'attendanceatacriminalproceedingorquasi-judicialhearing,asrequiredby subpoenaorcourtdocketnotice,isanofficialdutyassignment.Failureofamembertoappearwhen notified(bysubpoenadocketortheDepartmentliaison)inanymatterconcerninghisofficialduties,at thedesignatedtimeanddateofthenotice,willbegroundsfordiscipline.

a. Exceptions:Permissiontoomitthisdutymustbeobtainedfromtheprosecutingattorney assignedthecase,orothercompetentcourtofficial,orDepartmentdesignee.

B.TESTIFYINGFORTHEDEFENSE

1. Anymembersubpoenaedtotestifyonbehalfofadefendantinacriminalorquasi-criminal trialorhearing,oragainsttheCityorDepartmentinanyhearingorcourtproceeding,shallnotifythe OfficeoftheChiefofPoliceandattorneyrepresentingthegovernmentbody.

C.DEPARTMENTINVESTIGATIONS

1.Whensodirected,membersarerequiredtoanswerquestions,giverelevantstatements,or rendermaterials,asrequested,tocompetentauthorityinDepartmentalpersonnelinvestigations.

2. Members appearing as a witness before any (a) investigative body, (b) judicial tribunal, (c) hearing board or (d) person authorized to take testimony, must respond in full and truthfully. A member may not invoke Constitutional privilege and refuse to testify except when such testimony wouldbeselfincriminatinginacriminaloffense.Refusaltogivetestimonyinfullandtruthfullyshallbe causefordisciplinaryaction.

D.CIVILCASESANDCIVILACTIONS

1. A member shall not volunteer to testify in civil actions and shall not testify unless legally subpoenaed.Memberswillacceptallsubpoenaslegallyservedandprovideacopyofallsubpoenas totheOfficeoftheChiefofPolice.

2. Civilactioninterviewsinvolvingmemberswhichariseoutofdepartmentalemployment,as aresultofanofficialdutyshallbeconductedonlywhenauthorizedbytheChiefofPolice.

3.MembersshallconferwiththeirDivisionCommanderbeforegivingadepositionoraffidavit onacivilcase.

4. If a member is subpoenaed as a result of Department employment, or if the member is informed that he is a party to a civil action arising out of Departmental employment, he shall immediately notify the office of the Chief of Police and the governmental attorney of the service, subpoenaornotification,andofthetestimonyheispreparedtogive.

5. Members shall not enter into any financial understanding for appearances as witnesses priortoanytrial.

E.CIVILLAWSUITS-MEMBERS

1.Membersshallnotinstituteanycivillitigationorcivilactionarisingoutoftheirofficialduties withoutfirstnotifyingtheChiefofPoliceinwriting.

2. Members shall not accept or agree to accept, from any person, any money or compensation for damage(s) sustained or expense incurred by them in the line of duty, without first notifyingtheOfficeoftheChiefinwriting.

3. Memberswhoareservedacomplaint,damagesuitorcivilprocess,asaresultofanact arising out of his official duties shall, as soon as possible, notify the Office of the Chief of Police of suchlawsuitandprovidetheChiefofPoliceacopyofthecivilcomplaint.

F.PERSONALAPPEARANCES

1. Membersappearingincourt,hearingsorotherproceduresarerequiredtobeinuniformor clothingconformingtostandardsofdressimposedonofficersworkingindetectives(suit,sportcoat, tie,dressslacksandshirt).

Procedure #2.305 GRANTIE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title: 2.305

ARCH HOUSE RESPONSE

Procedure:

GUIDELINES Date Issued: Revised:

I.PURPOSE

A.To provide guidelines for response to Arch House and apprehension on their premises. II.POLICY A.In the past there has been some misunderstanding between Officers and ARCH House Staff
when Officers have had cause to investigate crimes involving ARCH House patients. Because there is specific language in both Federal and State Statute which sets forth what information the ARCH Staff may or may not divulge, the following is a summary.

B. ARCH House Staff is prohibited by Federal law and Regulation from divulging any patient information and from acknowledging the presence of the patient at ARCH unless the patient has consented, in writing, to such disclosure or an Authorizing Court Order has been entered.

1.THE RESTRICTIONS DO NOT APPLY WHEN:

a. The communication or information is directly related to the patient's commission of a crime on ARCH premises, a crime committed against ARCH Personnel, or the threat to commit a crime against ARCH Personnel or on the ARCH premises,

AND

The communication or information is limited to the circumstances of the specific incident at hand, including the patient status of the individual committing or threatening to commit the crime, that individual's name and address and last known whereabouts. In other words, a responding officer cannot use the occasion to go "Fishing" for information, but are limited to questions only pertaining to the issue at hand.

OR

b. A Court Order has been entered pursuant to the applicable Federal Regulations in conjunction with a Subpoena or other similar legal mandate.

2. There are certain circumstances when an Officer may enter the ARCH House, which are as follows:

a. An officer may enter the ARCH House when invited (by either guest or administrative staff).

b.An officer may enter with Search Warrant in hand.

c.An officer may enter when investigating a crime on the premises.

d.An officer may enter when in hot pursuit of a fleeing offender.

e. An officer may enter when armed with an Arrest Warrant, or is aware of the existence of same, and the officer knows that the person named in the Warrant is in fact on premises. The officer cannot enter merely on suspicion, but must have some cause to believe the wanted person is on premises, just as any other private residence.

III.PROCEDURE

A. GUIDELINES FOR RESPONSE TO ARCH HOUSE AND APPREHENSION ON THEIR PREMISES.

1. When the officer enters and the patient has not consented in writing to a disclosure of information or a Court Order issued in accordance with the applicable Federal Regulations is not presented to the staff or there has been no crime committed or threatened to be committed in ARCH House:

a. The ARCH Staff may advise the investigating officer that an identified individual is not and never has been a patient at ARCH.

b. The ARCH staff may not acknowledge in any way the presence of the individual in question in the program or the house.

c. When an Officer is conducting a follow-up investigation, he has occasion to go to the ARCH House, he may leave a business card or other message for someone he thinks may be living on premises; however, the ARCH Staff is in no way obligated to acknowledge the person's existence or forward the message.

d.The ARCH Staff may not disclose any patient's name or any identifying characteristics.

e.The ARCH Staff may not disclose or furnish any record, etc. of treatment.

f.The ARCH Staff may not identify a person as a past patient or provide any records of past treatment.

Procedure #3.200 GRANTIE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title: 2.306

SCHOOL DISTRICT #9

Procedure:

RELATIONSHIPS Date Issued: Revised:

2

I.PURPOSE

A.Toprovideguidelinesforchildsafetyresponseandneglectedorabandonedschoolchildern.

II.POLICY

A. ItisthepolicyofthePoliceDepartmenttoinsurethatelementaryschoolchildrenaresafe andproperlycaredforininstanceswhentheyarenotpickedupbyaparentorguardianattheendofthe schoolday.

III.PROCEDURE

A.ThefollowingprocedureswillbefollowedbyourDepartment:

1. The Granite City Police Department will be called by the elementary school principle, or theirrepresentatives,topickupthechildatschool.Thiswilloccurnoearlierthan3:45p.m.

2. The child will be transported by the Police Department to the Latchkey Program at Frohardt.

B.Thefollowingaretheresponsibilityoftheschool:

1. The parents or legal guardian will be billed for the latchkey services for that day per the ratechargedbytheYMCAforregularlatchkeystudents.

2. Anoticewillbeleftonthefrontdoorofthehomeschooltonotifytheparentsthatthechild hasbeentransportedtotheLatchkeyCenteratFrohardt.

3. Onthefirstoffense,theparentswillbegivenawrittenwarning.Forthe secondoffense, DepartmentofChildrenandFamilyServiceswillbecontactedforchildneglect.

 C. The School Board policy defines a "Neglected Child" as including "any child who is abandonedbyhisorherparentsorotherpersonresponsibleforthechild'swelfare."

Procedure #3.200 GRANTIE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title: 2.307

St. Louis Area Regional

Procedure:

Abduction Alert (SARAA.) and Ameria's Missing: Broadcast Emergency Response (AMBER) Date Issued: Revised:
2

I.PURPOSE

A.Toestablishproperandconsistentprocedurestobefollowedintheeventofachildabductionwiththe intenttoprovidethegreatestchanceforthesafereturnoftheabductedchildandthequickapprehension of the suspect. The St. Louis Area Regional Abduction Alert and the America;s Missing: Broadcast EmergencyResponsehavethepotentialtosaveachild'slife.

II.POLICY

A.TheOfficerInChargeuponnotificationofapossiblechildabductionshallberesponsibleformaking the decision to activate the SARAA/AMBER This decision will be made after reviewing the facts and circumstancesoftheincidentandassuringtheymeetthenotificationcriteria.Oncethecriteriahavebeen met the Chief and Assistant Chief shall be notified of the pending SARAA/AMBER and the Notification FaxFormcompletedandsent.TheondutyOfficerInChargeisresponsibleforupdatesandcancellation oftheSARAA/AMBERasfactsarelearnedabouttheincident.

III.PROCEDURE

A. The Granite City Police Department will adhere to and follow the guidelines established by statute undertheStateofIlllinois'sAMBERALERTNotificationPlan(PublicAct92-0259)andSARAA.

1.SeeAttachedAppendix.

Procedure #3.200 GRANTIE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title: 2.308

Madison County Child Advocacy

Procedure:

Center: Protocol for Physical/Sexual Abused Child Date Issued: Revised:

2

I.PURPOSE

A. To provide Police Officers with guidelines for the investigation of sexual abuse, assault, and/or physicalabuseofachildbetweentheagesofthree(3)andseventeen(17).

II.POLICY

A. It is the policy of the Granite City Police Department to adopt and follow the guidelines of the Madison County Child Advocacy Center PROTOCOL FOR A COORDINATED RESPONSE to conduct investigations and make referrals for victims of child abuse. The Madison County Child Advocacy Protocolisincorporatedandmadeapartofthispolicy.

III.PROCEDURE

A. The Madison County Child Advocacy Center will be referred to conduct interviews if there is an allegationofabuse(physicalorsexual)whenthefollowingcriteriaaremet.

1.Thevictimisbetweentheagesofthree(3)andseventeen(17).

2.TheabuseoccurredwithinMadisonCounty.

3.Thechildissafeandallemergencyneedsaremet.

B.Theinvestigatingofficerisalsoresponsibleforthefollowing:

1.PoliceOfficersmustnotifytheDepartmentofChildrenandFamilyServicesHotline.

2.Ifabuseiscurrent,occurredwithinthepastseventy-two(72)hours,theinvestigatingofficer will notify the Detective Division Commander or Detective Division Supervisor to have a Detective intervene.AmedicalexaminationwillbeconductedatCardinalGlenonChildren'sHospital.

3.Facsimile(FAX)acopyofthepolicereporttotheChildAdvocacyCenter.

C. The Madison County Advocacy Center Interview Referral Checklist for police and the Madison CountyChildAdvocacyProtocolofAugust2002areincludedinthefollowingappendix.

Procedure #2.309 GRANTIE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title: 2.309

Madison County Crisis

Procedure:

Intervention Team Date Issued: Revised:

I.PURPOSE

A. ThepurposeofthispolicyistodefineprocedurefortheMadisonCountyCrisisIntervention Team(CIT)

II.POLICY

A.MemberSelection

1. Any non-probationary officer in good standing may request assignment to CIT. Each departmentshallberesponsiblefortheselectionfromwithinitsranksandsubjecttoitsowncommand structure.

2.CITmemberswillbeidentifiabletothepublicbythewearingoftheCITpinupontheirduty uniformshirt.

B.Training

1. Once appointed to the CIT, the member will be required to attend a state-certified, basic 40-hourCITtrainingclass.ThistrainingismandatoryandshallbesuccessfullycompletedbyallCIT Officers.

III.PROCEDURE A.UtilizationofCrisisInterventionTeamMembers: 1.Incidents: a. Assigned police officers (district cars) responding to emergencies involving suspected
mentallyillpersonsshallsummonaCITOfficerassoonaspractical.

b. Non-emergencies and when available, a CIT Officer shall be dispatched to calls or incidentsinvolvingaconfirmedorsuspectedmentallyillpersonincrisis.Acrisiscouldconsistofa person having delusions, erratic behavior, causing a disturbance, or other activity or behavior that causesdistresstotheindividualorthegeneralpublic.

2.CITOfficeronscene: a. The CIT Officer on scene shall be responsible for dealing with the subject of the call,
to include communications with the individual, determining the appropriate disposition, and any paperworkinvolvedincludingbutnotlimitedto;

(1)PetitionsforInvoluntary/JudicialAdmission

(2)CITdatatrackingform

b. The CIT officer will be responsible for completing supplementary reports concerning crimescommittedaswellasAssistOtherAgencyReportswhenrequired.

c. The CIT officer will be responsible for the transportation, when necessary, of those personsinfurtherneedofclinicalevaluationandpossibleadmissiontoatreatmentfacility.Unless advised otherwise, these individuals will be transported to Gateway Medical Center in Granite City,Illinois.Thosepersonsinneedofevaluationshallnolongerbeheldinlocallockupspending petitions/certificationbycrisisworkers.Uponarrivalandintheeventthatrestraintsarewarranted, the CIT Officer will assist Hospital Staff in securing the individual in the appropriate restraints as decidedbyHospitalStaff.

d.TheCITOfficersshallcallGatewayMedicalFacility(798-3888)priortothetransportation ofpersonsinneedtoappraisethefacilityoftheexistingcircumstances.

e. Should the determination be made that transportation/commitment is not the recommended course of action, the CIT Officer shall call the appropriate crisis hotline to provide informationandrequestfollow-up.

f. In cases where criminal charges exist (excluding Homicide, Aggravated Battery or similar extremely violent acts) the CIT Officer, in agreement with the reporting agency, may avoid incarcerationofthesubjectandplacea"policehold"onthesubjectatGatewayMedicalFacility.

g. IntheeventthatGatewayMedicalCenterorotherintakefacilitiesarenotabletoaccept new patients, CIT Officers will transport these individuals to the police department, contact the appropriate hotline, and make every attempt to locate a facility willing to accept the patient (past practice).

IV.MADISON COUNTY CRISIS INTERVENTION TEAM COLLABORATIVE AGREEMENT

A. Granite City Police Department, Alton Police Department, Glen Carbon Police
Department,andtheMadisonCountySheriff'sDepartmentaremembersoftheMadisonCountyCrisis Intervention Team. The Madison County CIT was formed so that the enhanced services offered by CITOfficerscouldbewidelyavailablethroughoutMadisonCounty.

B.ThesedepartmentshaveenteredintoaworkingagreementwherebyCITOfficersmaybe calledfromothermemberdepartmentsshouldthedepartmentinneedhavenoCITOfficeronduty.

The CIT Officer shall be the primary communicator with the subject, handle communications, and advisetheofficersoftherequestingjurisdictionregardingthebestpossiblesolutions.

Procedure #2.500 GRANTIE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title: 2.500

AUXILLARY POLICE RIDE-

Procedure:

ALONG PROGRAM Date Issued: Revised:

I.PURPOSE

A. The Department recognizes the need to maintain a good working relationship with the Auxiliary Police unit as well as providing a training experience for Auxiliary members. The purpose of this policy is to establish guidelines for the Auxiliary Police members to participate in a ride-along and observationprogram.

II.POLICY

A.ItisthepolicyoftheDepartmenttopermitqualifiedAuxiliaryPolicememberstoobserveand ridewithon-dutypoliceofficersasprovidedinthisdocument.Auxiliarypolicemembersshalladhereto guidelinesassetforthinthispolicy.

III.SCHEDULING

A.Auxiliaryofficersshallbeofferedsixteen(16)hoursperweekfortheride-alongprogram.

1.Theshiftsshallbeasfollows:

FRIDAY: 7:00P.M.TO11:00P.M.ONEAUXILIARYOFFICER 11:00P.M.TO3:00A.M.ONEAUXILIARYOFFICER

SATURDAY: 7:00P.M.TO11:00P.M.ONEAUXILIARYOFFICER 11:00P.M.TO3:00A.M.ONEAUXILIARYOFFICER

Schedulingwillallowfour(4)auxiliarymemberstorideduringaweekatfour(4)hourseach.

2.AtthediscretionoftheAuxiliaryPoliceCommandOfficer,two(2)menmaybeassignedfor eight(8)hoursinsteadoffour(4)menatfour(4)hourseach.

3.IfanauxiliarymembercannotrideonFridayorSaturday,he/shemaybepermittedtoridealongduringaweeknightatthediscretionandwiththeapprovalofthePatrolDivisionCaptain.


B.SchedulingfortheAuxiliaryPolicememberswillbeapprovedbythepatrolDivisionCaptain.

C. UnlessauthorizedbythePatrolDivisionCaptainorChiefofPolice,Auxiliarymemberswill notbeallowedtoride-alongonmajorholidays.

D. Auxiliary members are bound by the hours scheduled and may not ride additional time unlessdirectedorapprovedbytheWatchCommanderoracommandofficeroftheDepartment.

E. The Watch Commander will assign the auxiliary member to a patrol officer. The assignments shall be divided equally among the shift to ensure that officers are not assigned auxiliary officersmorethansix(6)hourspermonth.

IV. GUIDELINES

A. Auxiliary police members will adhere to the Rules and Regulations of the Auxiliary police unit.

B. Auxiliary officers reporting for the ride-along program will be in full uniform. The uniform shall be clean and neatly pressed. Leather gear will be in good condition. The auxiliary officer shall maintain a professional, military bearing and appearance, conforming to the grooming standards of the Department.

C. The Shift Commander will inspect the auxiliary member prior to assignment to ensure uniformconformity.

D. Upon assignment to an officer, the Auxiliary member shall introduce himself/herself if not familiarwiththeassignedofficer.

E. Patrol officers will instruct the Auxiliary member as to what action(s) the auxiliary member shouldtake.AuxiliarymembersshallseekdirectionfromthePatrolofficerandadheretothedirectionof thepatrolofficer.Goodcommunicationisimportantforthesakeofofficersafetyandestablishingagood workingrelationship.

F. Auxiliary members shall not drive patrol vehicles except to perform a specified police purposeasdirectedbythepoliceofficerorincaseofemergency.

G.Auxiliaryofficersshallnotusethepoliceradiounlessdirectedbythepoliceofficerorincase ofemergency.

H. Auxiliarymembersshallstayincloseproximitytothepoliceofficerduringacallorincident. Theofficershouldknowthelocationoftheauxiliarymemberatalltimes.

I. Auxiliary members shall take police actions only when directed by the patrol officer or for officersafety.

2 Procedure #3.000 GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title: 3.000

PERSONNEL CLASSIFICATION
Date Issued:

Procedure:

Revised:

I.PURPOSE

A. To provide a structured classification plan with specific requirements and descriptions for each position.

B.To provide a clear description of those duties and tasks which define the specific job.

C.To list the job specifications for every position within the Department.

II.POLICY

A. The Police Department will ensure that job classifications are based on an analysis of position requirements, including job tasks, as well as an assessment of the requisite skills, knowledge and abilities. These classifications will then be utilized to define the functions, responsibilities, duties, requirements and specifications of an assignment or position.

III.PROCEDURE

A.

JOB TASK ANALYSIS

1. Job analysis is a systematic examination of the functions and objectives of each job to be performed as it relates to the knowledge, training, and skills required to perform the tasks or duties of the job. Job analysis supplies the Department with the basic information needed for many personnel functions.

2.The objectives of job analysis are:

a.Serve as a basis for the determination of a position classification plan and compensation;

b. Provide a basis for establishing minimum qualification requirements for recruitment, examination, selection and appointment, and promotion;

c.Assist in the establishment of training curricula; and

d.Provide guidance to employees and their supervisors concerning the duties and responsibilities of individual positions.

3.A written job analysis of every position in the Department will be maintained on file with the Patrol Division Commander. The job analysis will include:

a.The work behaviors (duties, responsibilities, functions, tasks, etc. of each position).

b.The frequency with which the work behavior occurs. c.The criticality of the job related skills, knowledge, abilities and behaviors.

B.CLASSIFICATION PLAN

1. The Police Department will maintain a Classification Plan consisting of the following elements:

a.Categorization of every job into classes, based upon similarities in duties, responsibilities, and qualification requirements.

b.Class specifications for every job within a class. c.Provisions for relating compensation to classes. d.Provisions for reclassification.
2.The Police Department will identify the responsibilities within a class specification to inform personnel assigned to a particular classification of their primary duties.

3. Positions in the Police Department are controlled to varying degrees by the City Council and the Fire and Police Commission. The City Council lawfully defines all positions, classifications and salaries within the Department, and the Fire and Police Commission is responsible for the recruitment, selection and promotion of all sworn personnel.

4. The Chief of Police will annually review the Department's Classification Plan and, if necessary, make recommendations for revisions.

2 Procedure #3.004 GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title: 3.004

SPECIALIZED ASSIGNMENTS

Procedure:

Date Issued:

Revised:

I.PURPOSE

A.To establish within the Police Department certain assignments that require specialized skills, knowledge and abilities above that of a Patrol Officer.

II.POLICY

A. The Police Department is committed to providing the most effective, efficient and professional services available. The Department recognizes that certain skills and abilities are necessary to provide that level of service. Specialized assignments will be utilized to accomplish that goal.

III.PROCEDURE

A. The Department has identified certain assignments requiring special skills, knowledge and abilities to perform various job related duties and responsibilities.

B.These specialty assignments are:

Field Training Officer Range Officer Criminal Investigator Juvenile Officer Evidence Technician Canine Officer Emergency Response Team Officer Traffic Accident Investigator DARE Officer SRO Officer MEGSI Officer Narcotics Officer CIT Officer Service Division Civilian Neighborhood Intervention Team

Neighborhood Abatement Team

C. The needs of the Department determine which specialty assignments are required and the
number of officers necessary to fill that assignment. The Chief of Police will have the final determination as to which specialty assignments are necessary, the number of officers assigned and which officers will be selected.

D. The Department Training Officer maintains a training matrix for each specialty assignment. Officers selected for a specialty assignment will be provided the appropriate training, when available and manpower permitting.

E. Anticipated openings for a specialized assignment will be advertised by written announcement throughout the Department. Notices will include a description of:

1.the assignment, its duties, requirements, and responsibilities; and

2.the procedures necessary to apply.

F.Consideration for selection to and maintaining a specialized assignment will be based on the following:

1.Department needs in the development of personnel.

2.Education, training, and qualifications.

3.Previous experience.

4.Performance evaluations.

5.Supervisory recommendation. 6.Performance in current work assignment.

G. The Chief of Police will annually, in October, review each specialized assignment for the purpose of determining whether it should be continued. This review will include:

1. the evaluation of the initial problem or condition that required the implementation of the specialized assignment; and,

2.a cost-benefit analysis of continuing the specialized assignment.

H.Temporary or rotating assignments of personnel to specialty assignments may be made on a periodic basis.

1. Any specialty assignment is available for temporary or rotating assignment provided that an opening exists and the pre-requisite training requirement has been met.

2. The duration of the specialty assignment will vary depending on the needs of the
Department.

 3.The criteria and selection process for a specialty assignment is outlined in III, F, 1-6 of this
procedure.

Procedure #3.102

POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title: SICK LEAVE, ON-DUTY INJURY Procedure 3.102 REPORTING AND SAFETY POLICY Date Issued: Revised:

I. PURPOSE A. To properly document when personnel report sick or injured for duty. B. To provide for a sufficient workforce when personnel call in sick. C. To provide for control of absenteeism due to sickness and injury. D. To establish guidelines for when an employee is injured on duty. E. To provide a safe and non-injurious work environment this policy shall define procedures, equipment and periodic training measures to aid in prevention of injury and illness, and to minimize employee lost time. Employee safety can be enhanced by identifying systems of reporting, preventative training, and inspection services for equipment and injury producing dangers on the job.

II. POLICY A. It is the policy of this Department to adhere to the procedures set forth as well as the adherence to labor standards in order to reduce employee injury, sick time and non-working time. All members are issued the City of Granite City, Employee Safety Manual. Each member should be familiar with its content and the content of this policy appendix, adhering to each. B. Sick leave with pay is provided as a benefit in recognition that employees do contract various illnesses from time to time and that their financial resources may be diminished in such instances if pay is discontinued, and that it may not be in the best interest or health of the employee or fellow employees for them to work while sick. To the extent permitted by law, sick employees are expected to remain at home unless hospitalized, visiting their doctor, acting pursuant to reasonable instructions for care or caring for a sick member of the immediate family.

C. The City maintains workmans compensation insurance to protect its employees that suffer a job related injury. All injuries, no matter how minor, incurred in the course of performing assigned work duties shall be reported immediately so that proper documentation occurs and treatment begins. D. To ensure that a sufficient workforce is available to accomplish the Departments mission, certain procedures covering the use of sick leave and on duty injury reporting and time off must be established. III. PROCEDURE

A. EMPLOYEES RESPONSIBILITY FOR REPORTING SICK

1. Employees who will be absent from work because of illness or off duty injury must notify the Department no later than thirty (30) minutes before the start of their work shift, in accordance with the work agreement. 2. The employee, or relative making notification, is required to provide accurate information concerning the type of illness or injury, and if possible an estimated length of time the employee will be absent from work. 3. Except where a doctor has set a specific date for the employees return, employees are required to notify the Department each day that they will be absent. 4. Sick or injured employees that are scheduled to appear in court or attend training must advise the Department when making notification so that the Court Officer and Training Officer can be notified. 5. Notification of absence to the Department is made by the employee calling the Officer In Charge. The Officer In Charge will complete a sick leave - off duty injury form and notify the supervisor of the oncoming shift. 6. Employees are expected to remain at home unless hospitalized, visiting their doctor, picking up medicine or food, acting pursuant to reasonable instructions for care or caring for a sick member of the immediate family. 7. The Department may, at its discretion and expense, require an employee to submit a physicians verification of illness from a physician designated by the City. If it is a family member who is sick, the Department may require a doctors verification of the illness. 8. In all circumstances, a physicians verification of illness and authorization to return to work will be required when an employee is absent for three (3) or more consecutive workdays due to an illness or injury. Such verification must be provided upon the employees return to work.

9. Employees shall be allowed one (1) day of sick leave for each month of service. Sick leave cannot be taken before it is actually earned. Sick leave shall be used in no less of an increment than one (1) hour. 10. The Patrol Division Commander will provide a monthly-accumulated sick leave balance report.
B. SUPERVISORS RESPONSIBILITY WHEN AN EMPLOYEE IS REPORTING SICK

1. When the on duty supervisor is notified of an absence for an on coming shift, he will check the work schedule to determine if sufficient staffing remains. If additional staffing is required to maintain minimum, he will follow Department procedure for assigning overtime. 2. The on duty supervisor will submit the sick leave - off duty injury form to the employees supervisor. 3. The on duty supervisor will notify the on coming supervisor of the employees absence and the action that he has taken. 4. The supervisor to whom an ill or injured employee is assigned will be responsible for making sure that the sick leave - off duty injury form has been completed in its entirety. 5. The employees supervisor is responsible for detecting and controlling sick leave abuse. If an employee establishes a pattern of chronic sick leaves, the supervisor will investigate the matter. The supervisor should consider the employees past performance as it relates to the use of sick leave. 6. Supervisors may conduct an inspection to determine if the employee is at home. Normally, inspections will be made at a reasonable time, between 0900 and 2100 hrs. However, circumstances may call for an inspection at any hour. 7. Supervisors may conduct the inspection by telephone. If an answering machine is encountered during the sick audit, the supervisor will leave his name, rank, date and time of the call and a message for the employee to return a call to the supervisor immediately upon his return.
C. EMPLOYEES RESPONSIBILITY FOR REPORTING AN ON DUTY INJURY

1. All employees will immediately report any injury, sustained while on duty, to their supervisor. 2. All employees that have sustained an on duty injury will document fully, on a memo, the circumstances surrounding the injury and provide all pertinent information to help in any subsequent investigation. This report will be completed as soon as possible after the incident, considering the extent of the injuries and submitted to the employees immediate supervisor.

3. All injuries of a minor nature should be initially treated at a Medical Center however, employees are free to choose where and by whom treatment is received. Employees who require immediate hospital attention should be transported to one of the area hospitals of the employees choice. Employees that are unconscious will be transported to the nearest hospital. 4. If treated by a physician and relieved from duty, the employee will inform his supervisor of the extent of the injury, next required visit with a physician and the approximate number of days before the employee will be able to return to duty. 5. Any employee that is absent from work due to an on duty injury must submit a physicians authorization to return to work. 6. All serious injuries or death of a member shall be reported immediately to the Chief of Police or to his designee if he's unavailable.
D. SUPERVISORS RESPONSIBILITY FOR REPORTING AN ON DUTY INJURY

1. All on-duty injuries shall be reported to the Chief of Police as soon as practical after the injury occurs. The report shall include the circumstance of the injury, the time, date, location, etc. All serious injuries or death of a member shall be reported immediately to the Chief of Police or to his designee if he's unavailable. 2. Supervisors will ensure that injured employees receive prompt medical attention. 3. Minor injuries may be treated by the Fire Department Paramedics or a facility or doctor of the employees choosing. 4. Depending on the seriousness of the injury, the employee should be directed to seek treatment at one of the area hospitals. 5. If the employee is admitted to a hospital, the Chief of Police will be notified immediately, through the chain of command. 6. The supervisor will complete an offense report, a crash report and/or Departmental memo, depending on the situation. The supervisor's report(s), the employees memo and any other documentation will be forwarded to the Chief of Police, through the chain of command. 7. The supervisors investigation should cover the following areas, when applicable: a. Photographs of any injuries, damaged property, scene of the accident/injury, and any other relevant materials. b. Names, addresses, telephone numbers, dates of birth and statements of any witnesses.

c. Statements of any Department personnel with direct knowledge or involvement with the incident. d. Any findings of improper procedures, unsafe actions, discrepancies and an investigative conclusion concerning the incident with recommendations to correct or prevent recurring of similar injuries. 8. The supervisors responsibility for promoting safety includes: a. Enforcement of all safety regulations. b. Documenting all on duty injuries. c. Ensuring prompt medical care to injured employees. d. Reporting unsafe equipment. e. Instructing employees in the safe operation of Department equipment in the performance of their assigned duties. f. Ensuring that protective equipment is utilized whenever warranted. E. PHYSICAL THERAPY AND DOCTOR'S VISITS 1. The City of Granite City Employee Safety Manual states: "If an injury on duty requires physical therapy and/or doctor's visits to continue, even though the employee has returned to work, with or without modifications, it is the responsibility of the employee to schedule these sessions during off duty hours, if possible. The City will accommodate the time for these sessions when appointments cannot be scheduled during off duty hours. This time is to be considered injury on duty loss time." 2. If an officer injured in the line of duty is able to operate a motor vehicle and physical therapy and/or doctor's visits are in town, a departmental vehicle may be used, if available. If the appointment is out of town it is the responsibility of the employee to secure transportation. a. No compensation will be made to employees who use their own mode of transportation nor shall they be compensated for time spent on these visits while off duty. F. INCIDENT REPORTING 1. All vehicle crashes involving a Department vehicle with another person, vehicle or property shall be investigated by the first line supervisor. The investigation shall include the State Crash Report, photographs of all damage to vehicle(s) or property, insurance information, witness statements, etc. 2. All vehicle crashes involving a city owned vehicle with another vehicle, person or property shall be investigated by a police officer, a first line supervisor when available. The

investigation shall include the State Crash Report, photographs of all damage to vehicles or property, insurance information, witness statements, etc. 3. All injuries or damage to property occurring on City property shall be investigated by a police officer. In case of an event that might result in a claim against the City for injury or property damage, an incident report and investigation, including photographs of scene, shall be conducted. In addition, the member conducting the investigation shall complete the "Granite City Accident Report." G. PREVENTATIVE MEASURES 1. All equipment or work stations considered to be in an unsafe condition, any unsafe procedure, or unsafe employee action, shall be reported immediately by all members to their immediate supervisor and in turn reported in writing to the Division Commander or Office of the Chief of Police for corrective action. 2. All hazards to the public, actual or potential, shall be reported to the communications center. The telecommunicator shall then notify or cause to be notified, the proper department, agency or authority to correct the hazard. The member observing the hazard shall take necessary actions to protect the public until the corrective action is taken or the proper authority assumes control of the situation. Members shall take immediate precautionary steps to prevent any furtherance of the hazard as necessary.

H. CHIEFS RESPONSIBILITY
1. The Chief shall be responsible for submitting all reports of on duty injuries to the City Safety Director for processing. 2. The Chief shall appoint department members to serve on the safety committee. I. SUPERVISORY REVIEW PROCESS FOR DUTY RELATED INCIDENTS 1. In an effort to better evaluate and therefore reduce the cause and frequency, of injury(s) on duty, property damage and employee lost time as a result of performance of duty(s) and traffic collisions involving Department vehicles, a Supervisory Review procedure shall be followed in addition to other reporting procedures. The Supervisory Review shall be initiated in every incident that results in a reported injury on duty and/or when an officer is involved in a motor vehicle collision while on duty. 2. If an officer is injured on duty or an officer is involved in a motor vehicle collision while on duty, it is mandatory that: a. Within one (1) week of the incident or the officer's return to work, there will be a Supervisory Review consisting of two (2) supervisors acting as reviewers of the incident.

b. The review officers will interview the officer(s) involved, collecting the facts of the incident (who, what, where, when, why and how). c. The reviewers will make every effort to determine cause and fault. d. The reviewers will leave a detailed "report of findings" regarding these facts and what preventable measures, training, corrections, should be taken or can be taken in the future. e. The final statement in the report shall reflect the supervisor's opinion as to whether disciplinary action is indicated. f. The "report of finding" shall be addressed to the Chief. g. The Supervisory Review member will consist of at least two (2) supervisors interviewing the officer involved and collecting the facts of the incident. The reviewers of fact shall be dependent upon the member involved, i.e.: (1) Patrolman involved = review by Sgt/Lt's (2) Sergeant involved = review by Lt/Capt (3) Lieutenant involved = review by Capt's/Major (4) Captain involved = review by Major/Chief J. HAZARDOUS MATERIALS AWARENESS 1. Members of the Department who may be first on the scene of an incident which may involve hazardous materials shall receive training to address the risks of injury involved in hazardous waste operations or emergency response activities. a. "First Responder" members shall have sufficient training to objectively demonstrate competency in the following areas: (1) Understanding of what hazardous materials are and the risks associated with them in an incident, and (2) Understanding of the potential outcomes associated with an emergency created when hazardous materials are present, and (3) Ability to recognize the presence of hazardous materials in an emergency, and (4) The ability to identify the hazardous materials, if possible, and

(5) An understanding of their role as first responders in the emergency response plan including site security and control and the U.S. Department of Transportation Emergency Response Guidebook, and (6) The ability to realize the need for additional resources and to make appropriate notifications. 2. Members at the "First Responders" level shall receive a basic training and annual refresher course. K. INFECTIOUS DISEASES AND BLOODBORNE PATHOGENS 1. The purpose of this policy is to provide guidelines for the protection of members as to Blood borne Pathogens and other infectious diseases. Because members are exposed to blood and other infectious materials during the course of their duties, the purpose of this policy is to provide protection to members regarding transmission of infectious diseases, including in particular Hepatitis B virus (HBV) and Human immunovirus (HIV) as well as less infectious diseases and simple job related injuries. 2. The objectives of this policy are to: a. Prevent the spread of communicable disease through common sense practice of aseptic technique. b. Practice universal precautions in a manner as to provide comfort and support during emergency response calls and incidents involving injuries or death. c. Educate members to the necessity of special techniques and equipment to reduce their risk of exposure to an infectious blood-borne disease. d. Maintain standardized operating procedure and policies to protect members and the citizens, and to comply with Federal and State requirements. 3. It shall be the policy of this Department to comply with regulations of the Federal Occupational Safety and Health Act as adopted by the Illinois Department of Labor, relating to occupational exposure to blood or other potentially infectious materials, and to inform department members of appropriate precautionary measures to be taken in circumstances where members may be exposed to infectious materials. The Federal Register, 29CFR par 1910.1030 is incorporated in this policy (Appendix B) as is the City of Granite City's Safety Department protocol for blood exposures (Appendix A). Definitions of terms used in the policy may be found in the appendix(s), 29CFR 1910.1030(b). L. EXPOSURE CONTROL PLAN 1. Employer Responsibilities

a. To provide training and health education to members, b. Insure that the work practices and protocols are observed, and c. Provide protective clothing and equipment for member use, and d. Provide procedures to follow in the event of body fluid spills or personal exposure to blood or body fluids. 2. Employee Responsibilities a. Members will have a knowledge of the modes of transmission of HIB and HIV. b. Know where protective clothing and equipment is stored, how to use it, remove it and dispose of it properly. c. Take advantage of the HBV vaccination offered by the City. d. Properly document and report all incidents of possible contamination, transmission or direct exposure of blood borne or bodily fluid contamination. (1) Documentation shall be in the form of the City's "Infectious Disease Exposure Report" which will be submitted to the Director of Safety through the Office of the Chief of Police. M. PRECAUTIONS AND PROTECTION 1. Universal precautions shall be observed to prevent contact with blood or other potentially infectious fluids/materials as outlined in 29CFD part 1910.1030, including a. Hand washing b. Use of protective personal equipment (gloves, eyewear, masks, gowns and airways) c. Syringe/needle packaging and disposal d. Replacement of clothing or laundering e. Replacement of protective personal equipment f. Housekeeping/clean-up 2. Members shall treat all blood, body fluids or other potentially infectious materials as infectious and follow all precautionary measures as described in this policy at all times. 3. Whenever any member's skin comes in contact with blood or potentially infectious materials, the member shall immediately, or as soon as possible, wash their hands and any

other skin with soap and warm water, or flush mucous membranes with water following the contact. 4. Members exposed to blood or other potentially infectious materials, who are in the field and not availed to soap/water, shall use antiseptic hand cleaners or towelettes. a. Antiseptic hand cleaner(s) are located in the police units, in appropriately labeled containers (Alcohol Gel, Waterless Antiseptic). b. When antiseptic hand cleaners or towelettes are used, hands shall be washed with soap and warm water as soon as possible. 5. Members wearing protective gloves or other personal protection equipment shall immediately, or as soon as possible, after removal of same, wash their hands using soap and warm water. 6. Eating, drinking, smoking, applying cosmetics, lip balm or handling contact lenses are prohibited in the area where there is a reasonable likelihood of exposure. 7. Syringes/Needles a. Dispose of all needles, syringes or any other sharp or potentially sharp items in a puncture resistant container and labeled BIOHAZARD. b. Needles and/or syringes shall be packaged in a needle/syringe keeper. N. PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT 1. The Department shall provide personal protective equipment for employees/members. This equipment shall not permit blood or potentially infectious materials to pass through or reach the members work clothes, street clothes, undergarments, skin, eyes, mouth or mucous membranes under normal conditions when the personal protective equipment is properly worn. 2. Personal protective equipment shall be available. a. In all marked police cars and unmarked police cars. b. The prisoner Booking/Processing area and Watch Commander/OIC's cabinet. 3. Personal protective equipment shall consist of: a. Disposable single use gloves to be specifically indicated for procedures where fluids are handled. The use of gloves is particularly important if: (1) The member has cuts, abraded skin, chapped hands, dermatitis or the like.

(2) When examining or contact with non-intact skin or persons with active bleeding. b. Face shields and masks and goggles. (1) The use of masks and protective eyewear/face shield should be used when contamination of mucosal membranes (eyes, mouth or nose) with body fluids such as splashes or aerosolization of such material is likely to occur. c. Gowns should be used when splashes to skin or clothing with body fluids are likely to occur. d. Surgical caps or hoods and/or shoe covers. e. Cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) one-way valve pocket masks. 4. Personal protective equipment shall be worn by members as follows: a. Disposable Gloves shall be worn whenever a member can be reasonably expected to have contact with blood or other potentially infectious materials, mucous membranes, and nonintact skin and also whenever handling or touching contaminated items or surfaces. b. Face Shields, Masks, Gowns shall be worn by members whenever splashes, spray, spatter or droplets of blood or potentially infectious materials may be generated and eye, nose, mouth contamination can reasonably be expected. c. Surgical Caps or Hoods and/or Shoe Covers shall be worn in instances where gross contamination can reasonably be expected. d. Cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) One-Way Valve Pocket Masks shall be used whenever CPR is performed by members to provide a protective barrier between victim and member's mouth. e. Supervisors shall ensure that subordinates use appropriate personal protective equipment as required in this document. f. If a member declines to use personal protective equipment, the circumstance shall be investigated and documented. g. Personal protective equipment provided by the Department shall be of a disposable type and not laundered or re-used. h. Personal protective equipment shall be removed by members prior to leaving the location of the incident where protective equipment use was required.

i. All personal protective equipment once used, shall be disposed of by the employee who used the equipment by placing the protective items in a biohazard labeled bag provided with each personal protective kit. The biohazard labeled bag will be disposed of at the GRMC Emergency Room or Police Department in a biohazard labeled disposal receptacle. j. Members will replace the personal protective equipment used as soon as possible from the supply maintained in the OIC cabinet/booking area. O. HOUSEKEEPING 1. Gloves will be worn during all disposal and clean up procedures. 2. Members and employees shall ensure that assigned work site areas are maintained in clean and sanitary conditions, 3. All working surfaces shall be cleaned and decontaminated with appropriate disinfectant, as soon as possible, after coming into contact with blood or other potentially infectious materials. 4. Surfaces (i.e.: the inside of police vehicles), where blood or other potentially infectious materials are overtly contaminated, or after any spill of blood or other potentially infectious materials has occurred shall, whenever possible, be cleaned and decontaminated immediately after the contamination. 5. Jail bedding contaminated with blood or other potentially infectious material shall be bagged in biohazard bags and disposed of properly. Mattresses shall be cleaned using a 10 per cent bleach and water solution. 6. Should the interior of a police vehicle be contaminated with an infectious or potentially infectious substance, it shall be cleaned according to the level of contamination. The vehicle and any reusable equipment will be disinfected appropriately, i.e.: cleaned and mopped with a bactericide/viricide or a 10 percent bleach and water solution (1:10). In moderate to severe cases of contamination the vehicle should be aired for a period of two (2) hours before being put back into service. P. CLOTHING 1. If an employee has been contaminated on a call the employee shall take himself/herself out of service and immediately, after the call, return to the Police Department. 2. The employee shall remove their contaminated uniform or clothing, handling them as little as possible, place them in the appropriate biohazard bag. 3. The employee shall then wash, clean and/or shower contaminated body parts. 4. The employee's uniform/clothing shall be discarded in biohazard bag.

5. A change of uniform should be readily accessible or kept in the employee's locker at the Department. 6. In no case shall an employee launder any clothing items that have been exposed to/ contaminated by blood or other potentially infectious materials, including uniform items at their home, commercial laundromat, dry cleaner or other facility. Q. TRAINING 1. Members of the Police Department performing duties likely to involve occupational exposure to blood or other potentially infectious materials shall receive annual biohazard training provided through the Safety Director by the Department. R. REPORTING AND RECORD KEEPING 1. Any member having an exposure, contamination will complete an "Infectious Disease Exposure" report. 2. If an employee has a needle-stick or cut (percutaneous contamination) or mucous membrane (splash to eye(s), nasal or mouth) exposure to body fluids or has a cutaneous exposure to blood when the employee's skin is chapped, abraded or otherwise non-intact, the facility receiving the suspect/victim/patient/source shall be informed of the incident. HIV patient testing will be provided per State regulations. 3. Documentation of the exposure to the member will be made in the police and safety reports. A copy of these reports shall be provided to the Director of Safety, who will follow up with the appropriate medical authorities under the reporting and notifications guidelines set forth by OSHA/IDOL. 4. If the source tests positive, the employee/member shall be evaluated clinically and by HIV antibody testing as soon as possible and advised to report and seek medical evaluation of any acute-febrile illness that occurs within twelve (12) weeks after exposure. HIV seronegative employees shall be re-tested six (6) weeks post-exposure and on periodic basis thereafter. All follow-up testing will be provided by the City provided the employee has followed precautions set forth in this policy and timely notification has been made. 5. All medical records as specified in this document shall be kept confidential and are not disclosed or reported without the employee's expressed written consent to any person within or outside of the Department except as required by this document or as may be required by law.

SAFETY APPENDIX A

PROTOCOL FOR COMMUNICABLE DISEASE TRANSMISSIONS

I. SQUAD CAR

A. When a squad car has been contaminated with body fluids or blood, the surfaces will be cleaned with a 10% bleach solution. The vehicle must be taken out of service until this procedure is completed. II. CLOTHING A. After the vehicle is cleaned, uniforms contaminated with a known HIV blood will be discarded in a red bag. III. SKIN A. Blood and fluid contaminate that come in direct contact with the intact skin will be washed immediately with a warm soapy water. IV. TYPES OF EXPOSURE A. There are two (2) types of communicable transmittable disease exposures that EMS personnel should be familiar with, blood borne and airborne. Under the Ryan White Act of 1990 a medical facility aware of a patient with an airborne communicable disease that has been transported by EMS Personnel (Fire or Police Personnel), shall inform those personnel of the disease. Blood borne diseases are not reported to EMS personnel unless an employee reports that an exposure has occurred. Therefore, it is imperative that all personnel who suspect an exposure has occurred and shall report said exposure. V. EXPOSURE DEFINED AS: A. Needle stick injury, B. Break in skin caused by a contaminated object,

C. Splash of blood or body fluids onto the employees' eyes, mucous membranes, or non-intact skin. VI. REPORTING A. Any employees having an exposure will fill out a City of Granite City Infectious Disease Exposure Report, an HIV Exposure Report. These reports are available from St. Elizabeth's Medical Center Emergency Room, Providence Occupational Clinic, Safety Department, and your OIC. If your exposure occurs during 8:00 A.M. - 5:00 P.M., Monday through Friday, please follow these instructions:

1. The employee will fill out an Infectious Disease Exposure report. 2. Inform the OIC that you are going to Providence. 3. Leave a copy of the Infectious Disease Exposure report with the OIC. 4. Take the report and go directly to Providence Occupational Clinic before continuation of additional work duties. 5. Upon Providence receiving this report that a communicable disease exposure has taken place, the OIC and Safety Director will be notified by Providence. 6. The OIC will notify the Police Chief. 7. The employee will be scheduled for the appropriate medical diagnostic workup and treatment, including long term follow-up care and spousal counseling, if necessary. 8. If necessary, the source will be contacted for the appropriate needed blood tests. This information will assist the health professional to determine your treatment. You will be notified by certified mail of the outcome of this test. You will also be notified by Providence for your follow-up treatment. ******************************** If your exposure occurs during 5:00 P.M. - 8:00 A.M., Monday through Friday, or on the weekend, please follow these instructions: 1. The employee will fill out an Infectious Disease Exposure report. 2. Inform the OIC that you are going to Gateway Regional Medical Center Emergency Room. 3. Leave a copy of the Infectious Disease Exposure report with the OIC. 4. Take the report and go directly to Gateway Regional Medical Center Emergency Room before continuation of additional work duties. 5. A determination will be made if an exposure has taken place. 6. The employee will be scheduled for the appropriate medical diagnostic workup and treatment, including long-term follow-up care through Providence and spousal counseling, if needed. 7. If necessary, the source will be contacted for the appropriate needed blood tests. This information will assist the health professional to determine your treatment. You will be notified by certified mail of the outcome of this test by Providence. You will also be notified

if you require any additional treatment. 8. Upon Providence receiving the report from the Emergency Room that a communicable disease exposure has taken place, the OIC and Safety Director will be notified by Providence. 9. The OIC will notify the Police Chief. ****************************************

NOTIFICATION

In addition to the above exposures, under the Ryan White Act of 1990, medical facilities will notify all EMS (Police and Fire) Personnel of any patient transported with a communicable airborne transmissible disease. If the medical facility finds an airborne exposure has taken place and needs to contact any Police personnel, the facility will attempt to contact the Police Chief. In turn the appropriate personnel will be notified in a timely manner.

Procedure #3.104

POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title:UNIFORM SPECIFICATIONS /Procedure:3.104 DRESS CODE DateIssued: Revised:

I.PURPOSE A. To establish the standards and specifications of police department uniform parts for full-time sworn officers, telecommunicators and uniformed civilian personnel. B. To set guidelines that provide for uniformity in the wearing of seasonal, work and dress uniform. II.POLICY A. All personnel of the Police Department, individually and collectively, will exhibit a professional appearance in order to: 1. Gain respect, trust and support from the community. 2. Maintain discipline and uniformity of the department as a semi-military organization. 3. Promote public recognition of uniformed officers. III.PROCEDURE A. PERSONAL APPEARANCE AND HYGIENE 1. Personnel shall pay particular attention to their personal cleanliness while on duty. 2. Members' hair shall be clean, neatly groomed and combed in a reasonable hairstyle and not extreme in appearance. Female hairstyles may be bouffant, braided, brushed, combed or worn up to a length that does not compromise officer safety. Female officers may wear inconspicuous pins and barrettes in the hair while on duty. 3. Male members shall be clean-shaven. Mustaches shall be neatly trimmed and not extend beyond the corners of the mouth. Sideburns shall be neatly trimmed with the base clean-

shaven in a horizontal line, in an even width (not flared). The length shall not extend below the base of the ear lobe. Conservative, natural looking cosmetics may be worn by female members. Unless authorized by the Chief 4. PERSONAL JEWELRY a. For safety reasons and appearances, no jewelry may be visible around the neck while in uniform. b. No more than one (1) ring shall be worn on each hand. c. No wrist chains or bracelets shall be worn unless for medical identification. d. Female members may wear inconspicuous, post style earrings. e. Male members may not wear facial jewelry, earrings, etc., that would distract from a military bearing. f. Members may not display "tattooing" on hands, wrist, fingers, head and neck. No tattooing, on the arm, below the sleeve of a short sleeve shirt or polo.

B.UNIFORMREGULATIONS
1. Department personnel, when working in uniform, attending a department authorized function in uniform or on a paid detail in uniform, will wear the designated uniform of the day and may not vary the parts of the uniform without specific permission from the Chief of Police or his designee. 2. All uniforms and accessories will be purchased from department approved uniform dealers. 3. All department personnel will have a serviceable uniform, as described in this procedure; available at all times to perform uniformed duty. 4. All cloth portions of the uniform must conform to the standards authorized by the department. 5. Uniforms and accessories will fit properly, will be clean and neatly pressed, and will be free of rips, tears, holes, frayed edges, missing buttons, scuffs and faded colors. Cloth parts of the uniform will not be patched. 6. All leather and nylon articles will be kept clean and give the appearance of being new. Leather articles and brass will appear polished.

7. Pockets will not have a bulging appearance and only two pens will be kept in the left uniform shirt pocket. 8. It will be the responsibility of all department personnel to replace any uniform or accessory items that are lost, destroyed, worn out, stolen or unfit for use. 9. No insignia, medal, patch or ribbon, other than that which is specifically approved in this or another department procedure, will be worn on any portion of a department members uniform without written permission from the Chief of Police. 10. Uniforms will be classified into two categories, dress (Class A) and work (Class B). 11. The work uniform is further categorized into a summer uniform and winter uniform. The seasonal uniform change will be at the discretion of the Chief of Police. 12. Seasonal inspections will be conducted by the watch commander on each shift prior to uniform changeovers. The uniforms will be inspected for serviceability. When a portion of an officers uniform is deemed unfit for use, the officer will be so advised by his/her watch commander. It will be the responsibility of the watch commander to notify the division commander of any violations. Seasonal inspections are not intended to take the place of periodic inspections by the Chief of Police, Division Commander or Watch Commander. 13. Uniform shoes will be black, smooth toed, leather or vinyl. Laces will be black and crosslaced. All uniform shoes/boots must be kept clean and maintained in a highly polished luster. 14. The complete uniform of the day shall be worn at all times while on duty unless otherwise directed by a commanding officer. IV.UNIFORMSPECIFICATIONS A. SHIRTS (Class B) 1. Uniform members of the rank of Lieutenant and above shall wear white or black UFX Elbeco polo uniform shirts. a. The uniform shirt may be of the department approved black polo style. b. Lieutenants may opt to wear the black or white polo shirt if he/she is going to work in the patrol function. c. The under shirt for the black polo Under Armor or 5-11 type tee shirt. will be a black

2. Uniform members of the rank of Sergeant and Patrolmen, will wear department approved black UFX Elbeco polo uniform shirts.

1. The under shirt for the black polo

will be a black

Under Armor or 5-11 type tee shirt.

2. Sergeants willnot display chevrons on the black polo shirts. 3. Officers willnot display a reflective Police emblem on the back of any black polo

3. Sergeants and Patrolmen may wear black mock turtleneck or turtleneck long sleeve shirts with optional GCPD embroidery centered or to the left of center on the neck only. Noother insigniawillbeallowed. B.UNIFORMINSIGNIA 1. The Department uniform patch shall be worn on the left sleeve shoulder of the dress shirt (Class A), polo shirt (Class B), jacket and coat. C.DEPARTMENTBADGE
1. The Department issued badge of office, indicating rank/title, shall be displayed on the left

breast of the uniform shirt, jacket, coat, or sweater and visible to the public at all times.
2. On the black polo shirt the badge will indicate rank/title, appropriately silver or gold and

will be a cloth patch D.NAMEPLATEANDAWARDMEDAL(S)

1. The Officers name will be embroidered on the black polo in the appropriate color, silver

or gold, with the first initial and last name. 2. The white polo shirt, for Lieutenant and above, will use black thread color for the name 3. The nameplate, worn with the ClassAdress, will be of appropriate finish and will be worn centered above the right shirt pocket, the upper right pocket of the coat or right breast of sweater in such a manner so that it is parallel to and resting on the top edge of the pocket. 2. Award ribbons will be worn above the breast badge as defined in the officer recognition policy. E.OPTIONALHASHMARKS/SERVICEBARS 1. One hash mark/service bar will be worn for each three (3) years of completed service. 2. Hash marks/service bar shall be yellow in color with black background. The yellow area will be one and one half (1 1/2) inch long by five sixteenths (5/16) inches wide. Hash marks will be sewn parallel to the jacket sleeve hemline of the left sleeve.

F.RANKINSIGNIAS 1. Ranking officers will wear the appropriate collar pins identifying their rank on the ClassA uniform. a. Major: Gold oak cluster centered between the top and bottom edge of the dress shirt collar and middle of the jacket shoulder epaulets. b. Captain: Two (2) three quarter (3/4) inch gold bars shall be worn on each side of the dress shirt collar. The bars shall be positioned so that a line bisects the center of the bars, approximately one quarter (1/4) inch from the front edge and tip of the collar point(s). (1) Two (2) gold bars shall be worn on each shoulder of the jacket, coat or sweater and are to be centered directly over the cross stitching on the shoulder epaulet, in such a manner so a line bisecting the space between the bars lengthwise would be perpendicular to the front edge of the shoulder epaulet. c. Lieutenant: One (1) gold bar shall be worn in a vertical position on each side of the dress shirt collar with the front edge of the bar one half (1/2) inch from, and parallel with, the front edge of the collar. The bar shall be centered between the top and bottom edge of the collar. (1) One (1) gold bar shall be worn on each shoulder of the jacket, coat or sweater and is to be centered so a line bisecting the bar lengthwise would be perpendicular to the front edge of the shoulder epaulet. d. Sergeants: One (1) gold, three bar, 3/4" chevron shall be worn on each side of the shirt collar. The chevrons will be positioned point up, so a line bisects the center of the chevron, approximately one quarter (1/4) inch from the front edge and tip of the collar points. (1) White color cloth chevrons with royal blue background shall be worn on the sleeves of the dress uniform shirt: white color cloth chevrons with black background shall be worn on the sleeves of the jacket and coat, approximately one quarter (1/4) inch below and centered beneath the Department patch. G.TIE 1. A black clip-on or velcro release uniform tie. H.TIECLASP 1. Tie bar with the Illinois State Seal in gold or silver finish according to rank. 2. Tie bar shall be aligned with the middle of the shirt pocket flaps. I.PANTS

1. The dress uniform (class A) pants shall be black regulation uniform pants with royal blue one eighth (1/8) inch sutash/piping extending from the bottom of the pockets to the end of the pants leg. a. Vertical cut pockets only. 2. The work uniform (Class B) pants shall be black in color, cargo style pants of one of the following types: a. Fechheimer Command Wear Trousers - Style # 39310 b. 5.11 Class B Uniform Pant 65% Poly- 35% Rayon Mix Style # 44058T J.SOCKS 1. Black only with low cut dress shoe or lightweight shoe. 2. White socks may be worn with the police boot. K.FOOTWEARANDSHOES 1. Members shall wear only black, police uniform shoes, with smooth toe, and leather or vinyl. 2. A Spring or Summer light weight (tennis shoe type) shoe approved by the Chief of Police may be worn with the Summer uniform only. 3. Members may wear black police style boots approved by the Chief of Police. 4. Any other special shoe/boot must be approved by the Chief of Police. L.HATS 1. The dress hat shall be the black round police hat with appropriate finish band and badge. 2. A black police winter pile cap or sock cap, with Police embroidered on the front of the sock cap, may be worn in the winter. 3. Black Granite City Police Department embroidered baseball style cap (with appropriate color embroidery for rank) may be worn by Officers. 4. Dress hats are to be worn in military style with the brim no more than two (2) fingers above the eyebrows. 5. Dress hats and pile caps will bear the Department hat badge in an upright, squared away position.

M.JACKETS/COATS/SWEATERS 1. Light weight/windbreaker style jackets will conform to the police uniform style, black in color. 2. Winter weight coats will be of police uniform style, waist length and black. 3. Leather jackets will be the black, Chicago police style, number 4450 by Taylor's Leatherwear. 4. The black military/uniform pullover sweater in V-neck, with shoulder epaulets, badge tab and name tab. 5. The Olympic jacket model 0VP-587, Olympic vest with zip-off bolero, black and blue or black vest for Patrol with badge and name embroidery required.

N.UNIFORMACCESSORIES 1. All accessories such as coat/jacket buttons, tie bars, rank insignias, hat braids, embroidery, belt buckles, and snaps must be colored according to rank. a. Silver for Patrolmen and Telecommunicators. b. Gold for the rank of Sergeant and above.

O.DUTYUNIFORMBELTANDGEAR
1. The following uniform items are to be maintained by all Officers for the ClassA uniform.

a. A Clarino leather garrison belt. b. A Clarino holster, appropriate model to match the duty weapon. 2. The following Nylon system uniform items are required for the ClassB uniform. a. Garrison belt with duty belt. b. The dual retention or the Pro 3 Triple retention holster in the high ride or jacket slot. c. Double magazine holder. d. Latex glove pouch.

e. Handcuff case or strap. f. Optional OC spray carrier. g. Night stick/flashlight/PR 24 ring or holders. 3. The following Safariland holster is optional: a. Safariland model 6004, Tactical Thigh Holster. 4. Command officers of the rank of Lieutenant and above have the option of wearing a single magazine holder and a 1.5-ounce OC spray carrier in the Nylon System. 5. Officers may not mix Clarino leather gear with Nylon gear. P.SUNGLASSES 1. No mirrored sunglasses shall be worn as part of the uniform.

Q.WORKUNIFORM
1. THE "CLASS B WINTER" UNIFORM a. The Class B Winter Uniform may be worn by patrol officers and Lieutenants who work patrol. The Class B Winter Uniform shall consist of the below listed shirt options in addition to the Department issued baseball style cap, approved black cargo uniform pants, Nylon garrison belt with two (2) magazines, one (1) pair of cuffs, OC spray, latex gloves, flashlight ring and/or nightstick holder, police style uniform boot or shoe, winter coat, jacket or sweater. When the temperature falls below twenty (20) degrees Fahrenheit the winter police uniform pile cap may be worn. Theshirtoptionsare: (1) Long sleeved UFX Elbeco polo shirt worn over the black long sleeved turtleneck or long sleeved mock turtleneck shirt. (2) Black long sleeved turtleneck or long sleeved mock turtleneck shirt worn under the uniform winter jacket or coat. (3) Black long sleeved turtleneck or long sleeved mock turtleneck shirt worn under the black uniform sweater. ******* The black long sleeved turtleneck or long sleeved mock turtleneck shirts may not be worn alone, except under the uniform jacket, coat or sweater which displays the Department

badge and officer name tag when in public view. It is strongly recommended that the turtleneck/mock turtleneck be embroidered with the G.C.P.D. logo (in color according to rank) centered or to the left of center on the neck. This is the only logo allowed on the collar of the turtleneck. ******* (4) When the temperature rises above sixty (60) degrees Fahrenheit, no turtleneck is required with the uniform long sleeve polo shirt. 2. THE "CLASS B SUMMER" UNIFORM a. Class B Summer Uniform may be worn by patrol officers and consist of the black, Department issued baseball style cap, short sleeved UFX Elbeco uniform polo shirt, black cargo pants, Nylon garrison belt with two (2) magazines, one (1) pair of cuffs, latex gloves, OC spray, and a flashlight/nightstick ring, light weight tennis shoe type uniform shoe. 3. Officers above the rank of Lieutenant will have the option to wear the black or white polo uniform shirt. Lieutenants working the desk will have the option to wear the summer or winter dress uniform. Command officers of the rank of Lieutenant and above have the option of a single magazine holder and small (1.5 ounce) OC spray. 4. Detectives will wear appropriate business apparel; business suit, sports coat, dress shirt and tie unless on special detail or otherwise directed by the Major. 5. CIVILIAN EMPLOYEES a. Civilian members of the Department not previously described, shall conform to the standards of dress normally worn by office personnel in the private business sector, unless otherwise directed by the Chief of Police. All articles of clothing shall be of a conservative nature.

R.DRESSUNIFORM
1. The "ClassA" uniforms as described below will be the uniform worn at funerals, parades, and formal occasions, or when directed by the Chief of Police. For funerals and memorial occasions the elastic, black "mourning band" shall be worn on the breast badge as directed per the office of the Chief of Police. a. THE "CLASS A" WINTER DRESS UNIFORM (1) Class A Winter Dress Uniform shall consist of the black Ike Jacket, black round police hat, long sleeved dress shirt, black uniform tie and clasp, black regulation uniform pant, clarino leather duty gear, polished leather or vinyl dress shoes and winter jacket, sweater or coat, when applicable. b. THE "CLASS A SUMMER" DRESS UNIFORM

(1) Class A Summer Dress Uniform shall consist of the black, round police hat, short sleeved dress shirt, black uniform tie and clasp, black regulation uniform pant, clarino leather duty gear, polished leather or vinyl dress shoes. A t-shirt worn under the uniform dress shirt must be a white t-shirt with no visible writing or design.

S.TELECOMMUNICATORUNIFORM
1. Telecommunicators will wear the dress uniform shirt or blouse. They will have the option to wear short-sleeved summer polo shirts all year round if so desired. A t-shirt worn under the summer dress uniform shirt must be white, with no visible writing or design. Black uniform pant; a black skirt and black belt. a. If the Winter Dress Uniform is worn, a black clip-on tie and specified tie clasp shall be worn. b. The uniform dress shirt will have the Department patch sewn on the left sleeve shoulder with the radio communications patch sewn on the right sleeve shoulder. The Department badge will be worn on the left breast. The telecommunicators' nametag and award medal will be worn centered above the right shirt pocket, parallel to and resting on the top edge of the pocket. c. Black shoes. d. A black sweater or black uniform jacket may be worn when comfort necessitates.

T.PLAINCLOTHESOFFICER
1. Officers assigned to duties requiring civilian clothes will wear appropriate clothing for their assignment. 2. Officers are encouraged to dress smartly and in good style. Gaudy, flashy or ill fitting attire will not be permitted. 3. Supervisors may approve a deviation from the above attire if an assignment dictates.

U.STATIONDUTYANDCOURTAPPEARANCE
1. All uniformed officers assigned to duty inside the police station, whether on a permanent or temporary basis, or attending court in uniform shall be required to dress in accordance with the uniform regulations. Officers may wear the trouser belt with the basket weave visible and an approved black in color holster.

2. Male officers attending court in civilian attire will wear dress slacks, dress shirt, suit coat or sport coat and tie. 3. Female officers attending court in civilian attire will wear a pants suit, skirt and blouse or other business attire. 4. Officers appearing in court in civilian attire will ensure that their weapon is concealed. V.CIVILIANEMPLOYEES 1. Civilian members of the Department not previously described, shall conform to the standards of dress normally worn by office personnel in the private business sector, unless otherwise directed by the Chief of Police. All articles of clothing shall be of a conservative nature. W.DUTYEQUIPMENT A. Officers assigned to Patrol Division are to carry or have in their personal possession while on duty the following equipment: 1. Uniform cap. 2. A duty bag or briefcase. 3. Flashlight. 4. TASER (Dept. Issued) 5. Optional O/C spray 6. Impact weapon, some examples are, but not limited to, expandable baton, ASP, PR 24, etc 5. Traffic direction cone/wand for flashlight or light sticks. 6. Reflective vest or jacket with reflective material. 7. Citation holder. 8. Citations a. Uniform Traffic Citations b. Parking Citations c. ATW Citations

d. Field Interview Reports (FIR) 9. Report Forms a. Tow Report b. Death Scene Check List c. Other Report Forms as necessary 10. IVC Offense Code Book 11. Miranda Card 12. Business Cards a. Cards shall have the minimum information: The Department name, address, officer's name, rank or title and DSN, Departmental telephone numbers. 13. Memorandum "memo" book or pad. B. The listed equipment is considered to be part of the uniform in addition to the mandated garrison belt equipment. These are minimum requirements. It is suggested that the officers' duty bag or case contain the reference materials and supplies necessary to perform the daily functions and duties of patrol. C. Uniform caps/hats shall be worn at all times when immediate identification is necessary for officer safety, i.e.: traffic direction, crowd control, or as otherwise directed. VI. WEARINGOFTHEUNIFORM A. Only authorized uniforms and equipment shall be worn by Department personnel. Officers shall not wear any identifiable part of the official uniform together with articles of civilian clothing. Civilian outer garments may be worn over the uniform when traveling to and from work. Members shall not wear the uniform off duty except when in direct route to and from work or specified Departmental assignment.

Procedure #3.200

GRANTIE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title:COMP TIME NOT ACCRUED Procedure:3.108 DateIssued: Revised:

I.PURPOSE A. To establish policy for paying back overtime that was taken but not accrued. II.POLICY A. The Department has occasionally allowed employees to take comp time off, even though the given employee has not accrued comp time on the books. These employees then owe the City the time taken. III.PROCEDURE A. Due to the comp time being taken at straight time, it shall be returned to the Department as straight time at the Department's request. Employees not in agreement with this policy should not ask for time off if they do not have it accrued. B. Employees who do owe the Department time may pay this back in no less than fifteen (15) minute increments when they have to work over on their regular shift due to a late call or finishing an assignment. It may also be paid back on overtime worked but at straight rate until the debt is paid.

Procedure #3.200

GRANTIE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title:SHIFT TRADING Procedure:3.109 DateIssued: Revised:

I.PURPOSE A. To establish policy for officers wishing to trade off a shift. II.POLICY A. It is the policy of the Police Department to reasonably allow officers to trade shifts. However, to maintain the proper chain of command on each shift, some restrictions must be observed. III.PROCEDURE A. The Officer In Charge of a shift cannot trade off a shift with a patrolman. The Officer In Charge must trade with a Sergeant and above. 1. EXCEPTIONS a. When there is another Sergeant or above on the shift who can assume the Officer In Charge position. b. When approved by the Patrol Captain, Assistant Chief or Chief of Police. B. Shift Trades which involve a period of time to exceed three (3) hours must be submitted in writing on the Department Shift Change request form and approved accordingly three (3) days in advance. 1. EXCEPTIONS a. Emergency trades may be approved by Patrol Captain, Assistant Chief or Chief of Police.

Procedure #3.300 GRANTIE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title: 3.300

GENERAL RULES OF CONDUCT

Procedure:

AND DEMEANOR Date Issued: Revised:

I.PURPOSE

A.TosetforththerulesofconductformembersoftheGraniteCityPoliceDepartment. B. Members of the Police Department are held to a higher standard than any other
representativegroupoftheCity.Officer'sactionsandpublicconductarecloselyscrutinized.Ifactions orappearancearebelievedtobeexcessive,unwarranted,orunjust,youarecriticizedfarmoreseverely than any other persons for comparable conduct due to youtr role in the community. The actions or inactions of one (1) member of the Department reflects upon all members and upon the profession of policingasawhole.

C. Wehonorthetrustendowedusbythecitizensofourcommunity.Weholdourselvestothe higheststandardsofprofessionalpoliceconduct,subscribingtotheLawEnforcementCodeofEthicsand theoathofpublicoffice.

II.POLICY

A. EmployeesoftheDepartmentarerequiredtocomplywithbehavioralstandardssetforthin thisCodeofConduct.

1. Employees and members of the Department must at all times conduct themselves in a manner which does not bring discredit to the individual or the Department. Failure to comply with theseprocedures,policies,rulesandregulationsisjustcausefordisciplinaryaction.

III.DEFINITIONS

A.LAW:Anyfederal,state,countyormunicipalstatuteorordinance.

 B. NON-COMPLIANCE WITH DIRECTIVES: When employees fail, either on or off duty, to followanyofthesepolicies,procedures,rulesandregulationsinthispolicymanual,themunicipalcode, stateorfederalstatutes.

C. DEPARTMENT POLICY:Anywrittenorverbalorder,policyorspecialorderwhichdefines responsibilities,duties,behavior,technique,oractionsdesiredaspartofthisDepartment'soperations.

D. GENERAL ORDER:WrittenpoliciesinthisDepartmentpolicymanualwhicharetoinclude subjectidentification,effectivedate,dateofissue,policynumberandnarrative.

E. SPECIAL ORDER: Written order issued by a superior/ranking officer for a certain activity andforalimitedtimeperiod.SpecialOrdersmayindicateatimeperiodof"untilfurthernotice."

F.DIRECT ORDER:Anyverbalorwrittencommandissuedbyasuperior/rankingofficer.

IV.EMPLOYEE CONDUCT

Thesetermsidentifyanddefinethedemandsofemployeeconduct.

A.ALWAYSSUBJECTTODUTY

1.Membersshallmaintainacurrenttelephonelistingwheretheycanbereachedatalltimes.

2. Membersshallmaintainacurrentresidence/addresslistingintheCityofGraniteCitywith less than ten years of senority, and within the boundary limits of Madison County, Illinois, with ten yearsormoreofsenority,atalltimes.

3. Members shall notify the Office of the Chief of Police, in writing, of any telephone or residence/addresschangeswithineight(8)hours.

B.IMPARTIALITY 1. Exhibitingpartialityfororagainstanindividualorgroupbecauseofrace,creed,genderor
influenceconstitutesun-officerlikeconduct;conductunbecominganofficer.

2. Similarly, unwarranted interference in the private business of others, when not in the interestofjustice,constitutesun-officerlikeconduct;conductunbecominganofficer.

C.COURTESY 1. Employees, members shall be courteous, respectful and civil in all contacts with the
public.Theattitudeanddemeanorofmembersshallbefair,firm,impartialandimpersonal.Members shallremaincalmandeven-temperedregardlessoftheprovocationtodootherwise.

2. Employees, members shall not use harsh, profane, violent or insolent language. Upon requestheshallprovidehisname,rank,andbadgenumber/DSNinaprofessionalmanner.

3. Members shall treat superior officers/ranking officers, subordinates and all associates courteouslyandwithrespect.Whileonduty,inthepresenceofthegeneralpublic,eachmembershall refertoeachotherbyrankortitle.

4. Members shall answer all telephone calls promptly and courteously, identifying the Department and member by name and rank/title. They shall be cheerful, respectful, courteous and helpfulwhileremainingprofessionalandfirm.

D.LOYALTY 1. Members shall be faithful to the oath of office, the principals of public service and the
objectivesoftheDepartment.

2. Membersshallpromoteandespousetheprincipalofespritdecorps:thecommonfeeling ofpurpose,pride,loyaltyandresponsibilitythatunitesadisciplinedgroup.

3. Members shall treat as confidential and official the business of the Department and shall not reveal police information except as provided by Department procedure, law or competent authority. Information contained in police records is considered confidential and shall be treated as such.ViolationofDepartmentconfidentialityisconductunbecominganofficer.

4. Membersshallnotpubliclycriticizethework,mannerofperformanceofduty,norconvey anyscandalousorprejudicialstatementsaboutothermembersoftheDepartment.

E.INTEGRITY 1. Membersshallbeexemplary,setexampletothecommunityintermsofsobriety,dignity,
courtesy,discretion,diligence,appearanceandobservationofproperdiscipline.

2. Members shall obey all federal, state and municipal laws. Failure of such is conduct unbecominganofficer.

3. Members shall carefully avoid any conduct that may compromise the integrity of themselves,theDepartmentorothermembers.

4.Membersshallnotinterferewithdueprocessoflawortheproperadministrationofjustice. Except where a manifest injustice might occur, or the interest or furtherance of an authorized police purpose, no member shall interfere in the issuance, prosecution, or disposition of a traffic citation, QUASI, or criminal complaint without the authorization of the Chief of Police or authority of the StatesAttorney'soffice.Impedingorcompromisingtraffic,QUASI,orcriminalcomplaints,directlyor indirectly,isjustcausefordisciplineandconsideredun-officerlikeconduct.

a. Exception:TheWatchCommanderorhigherauthority,aftercarefulconsideration,may voidaparkingcitationwhennecessitydemands.TheWatchCommanderorhigherauthoritymust havesufficientarticulatedcausetovoidthecitation.Thevoidingauthoritymustinitialthecitation.

5. Members shall promptly pay all debts and legal liabilities, obligations incurred; avoiding liabilitieswhichtheyareunabletodischargeonacurrentbasis.

6. Membersshallnotsolicitbusiness,subscriptionorcontribution,selltickets,merchandise, services, collect or receive money or other items of value for any religious, charitable or fraternal organizationswhileonduty,withouttheauthorizationoftheChiefofPolice.

7. Members shall not seek the influence or intervention of any member outside the DepartmentorfromanymemberoftheBoardofFireandPoliceCommissioners,forthepurposeof personalpreference,advancement,transferoradvantagewithintheDepartment.

8. Membersshallnotsolicitoracceptgratuities,favor,bribe,reward,orotheritemsofvalue forpersonaluseduringthecourseoftheirworkorinconnectionwiththeirduties.

9.Membersshallnotactasbailorforanypersonincustody.

10.Membersshallnotsuggest,recommendoradviseretentionofanyattorneytoanyperson comingtotheirattentionasaresultofanyofficialpoliceaction.

11. Members shall not associate on a social basis with any individual whose character, reputationorbackgroundaresuchthatwouldtendtodiscredittheofficer,employeeorDepartment.

12. Members shall not knowingly become a member or be affiliated with any subversive groupororganizationexceptwhennecessaryintheperformanceofdutyandthenonlythedirection and authority of the Chief of Police. Violation is unbecoming conduct/conduct unbecoming of an officer.

13. Members shall not communicate in any manner, directly or indirectly, any information which might assist persons wanted for an offense, or guilty of a QUASI or criminal act, which may enablethatpersontoescapearrest,punishment,orsecretevidenceofanunlawfulactivity.

14. Members shall not knowingly, either orally or in writing, make false report nor enter or cause to be entered in any Departmental book, record, or report, any false, inaccurate or improper information. F.OBEDIENCE TO ORDERS

1.Definitions

a. INSUBORDINATION:Whenanemployeefails,eitheronoroffduty,toobeyanyproper direction of a superior or commanding officer of higher rank. Ridiculing a superior officer or his orders,whetherinthepresenceorduringhisabsence,shallconstituteinsubordination.

b.A LAWFUL ORDER:Shallbeconstruedtobeanorderinkeepingwiththeperformance ofanydutyprescribedbylaw,rule,orregulationoftheDepartment;orforthepreservationoforder, efficiencyandproperdiscipline.

2. Orders from a superior to a subordinate shall be in clear understandable language.

Members in doubt to the nature or detail of their orders or assignment shall seek such information/ clarificationfromtheirsupervisorbygoingthroughthechainofcommand.Ordersgivenbyanofficer of equal or lesser rank shall be obeyed when the officer is relaying the orders of a superior/ranking officer.

3. Nosupervisoryofficershallknowinglyissueanorderwhichisunjustortendstonullifyany law,departmentalrule,regulation,orpolicy,generalorspecialorder,orcommandissuedbytheChief ofPoliceorsuperiorofficerofhigherrank.

4. Upon receipt of an order conflicting with any previous order or instruction, the member will respectfully advise the person issuing the second order of the conflict. If so directed, the latter commandshallbeobeyed.Responsibilityforcountermandingtheoriginalorderorinstructionshallrest withtheindividualcountermanding/issuingthelatterorder.

5. Obediencetoanunlawfulorderisneveradefenseforanunlawfulactionandnomember is required to obey any order which is contrary to federal, state, or local statutes. Responsibility for refusaltoobeyrestswiththatmember.Heshallbestrictlyrequiredtojustifyhisactions.

6.Memberswhoreceiveorderstheyfeelareconflictingorcontrarytotherules,regulationsor policiesoftheDepartment,orfeeltobeunjust,mustfirstobeytheordertothebestoftheirabilityina lawfulmanner,andthenproceedtoappealthroughthechainofcommand.

7. Members knowing of other members violating laws, rules and regulations, policies, or disobeyingorders,shallreportsameinwritingtotheChiefofPolicethroughthechainofcommand. Iftheviolationisofsuchseriousnature,itmustbebroughttotheimmediatepersonalattentionofthe ChiefofPolice,theofficialchannelsmaybebypassed.

G.USE OF ALCOHOL 1. Members shall not be under the influence of alcohol, either while reporting for duty or
during duty hours. The odor of alcoholic beverage on the breath of any officer or civilian employee at the beginning or during tour of duty is just cause for disciplinary action. Except in the execution ofofficialduties,withtheauthorizationoftheChiefofPolice,anemployeeshallnotdrinkorpossess alcoholwhileonduty.

2.Officersinuniformshallneverpurchaseorconsumealcoholicbeverages,whetheronoroff duty.

3. Officers are always subject to duty. Officers shall not consume intoxicants/alcoholic beverageswhileoffduty,andinapublicplace,totheextentthatevidenceofconsumptionisapparent ortotheextentthattheabilitytoperformdutyisinanywayimpaired.Inasmuch,ifanofficerisfound tobeintoxicatedinapublicplace,heshallbesubjecttodisciplinaryaction.

4. Whenoffduty,anofficerconsumingorhavingconsumedalcoholicbeveragesshallnotbe inpossessionofafirearm.

H.USE OF DRUGS 1.MembersoftheDepartment,onoroffduty,shallnotbeundertheinfluence,orpossession,

ofillegaldrugs.

I.ABUSE OF AUTHORITY

1.Membersshallnotuse,threaten,orattempttouseanyauthorityofofficialcapacity,title,or position,onoroffdutythatisforbiddenbylaworDepartmentrules,regulationsorpolicy.


2. Members shall not conduct internal affairs, investigations, upon other members unless specifically assigned to do so by the Chief of Police. When cause for investigation appears to exist againstanothermember,thatcauseshallbereportedtotheChiefofPolice.

J.UNAUTHORIZED USE OF TIME 1. Inappropriate use of duty time, not specifically mentioned herein, that affects
accomplishmentofdutiesandresponsibilities,maybejustcausefordisciplinaryaction.Inappropriate useoftimeincludes:

a. When not prompt and punctual in reporting for duty or in the execution of an assigned task;

b.Wheninattentivetodutiesbylaziness; c.Beingabsentfromassignedpost; d.Sleepingonduty; e.Conductingpersonalbusinesswhileonduty; f.Takingexcesstimeonbreaks; g.Makingotherunauthorizeduseofdutytime.

2.Whenincompetentorinefficientinperformingthedutiesofanassignedpositionortask.

3.Whenfailingtomaintainasatisfactoryattendancerecord. K.ABSENCE FROM DUTY 1. Every member or employee who fails to appear for duty at the date, time and place specified,willbeconsidered"AbsentWithoutLeave".

2.AbsencewithoutleavemustimmediatelybereportedinwritingtotheChiefofPolice.

3. All absence without leave in excess of one (1) hour must be reported to the Division Commander.

4. Absencewithoutleaveinexcessofthree(3)daysshallbecauseforremovalfromtheroll oftheGraniteCityPoliceDepartmentandreferredtotheBoardofFireandPoliceCommissionersfor dispositionorothercompetentauthority.

L.SICK LEAVE 1.AsdefinedintheWorkAgreement,sickleavewillbeusedbymembersforillnessoroffthe

jobincurreddisabilities.


2. An employee who becomes ill, injured or disabled on or off the job shall have the responsibilitytonotifytheWatchCommander,DivisionCommanderordutyofficer,notlaterthanthirty (30)minutespriortothebeginningofhisscheduleddutyday.

3. Failuretogivepropernotificationasrequiredmaybecausefordenialofsickleavepayfor theperiodofabsenceasdefinedin"absentwithoutleave."

4. Membersreportedonsickleavearesubjecttoreviewoftheircondition/illnessandmaybe subjecttovisitationbyasupervisoryofficertoconfirmthemembers'status.

5.TheChiefofPolice,athisdiscretion,mayatanytimedirectaphysicianordentist,selected byhim,toexamineanemployeereportingoffonsickleave.

6. Amemberfoundtobeinviolationorabuseofthesickleavebyanymeansasdescribed andsetforthinthispolicywillbeconsidered"AbsentWithoutLeave"andsubjecttodisciplinaryaction.

M.DEPARTMENT PROPERTY AND EQUIPMENT 1.Definition a. Improper/misuse of Department property occurs when a member's act is careless,
negligentorunsafeinthecare,maintenanceoruseofDepartmentalproperty,vehicles,equipment ormoney.

2. Members are responsible for the proper care of Department property and equipment assigned to them for their use. Damaged or lost property, or equipment of the Department may subjecttheresponsiblepersontodisciplinaryaction.

3. Members shall immediately report, in writing, any loss of or damage to Departmental property, assigned to or used by them, to their Division Commander. Any defect or hazardous condition discovered in any Department equipment or property, shall be immediately reported to the member'ssupervisor.

4.Membersshallnotmarkordefaceanysurfaceinthepolicebuilding.Nomaterialorfixture shallbeaffixedtoinanywaytoanywallwithoutpermissionoftheChiefofPolice.

5.Membersshallnotmark,alter,ordefaceanyofficialDepartmentalcorrespondence.

6. IntheeventthatDepartmentalpropertyorequipmentisfounddamagedandthatdamage hasnotbeenreported,itshallbetheprimafasciaevidencethatthelastpersonusingthepropertyor equipmentwasresponsible.

7. Departmental telephone equipment is not to be used to place long distance, personal or privatemessages.

8. Upon termination of Department employment, all members shall return Departmental issuedequipment/property.

9. Members shall not use Departmental letterhead stationary for personal or private correspondence.AllcorrespondenceregardingpolicebusinessmustbesentbytheChiefofPoliceor withhisconsentorauthority.

10. Officers can not upload any image or video, using department or personal equipment, fromthepolicedepartmentorincidentontoanysocialnetworksuchas,butnotlimitedto,Facebook, Myspace,Twitter,etc

N.USE OF TOBACCO PRODUCTS 1. Theuseoftobaccoandsmokelesstobaccoisprohibitedinthepolicebuildingandinany

Cityownedpolicevehicles;marked,unmarkedorundercover.

2. On duty personnel are prohibited to use tobacco products while in public view, when dealingwiththepublicorinthecourseofanyassignment.

3.Violationsofthetobaccopolicy:

a.FirstViolation:WrittenReprimand

b.SecondSubsequentViolation:Suspension

O.REPRESENTINGTHEDEPARTMENT

1.Allrequestsforpublicspeeches,demonstrationsorotherpublicappearancesshallbewith theapprovaloftheChiefofPolice.

2. Members,identifiedasrepresentativesoftheDepartment,shallnotpermittheirnamesor photographstobeusedinanycommercialtestimonywhichalludestotheirpositionofemploymentor toendorseanyproduct,service,orpoliticalentitywithoutthepermissionoftheChiefofPolice.

Procedure #3.301 GRANTIE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title:

DEPARTMENTAL DISCIPLINE Procedure: 3.301 Date Issued: Revised:

7

I.PURPOSE

A. ThepurposeofthisGeneralOrderistosetforththedisciplinaryprocedurefortheGranite CityPoliceDepartment.

II.DEPARTMENT POLICY

A. Itisessentialthatthepublic'sconfidencebe maintainedintheabilityofthePolice Departmenttoinvestigateandproperlyadjudicatecomplaintsagainstitsemployees.Inordertoestablish andmaintainthispublicconfidence,theDepartmentmustseekoutanddisciplinethosememberswhose conductdiscreditstheDepartment,orimpairsitseffectiveoperation.

B.Therefore,itshallbethepolicyoftheDepartmenttoacceptcomplaintsagainstitsmembers, sworn and civilian, and to investigate all such complaints to the appropriate disposition. The rights of the employee, as well as those of the public must be preserved, and any investigation arising from a complaintmustbeconductedinafairandimpartialmanner,withthetruthofthematterbeingtheprimary objective. It is the duty of the Police Department not only to protect the public from improper conduct byitsmembers,butalsotoprotectpoliceofficersandemployeeswhoareactingproperlyfromfalseor maliciousaccusationsofmisconduct.

III.GENERAL RULES OF CONDUCT

Asamemberofthepublicservice,aGraniteCityPoliceOfficerisrequiredtoconducthimselfbothonand offthejobinamannersoastobringcredittotheserviceaspreviouslyaddressedinthispolicymanual. Properemployeeconductincludesbutnotlimitedto:

A.Carefullyfollowingworkschedules.

B.UsingCitysupplies,property,andequipmentcarefullyandonlyformunicipalpurpose.

C. Following Department procedures and rules as well as obeying City ordinances and State laws.

D.Diligentlypursuingassignedduties.

 E. Reasonably regulating personal affairs and finances so as to not discredit himself or the publicservice.

F. Declining gifts, tips or gratuities of any kind for public service to any group, organization, individual,orbusinessfirm.

G.Usinghispublicpositionforpublicserviceandnotpersonalgain.

H.Conductinghimselfonthejob,inamannerthatbringscredittothepublicserviceandfellow employees.

I.Cooperatingwithfellowemployeessothatworkiscompletedinanefficientmannerandupto requiredlevels.

J. Limitingoutsideworkandactivitiessoasnottointerferewiththebestpossibleperformance ofhisposition'sdutiesandresponsibilities.

IV.DEPARTMENTAL DISCIPLINE

A.DUTYTOKNOWRULESANDREGULATIONS

1. ItisthedutyofeveryemployeeoftheDepartmenttomakethemselvesthoroughlyfamiliar withtherulesandregulationsgoverningtheDepartment.

B.EMPLOYEES'RESPONSIBILITYTOANSWERQUESTIONS

1. All employees must, when requested by their superior officer or other employees authorizedtoinquireintoanyofficialmatter,respondfullyandtruthfullytoallquestionsregardingthe performanceoftheirofficialduties.Anyfailuretorespondcompletelyandcandidlytosuchinquiries maybepunishedbyappropriatedisciplinaryaction,includingdismissal.

C.COMPLAINTDEFINED

1. A complaint is defined as an allegation that a Department employee has violated a departmentalruleorregulation,astatestatute,orcityordinance.

2.Theprovisionsofthisruleshallapplytocomplaintsfromthefollowingsources:

a.ComplaintsreportedtosupervisoryofficersbymembersoftheDepartment;

b.Thoseobservedbysupervisoryorcommandingofficers;

c.Thosereportedbyprivatecitizens;

d.ThosereportedbyCityofficials;

e.ThosereferredtotheDepartmentbyanypersonoragency.

D.PROCEDUREFORACCEPTINGCOMPLAINTS

1. WatchCommanderswillinvestigateallcomplaintsunlessdirectedotherwisebytheChief ofPoliceorhisdesignate.

2. All complaints against Department employees shall be referred to the on-duty Watch Commander.ShouldtheWatchCommandernotbeavailable,thecomplaintshallbereferredtothe nextlowerlevelofsupervision.

3. Theinvestigatingofficerwillconductathoroughandcomprehensiveinvestigationwithout delay.

4. On minor complaints, if the officer recording the complaint from a citizen resolves the complainttothecitizen'ssatisfaction,theofficershallnotesuchonthePersonnelComplaintFormand forwarditdirectlytotheChiefofPoliceorhisdesignate.

5. If the Officer recording the complaint is unable to satisfy the complaint and further investigationisrequired,theUniformedPoliceOfficerDisciplinaryAct(50ILCS725/3.8)requiresthat thepersonmakingtheformalcomplaintagainstanofficermusthavetheComplaintFormnotarized, and the notarized Complaint Form must be supported by a sworn affidavit. Once this is done, the notarizedComplaintFormandaffidavitwillbeforwardedtotheChiefofPoliceorhisdesignate.

E.MEMBERSSUBJECTTODISCIPLINARYACTION

1. Anymemberoremployeeviolatinghisoathandtrustbycommittinganoffensepunishable under the laws or statutes of the United States, the State of Illinois, or local ordinances, or who violatesanyprovisionoftheRulesandRegulationsoftheDepartment,orCity,orwhodisobeysany lawfulorder,orwhoisincompetenttoperformhisdutiesissubjecttoappropriatedisciplinaryaction.

F.DEPARTMENTALAUTHORITYTODISCIPLINE

1. FinalDepartmentaldisciplinaryauthorityandresponsibilityrestswiththeChiefofPoliceor hisdesignate.

2.Othersupervisorypersonnelmaytakethefollowingdisciplinarymeasures:

a.WrittenReprimand(subjecttoapprovalbytheChiefofPoliceorhisdesignate).

b.EmergencySuspension.

c.Writtenrecommendationsforotherpenalties.

G.EMERGENCYSUSPENSION

1. Thefollowingpersonnelhavetheauthoritytoimposeemergencysuspensionuntilthenext businessdayagainstamemberoremployeewhenitappearsthatsuchactionisinthebestinterest oftheDepartment;thissuspensionshallnotbeconstruedasdisciplineandsuchsuspensionshallbe withpay.


a.Anycommandofficerasdefinedherein. H.FOLLOW-UPACTIONONEMERGENCYSUSPENSIONS 1. Amemberoremployeereceivinganemergencysuspensionshallberequiredtoreportto theChiefofPoliceorhisdesignateonthenextbusinessdayat0900hoursunlessotherwisedirected bycompetentauthority.

2. The command officer imposing or recommending the suspension shall also report to the ChiefofPoliceorhisdesignateatthesametime.

I.REPORTOFDISCIPLINARYACTIONTAKENORRECOMMENDED

1. Whenever disciplinary action is taken or recommended (except for oral reprimand), a writtenreportmustbesubmittedimmediatelycontainingthefollowinginformation:

a.Thename,rank,DSN,andpresentassignmentofthepersonbeingdisciplined.

b.Thedate(s)andtime(s)ofthemisconductandlocation(s).

c.Thesectionnumber(s)ofthismanualviolatedorcommonnameoftheinfraction.

d.Acompletestatementofthefactsofthemisconduct.

e.Thepunishmentimposedorrecommended.

f. Thewrittensignatureandrankofthepreparingofficerandhispositioninrelationtothe memberbeingdisciplined.

2.DISTRIBUTIONOFREPORTSOFDISCIPLINARYACTION

Thereportshallbedistributedasfollowsbytheofficerimposingorrecommendingdisciplinaryaction.

a.Originalandone(1)copytotheChiefofPoliceviatheChainofCommand.

b.One(1)copytosubject'sCommandingOfficer.

c.One(1)copyretainedbyofficerimposingorrecommendingtheaction.

J.INFORMINGTHEPERSONBEINGDISCIPLINED

1. The member or employee being disciplined shall be informed of the charges at the time suchactionistaken.

K.MISCONDUCTOBSERVEDBYPOLICEPERSONNEL

1. Wheneveranycommandorsupervisoryofficerobservesorisinformedofthemisconduct of another member or employee which indicates the need for disciplinary action, he shall take authorizedandnecessaryactionandrenderacompletereportoftheincidentandhisactionstothe ChiefofPoliceorhisdesignateviatheChainofCommand.

L.SERIOUSCOMPLAINTSORALLEGATIONS

1. IfintheopinionoftheOfficer-In-Charge,theincidentisofsufficientgravity,heshallnotify hisCommandingOfficerortheChiefofPoliceorhisdesignate,regardlessofthehour.Inaddition,he shalltakeanyimmediateactionnecessarytopreservetheintegrityoftheDepartmentuntilthearrival ofhisCommandingOfficerortheChiefofPoliceorhisdesignate.

M.INVESTIGATIONOFALLEGEDMISCONDUCT

1. The officer assigned the investigation of an alleged act of misconduct on the part of a memberoremployeeoftheDepartmentshallconductathoroughandaccurateinvestigation.

2. Such investigation shall include formal statements from all parties concerned, when necessaryandpertinent,thegatheringandpreservationofphysicalevidencepertainingtothecase, andallotherinformationbearingonthematter.

N.REPORTSOFINVESTIGATIONOFALLEGEDACTSOFMISCONDUCT

1. Allegedactsofmisconductmustbeinvestigatedandtheresultsoftheinvestigationmust bereducedtoawrittenreport.Theinvestigatingofficershallsummarizethepertinentfactsincluding:

a.Anabstract(summary)ofthecomplaintofallegedactofmisconduct.

b.Pertinentportionsofthestatementsofallpartiestotheincident. c.Adescriptionoftheincident,physicalevidenceandotherevidenceimportanttothecase. d.Theobservationsandconclusionsoftheinvestigatingofficer.

O. CONCLUSION OF INVESTIGATION INVOLVING DEPARTMENT MEMBERS OR EMPLOYEES

1. All investigations of Department members or employees accused of misconduct will concludewithoneofthefollowingfindings:

a. Unfounded:Theinvestigationindicatesthattheactoractscomplainedofdidnotoccur orfailedtoinvolvepolicepersonnel.

b.Exonerated:Actsdidoccurbutwerejustified,lawful,andproper.

c. Not Sustained: Investigation fails to discover sufficient evidence to clearly prove or disprovetheallegationsmadeinthecomplaint.


d. Sustained: Investigation produces sufficient evidence to clearly prove the allegations madeinthecomplaint.

e. MisconductNOTbasedonComplaintSustained:Substantiatedmisconduct,notalleged inthecomplaint,butdisclosedbytheinvestigation.

V. POLICE OFFICERS RIGHTS

A.INFORMALINQUIRIES

Upon receipt of an allegation of employee misconduct which the OIC cannot satisfy or complete, the ChiefofPoliceorhisdesignateshallcausean"InformalInquiry"or"FormalInvestigation"tobemadeinto theincidentorcitizencomplaint.TheChiefofPolicemayassignanofficerorofficerstoinquireintothe incidentandallDepartmentpersonnelshallcooperatewiththoseassignedtoinvestigatetheinquiry.

1. "Informal Inquiry" shall consist of meeting between supervisory or command personnel andtheofficerofwhomtheallegationofemployeemisconducthasbeenmade.Thepurposeofthis meeting is to discuss the facts of the allegation with the officer. Although the officer may be asked routinequestionsregardingtheallegation,thequestioningshallbeconsideredaninterviewratherthan aninterrogationoftheofficer.

2. Upon the conclusion of an "Informal Inquiry", the supervisor or command person conductingthemeetingshallhavetheofficersubmit,inwriting,correspondencetotheChiefofPolice orhisdesignatethoroughlyexplainingtheincidentfromwhichtheallegationofemployeemisconduct stemmed. The supervisor or command person shall also submit, in writing, correspondence to the ChiefofPoliceorhisdesignatedetailingwhatwasdiscussedintheinterviewwiththeofficer.

3. Upon receipt of all correspondence from an "Informal Inquiry" the Chief of Police or his designate shall review the correspondence and determine if the allegation is serious enough to warranta"FormalInvestigation."

4. If the Chief of Police or his designate determines that the allegation, if sustained, is only a minor infraction of the Department's rules and regulations, the investigation shall be terminated at theconclusionofthe"InformalInquiry"andanydisciplinaryactiontakenagainsttheofficershallnot exceedasuspensionofmorethanthree(3)days.

B.FORMALINVESTIGATION

IftheChiefofPoliceorhisdesignatedeterminesthatanallegationisofamoreseriousnature,a"Formal Investigation" shall be initiated. The term "Formal Investigation" means any investigation during which the officer is interrogated for the purpose of gathering evidence of misconduct against the officer to be usedasabasisforfilingchargestoseektheofficer'sremoval,dischargeorsuspensioninexcessofthree (3)days.

1. The interrogation of an officer under investigation shall be conducted at the Granite City Police Department with all interrogations being conducted at a reasonable time of day, preferable duringatimewhentheofficerisonduty.However,therearetimeswhenitisnotpracticaltoconduct interrogations during an officer's normal tour of duty. In those instances, the officer may be called in during off-duty time, or in appropriate circumstances the officer's duty hours may be adjusted or changedduringtheperiodoftheinvestigation.


2. The interrogation session of an officer under investigation shall be of a reasonable duration, and the officer shall be permitted to have reasonable periods of rest and personal necessities.

3. The officer being interrogated shall not be subjected to professional or personal abuse, whichincludestheuseofoffensivelanguage.

4. Prior to being interrogated, the officer under investigation shall be advised in writing of the nature of the investigation, the name, rank, and unit or command of the officer in charge of the investigation,theinterrogatorsandanyoneelsewhomaybepresentduringanyinterrogation,except atapublicadministrativehearing.

5. Prior to being interrogated, the officer under investigation shall be advised in writing that any admissions made during the course of the interrogation may be used as evidence of employee misconductorasthebasisforchargesseekingsuspension,removalordischarge.

6. Priortobeinginterrogated,theofficerunderinvestigationshallbeadvisedinwritingofthe right he be represented by counsel. The selection of counsel shall be of the officer's choosing and mayberequestedatanytimebeforeorduringtheinterrogation.Ifarequestforcounselismade,a reasonable amount of time and opportunity to obtain counsel shall be granted. Although the officer has the right to have counsel present during the interrogation, for advisement purposes, the officer shallberequiredtoanswerquestions.Theofficer'scounselshallnotbepermittedtoansweranyof thequestionsfortheofficerandtheofficer'scounseldoesnothavetherighttodirect,when,where, orhowthequestioningisconducted.Theinterrogatingofficershallhavetherighttohavehisattorney present.

7. An officer under investigation may be requested to submit to a polygraph examination. However, a polygraph examination shall not be administered to the Officer without the Officer's expressed, written consent and refusal to submit to such a test shall not be the basis for any disciplinaryactionnormayitbemadeapartoftheofficer'srecord.

8. A completed electronically recorded record of the interrogation of the officer under investigation shall be made and a complete transcript or copy shall be made available to the officer withoutchargeorunduedelayupontheofficer'srequestforacopyoftheinterrogation.

9. IfoneormoreoftheallegationsisSustained,orthereisSustained-MisconductNotBased on the Complaint, the reporting party will be so informed, and will also be informed that appropriate disciplinaryactionhasbeentaken.

10. When each and every allegation in a complaint is found to be either Unfounded, Exonerated,orNon-Sustained,aletter,approvedandsignedbytheChiefofPoliceorhisdesignate willbesenttothereportingpartyinforminghimoftheresults.

11. When each and every allegation in a complaint is found to be either Unfounded, Exonerated,orNot-Sustained,theinvolvedemployeewillbesoinformedbytheChiefofPoliceorhis designateviamemorandum.

a. NO RECORD OF THE ALLEGATION WILL APPEAR IN THE EMPLOYEE'S PERSONNELPACKAGE.

12. If one (1) or more of the allegations is Sustained, or there is Sustained-Misconduct Not Based on the Complaint, the appropriate disciplinary measures to be taken will be forwarded by the ChiefofPoliceorhisdesignatetotheappropriatesupervisoroftheinvolvedemployee.

a. ARECORDOFTHEDISCIPLINARYACTIONHAVINGBEENCARRIEDOUTWILLBE INCLUDEDINTHECASEFILEPRIORTOBEINGCLOSED.

b. A RECORD OF THE DISCIPLINARY ACTION TAKEN WILL BE INCLUDED IN THE EMPLOYEE'SPERSONNELJACKET.

13.AlldisciplinaryactionwillbetakeninaccordancewithDepartmentrulesandregulations.

VI.PENALTIES/CONTRACTUAL CONSIDERATIONS

A.GENERALPOLICYSTATEMENT

1. Discipline in the Police Department shall be progressive and corrective, designed to improve behavior and not merely to punish it. Except for gross misconduct, disciplinary actions instituted by the Employer shall be for reasons based upon the employee's failure to fulfill his responsibilityasanemployee.WheretheEmployerbelievesjustcauseexiststoinstitutedisciplinary action, the Employer shall have the option to assess any of the following penalties based on the severityoftheoffense:

a.Oralreprimand.

b.Writtenreprimand.

c.Suspension.

d.DischargeorDemotion.

2. Any disciplinary action or measure other than an oral reprimand imposed upon an employeemaybeappealedthroughthegrievanceprocedurecontainedherein.Suchgrievancesshall befiledatStep2ofsaidgrievanceprocedure.Theemployeemayfileawrittenresponsetoanyoral reprimand.IftheEmployerhasreasontoreprimandanemployee,itshallbedoneinamannerthat willnotembarrasstheemployeebeforeotheremployeesorthepublic.

B.NOTICEANDAPPEAL

1.Disciplinaryactionmaybeimposeduponanemployeeonlyforjustcause.Disciplineshall beimposedassoonaspracticalaftertheEmployerhasareasonableperiodoftimetoinvestigatethe matter.Anemployeeshallnotbedemotedfordisciplinaryreasons.

2. For disciplinary matters up to and including termination, the disciplined employee may choose to either file a grievance pursuant to the Work Agreement or file an appeal to the Board of FireandPoliceCommissioners.ThischoicemustbecommunicatedinwritingtotheChiefofPolice withinten(10)daysoftheemployee'sreceiptoftheemployer'sstatementofdiscipline.Thischoice ofdisciplinaryappealprocedureshallbeaone(1)timedecisionwhichisbindingupontheemployee, UnionandEmployer.

3. A copy of all disciplinary action shall be provided to the Union unless the employee has executedawaiverstatinghisintentionstonotnotifytheUnionofsaiddisciplinetaken.

C.MAKEWHOLEPROVISION

1. Any employee found to be unjustly suspended or discharged shall be reinstated with full compensation for all lost time and with full restoration of all other rights, benefits and conditions of employment,withoutprejudice,unlessalesserremedyisagreeduponasagrievancesettlementor deemedappropriatebyanarbitrator.

D.PERSONNELFILESANDINVESTIGATIONS

1. TheEmployeragreestocomplywiththeIllinoisPersonnelRecordReviewAct,820ILCS 40.

2. Disciplinary actions, including suspensions three (3) days or less, recorded in the employee's personnel files shall not be used after eighteen (18) months to justify subsequent disciplinaryactionexceptforarelatedoffense.

3. Disciplinary actions, in excess of three (3) days, recorded in the employee's personnel filesshallnotbeusedafterthree(3)yearstojustifysubsequentdisciplinaryactionexceptforarelated offense.

4. Disciplinary investigations shall be in full compliance with the provisions of the state statutesreferredtoastheUniformPeaceOfficersBillofRights(50ILCS725/1etseq.)

E.RIGHTTOREPRESENTATION

1. The Employer shall conduct disciplinary investigations when it receives complaints or has reason to believe an employee has failed to fulfill his responsibilities as an employee and just causefordisciplineexists.EmployeesshallbeentitledtohaveaUnionrepresentativepresentatall meetingswiththeEmployerthatcouldleadtothedisciplineoftheemployee.

F.PRE-DISCIPLINEMEETING

1. Priortotakinganyfinaldisciplinaryactionandconcludingit'sinvestigation,theEmployer shallnotifytheemployeeofthecontemplatedmeasureofdisciplinetobeimposedandshallmeetwith theemployeeinvolvedandinformhimofthereason(s)forsuchcontemplateddisciplinaryactionand copies of pertinent documents. The Employer shall provide the employee with a written statement verifying the disciplinary action and briefly describing the reasons therefore. The employee shall be giventheopportunitytorebutthereasonsforsuchdiscipline.

G.PHOTODISSEMINATION

1. No photograph of an employee under investigation shall be made available to the media priortoacriminalconvictionorpriortoanarbitrator'sdecisionorCivilServiceCommissiondecision.

H.MEDIAINFORMATIONRESTRICTIONS

1. Theidentityofanemployeeunderinvestigationshallnotbemadeavailabletothemedia unlesstherehasbeenacriminalconvictionoradecisionhasbeenrenderedbyanarbitrator.Ifthe employeeisfoundinnocent,theemployeemayrequestandtheCityshallissueapublicstatement.

Procedure #3.302 GRANTIE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title: 3.302

DRUG TESTING POLICY

Date Issued:

Procedure:

Revised:

I.PURPOSE

A. The Police Department has a responsibility to provide a safe work environment and to
protect the public by ensuring that its employees have the physical stamina and emotional stability to performtheirassignedduties.Arequirementforemploymentmustbeanemployeewhoisfreefromdrug dependenceorillegaldruguse.

B. There is sufficient evidence to conclude that use of illegal drugs, and the abuse of legal drugs and alcohol, can seriously impair an employee's performance, and general physical and mental health.Illegaluseandthepossessionofillegaldrugsandnarcoticsbypoliceemployeesisacrimeand clearly unacceptable. There are many hazards associated with drug use by the police. Therefore, the PoliceDepartmenthasadoptedthiswrittenpolicytoensurethefollowing:

1.Toestablishawrittenpolicyandprocedure.

2.Toinsuretheemployeeknowstestingisarequirementofemployment.

3.Toinsuredrugtestsareorderedbasedonareasonablesuspicionorrandomtesting.

a.DrugtestingwillapplytoallemployeesofthePoliceDepartmentincludingtheChief.

b.Allnewlyhiredemployeeswillundergodrugtestinguponcommencementofhiring.

c. Each month thereafter all employees will submit to random testing with the employees namesornumbersbeingdrawnonalotterysystem.Eachnameornumberdrawnwillbeplacedback inthelotteryforthenextdrawing.Aunionrepresentativeshallbepresentduringthelotteryprocess.

II.DEFINITIONS (FOR PURPOSES OF THIS CHAPTER)

A.Employee: Allpersonnel,bothswornandcivilian.

B.Sworn employee:Allsworn(commissioned)employees,includingrankingofficers.

 C. Supervisor: Both sworn and civilian employees assigned to a position having day-to-day responsibilityforsupervisingsubordinates,orareresponsibleforcommandingaworkelement.

D. Drug Test:Abreath,urinalysis,orbloodtestadministeredunderapprovedconditionsand procedurestodetectsubstanceoralcohol.

E. Reasonable Suspicion:Havingenoughfactstocauseareasonablesupervisortosuspect theemployeeisorwasusingillegaldrugsorundertheinfluenceofcontrolledsubstancesoralcohol.

F. Controlled Substance: Any substance, possession or use of which is regulated or prohibitedbylaw.

G.Alcohol Abuse / Under the Influence of:Anyblood/breathalcoholcontentof.04ormore.

III.GENERAL RULES (Reference other rules that pertain to this subject)

A. Department employees shall not take any narcotics or controlled substance unless prescribed by a person licensed to practice medicine. Any statutory defined illegal use of drugs by an employee,whetheratoroutsidepoliceemployment,willnotbetolerated.

B. AllpropertybelongingtotheDepartmentissubjecttoinspectionatanytimewithoutnotice asthereisnoexpectationofprivacy.

1.PropertybelongingtothisDepartmentincludes,butisnotlimitedtopolice-ownedvehicles, desks,filesandstoragelockers.

2. Employees assigned lockers (that are locked by the employee) are also subject to inspectionbytheemployee'ssupervisorafterapprovalbytheChiefofPoliceorhisdesignee.

C. Police employees who have a reasonable suspicion to believe that another employee is illegally using drugs or narcotics, or appearing on duty under the influence of controlled substance or alcoholshallreportthefactsandcircumstancesimmediatelytotheirsupervisor.

D.FailuretocomplywiththeintentorprovisionsofthisGeneralOrdermaybeusedasgrounds fordisciplinaryaction.RefusalbyapoliceemployeetotaketherequireddrugtestorfollowthisGeneral Order will result in immediate suspension from police duties pending disposition of any administrative personnelaction.

E. Anyemployeewhoreportstoworkundertheinfluenceofalcoholordrugsorwhoseactions constitutereasonablesuspicionshallbetested.Ifthatemployeeissoincapacitated,intheopinionofthe OfficerinCharge,he/sheshallbesuspendedwithpaypendingtheresultsofthetest.

IV.POLICY-DRUG TESTING

A. Applicants for the position of sworn police employee shall be routinely tested for drug or narcotic usage as a part of their pre-employment medical examination. The testing procedure and safeguardssetforthinthisOrdershallbefollowedbytheexaminingphysicianandothersinvolvedinthe testingprocedure.


1. Refusal to take the test, or test results reporting a presence of illegal drugs or narcotics ortheuseofnon-prescriptiondrugs,orunjustifiedcontrolledsubstanceoralcoholabuseshallbethe basisofdiscontinuinganapplicantintheselectionprocess.

2. The results of drug tests on applicants for the position of employees of the Police Departmentshallbekeptconfidential.

B. Current employees of the Department shall be required to submit to a test for drug or narcoticusageasoutlinedbelow:

1. Upon implementation of this policy a thirty (30) day grace period will start at which time employees may come forward to request treatment for any drug/alcohol abuse problem and receive treatmentwithpay.Uponsuccessfulcompletiontheemployeeagreestorandomtestingonreturnnot toexceedonceamonthorperthediscretionoftheChief,indefinitely.ThisdoesnotremovetheChief ofPolice,OICtobeingallowedtestperthe"ReasonableSuspicion"clauseduringthethirty(30)day graceperiodoranyothertime.

2. TheChieforOICmayorderadrugtestwhenthereiswrittenevidencethatanemployee isimpairedintheperformanceofhis/herduties,orotherevidencecausingareasonablesupervisorto suspectthatemployeeisundertheinfluenceofdrugs/alcohol.Thecontentsofthewrittenevidence shallbemadeavailabletotheemployeethenextbusinessday.Uponbeingorderedtosubmittothe drug test the employee may request the presence of a Union Representative. The test shall not be delayedformorethanone(1)hour.Submittingtothedrugtestdoesinnowayadmitguiltorrelieve anyrightsoftheemployeeperthe"LawOfficersBillofRights."

3.CurrentemployeesmaybeorderedbytheChieforOICtotakeadrugtest.

a.Wheretheallegationinvolvestheuse,possessionorsaleofdrugsornarcotics.

b.Wherethereisseriouson-dutyinjurytotheemployeeoranotherperson.

4. AnyOICwhoordersadrugtestwhenthereisreasonablesuspicionshallforwardareport containing the facts and circumstances directly to the Chief of Police or his designee by the next businessday.

5. Test results reporting a presence of illegal drugs, alcohol or narcotics, or the use of prescription drugs without a prescription will be submitted as a part of a written complaint by the supervisorconsistentwithSectionIV-B-3aboverequestingdepartmentalaction.

6.TestwillbeconductedbyNIDA(NationalInstituteofDrugAbuse)approvedlabs.

7. TestresultswillonlybegiventotheChief.Employeeswillbenotifiedthenextbusiness dayofapositivedrugtest.

C. CURRENT SWORN EMPLOYEES ASSIGNED TO THE DRUG/NARCOTICS ENFORCEMENT UNIT. Shall be required (in addition to Section B above) to submit to a periodic unannounceddrugtestatthedirectionoftheirsupervisor.

1. Prior to accepting an assignment, an employee shall execute a written agreement and releasestatingthathe/shefullyconsentstoanymedical,physical,psychiatric,psychological,orother testing, including urine and/or blood for legal or illegal substances. In addition, the agreement or releaseshallgivetheDepartmentpermissiontohaveaccesstoalltheemployee'smedicalrecords.

2. Thesupervisorofthedrug/narcoticenforcementunitshallselectthedateandtimewhen eachemployeeassignedtotheunitwillbetested.Thetestshallbeadministeredatleasteverytwelve (12)months.

D.CHAINOFEVIDENCE-STORAGE

1. Management and the Union agree to jointly pick three (3) labs for testing purposes. A periodicreviewandifneededupgradewillalsobejointlydone.

2. Where a positive report is received, urine specimens shall be maintained under secured storageuntilalllegalhearingsareconcluded.Theemployeemaypickone(1)oftheremainingtwo (2) labs. A spare sample will be maintained by the first lab and will then be sent on the request of the employee to the second lab for testing and a second decision. This decision (result) will be the binding test. The cost of the second test will be born by the employer. The employee, after being notifiedhis/hertestwaspositive,willberesponsibletodirecttheChiefofPoliceordesigneewherethe secondsamplewillbesentforsecondtest.

3. Each step in collecting and processing of the urine specimens shall be documented to establishproceduralintegrityandthechainofevidence.

E.URINALYSISTESTSAVAILABLE

Thefollowinganalyticalmethodsforthedirectionofsubstancesareapprovedforconsiderationwiththe adoptionofthedrugtestingprogram.OthermethodsmaybeapprovedbyorderoftheChiefofPolice.

1.ChromatographicMethods

a. TLC (Thin Layer Chromatography, recommended for initial screening step), or HPTLC (HighPerformanceThinLayerChromatography).

b.GLC(GasLiquidChromatography)

c.GC/MS(GasChromatography/MassSpectrometry)confirmationstep.

d.HPLC(HighPressureLiquidChromatography).

2.ImmunologicalMethods
a.RIA(Radioimmunoassay).

b. EMIT(EnzymeMultipliedImmunoassayTechnique).Recommendedforinitialscreening step.

APPENDIX A

V.URINALYSIS PROCEDURES

A.OBTAININGURINESAMPLES

1. The employee designated to give a sample must be positively identified prior to any samplebeingobtained.

2. The room where the sample is obtained must be private and secure with documentation maintainedthattheareahasbeensearchedandfreeofanyforeignsubstance.Specimencollection will occur in a private setting and the procedures should not demean, embarrass or cause physical discomforttotheemployee.

a.Anyspecimencollectionafternormalworkinghourswillbetakenattheemergencyroom, GatewayRegionalMedicalCenter.

3. An interview with the employee prior to the test will serve to establish use of drugs currently taken under medical supervision and over the counter drugs. The employee and the interviewershallbothsignthereport.TheoriginalwillstaywiththeDepartment,one(1)copywillbe giventotheemployee.

4. Specimen samples shall be labeled and checked against the identity of the employee to ensuretheresultsmatchthetestee.Samplesshall,ifnotdeliveredtothelab,bestoredinasecure refrigeratedatmosphereuntiltestedordeliveredtothetestinglabrepresentative.

B.PROCESSINGURINESAMPLES 1.Thetestingorprocessingphaseshallconsistofatwo(2)stepprocedure.

a.Initialscreeningstep,and

b.Confirmationstep.

2. Theurinesampleisfirsttestedusingascreeningprocedure.Aspecimentestingpositive will undergo an additional confirmatory test. An initial positive report should not be considered positive;rather,itshouldbeclassifiedasaconfirmationpending.

3. The confirmation procedure should be technologically different than the initial screening test.NotificationoftestresultstotheChiefofPoliceorhisdesigneewillbehelduntiltheconfirmation test results are obtained. In those cases where the second test confirms the presence of a drug or drugsinthesample,thesamplewillberetainedforsix(6)monthstoallowfurthertestingincaseof disputebyone(1)ofthetwo(2)remaininglabs.

4. The testing method selected shall be capable of identifying marijuana, cocaine, including heroin, amphetamine barbiturates. Personnel utilized for testing will be certified as qualified to conducturinalysis,oradequatelytrained.

5. The laboratory selected to conduct the analysis must be experienced and capable of qualitycontrol,documentation,chainofcustody,technicalexpertise,anddemonstratedproficiencyin urinalysistesting.

6. Employees who have participated in the drug test program and where no drugs were found,shallreceivealetterstatingthatnoillegaldrugswerefound.Iftheemployeerequestssuch,a copyoftheletterwillbeplacedintheemployee'spersonnelfile.

7. Penalty.Anyemployeefoundtobeabusingdrugs/alcoholwillbesubjecttothefollowing penalty.

a.LEGAL DRUGS-----If positive on first offense, employee may receive treatment.

b.ALCOHOL---------If positive on first offense, employee may receive treatment.

c. ILLEGAL DRUGS ---------------------Recommendation by the Chief of Police to the Board of Fire and Police Commissioners that the employee be terminated.

d. If the employee is tested for "REASONABLE SUSPICION" and the test returns negative, the employee will be compensated three (3) compensation days away from the job with pay.

C. SWORN EMPLOYEES ASSIGNED TO THE DRUG/NARCOTIC UNIT shall serve in this assignmentforaperiodnottoexceedeighteen(18)months.ExtensionsmaybeapprovedbytheChief ofPoliceduetoinvolvementinamajorinvestigationorlengthycriminaltrial.

D. The procedure for administering the urinalysis program is outlined in appendix A of this generalorder.

E.EMPLOYEESwhohavebeenfoundtobeusingillegaldrugs,orabusingcontrolled substances or using alcohol or any other substance affecting performance of their duties shall be provided with a hearing, where evidence is presented and preserved, before action taken against the employee becomes final. The accused employee shall have a right to explain the presence of substancesinthespecimen.

Procedure #3.303

GRANTIE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title:SEXUAL HARASMENT COMPLAINTSProcedure:3.303 DateIssued: Revised:

REFERENCES: ILLINOIS REVISED STATUTES, CHAPTER 68, ARTICLES 1 AND 2 I.PURPOSE A. To establish policy and procedures regarding alleged incidents of sexual harassment. II.POLICY A. It is the policy of this department to: 1. Provide a work environment free from all forms of employee discrimination including incidents of sexual harassment. No employee will be subjected to unsolicited and unwelcome sexual overtures or conduct, whether physical or verbal. 2. Apply disciplinary action as appropriate to remedy the misconduct. 3. Keep the identity of personnel involved confidential. III.DEFINITIONS A. EMPLOYEE: All department personnel whether sworn or non-sworn. B. SEXUAL HARASSMENT: Any unwelcome sexual advances or requests for sexual favors or any conduct of a sexual nature when: 1. Submission to such conduct is made either explicitly or implicitly a term or condition of an individual's employment; 2. Submission to or rejection of such conduct by an individual is used as the basis for employment decisions affecting such individual, or; 3. Such conduct has the purpose or effect of substantially interfering with an individual's work performance or creating an intimidating, hostile or offensive work environment (Illinois Revised Statutes, Chapter 68, Art. 2, 101(E)).

C. The offensive behavior may be physical or verbal in nature. Examples of sexual harassment include but are not limited to the following: 1. Demeaning, leering or suggestive looks and obscene gestures. 2. Jokes or innuendoes intended for and directed to another employee; 3. Making acceptance of unwelcome sexual conduct or advances or requests for sexual favors of any nature a condition of employment or continued employment; 4. Sexual comments of a provocative or suggestive nature. IV.REPORTINGPROCEDURES A. EMPLOYEE 1. An employee who believes he or she has been the victim of sexual harassment will: a. Report immediately all allegations of sexual harassment to the Chief's office using the Complaints Against Personnel form. b. Take immediate action to limit the affected employees from any further work contact; c. Take immediate disciplinary action against the offending employee if the situation warrants it; d. Notify the Chief of Police of all alleged sexual harassment complaints by interdepartmental memorandum within twenty-four (24) hours of taking the report.

Procedure #3.304

GRANTIE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title:COMPUTER USAGE Procedure:3.304 DateIssued: Revised:

I.PURPOSE A. To provide guidelines for the use of departmental computers and allied equipment, information contained in the computer system, and Internet use. II.POLICY A. The Granite City Police Department is committed to providing an environment that encourages the use of computers and the gathering and storage of electronic information as essential tools to support the Department's mission. B. The use of the department computers and allied equipment imposes certain responsibilities and obligations on the employees of the department. It is the responsibility of each employee to ensure that this technology is used for proper business purposes, and in a manner that does not compromise the confidentiality of proprietary or other sensitive information. III.COMPUTERUSE A. Every employee is responsible for the security of the system to the degree that the job requires the use of information and associated systems. B. Confidential information shall be accessible only by personnel who are authorized in the performance of their duties. C. The system is primarily for business use and the department reserves the absolute right to review, audit and disclose all matters sent over the system (Departmental e-mail) and placed into storage. D. Loading software or applications without permission of the Chief, his designee, or System Administrator is prohibited. Employees shall respect the legal protection provided by copyright and licensing laws to software and data. The software will be licensed and registered through proper channels. E. Computers designated for an individual's use are not to be used by other employees without the consent of the individual, Chief of Police, his designee, or System Administrator.

F. The following activities, including but not limited to, are prohibited without authority form the Chief, his designee, or System Administrator: 1. Any malicious use, damage or disruption of the system (hardware or software). 2. Any attempt or success to delete, erase, or otherwise alter information stored in the system. 3. Changing computer configurations (desktop appearance, screensavers, printer setup, hiding the task bar, etc.). 4. The use of any department network, printing, or computer resources to display any improper communication (obscene, derogatory, defamatory, suggestive, harassing, etc.). IV.INTERNETUSE A. The Internet access provided by the department is a privilege of employment, not a right. Use of the Internet services is subject to internal review and monitoring. Employees that use this service agree to be subject to and abide by this policy. B. Users will not utilize the Internet system for: 1. Illegal, unlawful, or unethical purpose or to support or assist such purposes; 2. Partisan political purposes or commercial gain; 3. Harassing, intimidating, posting pornography or sexually explicit materials, or annoying another person via e-mail or messaging services; 4. Disrupting other users, service or equipment, unless for explicit police functions and under the direction of the Chief of Police or his designee; 5. Downloading images or videos unless for a job related use; 6. Procuring any items, goods, or contraband that are illegal to possess due to State or Federal law; 7. Monopolizing the network systems, overloading networks with excessive data, or disrupting the network system for use by others; 8. Downloading any software onto the department's equipment without the authority of the Chief of Police, his designee, or System Administrator; 9. Uploading any software licensed to the department or data owned or licensed by the department;

10. Participating in chat rooms or chat groups 11. Officers can not upload any image or video, using department or personal equipment, from the police department or incident onto any social network such as, but not limited to, Facebook, Myspace, Twitter, etc

C. Users shall: 1. Keep the use of the Internet system similar to personal telephone calls; 2. Keep personal e-mail at a minimum with at most small attachments; 3. Access only files and data that are their own, public domain, or to which they are authorized to access; 4. License and register any software downloaded; 5. Log off of the Internet after ending their session. V.VIOLATIONS A. Violations of this policy may result in disciplinary action, civil proceedings and criminal prosecution.

Procedure #3.305 GRANTIE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title: 3.305

EMERGENCY MEDICAL DISPATCH Procedure:

CERTIFICATES Date Issued: Revised:

I.PURPOSE

A. To create uniformity in the Continuing Dispatch Education (CDE) of certified Emergency MedicalDispatch(EMD)employeesandtoestablishstandardsthatassureappropriatetrainingtomeet requiredCDEhoursforre-certification.

II.POLICY

A. Employees that are certified in Emergency Medical Dispatch (EMD) will comply with the requirements to maintain an active certified status in EMD. Continuing Dispatch Education (CDE) is a requirement for re-certification with successful completion of the re-certification examination. EMD certified personnel will meet or exceed CDE standards established by the Madison County Emergency TelephoneSystemBoard(911)andtheNationalAcademyofEmergencyMedicalDispatch(NAEMD).

III.REQUIREMENTS

A.AcurrentCardiopulmonaryResuscitationcertification.

B. Twenty-four (24) hours of Continuing Dispatch Education (CDE) is required for recertificationeverytwo(2)years.ThefollowingarecategoriesofCDEapprovedbytheNationalAcademy ofEmergencyMedicalDispatch(NAEMD)forre-certification.

1. Protocol Review of Medical Priority Dispatch System (MPDS), especially of College of Fellowsupdates. Max:4credithours(2peryear)

2. WorkshopsandSeminarsrelatedtoEmergencyMedicalService(EMS),preferablytothe requiredskills,ofanEMD;i.e.airwaymanagement,reviewofessentialskill,scenarios,medical-legal issues,computer-aideddispatch,stressreduction,refreshercoursed,etc. Max:16credithours(8peryear)

3. Localplanning/managementmeetings,includinggeneralorganizationfordisaster,mass casualty,andHaz-Mat.

Max:8credithours(2peryear).

4. Quality Assurance case review, planning and analysis of issues or findings identified by dispatchQ.A.,theoreticallyorinpractice. Max:8credithours(4peryear)

5. Audio-Visual (films, videotapes, etc.) which illustrate and review proper emergency care andEMDprocedures.TitlesarerestrictedtothosethatareEMS,preferablyEMDrelated,andshould bewrittenontheapplication. Max:4credithours(2peryear).

6. Teaching the general public any topic within the scope of basic EMD/EMS relations. Synopsisofsubjecttaughtshouldbeincludedwithapplication. Max:4credithours(2peryear).

7. Miscellaneous-Thiscanincludeon-dutyworkexperienceasanEMD,EMT,Paramedic, etc. Max:4credithours(2peryear)

IV. CONTINUING DISPATCH EDUCATION (CDE) TRAINING

A. EMD certified employees shall successfully complete a Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation certifiedcourseasneededtohaveanactivecertification.

B. Employees that are certified EMD are to complete a combination of the following tasks to meettheCDErequirementsforre-certification.Asupervisororinstructorwillmonitorthetraining.After eachtaskiscompleted,writtennoticeshallbeforwardedtotheCaptainofPatrol.

1. ReviewtheprotocoloftheMedicalPriorityDispatchSystem(MPDS)atotalof2hoursper year.(2hoursperyear)

2. Expand their knowledge and abilities by attending seminars and workshops or in-service trainingfromsupervisorsandguestspeakersonEMDrelatedtopics.Topicsmayincludetelephone etiquette,stressmanagementorcomputer-aideddispatching.(8hoursperyear)

3. Attend staff organizational meetings concerning trauma, disaster management, Haz-Mat, etc.Monthlysafetymeetingsareincludedinthiscategory.(4hoursperyear)

4. Quality Assurance is monitored by the Madison County Emergency Telephone System Board (911). EMD certified employees are to regularly review the protocol review memos returned fromMadisonCountyEmergencyTelephoneSystemBoard(911).(4hoursperyear)

5.Reviewrecordedphonecalls,viewvideosandlistentoaudiotapesonEMDrelatedtopics. (2hoursperyear).

6. TeachthegeneralpublicoranindividualaboutanEMD/EMStopic.Thisincludestraining telecommunicators.(2hoursperyear)

7.Relatedactivitiesthatdonotfitintheothercategoriesoradditionalhoursinacategorythat hasreachedmaximumcredit.Thiscanincludehoursonthejob.(2hoursperyear)

V.CERTIFICATION

A. Completeandpassthere-certificationexaminationasadministeredbytheMadisonCounty Emergency Telephone System Board (911) and the National Academy of Emergency Medical Dispatch (NAEMD).

Procedure #3.602

GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title:OFF-DUTY ORProcedure:3.602 SECONDARY EMPLOYMENT DateIssued: Revised:

I.PURPOSE A. The purpose of this policy is to set forth guidelines to govern off-duty or secondary employment by members of the Police Department. II.POLICY A. The policy of this department is to provide guidelines to police employees to inform them of the types of secondary employment which are authorized; and to establish procedures to maintain accountability for the welfare of the department. These requirements are essential for the efficient operation of the police department and for the protection of the community. III.DEFINITIONS A. Employment: The provision of a service, whether or not in exchange for a fee or other consideration. Employment does not include volunteer charity work. B. Extra-DutyEmployment: Any employment that is conditioned on the actual or potential use of law enforcement powers by the police officer employee, including volunteer charity work. C.RegularOff-DutyEmployment: Any employment that will not require the use, or potential use of law enforcement powers by the off-duty employee. IV.PROCEDURES A. Officers wishing to engage in secondary employment are required to complete the attached "Notice of Secondary Employment" form and submit to the Chief's office prior to engaging in said secondary employment. In cases where employees may have multiple employers, a form is required for each employer. Officers are further required to notify the Chief's office when said employment is terminated. V.TWOTYPESOFOFF-DUTYEMPLOYMENT A. REGULAR OFF-DUTY EMPLOYMENT:

Employees may engage in regular off-duty employment that meets the following criteria: 1. Employment of a non-police nature in which vested police powers are not a condition of employment; the work provides no real or implied law enforcement service to the employer and is not performed during assigned hours of duty. 2. Employment that presents no potential conflict of interest between their duties as a police officer and their duties for their secondary employer. Some examples of employment representing a conflict of interest are: a. As a repossessor, or bill collector, towing of vehicles, or in any other employment in which police authority might tend to be used to collect money or merchandise for private purposes. b. Personnel investigations for the private sector or any employment that might require the police officer to have access to police information, files, records or services as a condition of employment. Unauthorized use of the Granite City Police Department's computer systemLEADS,REGISorcriminalhistoryfilesfortheuseinsecondaryemployment activitiesisstrictlyforbiddenandwillresultinseveredisciplinaryaction. c. Appearing in uniform during the performance of tasks other than that of a police nature. d. Assisting, in any manner, in the case preparation for the defense in any criminal or civil action or proceeding. Conducting activities for a business or labor group that is on strike. e. Working in occupations that are regulated by, or that must be licensed through the police department or its civilian board. 3. Employment that does not constitute a threat to the status or dignity of law enforcement as a professional occupation. Some examples of employment that constitute a threat to the status or dignity of the police as a professional occupation include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Establishments which sell pornographic books, magazines, sexual devices, or videos, or that otherwise provide entertainment or services of a sexual nature as prohibited by law. b. Any gambling establishment not exempted by law. B. EXTRA -DUTY EMPLOYMENT: Police officers may engage in extra-duty employment as follows:

1. Where a government, profit making or not for profit entity has an agreement with the police department for police officers in uniform or plain clothes who are able to exercise their police duties. 2. Types of extra-duty services which may be considered for contracting are: a. Traffic control and pedestrian safety. b. Crowd control. c. Security and protection of life and property. d. Routine law enforcement for public authorities. e. Plain clothes assignments. VI.REQUIREMENTSANDLIMITATIONS: A. Requirements and limitations on regular off-duty and extra-duty employment are as follows: 1. Any member wishing to engage in regular off-duty employment will submit a memo to the Chief of Police through the chain of command and receive permission from the Chief of Police to engage in regular off-duty employment. 2. In order to be eligible for extra-duty employment, a police employee must be in good standing with the department. Disciplinary actions will be taken into consideration when determining standing. The Chief of Police will have authority and control over extra-duty employment. Continued departmental approval of a police employee's extra-duty employment is contingent on such good standing. 3. Those officers who have not completed their probationary period, or who are on medical or other leave due to sickness, temporary disability or an on-duty injury shall not be eligible to engage in regular or extra-duty employment. 4. A police officer may work a maximum of 20 hours of regular off-duty or extra-duty employment, or a total of 60 hours in combination with regular duty in each calendar week. 5. The total hours does not include overtime and court hours. 6. Work hours for all off-duty employment must be scheduled in a manner that does not conflict or interfere with the police employee's performance of duty. 7. A police officer engaged in any off-duty employment is subject to call-out in case of emergency, and may be expected to leave his regular off-duty or extra-duty employment in such situations.

8. Permission for a police employee to engage in regular off-duty or extra-duty employment may be revoked where it is determined that such employment is not in the best interests of the department.

Procedure #3.700

Procedure #3.700
POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title:TRAINING ADMINISTRATIONProcedure:3.700 DateIssued: Revised:

I.PURPOSE A. To better prepare Department personnel to make decisive and informed decisions. B. To maximize effectiveness and productivity. C. To prevent civil and criminal liability by training all personnel in proper police procedures. II.POLICY A. The Department has an obligation to provide a professional standard of law enforcement service to the community. In fulfilling that responsibility it is essential that Department personnel be properly trained. This is true not only at the entrance level where officers must receive basic training prior to their assumption of police responsibilities, but it is a continuous process throughout each officer's career. III.PROCEDURE
A. TRAINING GOALS

1. To provide job related training for all Department personnel. 2. To train employees to be better prepared to act decisively and correctly in a broad spectrum of situations. 3. To enhance employee productivity and effectiveness through greater job knowledge. 4. To foster cooperation and unity of purpose among Department members through common training. 5. To provide training for specialization, promotional opportunity, and general safety of the employee and those with whom they come in contact

B. TRAINING FUNCTION

1. The training function within the Department will be vested with the Patrol Division Commander as the Department Training Officer. The Training Officer is responsible for providing training for all personnel in accordance with the goals of the Department. 2. The Training Officer is responsible for the following: a. To implement the Department's Comprehensive Training Plan; b. To ensure the requirements of the Law Enforcement Training Standards Board are met; c. To act as liaison with the training committee; d. To act as a liaison with S.I.L.E.C.; e. To assist the Field Training Cadre in planning and developing training programs according to the needs of the Department; f. To announce mandatory and all other available training for all personnel; g. To maintain training records of all personnel; h. To ensure training programs are being attended; i. To assist the Field Training Cadre in implementing training programs; j. To recommend instructors and develop training resources; k. To evaluate and coordinate all training programs in cooperation with the Field Training Coordinator.
C. TRAINING COMMITTEE

1. The Training Committee is responsible for assisting, developing and evaluating training needs, and serve as a means of input from different components of the Department. The Training Committee shall work closely with the Department Training Officer by providing suggestions and comments on all phases of the training function. These suggestions and comments are advisory in nature. 2. The Training Committee shall: a. Develop and maintain a Comprehensive Training Plan; b. Analyze training needs for both specific job categories and the Department in general;

c. Review current programs, suggest new programs and give recommendations for training needs; d. Solicit suggestions and ideas for training programs from those members of the Department they represent. 3. The committee shall be comprised of the following personnel: a. Training Officer (ex-officio) b. One Sergeant c. Field Training Officer Coordinator d. One Telecommunicator e. One Patrol Officer 4. Committee members shall be appointed by and report to the Chief of Police. 5. The Chief shall stagger the appointment of new committee members, excluding the Field Training Officer Coordinator and the Department Training Officer, so that two new committee members will be appointed every May and serve for a two year period. 6. The Training Committee should solicit suggestions from those they represent. Ideas and suggestions should be discussed and recommendations made based on merit of the suggestion and the training need. Barring budgetary limitations, the recommendations of the committee will have significant impact on training programs. 7. The recommendations of the committee are advisory in nature and are not binding upon the Department. The Chief of Police shall have the final authority to determine training measures.

D.ATTENDANCEREQUIREMENTS
1. The Training Officer will give written notice of training by routing a notification of training memo through the proper channels to the officer. 2. Personnel assigned to authorized training programs are required to attend all classes and other activities, except under the following circumstances: a. illness; b. personal emergency;

c. vacation; d. police business emergency; or e. authorized release from attendance. 3. The Training Officer shall be notified in all cases when an officer is unable to attend training. The officer scheduled for training shall notify the on duty supervisor or the Training Officer whenever unable to attend training. 4. Where training is mandatory by law, the Training Officer will make necessary arrangements for makeup training. 5. It will be the responsibility of the officer to arrange with the class instructor to make up necessary work or assignments. Excessive absence, or unexcused absence may result in being withdrawn from the class, in not being credited with successful completion, and/or appropriate disciplinary measures. 6. All personnel completing training courses shall receive documentation of such and a copy of the record shall be placed in the officer's file. 7. Attendance rosters will be made on all in-house training.

E.TRAININGCOSTREIMBURSEMENT
1. Generally, officers will not be reimbursed for mileage for attending training within the Department's service area. Special circumstances and exceptions for reimbursement will be reviewed by the Training Officer. 2. Reimbursement for mileage, meals and lodging outside the service area will follow the standards provided by the Law Enforcement Training Standards Board, or City procedures. 3. Meal allowances will be paid according to the current Union Contract. 4. When possible, the Department will provide funds in advance for certain travel expenses. 5. Personnel must complete a travel expense report upon completion of the training program. 6. Overnight accommodations will be provided as appropriate. In situations where cost effective housing is available through the training facility, personnel will be lodged at said facility. In all cases the most cost effective housing shall be utilized. 7. All tuition and required fees for materials, books, etc. will be paid by the City.

8. A Department vehicle may be used when available.

F.LESSONPLANS
1. Police Department in-service training programs shall require lesson plans. 2. In all training courses, lesson plans will be developed. These plans will include the following: a. guidelines and format for lesson plan development, b. a statement of performance objectives; and c. content of training and specification of the appropriate instructional technique, such as lecture, group discussion, panels or seminar. 3. Lesson plans will ensure that the subject to be covered is addressed completely and accurately, and is properly sequenced with other training materials. 4. Instructors shall ensure that all periods of instruction are adequately covered by a lesson plan outline. 5. Lesson plans will be required of all departmental and non-departmental instructors. 6. Responsibility for proper lesson plan development rests with the Training Officer. 7. Lesson plans shall include, as applicable, the following: a. Teaching techniques (lectures, group discussion, panel). b. Field experiences (operational experiences, observations). c. Presentations (lectures, lecture-discussion, lecture-demonstration). d. Problem solving (as reviewed by the Training Officer). e. Simulations (case study and role play). f. Statement of performance objectives. 8. Lesson plans shall be submitted to the Department Training Officer prior to the training date. All lesson plans must be approved before training begins. 9. The Training Officer will be responsible for the approval of lesson plans. This process is to ensure that lesson plans are consistent with departmental guidelines, policies and procedures.

G. TESTING PROCEDURES

1. Formal classroom instruction shall include written examination on the basis of two questions per single hour of instruction. Questions will be derived from instruction presented, shall have validity, and be job related. 2. All testing will have a pass/fail cutoff score. A 70% grade will be necessary to pass a training program. 3. Personnel failing any written test shall be given additional training in areas of deficiency and retested. 4. The testing format may be a written exam or a performance exercise. Written exams can include multiple choice, true or false, fill in the blank or essay questions. 5. Test development should be a cooperative effort between the instructor and the Training Officer. Final approval of all test questions and format will be the responsibility of the Department Training Officer.
H. TRAINING RECORDS

1. A record of any training received by department personnel will be maintained by the Training Officer. 2. Training records will include: a. Name b. Course title and instructor c. Where and when attended d. Hours of instruction e. Test score f. Copy of certificate 3. The Training Officer shall maintain records of training conducted by the Department. 4. Training records of classes will include: a. Course title, content and instructor b. Lesson plan

c. Names of attendees d. individual results of any tests administered. 5. Training records will not be released to anyone outside the Department except with the approval of the Chief of Police.
I. POST TRAINING COURSE EVALUATION

1. The Department Training Officer shall provide all personnel with a Training Program Evaluation Report form upon completion of any training course. These forms, when completed, shall be routed to the Training Officer. 2. The Training Officer shall meet with any officer who submits a negative evaluation. The meeting will be to critique the training course and provide a better understanding for the negative comments of the officer. 3. The Training Officer shall determine if the training academy or instructor should be informed of the negative evaluation. 4. Copies of all evaluation reports shall be provided to the Training Committee for review.

J.TRAININGINSTRUCTOR
1. The Department Training Officer is responsible for the selection of instructional staff for internal training programs. Instructors should possess demonstrated skill and knowledge in the topic they will instruct, as evidenced through their work, their formal training and previous instructing. 2. Personnel assigned as instructors for specific training will provide the instruction until the completion of the assignment. Training that needs to be repeated annually to ensure competency will necessitate continued training for the instructor. In most cases the tenure will be a minimum of five years. 3. Outside resources for providing instruction are necessary to meet many specific training needs. The selection process for these instructors is based on their experience, reputation and instructional material supplied to the Training Officer. This material is not limited to, but should include a lesson plan listing: a. training goals b. performance objectives

c. instrument for testing 4. The level of compensation for outside resources will be within the training budget, and approved by the Chief of Police.

3 Procedure #3.900 GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title: 3.900

PERFORMANCE EVALUATIONS

Procedure:

Date Issued:

Revised:

I.PURPOSE

A.To provide for the constructive evaluation of an employee's overall performance.

B.To provide a management system for detecting possible employee problems.

C.To bring consistent superior performance of employees to the attention of management.

D.To provide a basis for training needs and assessments.

II.POLICY

A. The Police Department will evaluate Department employees performance on a formal and periodic basis. The performance evaluation is intended to: promote a common understanding of individual needs, work objectives and standards of acceptable performance; provide employees with feedback as to how well the supervisor feels the employee is meeting expectations; suggest specific courses of action the employee can take in order to meet or exceed expectations; provide supervisors with feedback as to how they can help employees in their personal growth and development and to set objectives for future performance.

III.PROCEDURE

A.ORGANIZATION

1.Performance evaluation objectives are to: a.Initiate and maintain a communication channel between employee and supervisor.

b.Illustrate employee strengths and weaknesses.

c.Provide background needed in order to devise methods for improving employee performance.


d. Provide information used in developing employees for higher level and more responsible positions.

e.Point out areas of performance where the employee needs special training. f.Provide information used as a factor in promotions and reclassification. 2. A quarterly-annual performance evaluation will be given to each employee during March, June, September and December of every year. Completed evaluations will be returned to the Chief
through the chain of command.

3. Whenever an employees performance is deemed unsatisfactory, the supervisor will discuss this with the employee. A copy of this notice will be given to the employee whenever an
unsatisfactory performance has been noted.

4. The rater of an employee will be the employees immediate supervisor, and is responsible
for the following:

a. The performance evaluation should be representative of the employee's total performance and contribution for the entire evaluation period.

b.The rater should make sure that the criteria used for that performance evaluation is specific to the position(s) occupied by the employee during that rating period. The rater should review the job description for that employee before starting the evaluation process. c. Evaluations require well-planned, accurate and detailed information. Raters should take
enough time and be thorough with each evaluation.

d. The rater must discuss the performance evaluation with the employee. The rater and
employee must review and understand the content of the evaluation. The supervisor must sign the evaluation form to acknowledge that it has been read and discussed.

7. Raters should conduct evaluations uniformly. The raters will be rated by the Chief of Police regarding the fairness and impartiality of the ratings given to their employees.

8.All performance evaluations will be reviewed by the Chief of Police or his designee.

9. The employee must sign the performance evaluation report. Signing the performance
evaluation report acknowledges that the employee has read and discussed the evaluation with his immediate supervisor. Signing the evaluation report does not indicate agreement or disagreement with the contents of the report. The employee may make written comments on a department memo which will be attached to the evaluation report. These comments may include suggestions for improved performance, ways to improve the overall operation of the work unit, or concurrence or disagreement with the evaluation.

10. The completed evaluation report and any attachments will be copied in duplicate. One
copy will be given to the employee during the evaluation conference. One copy is retained by the rater, and the original is sent to the Chief of Police, or his designee, to be retained as part of the employee's record.


11. Contested performance evaluations will be reviewed by the Chief of Police. Employees will document the reasons for the contested evaluation and request a formal review with the Chief of Police. In this review process the Chief's decision is final.

B.COUNSELING

1.At the conclusion of the rating period, each employee will be counseled by their supervisor concerning:

a.The results of the performance evaluation just completed; b. The level of performance expected, rating criteria or goals for the new reporting period;
and

c. Career counseling relative to such topics as advancement, specialization, or training

appropriate for the employees position.

2. Supervisors will counsel their employees when necessary. Supervisors should review each periods activity with their personnel. Activity Reports are required by patrol personnel and each supervisor is responsible to make sure accurate records reflect each employee's activity for that period.

3. Performance evaluations will be discussed between the employee and the rater. This
will provide an opportunity for an open and constructive discussion of the employee's performance in relation to the requirements of their classification. It is the supervisor's responsibility to clearly explain to the employee what was taken into consideration in making the evaluation. The employee should be commended for work well done and helped to understand the areas in which they need improvement.

C.PROBATIONARY EMPLOYEES

1. Probationary officers and telecommunicators will be evaluated in accordance with training procedures #3.702 and 3.708.

2. Probationary civilian employees will be evaluated bimonthly by their immediate supervisor

during their probationary period.

3 Procedure #4.000 GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title:

PATROL OPERATIONS

Procedure: 4.000

Date Issued:

Revised:

I.PURPOSE

A.To provide continuous, effective and efficient 24 hour patrol service to the community.

B.To outline the general duties and responsibilities of the Patrol division.

II.POLICY

A. The importance of patrol to a community cannot be overstated. Whether it be gauged with the number of police patrol personnel, the portion of the budget allocated to patrol operations, or that the uniformed officer is frequently the most visible component of the Department, patrol is the foundation of police work. The manner in which patrol officers carry out their responsibilities affects not only the quality of justice, but also citizen perceptions of law enforcement and the criminal justice system.

III.PROCEDURE A.FUNCTIONS AND OBJECTIVES 1.Preventative patrol. 2.Crime prevention activities. 3.Response to calls for service. 4.Preliminary investigation of crimes and incidents. 5.Arrest and processing of prisoners. 6.Traffic direction and control. 7.Traffic crash investigation.

8.Maintenance of public order.

9.Auxiliary services. 10.Provisions of emergency services. 11.Development of positive relationships between citizens and the Department. 12.Reporting of information to appropriate organizational components.
B.ASSIGNMENT

1. The Chief of Police shall assign officers and supervisors to patrol shifts in accordance with the current Union Contract.

2. Officers will be assigned to a district by the shift supervisor at the beginning of the shift.
Officers shall be given exposure to all districts and are responsible for law enforcement services and activity within their district. Officers shall not leave their area without advising communications, unless in pursuit of a violator or directed by a supervisor or dispatch center.

3.Supervisors should rotate district assignments on a daily basis.

C.

RESPONSIBILITIES

a. Answering calls for service and general public assistance, providing the necessary aid and recording the information pertinent to the incident;

1.The Patrol division shall be responsible for:

b. complete area coverage and performance of tasks to accomplishment of Department

objectives;

c. the preliminary investigation of all cases, including the preservation of evidence and
effecting arrests;

d.enforcement of all traffic laws, regulations of traffic flow and investigation of all accidents; e.selective traffic enforcement and visible patrol; f. inspection and premise checks for all business, industrial and governmental buildings,
and;

g.identifying hazards and reporting them to the proper department component for corrective action.

D.OPERATIONS

1.Personnel in the Patrol Division will report for duty as assigned.

2. All personnel will be in full uniform of the day and equipped to receive information and perform their duties at the beginning of roll call.

3. Supervisors shall conduct a ten to fifteen minute roll call at the beginning of the tour of duty.

4.Roll call should cover, but is not limited to:

a.report briefing from prior 24 hours;

b.problem areas to be checked in an officer's beat; c.beat and squad car assignments; d.inspection of full uniform, appearance and equipment; e.schedule changes, new assignments and court dates; f.review procedures, directives and memos; g. investigation personnel will inform patrol officers of any pertinent information, pending
arrests or activity;

h.any hazardous areas, weather and road conditions, and training.

5. Attendance by investigative personnel at roll call, crime data bulletins distributed by the crime prevention officer, monthly staff meetings and review of new directives and procedures shall provide a basis for communications between the patrol division and the other components of the Department.

6.Officers, when assigned a call, shall respond safely and without delay.

7. Officers will respond in a routine, expeditious or emergency manner, as outlined in the

Operation of Emergency Vehicle procedure #4.002.

8. Two or more officers shall be assigned to answer calls where the nature of the situation is not readily ascertained, report of a crime in progress, domestic disturbances, 911 hang up calls, calls from liquor establishments, a danger may possibly exist or as directed by a supervisor.

9. Supervisors shall respond to all calls of major consequence and serious emergency. The supervisor shall take direct control at a major crime scene, pending the arrival of investigative personnel. The supervisor shall ensure that the scene is protected, witnesses are identified and offenders arrested.

10.Officers shall conduct a preliminary investigation of all criminal acts.

11. Followup investigations may be assigned to patrol officers by their shift supervisor when circumstances warrant, and:

a. the investigation is confined to the City limits or leaving the City authorized by the supervisor;

b.the investigation does not require a specialist's services;

c.sufficient manpower is available; and d.the investigation can be conducted during duty hours. 12. Field interviews are endorsed and encouraged by the Department. Field interviews help
identify persons of questionable intentions for possible followup action. Officers are encouraged to be aggressive, but be courteous and respectful of Constitutional rights. Officers shall document all field contacts on Field Contact cards and route them through their supervisor to the Detective Division.

13. Patrol officers shall immediately notify their supervisor when a confidential information
source is developed or used. Utilization of informants and criminal information shall be in strict compliance with all applicable legal standards and Department procedure # 4.204.

E.RADIO COMMUNICATIONS
1. Each officer is assigned a personal portable radio and shall carry it while on duty. It is the officer's responsibility to ensure that the radio batteries are kept charged and that the radio is in proper working order.

2. Officers shall identify themselves by their assigned number when calling the
communications center or another police unit.

3. Officers shall keep the communications center apprised of their status at all times so that
supervisors and fellow patrol officers know their status, including, but not limited to:

a.Arrival at a scene;

b.when making a vehicle or pedestrian stop;

c.when completing assignments and resuming patrol; and d.when leaving the vehicle for any reason.
4. Officers may use an Alternate Radio Frequency when the primary band traffic volume dictates and when other priority traffic takes precedence.

5. All radio traffic between patrol units and the communications center, or between other agencies and this department will be kept brief, concise and professional.

6. Officers must constantly be aware that all radio frequencies are shared with other police agencies, and shall remain courteous and professional at all times.


7. Officers shall use the Alternate Radio frequency for non-essential communication between patrol units.

F.DEPARTMENT MOTOR VEHICLES

1. Department vehicles used for traffic and general patrol will be clearly marked and distinguishable as Law Enforcement Emergency vehicles. The following markings and equipment shall be considered standard:

a. agency name, vehicle number, emergency telephone number, red and blue revolving emergency lights, siren and speaker assembly, spotlight, alley lights, offsetting flashing head lights, mobile radio transceiver and alternate radio frequency, personal protective equipment, flares, fire extinguisher, shotgun and ammunition, mobile data terminal, slim jim, radar unit, and an arrow light bar.

2.When requesting any replacements for the above equipment, or if the mobile radio or MDT needs repair, officers shall submit a memo to their supervisor. The report shall indicate the items requested and a brief reason for the request, when appropriate. When reporting trouble with a mobile radio or MDT, be as descriptive as possible when explaining the problem. The supervisor will forward the memo to the Administrative Service Commander for replacement or repair.

3. If the vehicle needs repair, a request for service form shall be completed for the Service Division. Notify the communications center to include the vehicle status on the pending summary report.

4. Seat belts and/or harnesses shall be used whenever patrol vehicles are in motion, by both the driver and passenger.

5. Any unmarked vehicle that may be used for traffic enforcement will be equipped with a siren and emergency lights.

G.NOTIFICATIONS

1. Coroner Investigator: The medical examiner will be called in all cases of sudden, violent, unattended or unexplained deaths.

2. Disruption of Utilities: The investigating officer shall immediately notify the dispatcher if there is any utility disrupted as a result of an accident, or severe weather. The dispatcher will then notify the proper authority.

3. Road Debris: The investigating officer will immediately notify the dispatcher of any road
debris or hazard. The dispatcher shall notify the proper authority for its removal.

4. Media: The news media will be informed by the shift supervisor, or his designee, of any
major traffic congestion or road closure to alert traffic to use alternate routes.

5. Notification of Death: medical emergencies or other messages of an emergency nature

involving life, health or safety will be delivered in person by the patrol officer assigned to that beat.

2 Procedure #4.002 GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title:

OPERATION OF EMERGENCY VEHICLESProcedure: 4.002

Date Issued:

Revised:

I.PURPOSE

A.To provide for the safe operation of Department vehicles as emergency vehicles.

II.POLICY

A. To carry out the mission of protecting life it may become necessary for an officer to operate a police vehicle as an emergency vehicle. It is the policy of this Department to safely respond to emergency situations.

III.DEFINITION

A.An emergency is a situation in which there is a high probability of injury or death to a person that could be averted or reduced by the presence of an officer.

B. An emergency vehicle is a police vehicle operated with its emergency lights and or siren activated.

III.PROCEDURE

A. Police vehicles will be operated as emergency vehicles when the officer has reasonable cause to believe a life is in danger or when in immediate pursuit of an offender. Communications personnel will attempt to ascertain the true degree of emergency involved in all complaints and relay this information to the cars dispatched.

B. The following may be considered some examples of emergency situations necessitating the operation of a police vehicle as an emergency vehicle:

1.Officer needs assistance.

2.Report of a forcible felony in progress.


3.A person calling for help in such a manner as to indicate immediate danger.

4.Report of an explosion.

5.Report of a fire with persons inside.

6.Report of a shooting or stabbing.

7.Report of an auto accident with injury or other extenuating circumstances.

8.Pursuit of an actual or suspected violator of the law.

9.Responding to an alarm.

10.A 9-1-1 hang up call.

11.An industrial accident.

12. Responding to a crime in progress in which there is a threat of physical danger to the parties involved.

C. Regardless of the nature of the emergency, officers should not drive in such a manner as
to endanger the life and property of another. Officers shall always consider road, traffic and weather conditions and their ability to control vehicles under adverse circumstances. Any use of electronic equipment, excluding the police radio, is prohibited:

1. The use of electronic equipment while responding to an emergency situation is prohibited. Some examples of electronic equipment are, but not limited to, the use of cell phones, texting, computer usage, etc

D. When responding to an emergency situation, an officer driving an authorized emergency vehicle may:

1. Proceed past a red or stop signal or stop sign, but only after slowing down as may be required and necessary for safe operation.

2.When approaching a "red" traffic light or stop sign an officer will:

a.decelerate and be prepared to stop,

b.enter the intersection only when it is safe,

c.yield to all moving vehicles and pedestrians,

d.accelerate only when it is safe.

3.When approaching a "green" traffic light an officer will:


a.decelerate and be prepared to stop,

b.enter the intersection only when it is safe.

c.accelerate only when it is safe.

4.Exceed speed limits so long as he does not endanger life or property.

5.Disregard regulations governing direction of movement and turning.

6.Drive against traffic on one-way streets only when there is no danger to life or property and then only with caution.

E. The following guidelines shall apply when operating a police vehicle as an emergency vehicle:

1.EMERGENCY LIGHTS a. The lights should be used in all situations in which the officer is to take liberties in his
driving and to expedite his free movement in order to reach his destination more quickly.

b.The lights are also to signal traffic violators to the extreme right of the roadway and stop. It may be necessary to use both the lights and the siren to effect the stop.

c.The lights are also used to assist motorists parked or stopped in hazardous locations.

d.When the patrol vehicle is parked or stopped on the roadway or in a hazardous location.

2.SIREN

a. The officer should be discreet in his use of the siren as it frequently complicates traffic problems. Under extreme conditions the siren should be activated continuously.

b. The siren should also be used to signal violators to stop when other means of attracting the violator's attention have failed.

c. Officers should use the siren based on existing traffic, roadway conditions, and the urgency of their arrival.

3. Emergency lights and siren in combination shall be utilized in the following circumstances:

a.During pursuit situations.

b.When responding to emergency situations.

c. When responding to an alarm, the siren may be deactivated so as not to announce your pending arrival.

4.Spotlight

a. The spotlight should be used as a protection to the officer when hazardous conditions exist.

b. The spotlight should be used to signal violators to stop but care must be exercised so as not to cause temporary blindness to the violator or other drivers on the roadway.

5.Public Address System

a.The public address system may be utilized to stop violators and direct their actions from a safe distance, so as to minimize the hazard to the officer.

b. The public address system may also be used in directing persons when unusual conditions exists, such as temporary traffic hazards or conditions and communicating with other persons.

6.Arrow Stick Lights

a.When off the road with a disabled motorist or traffic violator the officer may use the arrow stick lights in conjunction with the overhead emergency lights, if appropriate.

b. When pulled off the side of a roadway to complete an assignment or assist other units, these lights should be used to warn motorists.

F. Unmarked police vehicles will not generally be operated as emergency vehicles. Officers
operating unmarked vehicles will use extra caution because unmarked cars are more difficult for other drivers to identify as police vehicles.

G.Officers will not conduct an escort without prior approval of the watch commander.

1.Officers will not escort other emergency vehicles using flashing lights and sirens unless it is absolutely necessary to guide them to their destination.

2. Caution should be exercised especially when crossing intersections. Speed limits should not be exceeded.

3. Officers will not follow ambulances, fire apparatus, or other emergency vehicles so closely as to constitute a hazard.

4. Except as qualified below, officers will not use flashing lights and siren to escort nonemergency vehicles. This is an extremely dangerous practice that could expose the officer, Department and City to civil liability.

5. In cases of serious illness or injury, an ambulance will be called. Sick or injured persons should not be transported in Police Department vehicles.

6. If it is necessary to escort funeral processions, parades, or slow moving vehicles with oversize loads, the police vehicle's flashing lights may be used. Caution should be exercised while the escort is in progress.

Procedure #4.004

Procedure #4.004
GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title: REPORTING POLICE Procedure: 4.004 VEHICLE TRAFFIC CRASHES Date Issued: Revised:

I. PURPOSE A. To provide for investigation and uniform reporting of traffic crashes involving Department vehicles. II. POLICY A. Whenever the operator of a police vehicle from the Police Department is involved in a traffic crash, certain procedures will be implemented to safeguard the objectivity of the investigation. Watch Commanders should consider the nature and circumstances of the traffic crash and protect the integrity of the Department and all individuals involved. III. PROCEDURE A. The operator of any police vehicle involved in any vehicular traffic crash within the corporate City limits will: 1. Allow the vehicles to remain in the post accident position, if traffic conditions permit. Under no circumstances should they be removed from the immediate vicinity. 2. Request that the area Sergeant respond to the accident scene. 3. Request medical aid when necessary. B. All traffic crashes which occur within the corporate City limits involving a police vehicle, will be investigated by the area Sergeant who will complete the Traffic Crash Report including a diagram. C. Watch Commanders may request the assistance of an accident investigator to investigate any traffic crash involving injuries, extensive damage to property, or where special circumstances are present, such as potential liability to the City.

D. The operator of the vehicle involved in a traffic crash will submit an Officer Daily Report explaining the circumstances of the traffic crash. This memo will be prepared and submitted before the operator ends his tour of duty. E. The Sergeant investigating the traffic crash will submit a Supervisors Investigative Report Motor Vehicle, to the Chief of Police, through the chain of command, indicating the findings of his investigation. This report will include the following information: 1. traffic crash report number, 2. charge and court date, if an arrest is made, 3. citation number and court date if a ticket is issued, 4. other drivers insurance company and policy number, 5. brief narrative of the crash, 6. number and description of photographs taken, 7. name of accident investigator, if one used, and; 8. findings concerning negligence of operator and recommendations relating to corrective action and/or discipline. F. If the vehicle operator is disabled and cannot prepare the necessary reports, the investigating Sergeant will, when medically permissible, interview the injured operator and prepare the report. G. The investigating Sergeant will examine the damaged vehicle to determine if it is safe for use, considering both mechanical defects and unsightliness. H. The operator of any police vehicle involved in any traffic crash outside of the corporate City limits will: 1. Allow the vehicles to remain in the post accident position, if traffic conditions permit. Under no circumstances should they be removed from the immediate vicinity. 2. Notify the proper jurisdiction and request medical aid if necessary. 3. Contact the communications center and have them advise the on duty watch commander. 4. Obtain a copy of the Traffic Crash Report from the reporting agency. 5. Submit a memo explaining the circumstances of the crash.

I. The on duty watch commander will complete a Supervisors Investigative Report - Motor Vehicle after interviewing the operator involved in the traffic crash and reviewing the traffic crash report. The watch commander will submit this report to the Chief of Police, through the chain of command. This report will include the following information: 1. traffic crash report number, 2. charge and court date, if an arrest is made, 3. citation number and court date if a ticket is issued, 4. other drivers insurance company and policy number, 5. brief narrative of the crash, 6. number and description of photographs taken, 7. name of accident investigator, if one used, and; 8. findings concerning negligence of operator and recommendations relating to corrective action and/or discipline. J. If the vehicle operator is disabled and cannot prepare the necessary reports, the investigating watch commander will, when medically permissible, interview the injured operator and prepare the report.

Procedure#4.005

GRANITECITYPOLICEDEPARTMENT

Title:HATE CRIME RELATEDProcedure:4.005 INCIDENTS DateIssued: DateRevised: I.PURPOSE A. This policy is designed to assist employees in identifying crimes motivated by bias towardanindividual'srace,religion,ethnicbackgroundand/orsexualorientationandtodefine appropriatestepsforassistingvictimsandapprehendingsuspects. II.POLICY A. It is the policy of the Police Department to protect the constitutional rights of all citizens regardlessoftheirrace,color,ethnicity,orreligion.Whentherightsofanycitizenareinfringed upon by intimidation, force, or violence, the Department shall expend resources necessary to conductathoroughinvestigation,identifytheperpetrators,andbringthembeforethecourt. B.Therewillbespecialemphasisplacedonvictimassistanceandcommunitycooperationto reducethefearsofthevictimandthecommunity. C.ThePoliceDepartmentwillnottoleratemaliciousorcriminalincidentsthatareraciallyor religiously motivated. The Department will also investigate incidents, non-criminal in nature, thatadverselyaffectthecommunity. III.DEFINITION A.HateCrime:ahatecrimerelatedincidentisanactorathreatenedorattemptedactbyany person or persons against the person or property of another individual or group which may in any way constitute an expression of hostility toward the victim because of the persons actual orperceivedrace,color,creed,religion,ancestry,gender,sexualorientation,physicalormental disability,ornationalorigin.Suchactsinclude,butarenotlimitedto,vandalism,crossburning, fire bombings, bomb threats, assaults, battery, threatening phone calls, and any other incidents wheretheresultoftheactionisrealorperceived. B.Race: A group of persons who possess common physical characteristics (e.g., color of skin,eyesand/orhair,facialfeatures,etc.)geneticallytransmittedbydescentandhereditythat distinguishthemasadistinctdivisionofhumankind(e.g.,Asians,blacks,whites,etc).

C.EthnicGroup:Agroupofpersonsofthesameraceornationaloriginwhosharecommonor similartraits,languages,customsandtraditions(e.g.,Arabs,Hispanics,etc.). D.Religious Group: Any persons who share the same religious beliefs regarding the originandpurposeoftheuniverseandtheexistenceornonexistenceofasupremebeing(e.g., Catholics,Jews,Protestants,atheists,etc.). E.Sexual Orientation: A sexual attraction toward, and responsiveness to, members of one's ownsexormembersoftheoppositesex(e.g.,gays,lesbians,heterosexuals,etc.).
IV.FACTORSTOBECONSIDEREDINIDENTIFYINGHATECRIMERELATEDINCIDENTS:

A. The motivation behind the act determines whether an incident is hate related. Although noonefactorisconclusive,thefollowingcriteria,appliedsingularlyorincombination,should beusedtodetermineifprobablecauseexiststobelievethatanincidentwasmotivatedentirely orinpartbyanimositytowardthevictimbecauseofhisactualorperceivedrace,color,creed, religion,ancestry,gender,sexualorientation,physicalormentaldisabilityornationalorigin. 1.Werewords,symbols,oractsthatareormaybeoffensivetoanidentifiablegroupusedby theperpetrator,oraretheypresentasevidence?Forexample,isthereaburningcrossora paintedswastika,orwerederogatorywordsorslursorgraffitidirectedataparticularracial, religious,ethnicorotherminoritygroup? 2.Arethevictimandthesuspectedperpetratormembersofdifferentracial,religiousorethnic groups? 3. Has the victim or victims group been subjected to past similar incidents? Has there beentensionorhostilitybetweenthevictimsgroupandanotherparticularracial,religiousor ethnicgroup? 4.Isthevictimtheonlyminoritygroupmemberintheneighborhoodoroneofjustafewsuch persons? 5.Didthevictimrecentlymoveintothearea?Isthevictimacquaintedwithneighborsand or local community groups? Has there been evidence of hostility toward the victim by neighbors? 6. When multiple incidents occur at the same time, are all the victims of the same race,ethnicity,religion,nationaloriginorsexualorientation? 7.Doesameaningfulportionofthecommunityperceiveandrespondtothesituationasahate crimerelatedincident? 8. Does the incident appear to be timed to coincide with a specific holiday or date ofsignificance,(e.g.MartinLutherKingDay,RoshHashanah)?

9. Has the victim been involved in recent public activity that would possibly make him a target? Has the victim been associated with any prominent recent or past activities relating to his race, ethnicity, religion or sexual orientation, (e.g., NAACP, gay rights rally, demonstrationsbyoragainsttheKKK)? 10.Hastherebeenpriororrecentnewscoverageofeventsofasimilarnature? 11. What was the manner and means of attack, (e.g., color of paint, symbols or signs used, unusual spelling of the words used)? Is the modus operandi similar to other documentedincidents? 12. Is there an ongoing neighborhood problem that may have initiated or contributed to the act, (e.g., could the act be retribution for some conflict between neighbors or with area juveniles)? 13. Does the perpetrator responsible have a true understanding of the impact of the crime/ incidentonthevictimorothergroupmembers?Aretheperpetratorsjuveniles? 14. Does the crime/incident indicate possible involvement by an organized hate group, (e.g.,KKK,AmericanNaziParty)?Forexample: a.Istheliteratureprintedorhandwritten?Doesitcontainanidentifiablehategroupsymbol orinsigniaorhategroupaddress? b.Isthereanydocumentedorsuspectedorganizedhategroupactivityinthearea? V.INITIALRESPONSEPROCEDURE A. When an officer at the scene of an incident believes that it may have been motivated by racial,religious,ethnicorsexualorientationbias(RRES),theofficershalltakeanypreliminary actionsnecessary,suchas 1.determiningwhetheranyperpetratorsarepresentand,ifso,takingappropriateenforcement measures; 2.restoringordertothecrimesceneandtakinganynecessaryactionstogaincontrolofthe situation; 3.identifyinganyinjuredpartiesandtakingstepstoprovidemedicalassistance; 4.conductapreliminaryinvestigation; 5.identifyinganywitnessesorotherswhohaveknowledgeofthecrime; 6.protectingthecrimescene;and

7.summoningafieldsupervisortothescene. 8.preparetheappropriatereport 9. provide assistance in accordance with the Departments procedure for victim/witness assistance.

B.REPORTINGOFHATECRIMERELATEDINCIDENTS
1. A written report and thorough follow-up investigation will be made for all hate related incidents.Thereportwillbemaderegardlessofthevictim'sdesireforprosecution.Insome cases,themotivationbehindtheactwillbeunclear.
VI.SUPERVISORSRESPONSIBILITY

A.Wheninformedthatahatemotivatedincidenthasoccurred,thesupervisorwill: 1.Respondtothescenetodeterminetheseriousnessoftheincident; 2.determinewhetheradditionalpersonnelareneeded; 3. notify the Patrol Division Commander, the Chief of Police, an investigator, or other personnelasnecessary; 4.takewhateverstepsarenecessarytopreventtheincidentfromescalating; 5.Provideimmediateassistancetothecrimevictim,suchas a.expressingempathyforthevictimandshowingasincereinterestinhiswell-being; b. expressing the law enforcement agency's official position on the importance of these cases, the measures that will be taken to apprehend the perpetrators, and the officers' and department'sinterestinthevictim'swellbeing; c.allowingthevictimaperiodinwhichtoventilatehisimmediateconcernsandexpresshis feelings; d.assistingthevictiminidentifyingandcontactingindividualsoragenciesthatmayprovide supportandassistance.Thesemayincludefamilymembersorcloseacquaintances,family clergyman or departmental chaplain and community service agencies that provide shelter, food,clothing,childcareorotherrelatedservices;and e.providingsecurityandprecautionaryadvicetothevictimandarrangingforanyadditional securitythatmayberequiredforprotectionofthevictim.

6.supervisethepreliminaryinvestigation;toincludepreliminaryinterviewsofthevictimand anywitnesstotheincident. 7.Ensurethatallrelevantfactsaredocumentedonanincidentand/orarrestreportandmake aninitialdeterminationastowhethertheincidentshouldbeclassifiedasanRRESoffense. 8. Assist the Patrol Division Commander and the Chief of Police in carrying out any necessarycommunityrelationsfunctions.
VII.INVESTIGATORSRESPONSIBILITY

A. When responding to the scene of an alleged RRES incident, investigators shall assume controlofthefollow-upinvestigation.Thisincludes: 1.Assumecontrolofanynecessaryfollow-upinvestigations; 2.assuringthesceneisproperlyprotected,preservedandprocessedandallphysicalevidence oftheincidentisremovedassoonaspossible.Ifevidenceofaninflammatorynaturecannot bephysicallyremoved(e.g.,paintedwordsorsignsonawall)theownerofthepropertyshall be contacted to remove such material as soon as possible and the officer shall follow up to ensurethatthisisaccomplishedinatimelymanner; 3.conductallnecessarycrimescenesearches,surveillances,oractivitiestosecureevidence andapprehendtheoffender; 4. conducting a comprehensive interview with all victims and witnesses at the scene, or as soonaspossiblethereafter,andcanvassingtheneighborhoodforadditionalpersonalsources ofinformation; 5. notifying other appropriate personnel in the chain of command, depending on the nature and seriousness of the offense, and its potential inflammatory and related impact on the community; 6.contacttheappropriatefederal,state,andlocallawenforcementagenciesforassistanceif necessary; 7. working closely with the prosecutor's office to ensure that a legally adequate case is developedforprosecution; 8. making a final determination as to whether the incident should be classified as an RRES crime;and 9.completinganyreportsnecessarytocomplywithstatisticalreportingrequirementsforhate crimes. 10.keeptheChiefofPoliceandthevictiminformedofthestatusandanychangesinthecase.

 B. Investigative officers shall also take the lead role in providing ongoing assistance to the crimevictimtoinclude: 1. contacting the victim periodically to determine whether he is receiving adequate and appropriateassistance;and 2.providingongoinginformationtothevictimaboutthestatusofthecriminalinvestigation. C.TheDetectiveDivisionisresponsibleformaintainingafileonallhatemotivatedincidents andestablishingaliaisonwiththeappropriatefederal,state,andlocalagenciesforintelligence informationexchange. D.Afollow-upinvestigationwillbeconductedbyamemberoftheDetectiveDivisiononall reportsofhatecrimerelatedincidents.

6 Procedure #4.006

GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title: LAW ENFORCEMENT CANINE Procedure:4.006

Date Issued:

Revised:

I.PURPOSE

A. It is the purpose of this policy to provide guidelines for the management of the department's canine unit and use of police canines in field operations.

II.POLICY

A. Because of a superior sense of smell and hearing and potential aggressiveness, the trained law enforcement canine is a valuable supplement to the police workforce. However, utilization of canines requires adherence to procedures that properly control their use of force potential and that channel their specialized capabilities into legally acceptable crime prevention and control activities.

III.DEFINITION

A.Canine Team:An officer handler and his assigned police canine.

IV.PROCEDURES

A.

CANINE UNIT UTILIZATION

1. The fact that an officer is a canine team shall in no way hamper the shift commander in making duty assignments on a day-to-day basis.

2. Canine teams are available on a 24-hour, on-call basis to conduct building searches for offenders in hiding; assist in the arrest or prevent escape of serious or violent offenders; protect officers or others from death or serious injury; track suspects, or locate lost or missing persons, hidden instruments or evidence of a crime; and detect the presence of concealed narcotics.

a.Canine teams shall not be used/ called out to respond to minor complaints.

 V.CANINE AND HANDLER RESPONSIBILITIES A.Canine handlers are responsible for determining whether a situation justifies canine use and
the appropriate tactical measures that should be taken. The on-scene supervisor shall assess and review the situation. If the supervisor's assessment and the canine handler disagree on use of the canine then the canine unit supervisor will be contacted/notified. When time does not permit such notification, the directions of the on-scene supervisor shall be followed.

B. The canine supervisor or handler will have final authority in matters concerning the safety of the canine team.

C. Police canines shall not be handled or given commands by anyone other than the assigned handler or approved trainer.

D.Should the handler of a canine team be injured or otherwise unable to command the canine:

1.Contact the handler's spouse/family member to take control of the canine.

2.Contact another canine handler for assistance.

3. If unable to contact a family member/spouse or other canine handler, supervisors may utilize the canine snare or contact Animal Control to respond to the scene. A police canine is to be tranquilized only as a last resort and then only if the animal is a threat to other officers or the public. a. the canine is to be secured prior to the incapacitated handler being removed from the scene.

E. Requests for canine team assistance shall be directed to the first line supervisor or the shift commander in the absence of a first line supervisor.

1. A request by an outside agency for use of a canine team shall be approved by the shift commander.

F. Canine teams will follow normal chain of command for Administrative purposes. If one (1) of the canine teams is comprised of a ranking officer, he shall be regarded as the immediate canine supervisor.

G.In the event that a canine team is needed for a specific task, such as tracking a fleeing felon, drug interdiction/detection, etc., a team may be called out at the discretion of the Shift Commander.

1. When possible, the senior or ranking canine handler should be contacted first so he may make determination of whether the situation necessitates a response.

VI.

UNIT QUALIFICATIONS AND TRAINING

1.A willingness to remain with the unit for at least seven years.

A.Applicants for the police canine unit must have:

 2. A willingness (together with other family members) to care for and house the canine at the
officer's residence with a secure outdoor area for the canine.

3.A strong desire to work with canines and willingness to care for and train the animal. 4. The ability to pass designated physical fitness and agility tests related to the tasks of
canine handling.

5. At least five years of uniform patrol experience with satisfactory work performance, disciplinary and medical/ sick leave records B.The Chief of Police shall be responsible for selection of canine handlers.

C. All departmental canines must meet certification requirements. Untrained canines may not be used for canine duty.

D. New canine handlers must complete the prescribed canine training course and successfully meet all course requirements.

E. Canine handlers are required to demonstrate acquired abilities to the Chief of Police or his designee on a periodic basis.

VII.

CANINE BITES AND INJURIES

1. Use of specially trained police canines for law enforcement responsibilities constitutes a real or implied use of force. In this, as in other cases, officers may only use that degree of force that reasonably appears necessary to apprehend or secure a suspect as governed by the department's use of force policy. In all instances where a canine is deployed in a tactical situation, a written report shall be submitted to the watch commander. Whenever a canine bites an individual, whether or not in the line-of duty, the handler shall:

a.Notify the watch commander; b.Obtain medical treatment for the person; c.Take color photographs of the affected area following medical treatment; and d. Submit a written report whenever it has been alleged that a canine has bitten or otherwise
injured an individual. The report must detail the circumstances surrounding the incident, the identity of the individual involved and any witnesses, the extent of the injuries if known, and measures taken in response to the incident. The report shall be filed according to the department's use of force policy.

2. Whenever a canine does bite an individual, whether it be on command of the handler or of

the animal's own volition; the Madison County Animal Control officer must be notified. This notification is mandated by statute and Departmental regulation and must be done as soon as practical after the bitten individual has been subdued and medical treatment (if necessary) has been rendered. After the Animal Control officer is contacted, he will make arrangements to examine the canine. Per Statute, a police K9 may continue to perform regular duties. Any period of observation may be under the supervision of a police officer. The supervision shall consist of the dog being locked in a kennel, performing its official

duties, in a police vehicle, or remaining under the constant supervision of the K-9 handler.

3. If the County Animal officer is not available at time of bite, a message is to be left, if possible and contact made at the next business day.

4. Through arrangement with the County Animal Control officer, the Departmental veterinarian may examine the involved canine in lieu of the County Humane Control officer.

5.If a bite is executed during training, an examination and waiver is not necessary.

6. Currently, the Madison County Animal Control officer is Dr. David Hall and can be reached at one of the following locations:

Madison County Animal Control Office Edwardsville, IL

Creekwood Animal Hospital (618) 931-0101

7. The Departmental veterinarian is Dr. Allan Spector of Creekwood Animal Hospital. Dr. Spector's home number is 618-567-3573/618-567-3574.

THE ABOVE NUMBERS ARE NOT FOR PUBLIC DISSEMINATION, BUT ONLY FOR CANINE TEAM USE. VIII.

BUILDING SEARCHES FOR SUSPECTS IN HIDING

A. A primary use of departmental canines is for locating suspects in buildings or related structures where a search by officers would create an unnecessary risk. These searches shall be governed by the following:

1.Patrol officers shall secure the building perimeter. 2. Communications center personnel shall contact the building's owner to determine whether
there may be tenants or others in the building and to ascertain the building's layout.

3. When a canine building search is anticipated, a preliminary search by officers should not
be conducted, as this will interfere with the canine's ability to discriminate scents.

4. The on-scene supervisor shall also take the following steps in preparation for the canine
search:

a.Evacuate all tenants, workers or others from the facility. b. Request that all air conditioning, heating or other air-blowing systems be shut off so as
not to interfere with the canine's ability to discriminate scents.

5. The canine officer will confirm that the perimeter is secure before entering the building.
Officers shall secure all exits and limit communications to those of a tactical nature.

6. The canine may be unleashed during a building search unless there is an imminent risk of injury to innocent persons within the facility.

7.The canine may not be used to search facilities that contain substances potentially harmful to the animal unless overriding risk to human life is present.

8. Before starting the search, the handler or other officers shall loudly announce and repeat the statement that there are police officers on the premises and that a trained police canine will be released if the individual does not surrender. Officers shall allow a reasonable amount of time for the suspect to respond. Officers shall repeat the warning on each level of all multilevel structures.

9. When apprehending suspects in these or related circumstances, canines shall be commanded to disengage as soon as the suspect is subdued or readily complies with officer direction.

10. Officers may not transport arrestees in the same vehicle with a law enforcement canine unless alternative transportation is not available and immediate transport is essential for safety or security reasons.

IX.

CROWD CONTROL

A. Canine teams may be present where large groups of people are gathering, however, canine teams shall not be used for crowd control at peaceful demonstrations. B. Canine teams may be used for crowd control upon approval of the watch commander to protect life or property during a riot or other major unauthorized gathering that cannot be controlled by other means. In these situations, canines shall:

1. Be short leashed at all times unless no other means are available to protect an individual
from serious injury; and

2. Not initiate any offensive action, unless to guard against imminent loss of life or serious
bodily injury.

X.

DRUG DETECTION

A. Use of police canines in a drug detection capacity is authorized in the following situations and under the following conditions:

1. The canine handler shall maintain records that document the use and the proficiency of
individual canines in drug detection. This documentation shall be readily available to canine officers and others who may need it when seeking warrants.

2. Random exploratory sniffing of luggage, packages or other inanimate objects may be

conducted in public facilities and terminals, as authorized by the Chief of Police or his designee.

3. Exploratory sniffing in these facilities shall be confined solely to those areas open to the
general public and, whenever possible, with advance knowledge and consent of the appropriate facility manager.

 4. Exploratory sniffing shall be conducted without interference or annoyance to the public or

interruption of facility operations.

5.Canine sniffs conducted in areas restricted to the public are considered searches and may
be conducted only with reasonable suspicion or probable cause to believe that specific items contain illegal narcotics.

B. Patrol officers may detain for a reasonable length of time, vehicles, luggage or related items for the purposes of requesting a canine sniff if reasonable suspicion exists.

1. When a drug detection canine alerts to luggage or related items, in this or other circumstances, a warrant or consent to search must be obtained before it is opened unless exigent circumstances exist to conduct an on-site search.

2. Sniffing of an individual's person is not recommended. Individuals should be searched by hand and not by a canine. C.The use of drug detection canines in public schools is permitted only when:
1.The school's principal or designated authority requests or approves use of the canines;

2. There is reasonable suspicion to believe that illegal narcotics are being distributed and/or
consumed on the premises.

D Sniffs of the exterior of homes -- either individual dwellings or the common areas of multiple
unit dwellings -- may be permitted when:

1.The officer has probable cause to be on the property.

2.The owner has given consent.

3.A search warrant has been obtained. E.Drug-sniffing canines may be used to sniff motor vehicles when: 1. Reasonable suspicion exists to believe the operator or passengers are in possession of illegal narcotics; or

2. During a valid vehicle stop, the canine is used to sniff the vehicle's exterior in an exploratory manner. Unless the canine alerts to the vehicle, the operator may not be detained longer than necessary to conclude the business associated with the initial stop.

XI.

TRACKING

A. Police canines are available with watch commander approval to track missing persons or suspects, or to locate evidence that the watch commander has reason to believe has been abandoned or hidden in a specified open area. Such searches are subject to the following conditions and limitations:

1.When officers are pursuing suspects and contact with the suspect is lost, the officer, before summoning a canine team shall:

a.Stop and pinpoint the location where the suspect was last seen; b.Shut off engines of vehicles in the area if possible; and c.Avoid vehicle or foot movement in the area where the suspect or subject was last seen. 2. Canines used for tracking persons should remain on a leash of sufficient length to provide
a reasonable measure of safety to the subject of the search without compromising the canine's tracking abilities.

3. Canine teams may only be used to locate small children when there is a reasonable
suspicion of foul play or a belief that serious bodily harm or death will occur if the child is not located immediately. Where the use of a canine is deemed necessary, the canine officer shall explain the risks of the child being attacked to the parents or next of kin, and their approval shall be obtained prior to the use of the canine. If used to track a small child the canine will remain leashed.

4. Canine teams may not be used to apprehend anyone suspected to be under the influence
of drugs or alcohol if no other crime is involved, or the mentally disturbed if no crime is involved.

B.On-scene personnel shall: 1.Secure the perimeter of the area to be searched; 2. Secure the integrity of the area to be searched by keeping all personnel out of the area;
and

3.Protect all items of clothing that will be used for scent from being handled.

XII.

CANINE USE AND CARE

A. Police canines shall not be used for breeding, participation in shows, field trials, exhibitions or other demonstrations, or for off-duty employment unless authorized by the Chief of Police or his designee.

B. Canine handlers are personally responsible for the daily care and feeding of their animal to include:

1.Maintenance and cleaning of the kennel and yard area where the canine is housed;

2.Provision of food, water and general diet maintenance as prescribed by the departmentally authorized veterinarian;

3. Grooming on a daily basis, or more often as required by weather, working conditions or other factors;

4.Daily exercise (police canines are not permitted to run at large unattended); and

5.General medical attention and maintenance of health care records. 6. The canine team will be assigned a Department vehicle. The vehicle will be maintained
and housed by the officer assigned.

C. Where the handler is unable to perform these and related duties due to illness, injury or
leave.

1.Another canine handler may be assigned to temporarily care for the dog or,

2. The canine may be housed in a departmental approved kennel when the handler is unavailable.

D. Teasing or agitating a police canine is strictly prohibited unless performed has part of a training exercise.

E.Handlers shall not permit anyone to pet or hug their canine without their prior permission and immediate supervision. Should a civilian express a desire to do so, he should be informed that police canines are serious working dogs and that they can be dangerous if improperly approached.

F.A canine handler may apply to take possession of his dog where:

1.The canine is retired from duty or relieved due to injury; or

2.The handler is transferred, promoted or retires and the chief of police decides not to retrain
the canine for another handler.

XIII.CANINE USE OF FORCE

A.A canine handler must maintain control of his canine at all times whether on or off lead.

B. A canine may be deployed to apprehend/engage a fleeing felon only after notification is given in a loud distinct command to stop or the canine will be released.

C. Canines may NOT be deployed to apprehend offenders of minor violations including misdemeanors and minor traffic offenses.

D.A canine handler should consider the Supreme Court ruling of Graham Vs. Connor when
deploying their canine unit.

E. A canine may be deployed in officer safety situations when an offender is hiding and
refuses to surrender. If the offender refuses to come out of hiding the canine may be deployed only after notification to the offender that the canine will be released if he refuses to surrender. If the offender refuses to come out the canine may be deployed to subdue the offender and make the situation safe for officers to take the subject into custody. During these situations the canine may be released from the lead at the discretion of the handler.

 F. Canines may engage an offender when the handler or another officer is under attack or
under threat of attack. If there is threat or attack, whenever possible, the handler should warn the offender to cease his threat or the canine will be released.

G. A canine may be used to track individuals; however, the canine must be kept on a fifteen
(15) foot lead (or less) and in direct control of the handler at all times.

H. The canine unit may only use that degree of force that is reasonably necessary to
apprehend or secure a suspect as governed by the Department's use of force policy. In all instances where a canine is deployed in a tactical situation, a report shall be submitted. Whenever a canine bites an individual, whether or not in the line of duty, the handler shall abide by section VII of this policy.

Procedure 4.014

GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title:ANIMAL COMPLAINT ENFORCEMENTProcedure:4.014 DateIssued: DateRevised:

I.PURPOSE A. To provide a guideline for department response to animal complaints. B. To establish a procedure for handling animal bite reports and impoundment. II.POLICY A. The Police Department will handle stray, injured, lost or found animals in a humane manner. III.PROCEDURE
A. WILD, STRAY, OR INJURED ANIMALS

1. When a call is received concerning an animal complaint, the communications operator will determine if the complaint involves a wild animal or a stray domestic animal. 2. If the call concerns a stray domestic animal, a unit will be dispatched to attempt to identify and contact the owner of the animal. 3. If the stray domestic animal presents a danger to the public, and the owner cannot be located, an Animal Control Officer will be contacted. 4. If the stray domestic animal does not present a danger to the public, and the owner cannot be located, a notification form will be completed and forwarded to the Humane Department to attempt to locate and take custody of the animal on the next business day. 5. Officers should enforce ordinances concerning animals 6. If the animal is vicious and cannot be captured without injury to the officer, or presents a danger to the public, the officer may use a weapon to destroy the animal. Animals requiring destruction will be killed through the most reasonable method available for the time, location, and circumstances. The officer will document his actions on an Officer Daily Report and forward to the Patrol Division Commander through the chain of command.

7. If the call concerns a nuisance wild animal, i.e., squirrel, skunk, raccoon, opossum, etc., a unit should be dispatched to handle the incident. If the officer determines the animal presents an immediate danger to the public, an animal control officer will be contacted.
B. ANIMAL BITES

1. Officers will respond promptly to all reports of animal bites and ensure that the person bitten has received medical attention.
2. The officer will attempt to locate the owner of the animal, advise them of the incident and

determine if the animal has had its necessary immunization shots.

3. If the animal has had its immunization shots, the owner will be instructed to take their

animal to a veterinarian. 4. If the animal has not had its shots, an Animal Control Officer will be summoned to take custody of the animal. 5. The officer will obtain all necessary information to complete an animal bite report for the Department of Animal Control. 6. If the animal is a stray, a Humane Department or Sanitation Department officer will be contacted to impound the animal and advise the veterinarian that this animal has bitten a person. 7. If the officer is unable to identify the owner or the animal, a complete description of the animal will be obtained and included in the incident report.

2 Procedure #4.015

GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title:

BODY ARMOR Procedure: 4.015

Date Issued:

Revised:

I.PURPOSE

A.To provide for the highest degree of safety to all police officers while on duty.

B. To establish procedures for the use of the soft body armor vest as an item of police department safety equipment.

II.POLICY

A. The most valuable resource of the Department is its personnel. Any loss due to injury is a substantial loss to the Department. Therefore, a primary objective of the Department is loss control with proven loss prevention techniques. The policy of the Police Department shall be to provide, to all sworn personnel, a protective soft body armor vest.

II.PROCEDURE

A.

ISSUE AND USE

1. All sworn personnel shall be issued a soft body armor vest. Make, model and threat level shall conform to the National Institute of Justice standard #0101.03 for threat level protection.

2. Department members are STRONGLY ENCOURAGED to wear the soft body armor vest
while involved in uniform police operations.

3. Patrol personnel shall have soft body armor readily available while on duty. Readily available means in the passenger compartment of the police vehicle.

4.Body armor shall not be stored in a trunk compartment of any police vehicle.

5. Body armor shall be worn while performing hazardous duties such as stake outs, planned felony arrests, tactical functions or when directed by a supervisor under potential or known volatile or hazardous conditions.

6.The vest may be worn under the uniform shirt or over the uniform shirt in an approved vest
shell.

7. It shall be the supervisor's responsibility to ensure that personnel are properly equipped
with body armor during their tour of duty.

B.MAINTENANCE AND CARE

1.Personnel shall maintain the vest in a clean and serviceable condition.

2. The vest is subject to periodic inspections by supervisory personnel, as are uniforms and
other departmental equipment.

3. Cleaning shall be done only according to the manufacturer's instructions, as contained in

the Kevlar Personal Body Armor Facts Book.

C.

DAMAGE INSPECTION

1. Immediately after the vest has been subject to stress (attack by sharp or blunt objects, projectiles, or substantial impact), the vest is to be examined for damage to the Kevlar fabric.

2. Any attack to the vest shall be reported in writing to the officer's supervisor and shall be
inspected by the manufacturer or his representative.

3.If the Kevlar has been damaged or penetrated, it will be immediately replaced.

4.If the vest has become wet, allow it to air dry naturally.

D.

REPLACEMENT AND REPAIRS

1. The Police Department will establish a vest replacement program following the manufacturers recommended life expectancy of the vest.

2.The Police Department will replace or repair all vests damaged in the line of duty. 3. The officer shall be responsible for replacement or repair of the vest under the following
circumstances:

a.Weight gain that makes the vest unwearable.

b.Damage caused by negligence or not in the line of duty.

c.Wear caused by faulty maintenance.

d.Theft or loss due to negligence.

Procedure #4.018

GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title:NOTIFICATION FOR DEATHProcedure:4.018 AND SERIOUS INJURY DateIssued: Revised:

I.PURPOSE A. To ensure prompt notification of a family member in all cases involving deceased or seriously injured persons. B. To establish Department procedure for making notifications. II.POLICY A. Every effort will be made to locate and notify the nearest relative of a person who has suffered serious or fatal injuries, as soon as possible. Notifications will be made in person by a member of this Department or from another agency. Cooperation of the news media will be sought when withholding identity of the subject(s) pending the notification of a relative of the victim. III.PROCEDURE
A. CITIZENS

1. In cases involving death or serious injury to an adult, juvenile or mentally impaired person or any injury to a juvenile or mentally impaired person, the officer executing the original report will be responsible for notifying or causing notification of a relative. However, if the death is a homicide or suspicious circumstances surround the death, the Detective Division will be contacted before any notifications are made. Death notifications should, if possible, be made in person by two officers. 2. If a relative lives in an adjoining community, the notification may be made in person. The Police Department of that community will be notified of our presence and purpose. Supervisors will determine the appropriate distance for the neighboring communities. 3. If the relative lives in a jurisdiction outside our notification area, the appropriate Police Department will be requested to make the notification when death has occurred. In cases involving serious injury, and the person has been transported to a hospital, notification can be

made by telephone advising a responsible person of the basic information regarding the injury and where the person is being treated.
4. The official police report will contain the name and relationship of persons notified, date,

time, and name of notifying officer.

B.

DEPARTMENT PERSONNEL

1. The Chief of Police will be notified immediately whenever a member of the Department suffers serious injury or death.

2. In any case of serious injury or death to a member of the Department while on duty, the Chief of Police, or his designee, will make personal notification to the member's family. 3. When necessary, transportation for the family will be arranged for or provided by the supervisor. 4. It will be the responsibility of each member and employee of the Department to provide a current home address and telephone number of the person to be contacted in the case of injury.

6 Procedure #4.024 GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title: 4.024

FIREARMS, IMPACT WEAPONS

Procedure:

AND O/C SPRAY REGULATIONS Date Issued: Revised:

I.PURPOSE A. To set forth guidelines and regulations for the type of weapons and ammunition authorized by the Department, and to ensure proper training and qualification procedures for all personnel. B. To outline general guidelines for the carrying and use of firearms by police personnel.

C. The use of a firearm is one of the most serious acts in which a police officer will engage. It is imperative that the officer act within the boundaries of legal guidelines, ethics, good judgment, and accepted practices; but also be prepared by training and direction to act within the scope of this procedure whenever using a firearm in the line of duty.

II.POLICY A. This Department values the safety of its employees and of the public. Likewise, it is believed that officers should use firearms with a high degree of restraint. Therefore, it is the policy of this Department that the use of firearms is never to be considered routine and is permissible only in defense of life and then only after all reasonable alternative means have been exhausted. III.DEFINITIONS (720 ILCS 5/7-8) A. Deadly force is any force that is likely to cause death or great bodily harm, including the firing of a firearm in the direction of the person, even though no intent exists to kill or inflict great bodily harm; and the firing of a firearm at a vehicle in which the person to be arrested is riding. IV.PROCEDURE A. GENERAL

1. Sworn personnel of the department who are authorized by law to carry firearms shall exercise the utmost care and caution in the use of firearms.

2. Sworn personnel may carry their approved firearm within the provisions of State law. When carrying the firearm off duty and out of uniform it must be concealed. 3. It shall be prohibited for any member to appear in public in an intoxicated condition while carrying a firearm. No member shall carry a firearm under the influence of any intoxicant. 4. Carrying a firearm while on suspension or during a leave of absence, where the officers official commission is suspended, is prohibited. 5. 6. All handguns, whether carried on or off duty, must be registered with the Department. The carrying of a second exposed handgun while on duty is prohibited.

7. Only firearms and ammunition authorized by the Department shall be used in the performance of duty. 8. Officers will not point their firearm at a person unless circumstances create a strong reasonable cause to believe that it may be necessary to lawfully use the weapon in conformance with other sections of this procedure. 9. Officers will secure and store their weapons, both on and off duty, in such a manner as to deter unauthorized persons from gaining control over the weapon. Such as, but not limited to, a gun safe, gun lock, trigger lock, etc 10. Officers will immediately report any loss or theft, of a weapon, to the Department.

B. The above policy is the basis of the following set of rules which are designed to guide officers in all cases involving the use of firearms. 1. Officers shall not shoot except to protect themselves or another person from imminent death or serious bodily injury. 2. persons. Officers shall discharge their firearms only when doing so will not endanger innocent

3. Officers shall not discharge their firearms to threaten or subdue persons whose actions are destructive to property or injurious to themselves and do not represent an imminent threat of death or serious bodily injury to the officers or others. 4. Officers shall not discharge their firearms to subdue an escaping suspect who presents no immediate threat of death or serious bodily injury to the officers or others. 5. Officers shall not discharge their weapons at a moving vehicle unless it is absolutely necessary to do so to protect the life of officers or others. 6. Officers shall not fire warning shots.

7. Whenever practical, an officer shall identify himself as a police officer and order a suspect to drop his weapon before the officer himself shoots. 8. a. b. c. An officer is justified in shooting an animal only in the following circumstances: For self-defense. To prevent harm to the officer or another person, or When the animal is so badly injured that humanity requires its relief from further suffering.

(1) A seriously wounded or injured animal may be destroyed only after authorization from an OIC and all reasonable attempts have been made to request assistance from the Agency responsible for the disposal of the animal. 9. Any officer discharging a weapon shall leave a report to the Chief of Police. V.AUTHORIZED FIREARMS A. All sworn officers of the department will, at their expense, equip themselves with a handgun, as outlined below, to carry while on duty.

1. 2. Glock Model L 22, 22C, 23, 23C, .40 caliber or, Glock Model 21, 21C, .45 caliber.

B. Officers are prohibited from carrying any other firearm except as indicated above, except in the event of special orders from a commanding officer designating a different firearm for a special purpose, such as the ILEAS and SRT team. C. the eye. A back up weapon of the Officer's own discretion may be carried, but may not be visible to

D. Officers will carry the weapon with a round chambered. All semi-automatic handguns will be double action and equipped with an internal or external safety to guard against accidental discharge if the weapon is dropped. Weapons will not be carried in the holsters with the hammer cocked. E. Police Officers may carry off duty, a semi-automatic or revolver, of their own discretion.

F. The off duty firearm shall be carried on or about the officer's person, and shall be concealed at all times. Officers are exempt from this rule while participating in recreational activities in which carrying an off duty firearm would not be prudent. G. H. Officers shall not carry an off duty firearm while consuming intoxicants. All firearms owned by officers and employees shall be registered with the Chief of Police.

VI.

FIREARMS QUALIFICATIONS

A. All sworn personnel shall pass a qualification course with their duty weapon(s) bi-annually. An officer must pass a weapons qualification course with any authorized duty weapon before carrying it on duty. B. All sworn personnel shall pass a qualification course with their off duty weapon(s) annually. An officer must pass a weapons qualification course with any authorized off duty weapon before carrying it off duty. The officer will supply the ammunition for the course. C. D. annually. E. Master. All sworn personnel shall pass a qualification course with the department shotgun annually. All Department personnel authorized to use special weapons shall shoot for proficiency

All courses for qualification and proficiency shall be approved by the Department Range

F. The time and date of mandatory qualifications will be designated in a separate directive. This directive will include: 1. Course of fire

Type of targets Distance Number of rounds Position Time sequence, and Type of action (double or single) 2. Type of weapon

On duty weapon Off duty weapon Shotgun Rifle G. Firearms qualification includes achieving minimum scores on prescribed courses of fire, attaining and demonstrating a knowledge of the laws concerning the use of firearms, and being familiar with, and exercise safe handling procedures for the use of firearms. Officers must demonstrate the ability to break the weapon down for cleaning purposes, and reassembling it, restoring it to firing condition. H. Members that are unable to shoot a qualifying score will be required to attend additional range training with a Range Officer. The Range Master will be advised and monitor the progress to ensure all members qualify. I. The list of authorized duty weapons will be reviewed annually by the Range Master. Newer model weapons may be added as technology or threat levels change.

VII.AMMUNITION A. Duty ammunition will be provided by the Department. All members on duty will carry the manufacturer's rated amount loaded in their handgun and a minimum of two fully loaded magazine as a spare. B. Plain clothes officers may choose to carry the manufacturer's rated amount of ammunition loaded in their handgun and a minimum of one fully loaded magazine as a spare. C. D. E. of Police. Only Department issued or authorized ammunition may be carried on or off duty. The standard ammunition for Department shotguns will be 12 gauge, 1 ounce rifled slugs. No other type of ammunition will be authorized without specific prior approval from the Chief

VIII.SPECIAL WEAPONS A. Only those officers who have shown a proficiency in the use of special department weapons will be authorized for their use. The Chief of Police and the Department Range Master shall determine which officers are authorized to use special weapons. B. The Department Range Master will furnish to the Chief of Police, annually, a list of department personnel authorized to use Department special weapons. IX.RIFLE USAGE

A. The purpose is to provide guidelines for those officers who are qualified to have and deploy shoulder mounted center fire rifles during periods of duty. B. Recognizing that not all circumstances can be completely anticipated, officers shall adhere to the policy and procedures set forth for in Section III, as well as other sections of the Departmental Rules and Regulations. C. PROCEDURE FOR RIFLE DEPLOYMENT AND SQUAD CAR TRANSPORTATION

1. Only those individuals who have displayed competence through Departmental qualifications and training shall be authorized to carry and use a center fire carbine type shoulder weapon while on duty. Satisfactory competence must be demonstrated through practical exercises, as well as qualifying on various live fire qualification courses. 2. Rifles authorized for use by qualified officers of the Granite City Police Department shall be either the AR-15, in any available configurations (CAR, H-BAR, Heavy BBL, etc) Ruger Mini 14, or the Departmentally owned M-16 rifle. The caliber shall be .223. Any other weapon must be approved by the Chief of Police or his designee. Those rifles personally owned by officers must be approved by and registered with the Department. Ammunition shall be issued by the Department, and is the only

ammunition authorized. 3. Rifle utilization/deployment shall be done under the same circumstances that a shotgun would normally be utilized and under the criteria encompassed in the section of the rules and regulations addressing deadly force, with sound judgment by the individual officer. Other special circumstances wherein a rifle may be deployed would be under the authority of the Chief of Police or his designee. 4. Those officers properly trained in the use and deployment of selective fire rifles (the Departmental rifles with full automatic capability) may have occasion to utilize fully automatic burst fire. These circumstances, while admittedly rare, would typically be to suppress large volume hostile gunfire, (multiple adversaries) to provide cover fire for fellow officers or in response to incoming automatic gunfire. 5. Officers authorized to utilize these rifles will keep them in a Departmentally approved car and secured in the trunk while not in use. Rifles, either issued or personally owned, are not to be left in the patrol car after the tour of duty. The rifle may be kept secured at the officer's residence, or locked in headquarters in the officer's locker.

X.INSPECTIONS A. Firearms carried on or off-duty shall be maintained in a clean and serviceable condition.

B. All sworn officers shall submit their duty firearm for inspection by a Range Officer at the bi-annual qualifications. Off duty weapons shall be inspected during the off-duty weapon training. Any firearm that does not pass inspection will be immediately removed from service. A Department weapon will be lent to the officer until his firearm is serviceable or repaired, and inspected. C. Any unsafe or unauthorized equipment shall be reported to the Officer's supervisor in writing, by a Range Officer. D. Supervisors shall have frequent unannounced inspections to ensure that personnel are carrying only authorized weapons and ammunition and that all equipment is clean. E. All shotguns, in all squads, are to be cleaned once monthly on Sunday morning. The OIC or Shift Commander is responsible in insuring this assignment is completed. A report to the Division Commander is to be left, detailing which shotguns were not cleaned. F. All shotgun racks in squads shall be locked at end of shift, but may be unlocked at beginning of tour of duty and left unlocked until conclusion of shift. A round shall not be chambered while the shotgun is stored in rack. G. available. Department shotguns shall be loaded with buckshot rounds, but slugs shall be readily

H. The Range Master shall maintain, and update annually, a Weapons Authorization Log describing every weapon an officer is authorized to carry while on duty. This will include Department owned specialty weapons. Information to be included:

Manufacturer of Weapon Model of Weapon Barrel length Caliber Serial number Class of weapon Date and score of last qualification I. The Range Master shall maintain a Weapons Log describing all off duty weapons authorized to be carried by an officer.

XI.RANGE PROCEDURES A. Officer. All organized Department shoots will be scheduled and supervised by a Department Range

B. The Range Officer will be in charge of all personnel while participating in any shooting program on the range, regardless of rank or position. C. Uniform members will use their service weapon, holster and ammunition carrier when firing on the range course. D. Detectives and Administrative personnel shall use the weapon and holster they wear while on duty on a routine basis. E. Members may use a substitute weapon if their weapon is not usable at that time. Substitute weapons must conform with department regulations, and be approved by the range officer before any Department shoot. F. Members will be required to wear ear and eye protection at all times.

G. Weapons will be loaded and unloaded only on the firing line and only upon command of the Range Officer. H. All weapons and ammunition malfunctions or suspected malfunctions shall immediately be reported to the Range Officer. I. Any member sustaining an injury while on the range will immediately report it to the Range Officer. A written report will be made by the senior Range Officer to the Chief of Police. J. Any incidents on the range involving weapons, misconduct, or violations of department rules will be reported to the Watch Commander by the Range Officer. The Range Officer has the authority to order members off the range in cases of serious misconduct. K. L. M. All members are on duty while at the range and all rules and regulations apply. No civilians are to be on the range firing line without permission from the Range Officer. All officers shall adhere to all range rules and regulations.

N. The range officer shall complete a range qualification report after every training session and submit it to the Range Master.

XII.

MISCELLANEOUS

A. All on duty officers will carry their duty handgun in a holster. Uniformed officers must use a holster as specified in Department uniform guidelines. B. No officer will internally or externally modify any mechanical operating component of their on duty or off duty firearm, from factory specifications, without first obtaining written permission from a Department Armorer and the Range Master.

XIII.

AUTHORIZED LESS-THAN-LETHAL WEAPONS

A. All sworn officers of the Department will equip themselves with their choice of a less-thanlethal weapon. The Department will issue a Stun Weapon and O/C spray. Officers are required to carry a less than lethal weapon while on duty. All patrol officers will carry a Stun Weapon. O/C Spray and an impact weapon may also be carried. Some examples of impact weapons, excluding flashlights, are below but are not limited to: 1. An ASP Collapsible Straight Baton (either sixteen, twenty-one or twenty-six inch length baton) or, 2. A standard straight or side handled police baton made of wood, aluminum, polymer or nylon, not to exceed twenty-six inches in length. 3. 4. Only Departmentally approved Stun Weapons are to be carried by Officers Only Departmentally approved O/C Spray is to be carried by Officers

XIV.

CARE OF LESS-THAN-LETHAL WEAPONS

A. Officers who carry O/C Spray should routinely inspect the canister and nozzle for signs of erosion, leakage, dirt in the nozzle, fullness and/or other signs of damage. B. O/C Spray should not be stored in direct sunlight or in areas where the temperature can exceed 120 degrees Fahrenheit, such as in the trunk or passenger compartment of a vehicle. C. The ASP collapsible baton should be kept dry. If exposed to water, the blade should be opened and the baton dried with a soft cloth. The butt cap or plug, should be periodically checked to make sure it is tightly screwed onto the handle. The tip should be checked for looseness.

XV.

TRAINING

A. weapon.

All sworn officers and all Reserve Officers will be trained prior to carrying a less-than-lethal

B. Training will consist of classroom training and hands-on practical application of the less-thanlethal weapon. C. Only those officers demonstrating proficiency in the use of agency authorized weapons will be allowed to carry such weapons. D. E. Training will be conducted by certified weapons instructors. As part of the annual in-service training, the use of force procedure will be reviewed.

Procedure #4.025 GRANTIE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title: Procedure: 4.025

ADVANCED STUN WEAPONS

Date Issued:

Revised:

I.PURPOSE

A. The purpose of this policy is to provide police officers with guidelines on the proper carry; use, discharge and deployment of electronic stun weapon(s). The devices currently authorized for use aretheTASERInternationalInc.M26AdvancedTASERandtheTASERInternationalInc.X26Advanced Taser(hereafterreferredtoastheTASER).TheM26/X26isincorporatedasanadditionalpolicetoolfor theGraniteCityPoliceDepartment.TheM26/X26TASERisnotintendedtoreplaceself-defensetactics orfirearms.

II.POLICY

A.TheTASERisintendedforuseasadefensive,lessthanlethalweapon.Officersmayutilize the TASER to incapacitate, control a dangerous, violent or potentially violent subject when reasonable expectationexiststhatphysicallyengagingthesubjectwouldbeunsafefortheofficer,subjectorothers present; or attempts to subdue the subject by other tactics have been, or will likely be, ineffective; or whendeadlyforcewouldnotbejustifiedand/ornecessary.

B.AnyuseoftheTASERcontrarytoorinviolationofthispolicymayresultinrevocationofthe officer'sprivilegetocarry/usetheTASER;andshallsubjecttheofficertodisciplinaryactions.

III.DEFINITIONS

A. Discharge: Discharge of the TASER occurs anytime the TASER is activated/ triggeredwithoutacartridgeofprojectilesinwhichtheelectricalarcisactivated:

1.TestingoftheTASERpriortobeingplacedintoservice.

2.Touchstunningsubjectwithoutacartridgeengaged.

B. Deployment: Deployment of the TASER is any firing of the projectiles/probes from the TASERaircartridge.

C.TouchStun:Theengagingoftheelectronicprobesagainstasubject'sbodyinclosequarter contact.


IV.PROCEDURE

A.EquipmentandTraining

1. Only the TASER International Inc's. Advanced M26 TASER and X26 TASER are authorizedforuse.OnlytherespectiveTASERM26andX26aircartridgesareauthorizedforuse.

2.Onlydepartment-approvedholstersfortheTASERwillbepermittedaspartoftheuniform. TASERswillbeholsteredandcarriedinanapprovedmanner.

3.TASERswillonlybeissuedtoofficerswhohavesuccessfullycompletedacertifiedtraining programintheoperationsanduseoftheTASER.

4. Officers will carry only properly functioning and charged TASERs. At least one replacementcartridgewillbeissuedandcarriedbyofficer(s).

B.MaintenanceandCareofEquipment.

1. Officers will not deface, write on or adhere anything to the TASER or cartridges. No changes,alterations,modificationsorsubstitutionsshallbemadetotheTASERswithouttheapproval oftheChiefofPolice.

2.Officer(s)willbeissuedaDepartmentTASER,replacementcartridge,andholster.

a. The Watch Commander and supervisors will periodically check the Department issued TASER equipment to ensure there is no damage to the TASER, cartridges, or holster. It is the responsibilityoftheWatchCommandertoholdtheinspectionofequipmentandreportanydamage.

3. Officer(s) will inspect the TASER before the start of each shift to ensure that the unit
is properly charged by completing a test discharge. Officer(s) will immediately notify the Watch Commanderofanymalfunctions.MalfunctionsordamagetotheTASERwillbereportedinwritingto thePatrolDivisionCommanderandtheTASERwillbetakenoutofservice,untilrepaired.

4. Officers will check the TASERs to ensure that the port and cartridge doors are free of debrisandthattheissuedcartridge(s)hasnotexceededtheexpirationdate.

5.AllrepairstotheTASERsoraccessoriesshallbecompletedbyanauthorizedvendor.

C.UseoftheTASER

1. DeploymentordischargeoftheTASERshallbeincompliancewiththedepartmentUseof ForcePolicy.

a. The TASER is incorporated in the Use of Force Continuum at the same level as the chemical aerosol Pepper Mace, Oleoresin Capsicum (O. C.) spray. [Refer to Chapter 2.000 Use of Force] The TASER is directed for use following officer presence; officer verbal request for

compliance];officerverbalorderforcomplianceorbarehanddirection.

2. The TASER will never be used punitively or for the purpose of coercion. No officer will playfully,maliciouslyorintentionallymisusetheTASERinadisplayofpower.

3. DeploymentordischargeoftheTASERtosubdue,incapacitateorcontrolasubjectshall conformtotheTASERtrainingmethods.

4. DeploymentoftheTASERwillnotbeintentionallyaimedatthehead,neckorgroin.Itis permissible,inaccordancewithtraining,todischarge("touchstun")inthegroinorsidesoftheneck.

5.TheTASERwillnotbeused:

a.nearflammablematerials,gassesorliquids;

b.asadeadlyforceoption;

c.tothreatenorgaininformation;

d.towakeasuspectedintoxicatedsubject;

e.asaprod:

f.againstasubjectalreadyrestrained,unlessphysicalaggressionhastobeovercome;

g. on a subject who could fall from a height that would likely cause great bodily harm or substantialinjury;

h. on an animal, unless the officer can quickly restrain/control the animal with another restraintdevice;oruseofotherforceisnotreasonable.

4. Unless circumstances exist that would jeopardize safe deployment, the deploying officer shall give a warning and notice of the intent to deploy the TASER by loudly announcing "TASER." Theannouncementshouldbeinaloudvoiceandrepeatedasnecessarytoalertotherofficersatthe scene.

D.MEDICALCONSIDERATIONS

1.TASERprongsandprobesaretobetreatedasbiohazardsharps.Officersshallbegloved priortoremovalofanyprongs/probesthathavecontactedthesubject'sskin.

a. TASER prongs and barbs will be inspected after removal from the skin to ensure completeremoval.

b. Probes will be placed points down into the bores of the expended air cartridge and secured with tape. The cartridge will be disposed of in a plastic bag and placed in the biohazard container.

2. AfteranindividualhasbeensubjectedtoadeploymentordischargeoftheTASER,they willberestrainedandhandcuffedassoonassafelypossible,preferablybyabackupofficer.

3. The officer will visually examine the area of the deployment or discharge for injury. The TASER projectile prongs will be removed when it is safe to do so and only by an officer who has receivedTASERtraining.

a. If examination of the affected area reveals that the probes require medical removal, or thesubjectexhibitsotherphysicalsymptoms,thesubjectwillbetransportedtotheemergencyroom fortreatment.

b. TASER prongs that have struck the face, groin, genitals, female breast(s), or other sensitiveareashallberemovedonlybyemergencymedicalpersonnel.

4. SubjectsonwhichtheTASERhasbeendeployedordischargedshallbemonitoredforup to four hours while in custody. Medical assistance/evaluation will be provided if the subject exhibits anyadversereactions.

E.REPORTING

1. All incidents involving use of the TASER will be, as soon as possible, reported to the officer'simmediatesupervisor.

2. Allincidentsinvolvinganofficer'suseoftheTASER,adischargeordeployment,requires documentationoftheincident.A"TASER Use Report"willbecompletedbytheofficer.Theofficer's immediatesupervisorwillreviewthereportandforwardittothePatrolDivisionCommanderalongwith acopyoftheoffensereport.

3. Photographs of the individual and the area affected by the prongs or probes will also be takenandforwardedtothePatrolDivisionCommanderalongwiththe"TASERUseofForceReport" andtheoffensereport.

Procedure #4.027

GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title:

REPORTING HAZARDOUS CONDITIONS Procedure: 4.027

Date Issued: Revised:

I. PURPOSE A. To establish guidelines for identifying, reporting and correcting hazardous roadway conditions and other emergency situations. II. POLICY A. Upon the discovery of a hazardous condition the officer shall notify Communications and request that the appropriate agency be contacted to have the hazard corrected. III. PROCEDURE A. When an officer observes a situation that he believes to be potentially dangerous, or such hazard requires immediate correction, such as a fallen tree or electrical wires down, the officer will immediately notify communications and identify the type of assistance and equipment required. The officer will protect the scene, bystanders and direct traffic or take any other action deemed necessary to correct the situation. B. A supervisor shall respond to the scene of any emergency, upon request, to correct a hazardous condition. C. When a hazard is detected that represents a potential accident situation, but the threat of such is not imminent, the officer shall notify communications of the situation, who will then contact the proper agency. D. Officers shall report conditions that may require the service of another City Department. E. Hazardous conditions are identified by one or more of the following categories: 1. malfunction 2. defective, missing or lack of 3. broken or damaged

4. obstructed 5. improperly located F. Hazardous conditions may include but are not limited to: 1. mechanical traffic devices 2. traffic and information signs 3. train crossing locations 4. roadway lighting 5. broken water mains 6. electrical wires down 7. fallen trees 8. roadway debris 9. dangerous ice or snow accumulation 10. roadway safety devices: road markers, striping, reflectors and impact devices 11. defects in the roadway: ruts or holes 12. vehicles parked or abandoned on the travel portion of the roadway.

Procedure #4.030

GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title:DEPARTMENT VEHICLES DateIssued: Revised:

Procedure:4.030

I.PURPOSE A. To establish guidelines for the proper use, care and maintenance of Department vehicles and the use and assignment of Department vehicles to personnel. II.POLICY A. It is the policy of this Department to provide a clean and safe vehicle for officer's use in the daily performance of duties. The Department's fleet will be maintained through the Service Division with the cooperation of each officer. III.PROCEDURE A. Every officer assigned to operate a Department motor vehicle will be held accountable for the proper use and operation of the vehicle; security of the vehicle and its contents; and the care of the vehicle, vehicle accessories and equipment assigned to that vehicle. IV.PATROLVEHICLES A. Marked and unmarked police vehicles assigned to patrol officers are restricted to operation within the city limits of Granite City and within their assigned patrol district unless performance of police function requires the officer to proceed outside those boundaries. 1. Vehicle Inspections: a. At the beginning and end of each tour of duty, all vehicles used for patrol and prisoner transportation shall be inspected for readiness. The interior shall be thoroughly searched to ensure that no weapons or contraband have been left or hidden within the vehicle. b. Prior to placing a prisoner in the vehicle for transport, the transporting officer shall have inspected the interior. The vehicle shall be searched again after the prisoner has been delivered to the jail or other destination 2. When a patrol officer leaves the City limits, he shall advise the Communications Center and his immediate supervisor.

3. When an officer is not on an emergency call, all normal safe driving practices, obedience to all traffic laws, and basic rules of courtesy shall be observed. a. Emergency calls and emergency driving does not exempt an officer from reasonable and prudent operation of the vehicle for the safety of himself and others. 4. Patrol officers shall observe all traffic regulations in respect to parking in restricted or prohibited areas. a. In an emergency or if the expeditious nature of the call dictates violation of parking laws, the officer shall park so that they do not unnecessarily interfere with traffic or create a hazard. 5. No police vehicle will be used to jump start, battery start a non-police vehicle. 6. Before going off duty, officers are required to fill the gas tank with gasoline. 7. Before going off duty, officers are required to remove all uniform gear and debris from the patrol vehicle. 8. Upon completion of transporting a prisoner or other person(s), officers shall inspect the rear passenger compartment for valuables, evidence and contraband. 9. Issued equipment for vehicles shall not be changed, interchanged, altered or removed from such vehicle without permission of the Watch Commander. If equipment is removed it is to be returned to the original vehicle at end of tour of duty. 10. All damaged equipment, inoperable equipment, unsafe equipment or damage to a vehicle will be reported to the supervisor and to the Division Commander. Maintenance reports will be left to the Service Division for any inoperable equipment or vehicle maintenance needs. 11. Members shall not use any Department vehicle without permission of the Chief of Police or Division Commander. V.DETECTIVEVEHICLES A. Each detective, to insure a more timely response to emergency calls after regular duty hours, will be assigned a detective vehicle. 1. Each detective will be responsible for insuring that their vehicle contains all of the necessary equipment to be used in a call-out investigation. Except in extreme cases, each detective should have a vehicle prepared and equipped to respond directly to a crime scene. B. Each detective may use the Department vehicle for personal use during his on-call assignment, but shall limit the transportation of non-police, civilian personnel.

1. An exception to transportation of civilians applies when the detective may find it necessary to drop off or pick up a family member while enroute to/from work, to/from his residence. In this case, the family member shall be dropped off at a safe place before the detective responds to a call. C. The Detective Lieutenant, as a supervisor, may also utilize the privilege of a take home car, applying the same guidelines to the vehicle that governs the on-call detective. VI.SECURITYOFPOLICEVEHICLES A. When it is necessary to leave a Department vehicle unattended and unoccupied, officers are to secure the vehicle, turning off the ignition and locking the doors, with the following exceptions when officers are in close proximity of their vehicle. 1. Officers while at an incident find it necessary for the continuous operation of emergency equipment, (i.e.: fire scene, crash scene, traffic direction, etc); or 2. Officers have reason to believe that the police action may lead to a custodial arrest; or 3. If for a police purpose due to the expeditious nature of the call/ circumstances which would be impractical. VII.ASSIGNEDVEHICLES A. Unless otherwise designated by order of the Chief of Police, certain officers or positions within the Department have been assigned the use of Department vehicles; "take home" cars as listed below: 1. Chief of Police 2. Assistant Chief of Police 3. Captains 4. Any other officer designated by the Chief of Police. B. Members other than those assigned shall not use a Department vehicle without permission of the Division Commander or Chief of Police. No officer shall take a police vehicle home while off duty, without permission of the Chief of Police or Division Commander. C. Officers assigned a "take home" vehicle may drive the vehicle within an hour radius of Granite City, unless permission to go further by written or verbal permission from the Chief of Police. D. Officers assigned a "take home" vehicle may transport family members or non-police personnel in the Department vehicle.

1. If an on call officer has to respond to an emergency, family members/civilians will be dropped off at a safe point, if possible, before responding to the emergency. 2. Care and discretion must be used as to who is in the Department vehicle. Civilians may be in the assigned vehicle if the purpose is police related, as an officer may from time to time be required to travel to and from, or take certain non-police with them for whatever purpose during duty hours. VIII.CIVILIANSINSQUADS,DEPARTMENTVEHICLES A. Other than Police Department related business or activity, or the exceptions enumerated herein, no persons other than police officers shall ride in or otherwise be transported in a squad car unless under arrest and secured. Exemptions are: 1. Approved ride along from the office of the Chief or his designee. 2. Auxiliary officers during active status. 3. Civilian Department personnel during inclement weather or emergency. 4. Civilians when such circumstances dictate as to prevent loss of life, great bodily harm or endangerment; or 5. Transportation of persons to serve a police purpose (witness, informant, etc). IX.TRANSPORTVAN A. The prisoner transport van's primary use is for the transportation of multiple prisoners in excess of what would be safe or reasonable in a squad car. 1. Use of the van for unique circumstances which may arise will be left to the discretion of the Watch Commander, i.e.: scenes of mass disorder, mob action, etc. 2. Prisoners transported in the prisoner van shall be handcuffed and secured in seatbelts prior to transportation.

Procedure #4.031

GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title:VEHICLE PURSUITProcedure:4.031 DateIssued: Revised:

I.PURPOSE A. To establish guidelines and responsibilities for vehicle pursuits requiring emergency operation of Police Department vehicles. II.POLICY A. Emergency operations of department vehicles shall be conducted in strict accordance with existing statutes, rules and procedures. B. Vehicle pursuit is one of the most dangerous duties a police officer must perform. When a decision to pursue is made, the safety of all concerned must be considered. The seriousness of the offense must be weighed against the hazards of the health and welfare of citizens who might be affected by the pursuit. During the pursuit, continuous balancing of the seriousness versus safety is mandatory. C. The Department expects an officer, or his supervisor, to terminate a pursuit whenever the risks to the safety of the officers or citizens outweigh the danger to the community if the offender is not caught. D. No task is of such importance as to justify the reckless disregard of the safety of innocent persons. The principles of safety shall not become secondary. E. The responsibility for the decision to overtake or pursue another vehicle rests on the individual officer. In arriving at his decision he must carefully consider all factors involved and the possible consequences. III.DEFINITIONS A.Vehicle Pursuit: An active attempt by one or more officers to apprehend a suspect operating a motor vehicle, while the suspect is trying to avoid capture by using high speed or other evasive tactics such as driving off the roadway, sudden or unexpected movements or

willfully failing to yield to a signal to stop. B.FelonyPursuit: is where the violator is being pursued in order to effect a felony arrest; the officer may use force which he reasonably believes to be necessary to effect arrest in accordance with Department policy and State statutes. C.MisdemeanorPursuit: is when the violator being pursued is known to have committed a misdemeanor only, the use of force likely to cause great bodily harm is prohibited. Barricading the roadway or using firearms will not be utilized in misdemeanor pursuit. D.Roadblock: Any method, restriction or obstruction used or intended for the purpose of preventing free passage of vehicles on a roadway to effect the apprehension of an actual or suspected offender in a vehicle. E.Primary Pursuing Unit: The police unit that initiates a pursuit or any unit that assumes control of the pursuit. F. Terminate Pursuit: The officer will deactivate audible and visual emergency warning equipment (emergency lights and siren) and resume a safe speed. G.Supervisor: The on duty patrol shift watch commander and/or first line supervisor (Sergeant). IV.GENERALPROCEDURE A. In order to diminish the likelihood of a pursuit developing, officers intending to stop a vehicle shall, when practical, be within close proximity to the subject vehicle prior to activating the emergency signaling devices on the police vehicle. The responsibility for the decision to initiate hot pursuit rests with the individual officer. B. A pursuit may be initiated when a suspected violator attempts to flee in a vehicle for a traffic violation, but must be discontinued when there is a clear and present danger to the general public. C. A police officer may not pursue a vehicle wanted for a minor traffic violation, when it becomes clear that the risks to the public outweigh the results of the pursuit. D. Only vehicles equipped with an operating siren and emergency lights shall engage in the pursuit. E. Pursuit shall be limited to two (2) vehicles, a primary and secondary unit. F. Caravanning is prohibited at all times while in pursuit. Caravanning is the use of more than two (2) police vehicles directly pursuing the suspect vehicle. It does not preclude the vehicle to be used for possible interception.

G. Roadblocks may be used, but only under strictly enforced safety guidelines listed under roadblock section. H. Officers who are not a primary or secondary unit should not leave their assigned area to become involved in a pursuit unless directed to do so by a supervisor.
V.INITIATINGPRIMARYUNITRESPONSIBILITY

A. The responsibility for the decision to initiate pursuit rests with the individual officer. The officer shall, in all cases, notify the Communications Center when a pursuit is underway and provide the following information: 1. police unit identification; 2. location, speed and direction of travel, with continuous updates; 3. vehicle description including license number, if known; 4. the specific reason for the pursuit, including known laws violated; 5. number and description of occupants; 6. when, or if, the pursuit leaves the municipal limits; and, 7. when switching to another radio frequency. B. Failure to provide sufficient information will be cause for a supervisor to order termination of the pursuit. C. The initiating/primary unit shall be in field command and bears operational responsibility for the pursuit unless relieved by a supervisor. The authority of this unit pertains to the immediate field operation and is, always, subordinate to the shift supervisor or commanding officer. D. The primary unit may maintain pursuit as long as it is safe to do so; until directed to terminate the pursuit by a supervisor; the suspect is stopped; or a reasonable distance has been covered which may indicate the futility of continued pursuit. E. The decision to abandon pursuit may be the most intelligent course of action. A pursuing officer must constantly question whether the seriousness of the offense justifies continued pursuit. In anycase,apursuitshallterminateunderanyof the followingcircumstances: 1. if, in the opinion of the pursuing officer or a supervisor, there is a clear and unreasonable danger to the officer or others created by the pursuit which outweighs the necessity for immediate apprehension;

2. the suspects identity has been established so that later apprehension can be accomplished and there is no longer a need for immediate apprehension; 3. the prevailing traffic, roadway and environmental conditions dictate the futility of continued pursuit;

4. the pursued vehicle's location is no longer known; or, 5. the pursuing officer knows or is reasonably certain that the offender is a juvenile, the offense is a misdemeanor or non-serious felony, and the safety factors involved are obviously greater than those with which a juvenile can cope. F. Termination of a pursuit does not necessarily prohibit the following of a vehicle at a safe speed or remaining in an area to re-initiate pursuit if the opportunity and conditions permit. G. When terminating a pursuit, the officer must advise dispatch that he is terminating pursuit. The officer will also turn off his vehicles emergency lights and siren.
VI.ASSISTINGUNITRESPONSIBILITY

A. Assistance will be coordinated by the Communications Center under the direction of the supervisor. The supervisor and primary unit will be advised of the identity and locations of units who can assist. B. An active pursuit will normally involve no more than two units (the primary unit and one backup unit). If more assistance is specifically requested the amount of assistance will be determined by: 1. nature of offense; 2. number of suspects; 3. whether the participating units are single or double man cars; and, 4. other clear and articulated facts that would warrant the increased hazards. C. Only a supervisor may authorize more than two units to be in active pursuit. All other units will remain aware of the direction and progress of the pursuit but shall not actively participate unless specifically authorized to do so. D. An authorized assisting unit shall immediately notify the Communications Center of its identity upon joining the pursuit. E. If the primary unit is a one-man car the assisting unit may assume radio communications responsibility allowing the primary to devote full attention to driving.

F. The assisting unit will maintain a safe distance behind the primary unit. G. Assisting units shall avoid intersecting the path of an oncoming high-speed vehicle. H. If the primary unit becomes disabled, the assisting unit will become the primary unit. A new backup unit may be authorized by the supervisor. VII.GENERALPRECAUTIONSFORSTOPPINGVEHICLE A. The following methods of stopping a fleeing vehicle is approved by the Department as a last resort and only when the circumstances warrant that they can be attempted in a manner as to not put the general public in danger. 1. Bumping suspect vehicle or attempting to run a vehicle off the roadway is forbidden unless approved by the Shift Commander. Such action would be approved only when the use of deadly force would be authorized. 2. The standard police slow down procedure of one (1) squad in front and one (1) squad at the rear with the lead squad being the unit that determines the proper slow down speed. 3. Roadblocks may be used, but only with the permission of the OIC and that the officers setting the roadblock do so with the safety of the public, the police, and suspect vehicle in mind. Any roadblock set up must be done as to give the fleeing vehicle ample time to stop safely, considering all conditions at the time of the pursuit, such as speed, weather conditions, traffic. No roadblocks are to be set up on curves, hills or anywhere that deprives the general public of emergency escape. Innocent persons must not be placed in a position of danger during the setup of a pursuit roadblock. VIII.USEOFFIREARMS/DEADLYFORCEINPURSUITS A. No officer may fire a weapon at a fleeing vehicle unless it is to protect themselves or another from imminent death or serious bodily injury. IX.GENERALRESPONSIBILITY A. Even though the officer is legally engaged in pursuit, he must exercise that degree of care which a reasonable prudent person in the discharge of similar duties and under like circumstances, would use. It is understood that the officer's ability to supervise or control other motorists by the nature of existing circumstances is limited, but it is his or her duty to avoid contributing to the danger already created by the violating motorist. X.COMMUNICATIONCENTERRESPONSIBILITIES A. Receive, repeat, and properly record all incoming information on the pursuit, the pursued vehicles and occupants.

B. Immediately notify the supervisor when a pursuit is initiated. C. Clear the radio channel of unnecessary traffic, advise other units that a pursuit is in progress and broadcast relevant information. D. Perform relevant records and motor vehicle checks. E. Control all radio communication during the pursuit and continue to monitor radio traffic until pursuit is terminated. F. Coordinate assistance under the direction of the supervisor. G. Notify, as soon as practical, outside agencies if the pursuit enters their jurisdiction.
XI.SUPERVISORRESPONSIBILITY

A. Upon being notified of a pursuit, the supervisor will verify the following: 1. no more than the necessary units are involved; 2. the proper frequency and procedures are being utilized; and, 3. affected allied agencies are being notified. B. The supervisor will direct the pursuit, approve or order alternative tactics, and maintain control until the pursuit is terminated. C. Remain within our corporate limits to provide proper supervision unless the supervisor is the primary unit or there is another need for the supervisor to leave the corporate limits. The supervisor will designate an officer to remain within the corporate limits and assume command until the supervisor returns. D. In the absence of adequate information from the primary or backup units, the supervisor will terminate the pursuit. E. As with many tactical field problems, it is not necessary that the supervisor be physically present in order to coordinate and control the pursuit. F. If the pursuit terminates in our jurisdiction, the supervisor will proceed to the termination point to provide guidance and necessary supervision. G. Ensure proper completion of required reports.
XII.PURSUITINITIATEDBYANOTHERPOLICEAGENCY

A. A unit may become directly involved in the pursuit if authorized by a supervisor as long as the pursuit remains within our corporate limits. To continue outside of our corporate limits, authorization to do so must be received from a supervisor. B. All other relevant guidelines described in this procedure will apply.
XIII.COMMUNICATIONSRESPONSIBILITYFORANOTHERPOLICEAGENCY

A. Monitor the progress of the pursuit and relay relevant information to the field units. B. If the pursuit terminates in our jurisdiction, ensure that necessary police and other assistance is dispatched.
XIV.SUPERVISOR'SRESPONSIBILITYINPURSUITBYANOTHERAGENCY

A. Closely monitor the pursuit while it is in our jurisdiction to ensure that adequate assistance is provided. B. Ensure that Police units do not continue the pursuit once the pursuit has passed our corporate limits unless necessary to assist the pursuing unit.
XV.VEHICLEOPERATIONS,TACTICS,LIMITATIONSANDPROHIBITIONS

A. TrafficViolations: A pursuit may be initiated when a suspected violator attempts to flee in a vehicle for a traffic violation, but must be discontinued when there is a clear and present danger to the general public. B. Property Crimes: Pursuits for property crimes will be based on the seriousness of the crime weighed against the danger to life posed by the offender and the danger posed by the pursuit itself. C. Offensive Tactics: During the course of a pursuit, deliberate contact between vehicles; forcing the offender into parked cars, ditches, or any other obstacle; boxing in or heading off; ramming; or driving along side the pursued vehicle while it is in motion shall be prohibited unless such actions are specifically approved by the supervisor. Such tactics may be approved only when the use of deadly force would be authorized. Reckless or hazardous driving maneuvers of the pursued vehicle shall not be duplicated by any pursuing unit. D. Civilian Ride-Along: No unit will engage in a pursuit when accompanied by a civilian ride-along. E. Unmarked Police Vehicles: Officers operating unmarked vehicles (provided the vehicle is equipped with emergency lights and siren) may engage in a pursuit only when the offender presents an immediate and direct threat to life. The unmarked car will withdraw from active pursuit when a marked unit becomes available to take over the pursuit.

F. Caravanning: There shall be no caravanning by field units not directly involved in the immediate active pursuit. G. Passing: Passing another pursuing police vehicle in a pursuit is prohibited. H. Spacing: All units in a pursuit shall space themselves at a distance that will ensure proper braking and reaction time for any sudden or unexpected maneuvers. I. Controlled Access Highway: Units shall not pursue offenders the wrong way on the toll road, interstate or other controlled access highways, divided highways or ramps. J. TrafficControlDevices: Extreme caution must be used whenever officers disregard traffic signs or signals. K. EmergencyEquipment: No officer will continue a pursuit if the emergency equipment on the unit ceases to function properly. L. Collisions: No officer will continue a pursuit if his unit becomes involved in a traffic collision unless the collision is with the pursued vehicle and no other police unit is available to assume control. M.Roadblocks: The use of roadblocks must be authorized by a supervisor. Generally, a roadblock will be employed only as a last resort. The use of a roadblock must be directly associated with the seriousness of the offense. The roadblock must be clearly visible and provide adequate warning to allow vehicles to come to a safe stop. The roadway shall not be completely blocked unless the use of deadly force would be authorized. N. StopStrips: Stop strips have been provided for some of the uniform patrol units and may be deployed at the direction of a Supervisor. They may be utilized only at a time and location where the likelihood of an uninvolved vehicle striking a stop strip is nonexistent. O. BoundaryLimits: No officer will continue a pursuit initiated by this Department once the pursuit has reached the far corporate limits of an adjoining municipality without the specific approval of a supervisor.
XVI.REPORTINGANDCRITIQUE

A. At the conclusion of a pursuit, the primary unit officer will complete a Law Enforcement Training Standards Board Pursuit Driving Report. B. The Patrol Division Commander will review the Pursuit Driving Report and conduct a critique of the pursuit. He will review the circumstances surrounding the incident and report to the Chief of Police. This will include:

A review of the facts surrounding the incident as it relates to adherence to Department policy and procedure, and a finding and recommendation in those circumstances where there are deviations from policy and procedure. C. The Patrol Division Commander will forward the Pursuit Driving Report to the Law Enforcement Training Standards Board.

Procedure #4.032

GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title:FIELD INTERVIEWSProcedure:4.032 DateIssued: Revised:

I.PURPOSE A. To identify suspicious persons and their possible association with criminal activity. II.POLICY A. It is imperative that police departments adopt aggressive measures for the prevention of crime and the apprehension of criminals. Field interviews are endorsed by the Police Department as an appropriate technique to deter and identify criminals. III.LAW
A. Temporary questioning without arrest

1. A peace officer, after having identified himself as a peace officer, may stop any person in a public place for a reasonable period of time when the officer reasonably infers from the circumstances that the person is committing, is about to commit or has committed an offense and may demand the name and address of the person and an explanation of their actions. Such detention and temporary questioning will be conducted near where the person was stopped.
B. Search during temporary questioning

1. When a peace officer has stopped a person for temporary questioning and reasonably suspects that he or another is in danger of attack, he may pat down the person for weapons. If the officer discovers a weapon, he may take it until the completion of the questioning, at which time he shall either return the weapon, if lawfully possessed, or arrest the person so questioned. IV.PROCEDURE

A. When an officer has a reasonable suspicion of possible criminal activity he may stop an individual. The standard of reasonable suspicion is substantially lower than the requirement of probable cause. However, the reasonable suspicion must be based upon objective circumstances that led the officer to suspect possible criminal activity and possible involvement by the suspect. B. When determining the appropriateness of field interviews the officer should evaluate contributing factors including suspicious behavior, time of day, the actions of the person, the circumstances of the moment, and the general awareness of crime in the areas. C. When stopping a suspicious person or vehicle the following will apply: 1. Notify communications of the location of the stop and a brief description of the person(s); 2. if a vehicle is involved give a brief description of the vehicle, license number and number of occupants; and, 3. the communications operator will dispatch a backup unit to assist in the field stop, unless the officer indicated that a backup is not necessary. D. Field interview stops will normally be concluded in one of three ways: 1. The officer's original suspicion is unfounded and no FIR Contact card or written report is necessary; 2. probable cause for an arrest is established and the offender is taken into custody and the arrest report makes a FIR Contact card unnecessary; or, 3. there is a doubt about the person stopped but the officer does not have grounds for a legal arrest so a FIR Contact card is completed. E. When completing a FIR Contact card the officer will obtain as much information as possible. Since the requirement of reasonable suspicion to stop must be based on objective grounds, officers should be reminded to specifically record the objective grounds, along with any other specific conduct of the subject that contributed to the officer's suspicion, in the appropriate space on the card. F. On all FIR contact stops, when a card is completed, the officer should request the communications operator to initiate a case report number and advise when the stop is complete. All cards from a single stop may be logged under the same case report number. G. Completed cards will be turned in to the shift supervisor who will review them for accuracy, completeness and whether the card is in compliance with the Department's policy. All cards will be initialed by the supervisor. H. FIR Contact cards will be routed to the Detective Division supervisor for review.

I. FIR Contact cards will be returned to the records center for filing. J. FIR Contact cards will be purged three (3) years from the date of the initial contact.

Procedure #4.035

GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title: DOMESTIC VIOLENCE Procedure: 4.035 Date Issued: Revised:

I. PURPOSE A. To provide guidelines for officers responding to incidents of domestic violence. B. To inform officers of their requirements under the Domestic Violence Act. C. To establish guidelines, responsibilities and procedures for domestic violence intervention. II. POLICY A. It shall be the policy of the Police Department to view domestic violence as a serious crime. Therefore, this department shall take a proactive response to safeguard victims rights, provide victim assistance and use arrest as a deterrent to future violence. Officers shall familiarize themselves with the Domestic Violence Statute. III. DEFINITIONS A. Domestic violence: means physical abuse, harassment, or intimidation of a dependent, interference with personal liberty or willful deprivation but does not include reasonable direction of a minor child by a parent or person in loco parentis. B. Abuse: Physical abuse; harassment; intimidation of a dependent; interference with personal liberty; or willful deprivation. But it would not include that which could be construed as a reasonable direction of a minor child by a parent or a person in loco parentis (e.g. a teacher). C. Probable Cause: A set of facts and circumstances, available to an officer upon inquiry, which would cause a person of reasonable prudence and caution to believe that a crime has been committed and that the suspect has committed the crime or that certain items may be contraband, stolen property, or subject to seizure as evidence of a crime. D. Battery: The act of intentionally or knowingly without legal justification and by any means (a) causing bodily harm to an individual or (b) making physical contact of an insulting or provoking nature with an individual.

E. Domestic Battery: An act of committing a battery wherein the victim or individual upon whom the battery was committed is defined as a "Family or Household Member" in the Code of Criminal Procedure. (See paragraph H of this chapter.) F. Assault: An act performed without lawful authority which places another in reasonable apprehension of receiving a battery. G. Deadly Weapon: Any firearm, loaded or unloaded, or any weapon from which a shot, readily capable of producing death or serious physical injury, may be discharged, or a switchblade knife, bludgeon, dagger, billy, blackjack, or metal knuckles.

H. Family or household members: Includes spouses, former spouses, parents, children, stepchildren and other persons related by blood or by present or prior marriage, persons who share or formerly shared a common dwelling, persons who have or allegedly have a child in common, persons who share or allegedly share a blood relationship through a child, persons who have or have had a dating or engagement relationship, and persons with disabilities and their personal assistants. For purposes of this paragraph, neither a casual acquaintanceship nor ordinary fraternization between 2 individuals in business or social contexts shall be deemed to constitute a dating relationship. I. Harassment: Knowing conduct that would cause a reasonable person emotional distress; and does cause emotional distress. Pursuant to statute, the following types of conduct are presumed to cause emotional distress: 1. Creating a disturbance at the victim's place of employment. 2. Repeatedly telephoning the victim's place of employment, home, or residence. 3. Repeatedly following the victim about in a public place or places. 4. Repeatedly keeping the victim under surveillance by remaining present outside his or her home, school, place of employment, vehicle, or other place occupied by the victim. 5. Peering in the victim's windows. 6. Repeatedly threatening to improperly remove a child of the victim from the jurisdiction, improperly concealing that child from the victim, or making a single such threat following an actual or attempted improper removal or concealment. 7. Threatening physical force, confinement, or restraint on one or more occasions. IV. PROCEDURES GENERAL
A. TELECOMMUNICATOR RESPONSIBILITY

1. Two officers shall be dispatched on all domestic disturbance calls.

2. Because the Telecommunicator is likely to be the first to receive the call, they are

the key in determining the type of response. To assist the responding officers, the Telecommunicator shall determine the following information, if possible: a. The name of the complainant; b. If the incident is in progress; c. If there is a weapon involved; d. If anyone has been injured and needs medical attention; e. A description of the offender, his name, his location, direction and mode of travel; f. If any drugs or alcohol are involved; g. If there have been prior incidents; h. If there are any minors in the house; and i. Check LEADS for orders of protection or cautions, whenever practical or necessary 3. The Telecommunicator will maintain telephone contact until the officers arrive to monitor the incident and provide support to the victim. Background noises may help to evaluate the situation and provide further information to the responding officers.
B. OFFICERS RESPONSIBILITIES

1. Priority of response to domestic violence calls shall be no less than if the incident involved strangers. 2. Upon arrival, officers should verbally identify themselves as police officers and give an explanation for their presence. 3. Officers may enter and conduct a search of the residence if consent has been given to do so. Although a consent search eliminates the need for a search warrant and probable cause, such consent must be freely and voluntarily given. If two people have joint ownership of a place or thing, either one may give a valid consent. However, if one of them exercises sole control over part of the premises, the other cannot give valid consent to search that part. 4. When entry to a residence is refused, officers shall be persistent, explaining that a complaint was received and must be investigated. If entry is still denied, request the Telecommunicator to call the residence and establish contact with the victim. If entry is still

refused, officers shall request the presence of a supervisor. 5. There may be times when sufficient probable cause exists to indicate that a crime is being committed, has been committed or that a life is in danger. In these cases, if entry has been refused, or there is no reply from the premises, forced entry may be necessary. Officers shall evaluate the following elements when considering a forced, warrantless entry: a. The degree of urgency involved and the time required to secure a warrant; b. The possibility of dangers to others, including police officers; c. Whether the offense involves violence; d. Whether the officers reasonably believe that persons may be armed. 6. Upon investigation of a domestic violence incident, the officer shall evaluate the circumstances surrounding the incident and determine if probable cause exists to make an arrest. 7. Under no circumstances will an officer of this department use the threat to arrest all parties involved for the purpose of discouraging the victim from signing a complaint. 8. When a domestic violence crime has occurred, ONLY with extenuating circumstances and a supervisor's approval will an arrest not be made. In that instance, a written police report will be made articulating the specific reasons why an arrest was not made. 9. Bond of offenders arrested for a domestic violence related incident must be set by a Judge. The jail list shall be marked as no bond, until such time as a Judge sets a bond. 10. Any officer assigned to investigate an allegation of domestic violence, neglect, or exploitation incident between family or household members will make a written police report of any bona fide allegation and the disposition of such investigation even if an arrest is not made. The report will include the victims statements as to the frequency and severity of prior incidents of domestic violence, neglect, or exploitation by the same family or household member, and the number of prior calls for police assistance to prevent such further domestic violence, neglect, or exploitation. 11. In all cases of domestic violence the victim will be issued a victim information notice and a Domestic Violence Act form. V. PROCEDURES FOR INVESTIGATION OF DOMESTIC VIOLENCE A. In all cases of Domestic Violence, alleged acts of Domestic Abuse, or Violations of an Order of Protection, an Offense/Incident Report shall be completed.

1. Law enforcement officers at the scene of an alleged incident of domestic violence will continue to make a professional assessment of the situation at hand, and determine whether probable cause exists for charges and arrest, based on the totality of evidence available. 2. If no arrest is made when the suspect is present, the Offense Report will clearly show reasons for not making an arrest. All Offense/Incident Reports shall be forwarded to the State's Attorney's Office in Edwardsville within three (3) days of the incident, whether an arrest is made or charges issued. B. In determining probable cause for charges and arrest in cases of Domestic Abuse, law enforcement officers shall use a uniform format for collecting and reporting relevant evidence. A variety of evidence makes it possible to prosecute domestic abuse cases even when a victim chooses not to cooperate with prosecution. 1. The officer should interview the victim and offender separately, so that the victim can speak freely without being intimidated by the presence of the offender. The officer should process the crime scene and collect evidence as in any other case involving physical harm to a victim. The evidence should include, where feasible: color photographs of injuries; photographs and a description of premises which corroborate the reported incident; weapons or other articles which can be used to corroborate occurrence of violence (broken glass, torn clothing, bloodstained articles, damaged possessions), 911 transcripts and tapes; victim's statements about frequency and severity of prior instances of abuse; statements by children present and statements by potential witnesses, neighbors; number of prior requests for police assistance. 2. The officer should interview both parties involved in a domestic dispute and offer both parties the opportunity to make a statement. The officer should determine who was the aggressor and arrest only that person. Under no circumstances are both parties to be charged with Domestic Battery. If the officer feels the need to charge the non-aggressor party, then that person should be charged with something other than Domestic Battery. C. The Madison County State's Attorney hereby directs police agencies within Madison County to aggressively utilize the arrest powers granted by the state legislature. 1. Arrests are expected, based on probable cause, if any of the following circumstances exist: a. Signs of injury or impairment. b. Deadly weapon involved. c. Alleged battery, with no physical signs of injury, when other corroborating evidence is available. Example A: The victim claims that a battery occurred. The officer, upon examining the victim, cannot detect visible signs of injury. When the officer interviews the perpetrator, the perpetrator admits to striking the victim.

Example B: The victim claims that a battery occurred. The officer can detect no visible signs of injury. A responsible witness makes a statement to the officer that the alleged perpetrator struck the victim. d. An assault of the victim / reasonable apprehension of receiving a battery. e. Order of Protection in effect which excludes the suspect from a particular residence, with probable cause to believe the suspect has violated that specific paragraph of the order. Note that an arrest should be made even if the victim has invited the suspect onto the property of the victim. Persons protected by an Order of Protection do not have the power to waive the injunction against the violator. Only the Court can dissolve or modify an Order of Protection. D. THE OFFICER COMPLAINANT. SHALL SIGN THE APPROPRIATE CHARGE AS THE

1. A victim who clearly desires to sign as the complainant shall be encouraged to make a written statement about the incident. 2. A separate form, to be used by the State's Attorney's office to notify victims of court proceedings, shall be completed by the officer. The officer shall note the victim's name and the address to which mail will be delivered. This form will not be a part of the court record, and the address noted therein will not be made available to the defendant or to the defendant's attorney. 3. Pursuant to statute, the officer shall advise victims of their legal rights and provide all victims with a copy of the "Illinois Domestic Violence Act: Rights of Victims" form sheet which should include the officer's name and badge number. The officer is encouraged to review the sections of the sheet which describe how a victim may obtain an order of protection, seek shelter from further abuse, and preserve evidence of domestic abuse. E. The following guidelines apply only when a police officer arrives at a domestic violence scene and the perpetrator has fled from the scene and does not return to the scene while the officer is processing the scene. 1. Process the scene, i.e.: take statements, collect evidence, etc., just as you normally would. Advise the victim of their rights and options. (See Paragraph D-3) 2. If the perpetrator does not return to the scene while you are processing the scene, advise the victim that since the perpetrator is no longer at the scene, an arrest warrant will be secured. 3. Prepare and sign a misdemeanor complaint and complete the victim notification form. 4. The Police Department, a detective or assigned officer will prepare an Arrest Warrant and LEADS Sheet. On the next court day the police agency should submit the signed Misdemeanor Complaint, Arrest Warrant, incident report and LEADS Sheet to the nearest

presiding Judge for their consideration. 5. Judges in area Courts will issue a warrant based on the above documentation to the officer who presents this documentation during the next court day, and verifies the complaint before a deputy clerk. It will not be necessary, unless practical for the department involved, for the same officer who signs the misdemeanor complaint to appear before a Judge to obtain a warrant. F. During the period between an incident and the issuance of a warrant, law enforcement officers shall make an arrest, based on probable cause, when a perpetrator is encountered. EXAMPLE: If a law enforcement officer sees a perpetrator on the street during a weekend after a Friday night incident, he or she should arrest the perpetrator, based on probable cause. Pursuant to case law, an individual cannot be arrested in his residence without a warrant having been issued. G. In the event that a law enforcement officer is unable to determine probable cause, based on a totality of the evidence, for a charge of domestic abuse, but the victim maintains that an offense occurred, several options exist: 1. Advise the person alleging abuse, and expressing a concern for personal safety, of the right to seek a pro se order of protection; 2. Advise the person expressing a concern for personal safety to contact a domestic violence advocacy agency, and to seek shelter. Assist the person to use the Illinois Domestic Violence Act; Rights of Victims form (see paragraph D-3), which contains the names and phone numbers of local shelters; 3. Any party not residing at the location may be advised to leave. If the alleged perpetrator does not reside at the residence, and refuses to leave, the officer may advise that the perpetrator may be subject to trespassing charges. 4. Advise the person alleging abuse and wishing to pursue criminal charges that, pursuant to the Domestic Violence Act, all relevant information may be brought to the State's Attorney's office for review. a. Departments are expected to forward written reports, in cases where no charges are filed or arrests made, which explain the inability to establish probable cause. H. Arrests for Violation of an Order of Protection are required under this policy if the following conditions exist: 1. An Order of Protection exists and its validity has been verified (through LEADS); 2. The officer has probable cause to believe the offender is in violation of the order;

a. Officers should closely read the Order of Protection for restrictions. 3. The offender is present and has knowledge of the Order of Protection. If the offender denies knowledge of the Order of Protection and his/her denial is credible, the officer should provide the offender with a copy of the order, verbally advise him/her of the contents, and note in the report that a copy of the Order of Protection was given and explained to the offender. 4. An Order of Protection is not void if the victim has invited the offender into the residence. Enforcement is still required. a. An Order of Protection can only be issued, extended, modified or revoked by a Judge. The victims cannot change their minds and allow a violation of the order of protection. I. If an arrest is made and the officer believes that the facts of the particular case warrant the setting of bond higher than the standard figure, the officer should contact the Judge on call. The Sheriff's Department receives current information on which judge is on call for Orders of Protection, from the Chief Judge's office. The Sheriff's Department will provide the officer with the number for the judge on call. Examples of appropriate circumstances for a higher bond include an unusually brutal beating perpetrated on the victim, or when a high bond is necessary to protect the victim from repeated abuse. J. In a battery situation, the officer should charge the offender with Domestic Battery (rather than Battery) if the victim qualifies as a "Family or Household Member" (See section III, paragraph H of this directive for definition).] K. In the event an offender's conduct is barred by both a state statute and a municipal ordinance, the offender is to be charged with violation of the state statute, which carries a potential jail sentence. L. All domestic-related charges, including battery and violation of Orders of Protection charges will be processed through a centralized docket in Edwardsville. Other charges will be included on this docket, as follows: 1. Companion charges committed along with a domestic battery will be prosecuted on the centralized docket. On the misdemeanor complaint form, the officer should write "(domestic violence court)" under the charge name, to facilitate routing the case to the centralized docket. 2. A battery charge, which constitutes abusive behavior in a relationship. Example 1: Boyfriend beats a girlfriend not living with him. Example 2: An ex-spouse, divorced for two (2) years, batters an ex-spouse when returning children from a visitation. On the misdemeanor complaint form, the officer should write "(domestic violence court)" under the charge name, to facilitate routing the case to the centralized docket.

3. A charge of aggravated assault, assault, criminal damage to property, or disorderly conduct is committed, and the victim is a current or former family or household member, or is or has been in a relationship with the perpetrator. Example 1: An officer responds to a domestic disturbance call. The officer witnesses a husband shaking a fist at a wife, and saying: "I'm going to kill you." No battery occurred. The perpetrator is charged with assault. Example 2: A man smashes the windows of a woman's car after she ends a relationship with him. The perpetrator is charged with criminal damage to property. These charges should be routed to the centralized docket, as described above. 4. Unlawful visitation interference charges, standing alone, where no violence or threat of violence has occurred, shall not be designated as appropriate charges for the centralized domestic violence docket. M. Pursuant to the Domestic Violence Act, officers shall provide or arrange, as warranted, transportation for the victim of abuse to a medical facility for treatment of injuries, or to a nearby place of shelter or safety. If no arrest is made, because of a clear lack of probable cause, the officer may nevertheless suggest that one party leave the home for the night. If one party is locked out of the house for the night, the complainant will be advised to contact an attorney as the matter is civil in nature. Officers will not assist in breaking into the house. N. If a perpetrator of violence has physical custody of a child or children, the officers should not allow that fact to prevent charges against that perpetrator and the process of charging that person may require the officer to transfer the physical custody of the child or children to the victim. When the victim is referred to the State's Attorney's Office for an Order of Protection, we will ask the Court to review the situation of physical custody of any minor child or children in a temporary Order of Protection (as we have done in the past). O. Officer's response to a complaint of stalking should be to verify, through proper police reports and investigation, that the perpetrator has had physical contact with the victim with the intent of harassment. 1. Upon a review of these reports, if the circumstances so warrant, seek a felony charge of communicating with a witness since a reasonable inference may be drawn that the stalkingtype conduct is intended to intimidate the victim so as to dissuade the victim from appearing in Court or cooperation with local police or the State's Attorney's Office.

VI. VICTIM ASSISTANCE

A. Officers will offer victims immediate and adequate information (the Domestic Violence Act form) written in a language appropriate for the victim, which shall include a summary of the procedures and relief available to victims of domestic violence. B. If the victim requests assistance in leaving the premises, the officer will stand by for a reasonable amount of time to allow the victim to gather some necessary personal belongings and possessions. C. Officers will provide the victim with a referral to the Family Shelter. D. Officers will advise the victim about seeking medical attention and preserving evidence (specifically including photographs of injury or damage and damaged clothing or other property). E. Officers will provide or arrange for transportation of the victim and, at the victims request, any minors or dependents in the victims care, to a medical facility for treatment of injuries or to a nearby place of shelter or safety. VII. DOMESTIC CASES INVOLVING ACTIVE DUTY MILITARY PERSONNEL AND THEIR FAMILES 1. Upon discovery of a domestic violence case involving active duty Military personnel, the Granite City Police Department will notify the appropriate Military Service and will furnish a written report of the police intervention, including photos, arrest report, Breathalyzer findings, etc. They will then immediately notify the Family Advocacy Program Manager for follow-up. When in doubt of the duty status of an individual, the notification shall be made and the Military will resolve the matter.

VIII. OUT OF STATE ORDERS OF PROTECTION

A. Out of state Orders of Protection are enforceable in the State of Illinois.
IX. LIMITED LAW ENFORCEMENT LIABILITY

A. Any act of omission or commission by any law enforcement officer acting in good faith in rendering emergency assistance or otherwise enforcing the Domestic Violence Act shall not impose civil liability upon the law enforcement officer or his or her supervisor or employer, unless the act is a result of willful or wanton misconduct.

5 Procedure #4.200 GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title: 4.200

CRIMINAL INVESTIGATIONS Procedure:

Date Issued:

Revised:

I.POLICY A. To outline the administrative and operational guidelines for efficient and effective criminal investigations. B. C. To outline the administrative and operational guidelines of the Detective Division. To establish a component within the police department to conduct followup investigations.

II.PURPOSE A. The function of the Detective Division is to supplement the efforts of the Patrol division by ensuring those follow-up investigations of criminal offenses are conducted by trained detectives. The Detective's responsibility begins when the Patrol Officer has reached a point in the preliminary investigation when he can no longer continue because of time, area, workload or specialized skills are needed. The Department's responsibility is to ensure that criminal offenses are thoroughly investigated and that the offenders are promptly and efficiently brought to justice. III.PROCEDURE A. SUPERVISOR RESPONSIBILITY

1. The Detective Division Commander shall ensure that all cases meeting the criteria for followup investigation are effectively and aggressively investigated in a manner that will facilitate the apprehension and prosecution of criminal offenders and/or clearance of reported crime. 2. The Detective Division Commander shall assign reports to individual detectives for followup based upon: a. area of responsibility;

b. c.

level of expertise; individual case load.

3. The Detective Division Commander will review and approve all supplementary reports submitted by detectives. 4. The Detective Division Commander will ensure that all reports submitted are of the highest quality and correctly reflect the proper direction of the investigation. 5. Determine work schedules and ensure that an oncall schedule for detectives is maintained. 6. Ensure that the Chief of Police, through the chain of command, is informed concerning all major investigations. 7. Prepare monthly reports indicating the number of cases assigned, and their status.

8. Cooperate with all other supervisors to ensure unity of Department goals, and achievement of organizational objectives. 9. Ensure that crime analysis, trends and general criminal information is disseminated to Patrol in a timely manner. 10. 11. 12. Ensure that investigation logs, records, and files are maintained and updated. Ensure the maintenance and security of juvenile records. Annually evaluate all investigative personnel.

B. DETECTIVE RESPONSIBILITY 1. A detective holds the rank of patrolman and is assigned to the Detective Division by the Chief of Police. 2. Each of the following duties, responsibilities and tasks are performed on an ongoing basis:

a. Conduct followup investigations on each assigned case, until there is an approved disposition. b. Investigate delinquent and status offenses committed by juveniles.

c. Inform the supervisor of all progress in cases assigned by promptly submitting detailed supplementary reports. d. Develop intelligence information regarding criminal activity and identification, and forward such information to the Patrol division.

e.

Develop confidential sources of information to further investigative effectiveness.

f. Maintain a cooperative liaison with law enforcement agencies at the local, state, and federal levels, sharing information and cooperating in investigations whenever appropriate. g. Assist and cooperate with other Department members in the investigation of offenses, toward the objectives of apprehension and prosecution of criminals and the recovery of property. h. Assist State evidence technicians in the collection of physical evidence on major cases, ensuring proper preservation and chain of custody. i. Prepare cases for court, testifying at each stage of the trial process and cooperate with the prosecutor whenever requested. j. Use a major case check list whenever assigned to a major or critical investigation.

k. Ensure civil treatment and the protection of constitutional rights of all persons coming within the scope of the investigation. l. Be prepared to provide updates on any open cases on a monthly basis.

3. The Chief of Police may assign patrol officers temporarily, to the Criminal Investigations Unit to benefit the Department in the following ways: a. b. c. d. e. C. strengthen the investigation process; investigate major crimes, i.e. homicide; improve and provide more complete preliminary investigations; create a pool of patrol officers with investigation experience; and enhance career development for the individual officer. CASE SCREENING

1. All reports shall be forwarded to the Detective Division Commander for review and assignment. 2. Utilizing the solvability factors, the Detective Division Commander shall determine which offenses, shall be investigated. 3. The Detective Division Commander shall also consider the type of crime, seriousness, frequency, impact on the community, research conducted by the Department and from other agencies, and documented experiences of the Department or from other agencies, when screening cases for followup.

D. 1.

CASE ASSIGNMENT The Detective Division Commander will assign cases to unit personnel.

2. Cases requiring specialized skill, knowledge, and ability should be assigned to personnel having those credentials. 3. All cases assigned shall be entered into a database.

4. The detective assigned a case for followup will become the primary detective and is responsible for the conduct and results of the investigation. 5. All supplementary reports, including records of statements, results of examinations of physical evidence, case report status and all other reports, shall be forwarded to the Detective Division Commander for review and approval. 6. The Detective Division Commander can authorize the suspension of an assigned case. The determination to suspend shall be based upon the following: a. b. c. d. All leads have been exhausted; unavailability of Department resources; seriousness of crime; and impact on the community.

7. All major cases suspended shall periodically be reviewed to determine if any new techniques, information or evidence has surfaced which would result in a reassignment. 8. In all cases where the investigation is cleared/closed without charges being issued, the victim/complainant will be notified and advised of the change. This notification shall be documented in the supplemental report. E. FOLLOWUP INVESTIGATION PROCEDURES

1. After preliminary investigation and the determination that an investigation follow-up is required, the case will be assigned to a detective. The assigned detective is accountable for conducting the follow-up investigation. All followup investigations should practice acceptable methods of developing information through witnesses, victims, informants and other sources of available information. The following should be considered when conducting an investigation: a. Information Development -- use department record systems, contact outside agencies and LEADS/NCIC computer system for background, supportive and historical data.

b. Interview/Interrogations -- valuable information is obtained by interviewing victims, witnesses and officers that were at the scene. Interrogations of suspects and offenders will provide information on involvement, intent and knowledge of the crime. c. Physical Evidence -- the collection and preservation of evidence is often critical in the prosecution of many cases. Every effort should be made to use the best available techniques for gathering evidence. The rules of evidence, proper packaging and chain of custody must be thoroughly understood and applied. d. Surveillance -- observations of suspects, offenders and fixed locations are helpful in documenting activities. Surveillance often detects criminal behavior and provides a basis for obtaining a search warrant. 2. When a case is received by a detective he shall attempt to contact the victim or complainant, on the date of assignment. 3. The detective should discuss the merits of the case, outline the basic course of the investigation and stress the importance of the victims cooperation in any prosecution. The detective shall notify the victim any time there is a change in the status of their case. 4. The following steps shall be considered by detectives when conducting a preliminary or followup investigation: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. Review and analyze all reports from the preliminary phase, conduct additional interviews and interrogations, review Department records, seek additional information (uniform officers, informants), review results from laboratory examinations, arrange for dissemination of information as appropriate, plan, organize and conduct searches, prepare cases for court presentations, assist in prosecution, identify and apprehend suspects, collect physical evidence, determine involvement of suspects in other crimes, and check suspects criminal histories.

5. The following steps shall be considered by officers/detectives when conducting a preliminary investigation for a homicide or major case: a. Upon arrival, enter the scene by the route least likely to disturb evidence, noting your route of travel. b. c. Check the victim for signs of life. Summon medical assistance if necessary.

d. Be aware of dying declarations. Ask the victim if they know who did this them, if they can give a description and if they know that they may die. e. If the victim is unconscious and being transported to a hospital an officer will remain with the victim at all times for the purpose of a dying declaration f. If the victim must be removed from the scene and if possible, photograph the victims position before removal. If not possible, note and sketch the victims position. g. Accompany the victim to the hospital to collect and mark items of evidence. If doctors and nurses are involved in the evidence recovery process, note the time recovered and identity of that person. h. If the victim remains on the scene, secure the scene.

i. Prevent anyone from touching the body or disturbing anything, pending the arrival of the investigators, evidence technicians or the medical examiner. j. k. Detain and identify witnesses. Prevent the destruction of fragile evidence such as footprints, tire tracks, etc.

6. Detective personnel may, on occasion, request that a polygraph examination or Computer Voice Stress Analaysis (CVSA) be conducted to aid an investigation. All such requests must be approved by a Detective Division Supervisor. 7. Any detective who has received approval to use a polygraph examination or CVSA shall only use the services of the State Police or approved outside agency. 8. All constitutional rights, guaranteed suspects of crimes, shall be strictly adhered to by all sworn personnel. Sworn personnel of the department SHALL NOT: a. b. c. use coercion for confessions or admissions; unnecessarily delay a suspects arraignment; fail to inform a suspect of his rights;

d. e.

deprive a suspect of counsel; release pretrial publicity intending to prejudice a fair trial.

F. BACKGROUND INVESTIGATIONS 1. The Detective Division shall be responsible for conducting background investigations. Background investigations may be necessary to aid criminal investigations or identify organized crime figures. 2. Pre-employment and liquor license background investigations shall be conducted by an investigator. 3. The following sources of information will aid the detective during the background investigation: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. F.B.I. State Police Secretary of State Credit Checks I.R.S. Utility Companies Banks State Welfare Agencies Local Law Enforcement Agencies Military Criminal Investigations Educational Institutions Associates -- neighbors, family, acquaintances Employers Social Security Number verification

4. Information obtained in a background investigation will be controlled through the Detective Division. Files will be separated from other police and investigation records, and shall not be distributed without the approval of the Chief of Police. 5. All information obtained as a result of a criminal background investigation shall be periodically updated and purged as circumstances dictate, and in accordance with State and Federal Law.

G. MAINTENANCE OF CASE FILES 1. Detectives will maintain a file on cases assigned for follow-up investigation. A typical case file may include reports and support documents. 2. Case assignment information will be entered into a database maintained by the Detective Division Commander. 3. Detectives will be responsible for maintaining all copies of pertinent reports and documents in their case file. When an original document relating to the case comes into the custody of the detective he will make a copy for his file and forward the original to the Records unit for inclusion into the master file. 4. Only active cases will be kept by the detective and once the investigation is complete the case will be turned over to the supervisor for review. 5. Access to investigation case files will be on a need to know basis, with permission of the assigned detective or Detective Division Supervisor. 6. Case files will be purged according to the Local Records Act.

H. INVESTIGATION OPERATION FUNDS 1. The Department maintains a special fund to support operations by the investigative personnel. The Detective Division Commander is responsible for the security, maintenance, records and accountability of this fund. Only the Detective Division Commander and the Chief of Police are authorized access to the fund. 2. Funds may be used for purchasing contraband as evidence, expenses for surveillance activities, and other related investigation assignments. 3. Fiscal and procedural management of this fund will include the following:

a. Authorization of the Detective Division Commander as responsible for the fund, including acceptance of money into the fund account and disbursement of funds; b. c. maintaining the fund in a secured location; submission of requests for funds prior to use;

d. e. f.

maintaining a ledger that identifies the date, amount and purpose of the expenditure; bi-annual report of expenditures to the Chief of Police; and, annual financial statement of the fund.

4. The Chief of Police must give prior approval for all expenditures from the fund. If there is an emergency, and the Chief of Police cannot be reached, the Detective Division Commander may authorize the expenditure. However, the Detective Division Commander will, as soon as possible, inform the Chief of Police of the expenditure. When the Chief of Police is out of town the Detective Division Commander will contact his designee for approval. 5. The Chief of Police may request a financial statement of the Investigation Operation Funds. This statement will detail all transactions of the fund. 6. The Chief of Police, or his designee, will conduct periodic audits of the Investigation Operations Fund. These audits will check to ensure that funds are properly detailed, that the funds are maintained in a secure location, records of all transactions are documented, and funds have been disbursed for approved activities.

GRANITE CITY

POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title: 4.201

INVESTIGATOR CALL OUT Procedure:

Date Issued:

Revised:

I.PURPOSE

A. To provide for 24-hour availability of a criminal investigator to conduct follow-up investigationswhenaseriouscrimehasoccurred.

II.POLICY

A. ItshallbethepolicyofthisdepartmenttoensurethatamemberoftheDetectiveDivisionis notifiedwhenaseriouscrimehasoccurred.Duringnormaldutyhours,follow-upinvestigationsmaybe conductedbytheassigneddetective.Duringunscheduledhours,therewillbeaninvestigatoroncallat alltimes.TheDetectiveDivisionCommanderwillprovideanoncallscheduleofavailableinvestigators. Acopyshallbegiventoeachwatchcommanderandmadeavailableinthecommunicationscenter.

III.PROCEDURE

1.Thetypesofincidentsinwhichaninvestigatormaybenotifiedareasfollows:

Homicide Questionabledeath ArmedRobbery SexOffenses ChildAbuse Burglary Arson Bombings AggravatedBattery

Anyincidentthatthewatchcommanderdeterminesneedstheimmediateattentionofaninvestigator.

2. The watch commander will review all pertinent information surrounding the incident to determineifanoff-dutyinvestigatorshouldbenotified.

3. Ifanimmediatefollow-upinvestigationisrequired,thewatchcommanderwillcontactthe DetectiveDivisionCommandertoauthorizetheinvestigatorcallout.


4. Communications Center personnel will refer to the call out schedule provided by the Detective Division Commander for the on call investigator. The watch commander may contact the investigatororhaveatelecommunicatormakenotification.

5. When the on call investigator is contacted, he should be advised of the type of incident, locationandanyspecialequipmentneeded.

6. Iftheoncallinvestigatorcannotbecontacted,theDetectiveDivisionCommandershould becontactedimmediately.

7. If the watch commander determines that the incident is of major consequence, the DetectiveDivisionCommanderwillbecontacted.

Procedure #4..204

GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title:

INFORMANTS

Procedure: 4.204

Date Issued: Revised:

I. PURPOSE A. To provide for the confidentiality and management of informant activity, files and funds. II. POLICY A. It is important for law enforcement agencies to recognize that the use of an informant is important to the satisfactory completion of many investigations. Equally important however is the confidential nature of informant activity, identity, files and funds. It is therefore the responsibility of this Department to ensure that rigid controls are maintained when dealing with informants, and that strict guidelines are used in the control of informant funds. III. DEFINITION A. An informant is any individual who, under the direction of an officer, supplies assistance or information regarding criminal activity, usually, with an expectation of some form of compensation. The informant is different from other concerned citizens who do not work under the direction of the officer or become a party to the investigation itself. IV. PROCEDURE
A. ADMINISTRATION

1. The Detective Division Commander is responsible for maintaining a master file of informants. The information in these files will be secured in a locked file cabinet with limited access to the Chief of Police, the Detective Division Commander and the informants contact officer. A record of all informants used by this Department will be included in this master file. The Detective Division Commander is responsible for updating and ensuring that information and documentation is current and the file is properly maintained. 2. Information in these files will contain the following: a. Police Department Confidential Informant Information Record form;

b. photograph, except juvenile; c. fingerprint card, except juvenile; d. criminal history record; e. copy of case reports where the informant provided information or assistance; f. receipts for monies received by the informant; g. any correspondence relative to the informant; and h. a waiver form signed by the informant. 3. When an officer develops an informant he will be required to provide all the necessary documentation for the master file. The Detective Division Commander will assign a confidential informant number (C.I. #) to each informant in the master file. This informant control number will be used in all reports concerning the informant to protect his identity. If necessary an alias may be assigned by the Detective Division Commander for later referrals or the signing of pay receipts. 4. Officers are responsible for forwarding all reports concerning contact with their informants to the Detective Division Commander, through their chain of command to initiate a new file or to update the master file. Maintenance of the file is the responsibility of the Detective Division Commander. All information should be properly dated and checked for accuracy and authenticity.
B. RESTRICTIONS

1. Informants will sometimes offer to exchange information for immunity, leniency, or their release. These however can only be properly granted by a judge in a judicial proceeding. Neither the Department nor any member may grant any person immunity, leniency, nor their release from custody. When an officer intends to intercede on behalf of an informant or potential informant in relation to any legal proceedings, supervisory approval is required. Informants or potential informants will not be made promises that prosecution will be declined or dismissed, or specific sentences received, but advised that legal authorities will be advised of their cooperation and asked to consider it in the pending legal matters in question. 2. Juvenile informants will not be used without written permission from their parent or guardian. 3. Two (2) members of the Department must be present when working with an informant of the opposite sex. 4. The Department will not sanction or tolerate independent criminal activity on the part of any informant.

5. Informants will not receive money without first signing a Department receipt. 6. Officer/Informant contacts will be of a strictly professional nature. Social or business contacts are expressly prohibited.

C. PRECAUTIONS 1. Contacts with informants should be made by at least two (2) officers when possible and practical. 2. When a lone officer must make contact with an informant, the officer will notify his supervisor of the meeting. 3. When meeting an informant, the officer should always select the time and place. 4. Officers will, at all times, maintain control of the relationship between the officer and the informant, and the decisions on how to proceed with the investigation. 5. All contacts with informants will be documented and the report will become part of the master file. Any information relating to violations of law that would be of interest to other agencies or units of the Police Department will be investigated and the appropriate notification made. 6. When using a juvenile as an informant a signed wavier must be obtained from the parent or guardian of the juvenile giving permission. The parent or guardian will be kept informed as to the specific use of the juvenile in any investigation. Officers will diligently strive to protect a juvenile informant from physical or emotional harm and will not allow the juvenile to be placed in possible danger. 7. Informants who are to participate in an undercover purchase in which he may come into contact with Department funds, controlled substances, or anything else of potential evidentiary value will be thoroughly searched both before and after the undercover encounter, and where possible kept under continuous observation during the undercover operation. Searches will only be conducted by officers of the same sex as the informant.
D. INFORMANT FUND

1. The Department's budget provides for an informant fund. These funds are strictly for payments to informants and other investigative expenses. 2. The Detective Division Commander is responsible for maintaining and disbursing funds. The funds will be secured and accessible to only the Captain of Detectives and the Chief of Police.

3. Personnel requesting funds will document their request to their supervisor and describe the following: a. case number or Confidential Informant number; b. describe the reason for the request; total funds needed and their intended use; and, c. personnel involved in the investigation. 4. All requests must be approved by the Detective Division Commander and the Chief of Police. The Detective Division Commander is authorized to disburse funds in the case of an emergency. However, the Captain of Detectives will contact the Chief of Police as soon as possible after the emergency. 5. The Detective Division Commander will maintain a ledger to record all transactions from the fund. Whenever money is disbursed the following information will be recorded: a. date of transaction; b. amount of money disbursed; c. name of person signing for receipt of money; d. reason for disbursement; e. confidential informant number, if applicable; and f. balance on hand. 6. The Detective Division Commander will use the following criteria whenever funds are paid out to an informant: a. a previous history of providing accurate information; b. reliability of the informant; c. type of information provided; seriousness of the crime; and, d. the probability of an arrest and conviction. 7. Informants must sign a Fund Receivable form whenever money is disbursed from the informant fund. An alias may be used by the informant if assigned by the case investigator and logged on the master file. The form will then be forwarded to Detective Division

Commander to be included in the informant's master file. 8. Any funds expended from the fund and not used will be returned with an explanation for the return. 9. The Detective Division Commander will submit bi-annual reports of the informant fund to the Chief of Police through the Assistant Chief of Police. 10. The Detective Division Commander is responsible for the continuous accounting of the fund and will submit an annual audit, in January, to the Chief of Police through the Assistant Chief of Police summarizing all expenditures from the fund. 11. The Chief of Police, or his designee, will periodically conduct unannounced audits of this fund. The audit will: a. ensure that all funds have been accounted for with accurate and clear documentation; b. ensure adherence to the requirements set forth in this procedure; and, c. check that proper control measures are being followed.

E. CENSURING AN INFORMANT
1. In the event continued use of an informant would prove to be detrimental to the goals of the Department or to the safety of its officers, or when an informant is found to be otherwise unreliable, and in the opinion of the officer, should not be used, the relationship between the informant and the Department will be terminated. 2. The officer will submit a report indicating the reasons why the informant should no longer be utilized. 3. Upon receipt of this report the Detective Division Commander will write the word "Censure" on the cover of the informants master file and date and initial it. 4. The officer directly involved with the informant has the responsibility to notify any other officers, units or agencies that the informant is no longer reliable.

Procedure #4.301

GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title: COMMUNITY RELATIONS Procedure: 4.301 Date Issued: Revised:

I. PURPOSE A. To establish an atmosphere where an officer may perform his duties with the acceptance, understanding and approval of the community. B. To develop and maintain positive community relations by identifying and being responsive to citizen needs and concerns. II. POLICY A. The Police Department is committed to establishing close ties with and responding to the needs and problems of the community. While the Department's task is generally governed by law, the policies formulated to guide the enforcement of the law must include consideration of the public will. This responsiveness must be clearly understood at all levels by a genuine concern for the problems of individuals or groups. The needs of the community must become an integral part of the programs designed to carry out the mission of the Department. Community relations is a shared responsibility. Every member of the Department is accountable for promoting good community relations. III. PROCEDURE A.RESPONSIBILITIESANDOPERATION

1. The Patrol Division Commander will have the primary responsibility for the administration of the community relations function. The community relations function is to proactively and reactively respond to community needs in a community relations context. The Patrol Division Commander will coordinate all Department activities by maintaining open lines of communication with the community and by initiating departmental programs responsive to community law enforcement needs. 2. Every member of the Department, through the general discharge of their law enforcement duties, will strive to achieve a positive relationship with community organizations and individuals.
3. The Department will attempt to identify and correct internal practices, or attitudes, that may contribute to community tensions and grievances. 4. At least every two years, a survey of citizen attitudes and opinions will be conducted. The survey will cover:

a. department performance; b. competence and performance of Department personnel; c. officers behavior toward citizens; d. citizens fears about crime and safety in the community and their neighborhoods; e. recommendations for improvement. 5. The Patrol Division Commander is responsible for developing and administering the survey. Results and recommendations will be forwarded to the Chief of Police. 6. Department policies and procedures should reflect the needs expressed by community organizations and individual residents. Citizen input will always be encouraged, and suggestions and opinions will be gathered in the following ways:

a. participation and membership by Department members in civic organizations;

b. community meetings attended or organized by the Crime Prevention Unit; and c. citizens concerns expressed to officers while handling calls for service.

2 Procedure #4.400 GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title:

BOMB THREATS Procedure: 4.400

Date Issued:

Revised:

I.PURPOSE

A. To provide broad guidelines for handling bomb threats with a minimum of danger and confusion.

II.POLICY

A. The potentially serious injuries, considerable property damage and disruption of sometimes vital services dictates that our response be swift, but cautious. This Department will take seriously all threats to injure citizens and damage property.

III.PROCEDURE

A. When a bomb threat is received, an officer and supervisory personnel will be dispatched to the location.

B. The on scene supervisor will inform all personnel responding to the scene to cease radio transmissions and sirens within 150 feet of the facility.

C. The on scene supervisor will discuss the threat with only the owner, manager or supervisor in charge of the facility or building.

D. The person in charge of the facility or building will be in control of the situation and make all decisions until such time when a suspected bomb is located.

E. The on scene supervisor may suggest an appropriate course of action, but will not take control until information or evidence is uncovered indicating the presence of a suspected bomb.

F. It will be the responsibility of the person in charge of the facility or building to have the location searched, and to provide individuals from his facility to do the searching.


G. Police personnel will not assist in any searches where occupants of the facility are available to perform this duty, except if the location is a private residence in which case the officer may accompany a member of the family while that person searches the premises.

H. The on scene supervisor may suggest that occupants familiar with the location are best suited to search for suspicious objects. However, all searchers must be instructed not to touch or move any suspicious object. All suspicious objects discovered should be immediately brought to the attention of the police.

I. The decision to evacuate the facility or building on the strength of the bomb threat will be left to the person in charge of the facility. Several factors should be considered.

1.How credible is the threat?

2.Was a time given for the explosion to occur? 3.How disruptive would the evacuation be?
J. If the person in charge of the facility or building orders an evacuation without a bomb or suspicious object being found, the persons leaving should be instructed not to touch anything.

K. If a suspected bomb is found, the on scene supervisor will immediately take control and do the following:

1.Not move or touch the suspect device in any way.

2. Summon additional personnel to the scene, if necessary, to establish an outer perimeter for crowd control.

3. Notify the Bomb Disposal Unit per current contact number in the OIC phone book at the Watch Commander's Desk.

4.Evacuate all persons from the facility to a place of safety.

5.Establish a critical incident command post and staging area.

6.Request the fire department send an ambulance crew and appropriate fire apparatus to the staging area.

7.Notify the Chief of Police through the chain of command.

L. The on scene supervisor in charge will cooperate with any assisting agency called to the scene and will remain on the scene until relieved, or the scene has been rendered safe.

M.All bomb threats will be documented on a General Information report.

2 Procedure 4.402 GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title: 4.402

MISSING PERSONS

Procedure:

Date Issued:

Revised:

I.PURPOSE

A.To provide guidelines for taking a report of a missing person.

II.POLICY

A. All missing person reports will be investigated thoroughly and quickly. Any reports of missing children will be handled as a priority investigation.

III.PROCEDURE

A.

MISSING PERSON - ADULT

1.A missing person report will be taken whenever the circumstances indicate that the person missing may be endangered, missing involuntarily, disabled, a catastrophe or accident victim, or other such circumstances that warrant police intervention and the person is a resident of Granite City.

2.The officer will obtain the missing persons name, age, description, last known location and possible destination as soon as possible. This information will be given to the telecommunicator who will and broadcast the information to patrol units.

3. The report should be made by a relative or legal guardian. If, however, a relative or guardian is not immediately available, then the report may be taken from a person who is a close friend, an employer or co-worker, or someone who has temporary custody of the missing person and a genuine concern for the missing persons safety.

4. The reporting officer will request that the person filing the report sign the LEADS entry section of the missing person report form. The officer will explain that the form permits the Department to enter the missing person into LEADS and holds the reporting person responsible for transporting the missing person back home if located in another jurisdiction.


5. If the person refuses to sign the LEADS entry section, the officer will explain how this will severely limit any attempt to notify other law enforcement agencies concerning the missing person. Any refusal will be documented in the narrative.

6.The reporting officer will attempt to obtain a current photograph of the missing person. The
photograph will be attached to the original report.

7.The watch commander will ensure that the missing person is entered into LEADS.

8. If the missing adult has been missing for at least 30 days, every effort must be made to obtain dental data for entry into LEADS. An authorization to release dental records can be obtained from the LEADS manual.

9. Investigators assigned a missing person report for follow up will contact the complainant and keep him informed of any progress made and the current status of the case.

10. The watch commander on duty at the time notification is received that a missing adult is located, found or who has returned home is responsible for ensuring that all LEADS and NCIC computer entries have been canceled. This information will be included in a supplemental report.

B.MISSING PERSON - MINORS

1.A missing person report will be taken on any person reported missing who is under the age of eighteen, un-emancipated and a resident of Granite City.

2. The officer will obtain the minors name, age, description, last known location and possible destination as soon as possible. This information will be given to the telecommunicator who will broadcast the information.

3. The parent or guardian will be asked to sign the LEADS section of the missing person
report. The officer will fully explain the purpose of this section and the parents responsibility to provide transportation when the minor is found. If the parent refuses to sign the LEADS section, the officer will indicate this in the narrative. However, any missing person report involving a minor will be entered into LEADS.

4. The officer should obtain a recent photograph of the minor for future identification. The officer should also inquire if the missing minor has an original set of fingerprints available. If available, both items should be made a part of the missing person report.

5. If the missing minor has been missing for at least 30 days, every effort must be made to obtain dental data for entry into LEADS. An authorization to release dental records can be obtained from the LEADS manual.

6.The watch commander is responsible for ensuring that the missing minor has been entered into LEADS.

7.Investigators assigned a missing minor report for follow up will contact the complainant and keep him informed of any progress made and the current status of the case.

8. The watch commander on duty at the time notification is received that a missing minor is located, found or who has returned home, is responsible for ensuring that all LEADS and NCIC computer entries have been canceled. This information will be included in a supplemental report.

C.SEARCHES

1. A patrol supervisor will respond immediately to the scene of a missing or abducted child, a disabled or mentally impaired adult and determine the type of investigation and search that is necessary.

2. The residence and surrounding neighborhood should be thoroughly searched by available personnel.

3. Additional assistance can be requested, by the watch commander, from the following, depending on the circumstances of the incident. a.Surrounding police departments;

b.On coming shift;

c.Department canine;

d.Fire Department personnel;

4. When the watch commander determines that the search will be detailed or lengthy, and there is a definite need for an immediate investigation, the on duty or on call investigator will be requested to respond to the scene. The Patrol Division Commander will also be notified.

5. The investigator responding to the scene will assume responsibility for coordinating the continued search and necessary follow up investigation, including maintaining contact with the complainant.

Procedure #4.403

GRANTIE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title:BANK/FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONProcedure:4.403 ALARM RESPONSE DateIssued: Revised:

I.PURPOSE A. It is the purpose of this policy to provide law enforcement officers with guidance for responding to and handling alarms at banks and other financial institutions. II.POLICY A. With robberies of banks and related financial institutions at a record high, it is essential that all law enforcement officers understand their role and responsibilities when responding to these offenses and the inherent dangers involved. Therefore, when responding to robbery alarms at these establishments, officers shall follow the procedures set forth in this policy in order to enhance arrest possibilities of suspects and observe proper precautions for the safety of officers, employees and bystanders. III.PROCEDURES A. DISPATCHER RESPONSIBILITIES 1. Upon receipt of a financial institution alarm, a minimum of two (2) patrol units shall be dispatched and a field supervisor shall be notified. 2. If the robbery notification is received by telephone, a complete description of the perpetrators shall be obtained from the caller along with as much additional information as possible; particularly, whether the perpetrator is at the scene and, if not, his direction and mode of travel and a complete description of any vehicle involved. 3. If the robbery notification is made by alarm, the dispatcher shall not attempt to contact the institution in order to determine the validity of the alarm until officers have given notice that they are in position at the establishment. 4. If the dispatcher is subsequently notified that the alarm is false, he/she shall a. advise the caller that police units are responding,

b. obtain the identity of and maintain contact with the caller, c. verify the false alarm with a key employee of the establishment (e.g. manager or head teller) and advise him that he will need to exit the facility to meet the responding officers utilizing the Department's prearranged signal, d. obtain a physical description of the key employee and provide responding officers with the description and the fact that the employee will meet them outside as required, and 5. Dispatcher shall telephone the institution, calling a designated telephone number. The code "Mr. Robert Roberts" shall be the designated call sign for an active alarm. The bank employee shall respond that the alarm is false if the alarm is in error. If the alarm is actual and a robbery is in progress, the bank employee shall respond that "Mr. Roberts is busy and will be available at '2' to indicate two (2) known perpetrators (1 if 1, 3 if 3, etc). The dispatcher will advise responding officers of same. If the call is not answered or a questionable response is provided to the inquiry code, officers at the scene shall be informed of these facts and told that a possible robbery is in progress. B. RESPONDING OFFICER PROCEDURES 1. Responding officers shall use appropriate vehicular warning devices when approaching the scene, but the siren will not be used within the hearing range of the reported robbery. 2. Responding units to the scene should be observant of any suspicious vehicles leaving the scene as well as other vehicles or persons outside the facility who may be serving as lookouts, cover or drivers for a robbery team. 3. The first unit on the scene shall serve as the primary unit until relieved by a supervisor, and shall take a position in front of the facility that provides good observation without being easily visible to those inside. The primary unit shall report on observable conditions at the location to the dispatcher but should not initially approach the building. 4. The primary and all subsequent units arriving at the robbery location shall report their arrival and position to the dispatcher. The primary unit or supervisory officer should direct responding units into positions that will establish a building perimeter covering all exits and entrances. 5. Once the building perimeter has been established and no notice of a false alarm has been received, the primary unit on the scene shall determine whether the dispatcher shall telephone the establishment. If the call is made, the dispatcher shall identify himself and inquire whether a robbery is in progress. If the call is not answered or a questionable response is provided to the inquiry, officers at the scene shall be informed of these facts and told that a possible robbery is in progress. 6. If a robbery in progress is suspected, the primary unit or supervisory officer shall determine whether to request additional backup and whether specialized units shall be alerted to include

canine and SRT teams. Unless otherwise directed, officers shall wait until suspects have exited the building before attempting apprehension. This helps to avoid the development of a hostage situation. 7. Once perpetrators have been apprehended, the crime scene shall be secured by officers in preparation for processing by crime scene technicians, departmental investigators and federal agents. 8. If a robbery has been committed and the perpetrators have left the scene, the primary unit should begin preparation of the initial report by identifying witnesses, caring for any injured parties, protecting the crime scene and obtaining necessary information regarding the perpetrators for supplemental broadcast. Remaining units should initiate the search for suspects on likely escape routes, being alert to unusual activities and circumstances. 9. If the dispatcher notifies officers that he has been in contact with an employee of the establishment and there does not appear to be a robbery in progress, officers shall determine the identity and description of the employee and wait for him to exit the building and approach the officers using the prearranged signal. Officers shall accompany the employee into the establishment in order to verify the situation and shall notify dispatch once the verification is complete. 10. If the alarm is received after business hours and the establishment is not occupied, responding officers shall assume positions in the front and rear of the building and jointly conduct an inspection of the facility for signs of forced entry. If signs of forced entry exist, officers shall follow procedures for conducting a building search. If the building is secure, dispatch shall be notified to contact the owner or the establishment's designated contact person to meet them at the location. C. CRIME PREVENTION RESPONSIBILITIES A. Officers assigned to crime prevention duties shall assume responsibility for providing all employees of banks, financial institutions and related establishments with training on their responsibilities in the event of a robbery and conduct follow up with those who fail to comply with departmental requirements. In particular, employees should be familiarized with the following: 1. Departmental procedures in response to a financial institution alarm. 2. Employees' responsibilities for protecting their safety and the safety of others. 3. The proper use of decoy money and explosive money packages. 4. Tips to avoid hostage taking (e.g., closing establishment doors immediately after perpetrators exit) and appropriate actions if one is taken hostage. 5. Use of the silent alarm.

6. The use of signals or placards when approaching officers. 7. Protection of evidence.

Procedure #3.200

GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title:FIRE RESPONSE PROTOCOL Procedure:4.404 DateIssued: Revised:

I.PURPOSE A. In order to insure that first responders are aware of the dangers prevalent with building fires, the following guidelines have been established with the input of the Fire Department. II.POLICY A. If an officer is first to arrive on the scene of a structure fire, observe the overall conditions, paying particular attention to any smoke showing and the color of same. The smoke color can be an indicator of an accelerated fire. If smoke or flames are observed, report same to the telecommunicator, who can advise the responding fire unit(s) of your report. B. Do not open windows or doors, when: 1. Building is pulsing or belching smoke from eaves or around windows. 2. If you see flames inside, and the building goes dark before you enter. 3. If house appears to be vacant, possibility of arson (accelerants). C. These are all signs that a backdraft is possible. When combustibles inside a closed space burn up all of the oxygen in that space, the flames will go out. What you then have is a superheated atmosphere that is only lacking oxygen, and with the sudden influx of oxygen, caused by a door or window being opened, you have the potential for an explosion, or backdraft. D. If you check a building and cannot hear or see anyone inside, close the door or window, if possible. E. Public servants, by nature, would not leave anyone if you thought you could help them. If you do try to affect a rescue, remember, the coolest and most breathable air will be down low, and if you are alone, radio to someone that you are going in. F. Always keep in mind officer safety comes first, if something happens to you we then have two (2) people to rescue. Bottom line: If you do not intend to enter the structure, leave windows and doors as is, unless you can see a victim by a window or door. If you do open a window or

door thinking you're helping them, you may be giving the fire enough oxygen to cause the victim more harm than good. G. Also, passing along to firefighters any information officers may receive from neighbors or relatives about the fire, or people who may still be inside the building would be very helpful to us.

Procedure #4.411

GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title:HOSTAGE/BARRICADEDProcedure:4.411 SUBJECT INCIDENT DateIssued: Revised:

I.PURPOSE A. To identify procedures for handling a hostage/barricaded subject incident. B. To establish guidelines and responsibilities for responding personnel to the scene of a hostage/barricaded subject incident. C. To minimize injury to officers, hostage/victim, suspects, and others with a priority of life. D. To provide for the notification and assistance of additional personnel, other law enforcement departments, and support agencies. II.POLICY A. A hostage/barricaded subject poses an extreme danger not only to officers who seek to arrest him, but to other persons as well. However, it is the policy of the Police Department to expend all reasonable efforts, when possible, to resolve barricaded incidents peaceably. The primary objective of police action in these incidents is the preservation of life. The safety of hostages, police personnel, innocent bystanders, and if possible, the offender must be our first concern. A secondary objective includes the apprehension of the offender, recovery of property and restoration of order. This does not exclude the use of force, non-lethal or lethal, for the safe resolution of the situation. III.DEFINITIONS
A. HOSTAGE INCIDENT: A situation in which a person(s) holds another person(s) against their will by force, threat or violence, and law enforcement officials are present at the scene attempting to obtain the release of the hostage. B. BARRICADED PERSON: A situation in which a person(s) who is armed or believed to be armed, suicidal or mentally unstable resists being taken into custody by barricading himself in a room, building or other location.

C. INNER PERIMETER: The immediate area of containment as designated by the on scene supervisor. This area is initially staffed by first responding officers until relieved by tactical response officers. Other persons will be evacuated from this area to prevent injury or

interference with the operation. Only personnel authorized by the supervisor in charge should be allowed entry to this area.

D. OUTER PERIMETER: A secondary control area surrounding the inner perimeter, providing a safe zone for access to the inner perimeter. This area is staffed by officers whose main responsibility is to deny unauthorized access to the area, traffic and crowd control.

E.COMMAND POST: A secure location within proximity of the outer perimeter, if possible, from which the
supervisor in charge directs the operation. Considerations in selecting the location should include access to support services (telephone, rest room facilities, etc.), away from civilian and vehicular traffic, if possible, a safe entry route from which other responding units and support services (ambulance, fire apparatus, etc.) can approach safely. F. STAGING AREA: A designated location on the outer perimeter to which all responding personnel will report for briefing, assignment and equipment. This area will generally be under the command of a supervisor assigned by the supervisor in charge of the incident. G. TACTICAL RESPONSE TEAM: A unit of specially selected, appointed, trained and equipped officers will provide assistance in those incidents that would require special tactics, techniques and equipment. There is a set team structure with designated coordinators and team leaders.

IV.PROCEDURE A.INITIAL RESPONDING OFFICER RESPONSIBILITY 1. When an officer is confronted with a hostage/barricaded subject incident he must take immediate steps to: 2. prevent injuries to himself and others by seeking cover and controlling the situation; 3. evaluate the situation, gather and disseminate information, and clear the immediate area of any bystanders or injured victims when possible; 4. notify communications to request priority radio traffic and request a supervisor respond to the scene; 5. advise responding units of the safe route to enter the area and any helpful information regarding the suspect and location; 6. direct responding units to positions that will minimize the movement of the suspect and prevent escape; 7. detain all witnesses for debriefing; 8. attempt to avoid confrontation in favor of controlling and containing the situation until arrival of trained tactical or hostage negotiation personnel;

9. create an immediate action plan if there is an imminent threat of death to hostages (active shooter, etc).
B. SUPERVISOR RESPONSIBILITY

1. The shift supervisor responding to the incident will be responsible for the following:

a. evacuation of anyone who has been injured if possible; b. obtain all information from the initial responding officers regarding the suspect, weapons, location and particulars of the incident; c. establish where the inner perimeter will be and assign uniformed officers. All personnel assigned to or entering the inner perimeter will wear body armor; d. debrief any witnesses; e. provide all necessary information to officers on the scene, establish strict firearms control, establish rules of engagement and inform all officers of the particulars of the incident and the elements for use of deadly force that have been established should the incident extend to their position; f. establish and detail officers to an outer perimeter; g. attempt to contact the barricaded suspect and arrest him without further incident. 2. If the supervisor is unable to resolve the incident he should immediately notify the Watch Commander who will then notify the Patrol Division Commander that there is a need to initiate a critical incident response. The street supervisor, or his/her designee, should also do the following: a. establish a command post and chain of command; b. summon additional personnel to the scene as required, (the supervisor should consider notifying officers from surrounding communities if immediately needed, then replacing these officers with officers called into duty early). c. if necessary begin evacuation of all persons within the inner perimeter; d. establish a staging area and request all appropriate support equipment, ambulances, fire apparatus, and additional personnel respond to that location; e. assign an officer to the staging area to brief all responding personnel and coordinate the movement of all equipment;

f. request that the Assistant Chief of Police handle all requests from the media for information. If the Assistant Chief of Police is unavailable assign one member of the Department as a news media liaison and refer all inquiries to that person. Only the on scene supervisor may authorize access to the scene by the news media; g. assign investigators at the command post to intelligence type duties concerning identities of the suspect(s), background information, and obtaining plans or sketches of the barricaded location from the Fire Department or Department of Public Works; h. maintain contact with the barricaded subject and attempt to constantly evaluate his physical condition and emotional state. 3. When the Patrol Division Commander or the Chief of Police arrives at the command post, he will conduct a debriefing of the supervisor in charge and personnel who established initial containment. The Patrol Division Commander or Chief of Police will have the final decision to request assistance from the Tactical Response Team. If the Patrol Division Commander or the Chief of Police is not available, the on scene supervisor has the authority to request assistance from the Tactical Response Team. 4. All personnel, regardless of their operational component within the Department, will fully and totally cooperate with the on scene supervisor during any emergency. This coordinated effort is necessary to provide for the safety of all concerned, to alleviate any misunderstanding, and ensure the success of the operation.
C. FIREARMS DISCIPLINE

1. Firearms discipline is essential during a hostage/barricaded subject incident. No weapons fire will be authorized without the express approval of the on scene supervisor or, the prerequisites for self defense are met. The prerequisites are: a. weapons fire is necessary to protect one's own life, or b. weapons fire is necessary to protect the life of another. 2. All supervisors shall give close attention to the matter of firearms discipline. Any use of chemical agents, i.e., tear gas, by other than Tactical Response officers must be authorized by the supervisor in charge. 3. Nothing in this procedure precludes the lawful use of force, deadly or otherwise, by members of this Department in protecting themselves or others from death or serious injury from aggressive action by the hostage taker or barricaded subject.
D. NEGOTIATING TACTICS

1. Since no two hostage situations are alike there can be no standardized plan for negotiations. Each incident should be treated individually. 2. The on scene supervisor is responsible for ensuring that contact has been initiated and maintained with the hostage taker or barricaded subject. If necessary, this task may be relinquished to a negotiator upon his arrival. 3. The on scene supervisor is responsible for coordinating with the tactical resonse supervisor to insure utility companies are contacted for the timely shutdown of services. 4. Responsible negotiating tactics include, but are not limited to the following: a. Buying time. As a rule the more time the captor spends with the hostage, the less likely he is to take the hostage's life. b. Obtaining information from the offender(s) that is helpful in understanding his mental and emotional condition. c. Allowing the offender(s) to ventilate anxieties. d. Developing trust with the offender(s). e. Assisting the offender(s) with solving problems in a realistic and non-violent manner. f. Influencing the offender(s) to release the hostages and surrender peaceably. g. do not make offers/promises that cant be kept or are realistic 5. Practically all demands are negotiable with certain exceptions. The following will not be provided: a. weapons and ammunition; b. drugs or alcohol; c. additional people or an exchange of people, including police officers, for a hostage; and, d. releasing persons who are being held in legal custody. 6. Negotiable items are left to the discretion of the supervisor based on the incident at hand. Items such as food, water, cigarettes and other physical comforts should be considered base negotiable items and used appropriately.
E. RELOCATION

1. Whenever possible the supervisor in charge will not allow the offender(s) to leave the scene of containment. All requests for vehicles or relocation will be denied. 2. In the event the offender(s) escape containment, provisions for chase and surveillance vehicles will be initiated. 3. In the event the escape route enters another jurisdiction, the communications center will advise those jurisdictions and request their assistance. 4. If possible and safe prevent vehicle mobility by disabling vehicle, use stop sticks etc
F. CONCLUSION

1. The on-scene supervisor and the tactical response supervisor will maintain the integrity of the outer and inner perimeter until the hostage and offender have been removed from the scene and investigative personnel have the opportunity to conduct a proper crime scene investigation.
G. AFTER-ACTION REPORT

1. The Chief of Police will assign a supervisor involved in the incident to complete an afteraction report that outlines actions taken and makes recommendations for improvements in future incidents.

2 Procedure #4.413 GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title: 4.413

SPECIAL EVENTS

Procedure:

Date Issued:

Revised:

I.PURPOSE

A.To establish planning requirements for Department operations at special events.

II.POLICY

A. Most special events require additional personnel and resources to handle those problems normally associated with increased traffic volume and large crowds. The Department will attempt to alleviate those problems by proper planning and staffing for these events.

III.DEFINITION

A. A special event may be defined as an activity such as a parade, athletic contest, or public demonstration or celebration that results in an increase in the normal police services required for the control of traffic, crowds, or crime.

IV.PROCEDURE

A. The Patrol Division Commander is responsible for the Department's coverage of a special event. This responsibility includes the planning, coordination and supervision of personnel detailed to the special event.

B. The Department's effectiveness in handling special events depends on contingency plans relative to the events; therefore, a specific plan will be developed by the Patrol Division Commander. This plan will include:

1.the type of special event;

2.manpower required, uniformed and plain clothes;

3.deployment of manpower, including times needed and fixed post assignments, if required;


4.written estimates of traffic, crowd control, and crime problems expected:

5. overall logistic requirements, including feeding, transporting, equipping, maintaining, and relieving personnel assigned to the event;

6.equipment needed, (barricades, radios, traffic vests, vehicles, etc.); and,

7.coordination required within and outside the Department.

C.The Patrol Division Commander will contact the appropriate departments, (fire, public works, health, etc.) and coordinate plans and exchange information regarding job functions at the event. He will also coordinate the exchange of information with other law enforcement agencies involved in the event.

D. The Patrol Division Commander will submit the plan to the Chief of Police before the event is scheduled to start. The plan will be disseminated to all personnel assigned to the event to ensure they are aware of their individual responsibilities.

E.When possible a briefing will be held for all personnel just prior to the starting of the event.

F. The Patrol Division Commander will submit an after-action report that evaluates the police coverage of the event and any deficiencies experienced along with recommendations for improvements in future special event coverage.

4 Procedure #4.414 GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title: 4.414

SPECIAL OPERATIONS

Procedure:

Date Issued:

Revised:

I.PURPOSE

A.To outline the Department's response to special and covert operations.

II.POLICY

A. The Police Department will employ measures to resolve special operations incidents and events that are reasonable, effective, and consistent with the Department's resources and mission.

III.DEFINITION

A. A special operation is any occurrence requiring police intervention that places demands on department personnel and support resources beyond normal operational requirements.

IV.PROCEDURE

A.

SPECIAL OPERATIONS

1. Officers will respond immediately to any incident requiring an emergency call for police service. Most special operations incidents are handled by the Department until the severity of the situation is assessed, the immediate threat is minimized and the resolution requirements are defined.

2. After the incident has been assessed the special operation may be resolved either by
the Department, by the Department with the assistance of another agency, or by an outside agency entirely.

a.Special operations the Department is prepared to handle by itself are:

(1)bomb threats;

(2) undercover surveillance/stakeouts; and

(3) coverage of special events.

b. Special operations the Department will normally handle with the assistance of another agency are:

(1)VIP protection;

(2)disaster;

(3)civil disorder;

(4)civil defense emergencies;

(5)decoy operations;

(6)emergency response teams; and,

(7) hostage negotiations.

c.Special operations that will be handled by an outside agency are:

(1) bomb disposal; and,

(2)special purpose (undercover and surveillance) vehicles.

3. Special operations that require an immediate response will be handled by the patrol shift on duty at the time. The watch commander will be responsible for coordinating the response, the initial assessment of the incident, and notifying the appropriate personnel or other agencies for assistance, if necessary.

4.All requests for assistance from the Detective Division for deployment in special operations
to supplement other department components must be approved by the Assistant Chief of Police (Detective Division Commander) or the Chief of Police. Requests for assistance in stakeouts, saturation patrols, or other operations should be documented with an explanation of the special operation to be addressed.

5. Special operations that do not require an immediate response are delegated by the Chief
of Police to the appropriate officer(s) or department component for necessary action.

6. Patrol Supervisors may utilize Detectives when the patrol shift cannot adequately handle
an emergency special operation, event or incident.

7. Once an operation is undertaken, it will be the responsibility of the supervisor in charge of

the operation to coordinate all functions and components of the operation and maintain cooperation between them.

B.

COVERT OPERATIONS

1. When deemed appropriate, the Department will conduct covert operations in an attempt to gather evidence leading to the arrest and prosecution of individuals involved in criminal activities.

2. Covert operations may include undercover or surveillance activities designed to infiltrate

and establish associations with those individuals suspected of criminal operations.

3. Covert operations will be coordinated and supervised by the Detective Division

Commander and operated in a legitimate manner seeking advice from the Prosecutors office when appropriate.

4.The Chief of Police will approve all covert operations. 5.The Detective Division Commander will brief the on-duty watch commander, if appropriate,
concerning the operation before its initiation. Patrol units should be advised to be available for backup assistance, or to stay clear of the area, depending on the situation and circumstances.

C.

UNDERCOVER OPERATIONS

1. The Detective Division Commander will be responsible for addressing the following concerns before initiating an undercover operation:

a.identification and analysis of the suspect(s);

b.provisions for initiating contact with the suspects;

c.a full analysis of the neighborhood surrounding the area;

d.providing the necessary expense funds;

e.procuring necessary equipment;

f. establish routine and emergency communications between the undercover officer and surveillance officers;

g. determine the legal considerations of the operations and seek advice from the Prosecutor;

h. develop the overall plan for the operation, including the guidelines for arresting the suspect(s);

i. ensure that adequate backup police personnel are available for the safety of the undercover officer; and,

j.ensure that close supervision is provided throughout the operation.

2. Vehicles and equipment needed for a surveillance will be determined by the Detective Division Commander. If the vehicles currently provided by the department cannot be used, arrangements will be made with the appropriate federal, state, or county agency.

3. The Chief of Police must approve any request to contact another agency for use of
surveillance vehicles or equipment.

D.

SURVEILLANCE/STAKEOUT

1. The Detective Division Commander will establish the plan of operation before initiating a surveillance/stakeout. The plan will consider the following:

a. analyze all available intelligence information pertaining to the crime and subject of the surveillance;

b. identify and analyze offenders and their habits, associates, vehicles, methods of operation, and any and all pertinent information;

c.familiarize assigned officers with targeted areas for surveillance;

d.establish operational procedures, for observation, tails, and effecting the arrest; e.provide expense funds, as needed (tolls, meals, etc.); f.establish the primary and secondary means of communication; g.ensure close supervision; h.provide adequate relief; and, i.determine any legal ramifications and contact the Prosecutors Office for advice.

E.

DECOY OPERATIONS

1.Decoy operations must have prior approval of the Chief of Police.

2. The Detective Division Commander must be on the scene to provide for close supervision
of the operation.

3. The Detective Division Commander is responsible for addressing the following concerns
prior to initiating any decoy operation: a.an analysis of victims profiles, crime M.O., location, day and time;

b.provide appropriate disguises for participating officers, if required;

c.provisions for sufficient back up for safety;


c. develop an operational plan consistent with the activity, determining points of observations, and the method of arrest;

d. identify potential legal problems of the operation and seek advice from the Prosecutors Office;

f. establish the communications channel(s) or other appropriate communications method,

especially emergency communications for fast response by back up officers;

g. identify all personnel involved in the operation and assign call numbers or false identification, if required;

h.inform all on duty patrol personnel of the operation; and

i.ensure close supervision is provided throughout the operation.

F.

CONDUCTING RAIDS

1. Raids should only be conducted pursuant to a warrant, but may be conducted without a warrant upon necessity and with legally and judicially sufficient cause. A raid will only be initiated with the approval of the Chief of Police, or in his designee.

2. Before conducting any raid the following provisions will be met: obtain authorization from the Chief of Police;

a.a supervisor will be designated as raid coordinator;

b. establish strategies and tactics for approaching, entering, securing, and leaving the target;

c. determine the evidence and/or contraband which will be the object of the search and subsequent seizure;

d.select and secure any specialized equipment needed to carry out the raid, (battering ram, sledgehammer, etc.);

e. select and establish communication with specialized support units; arranging for the arrest and processing of suspect(s);

f.determine the level of resistance expected and the level of force required to overcome the resistance;

g.arrange for standby medical and fire equipment; and,

h. provide for the completion of all required reports necessary to properly document the incident.

Procedure #4.415

GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title:PROTOCOL FOR ARMED INTRUDER/ Procedure:4.415 GUNFIRE/SHOOTING INCIDENT AT THE GRANITE CITY PUBLIC SCHOOLS DateIssued: Revised:

I.MISSION A.GraniteCityPoliceofficerswillrespondtothesituationinorderto: 1. Neutralize the suspect (s) 2. Take control of the situation II.CONCEPTOFTHEOPERATION A. Dispatchers will: 1. Declare main radio channel 10-33 emergency traffic only. 2. Dispatch all available officers. 3. Gather and disseminate information to all responding officers. 4. This information will include: a. Where did it happen? Location? In a building? Which one, name? b. Is the building occupied at this time? If so, how many people are inside? c. Is the suspect(s) still inside the building? d. Do we know the exact location of suspect(s)? e. Are there injuries? How many? Types? f. Do we know of any hostages? How many? Where are they?

g. How are suspect(s) armed? Handgun, shotgun, automatic weapon, assault rifle, knife, bomb? h. Suspect(s) description: (1) Number involved (2) Race (3) Sex (4) Height, weight, hair, eyes, clothing (5) Names 5. Keep caller on the line! B. Officer In Charge will: 1. Direct all patrol officers to the general area of the incident. Exact location to be given. 2. Inform Administration and the Detective Division, dispatching same. 3. Respond to the scene. 4. From the scene, coordinate and direct entry teams, perimeter officers and assign positions until relieved by higher command. C. Officers at the Scene: 1. Will, as soon as possible, report to the location as directed by Dispatch. 2. The first officers on the scene shall make radio contact with the School Resource Officer (SRO). The Command Officer at the scene shall evaluate the situation and formulate a course of action to neutralize and take control of the situation by making entry to the building. 3. The next two (2) officers on the scene shall set a perimeter of the building with visual contact of all sides to cordon off the area. One perimeter officer will take a position at State and Fehling and observe the front of the school. The other perimeter officer will take a position at the school marquee sign just off Madison Avenue, south of Nameoki Road. 4. The remaining responding officers shall coordinate with the Officer in Command for assignments as follows: a. Backup and support to the entry team.

b. Assistance in securing the perimeter/closing surrounding streets. c. Securing evacuation locations and rally points. d. Assist as directed at the Command Post/Media area. e. Assist in other assignments as directed. E.ALLOFFICERSSHOULDBEPREPAREDTO: 1. Cease all actions if a Hostage situation is discovered 2. Arrest, search, transport suspect(s) 3. Administer first aid to the injured 4. Secure evidence and the crime scene 5. Complete all reports as soon as possible for prosecution

In the event of such an occurrence, the Command Officer in charge of the scene shall determine and have authority to issue a Police Department Call Out, as well as an Auxiliary Police Call Out. All "Called Out" police personnel shall report as soon as possible to the Command Center at the main office at Coolidge Middle School for assignment.

GRANITE CITY HIGH SCHOOL

PRE-PLANNEDPERIMETER: Nameoki Road, Madison Avenue, Coolidge Middle School, 29th Street, State Street, Grand Avenue. COMMANDPOST: Police - Main Office of Coolidge Middle School EMS/Fire - Niedringhaus School rear parking lot, 29th and State Streets. Arch Air Support - Wilson Park Diamond #8 Media - Wilson Park Ice Rink

EVACUATION/ RALLYPOINTS: If feasible, Coolidge Middle School

*** See attached Phone List for other assisting agencies and support services***

CRISISRESPONSEPROTOCOLPHONELIST

AMBULANCE ArchHelicopter1-800-325-9191 GraniteCityFire/EMS911/876-4747 ArmyDepot452-4200 Abbott/Lifeforce1-314-768-1212 Lifestar876-4411 Medstar1-800-426-9281/233-2283 BOARD-UPSERVICE FastHelp1-800-327-8435 BOMBANDARSON ScottAirForceBase

Day#256-5960 Night#256-5891 ScottExplosiveOrdinanceDiv.256-6548 ScottCommandPost256-6612or 256-5891St.LouisP.D.Bomb&Arson 1-314-444-5367 IllinoisStatePolice Day#1-217-782-7126or Bomb&Arson1-217-785-0309 MikeWeberOrdinanceExpert 798-3268orpager#782-9411 BUSSERVICE Bi-State1-314-982-1400/231-2345 GCTownship877-8584 Harmon797-0931 MCT797-0660 MCTJerryKane583-9669 Mayflower931-4320 Vandalia344-1272 CHARITYSERVICES CHASI(ChildIntervention)452-8900Chestnut288-3100 CounselorsBeeper-225-3497 SalvationArmy451-7957 UnitedWay876-6780RedCross452-7184 Pager338-0264/738-0623 FIREDEPARTMENTS GraniteCityFireDept.911/876-4545 LongLake931-0955 Mitchell931-1120 Madison876-4300 ArmyDepot451-4282 HAZARDOUSMATERIAL Chemtree1-800-424-9300 React1-800-325-1398 Riedel1-800-334-0004 HOSPITALS

GatewayRegionalMedicalCenter 798-3000 GRMCEmergencyRoom798-3066 MORGUE(temporary) LanterTrucking452-7100/452-9500 AntlerTrucking314-436-0299 POLICEAGENCIES GraniteCity911/877-6111 MadisonCounty931-0066/692-4433 IllinoisState346-3600 GraniteCityAuxChief(pager)798-7196 Madison876-4300 Venice877-2114 FBI(Belleville)234-8660 FBI(Alton)465-1024 UTILITIES Ameritech(phonetrace)1-800-832-2998 IllinoisPower1-800-755-7000/ 800-767-8048 IllinoisAmericanWater1-800-422-2782

SCHOOLDISTRICT#9:

Procedure #4.502

GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title:INVESTIGATING A SUSPECTED Procedure:4.502 CLANDESTINE LABORATORY DateIssued: Revised:

I. INTRODUCTION A. The Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) has mandated that any incident involving hazardous chemicals requires an emergency response by he public safety officer who first discovered it. This person is responsible for his or her personal safety, the safety of the general public, isolating the area, and providing information to other emergency responders and investigators. II. PURPOSE A. To establish guidelines for the investigation of clandestine drug laboratories by all Granite City Police Officers. III. DEFINITIONS A. Clandestine drug laboratory: a collection of one or more chemicals or materials, whether they be in a home, barn, vehicle, or rural secluded area, that are intended to be used in the manufacturing of a Controlled substance, i.e. methamphetamine, PCP, ecstasy, LSD, or any other chemically derived controlled substance. The mere presence of the chemical constitutes a clandestine lab for the purpose of this policy. The chemical or materials do not have to be in a cooking process to constitute a clandestine drug laboratory. B. Hazardous Material: for the purpose of this policy a hazardous material will be defined as any substance in a clandestine laboratory that is unknown, or any substance at a clandestine laboratory that is known to have negative effects on the human body. C. Officer: every commissioned law enforcement officer employed by the Granite City Police Department. D. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): the Federal Agency that is responsible for setting minimum guidelines for training of clandestine laboratory investigators and the disposal of hazardous materials found at clandestine laboratories.

E. Site Safety Officer: the officer at the scene of a clandestine laboratory who is in charge and who has received the mandatory forty (40) hour OSHA certified training for the investigation of clandestine laboratories or Granite City Drug Unit. F. Federal Drug Enforcement Administration (DEA): Fairview Heights, Illinois, (618) 6280025 or (214) 538-4600 (24 hour number). G. Metropolitan Enforcement Group of Southwestern Illinois (MEGSI): Collinsville, Illinois, (618) 346-3750 or ISP Dispatch (618) 346-3649, Illinois State Police Meth Response Team (618) 346-3649. H. Exposure: ingestion, inhalation, absorption through the skin, eyes, or mucous membranes, or other physical contact with a hazardous material. I. Chemicals: for the purpose of this policy chemicals will refer to any solvents, flammable liquids, flammable solids, corrosives, gases, and precursor materials used to produce controlled substances. Examples of the above are: red phosphorous, ephedrine or pseudo ephedrine tablets, anhydrous ammonia, naphtha, starting fluid, ether, sodium hydroxide, lithium or sodium metals, muriatic or sulfuric acids, methamphetamine bases, iodine, hydrogen peroxide, and iodine crystals. IV. POLICY: the following policy is to set forth procedures to be taken by a Granite City Police Officer when he or she comes into contact with a suspected clandestine drug laboratory. A. Clandestine Laboratories 1. When a Granite City Police Officer comes into contact with what he or she suspects t be a clandestine drug laboratory, he or she will: a. take reasonable steps to secure any suspects and evacuate the area as quickly as possible. The officer shall not handle any of the contents of the laboratory and shall not turn any electrical instruments at the site on or off. If there are adjoining apartments, homes, or community members who are in close proximity to the suspected clandestine laboratory the office will evacuate them from the immediate areas as quickly as possible. b. Once the officer at the scene is secure he or she will notify the on duty shift commander of the discovery. The officer will then secure a perimeter of at least 50 feet around the suspected clandestine drug laboratory, for which mo one will be allowed toe enter. This distance should be increased if the officer can smell any chemical odors or feels any ill feelings. The officer shall remain up wind from the suspected clandestine laboratory at all times. If the suspected clandestine drug laboratory is located in a vehicle, the officer will secure a perimeter around the auto just as he or she would if the lab was found in a home and reroute traffic around the site. Do not move a suspected clandestine drug lab once it is detected.

c. All Granite City Police Officers are to remain at the perimeters edge and refrain from reentering the suspected clandestine laboratory from this point on, unless directed otherwise by the Site Safety Officer. d. Once notified the Watch Commander will make contact with the Granite City Police Departments active Drug Unit and/or MEGSI Agent and inform him or her of the situation. If the MEGSI Agent from our department is not available, the Shift Commander will request the assistance of another MEGSI Agent to process the suspected laboratory. e. If the on duty shift commander is unable to obtain assistance from the MEGSI Unit, he or she will make contact with the Illinois State Police Meth Response Team and request an agent from their agency to process the scene. f. In the rare event that one of the above two agencies are unable to assist in processing the scene, the shift commander shall make contact with a member of the Madison County Hazardous Material Team and request their assistance in processing the laboratory. When they arrive the Granite City Police Officer on scene shall request that they inspect the scene and remove any suspected hazardous materials. From this point on it will be up to the shift commander as to how the investigation is to proceed. g. It is a violation of this policy for any Granite City Police Officer who is not OSHA Certified in the investigation of a clandestine drug lab and who is not equipped with the proper protective equipment to enter a site where a suspected clandestine drug laboratory has been detected for the purpose of investigating said clandestine drug lab. Once a suspected clandestine drug laboratory is located by a Granite City Police Officer, he or she is to follow the procedures set forth in this policy and is not to attempt to move, tamper, investigate, or view any chemicals or articles in a clandestine drug laboratory, unless authorized by a site safety officer. 2. Once the Site Safety Officer has arrived, the Granite City Police Officer on scene will: a. maintain the perimeter set up around the suspected clandestine laboratory during the entire investigation b. be under the Site Safety Officers discretion all times during the investigation and will assist him or her as requested c. If the Site Safety Officer is not seizing the articles of evidence found at the suspected clandestine drug lab for prosecution purposes, the Granite City Police Officer on scene will secure those articles of evidence that the Site Safety Officer feels pose no threat and are essential to the prosecution of the case. The evidence should be secured using the same procedures as set forth by existing policy. d. NOTE: The Site Safety Officer may choose to process the scene and leave the prosecution of the case up to the Granite City Police Department, for that reason this agency will do all it can to provide all available information on clandestine laboratories to Granite

City Police Officers as it becomes available. When the prosecution is left up to the Granite City Police Department, the officer on scene will thoroughly document his actions and refer the case to the Granite City Police Department Detective Division, just as he or she would with any other felony investigation. If the Granite City Police Officer is unclear on anything or has any question, he or she should ask the Site Safety Officer those questions before leaving the scene. The Detective Division shall obtain a copy of the Site Safety Ofifcer's report upon its completion. B. Evidence Collection 1. The following is a listing of articles that will not be seized and submitted to the Granite City Police Department evidence vault, by anyone. a. cans containing solvents, such as, Heet, toluene, starting fluid, Freon, camping fuel, o any other flammable solvents. This does not include jars with solvents that have suspected controlled substances suspended in it. b. red phosphorous (including common kitchen matches and road flares). c. Anhydrous ammonia, containers that once contained anhydrous ammonia should be photographed thoroughly and disposed of by the Site Safety Officer. d. Any unknown liquids or solutions. e. Blow torches (this does not include hot plates or crock pots). f. Iodine or iodine crystals. g. Sodium hydroxide (a.k.a. lye). h. Hydriotic acid, sulfuric acid, muriatic acid, or any other forms of acid. i. Lithium or sodium metals (this does not include unopened lithium batteries or battery pieces). j. Contaminated cooking ware such as hydrogen chloride gas generators (this only applies to cooking ware that contains suspected hazardous materials. This does not apply to those pieces of cook ware that contain suspected ephedrine, pseudo-ephedrine, or finished controlled substances such as methamphetamine, LSD, or PCP that are suspended in solvents or other liquids). k. Any suspected dangerous or hazardous materials. l. Any cylinders of compressed gas.

m. NOTE: All the above articles should be thoroughly documented and photographed, by the Site Safety Officer on site or other person in charge. The Site Safety Officer will determine if a hazardous waste disposal company should be called out to clear the site of hazardous materials. C. Processing of Clandestine Laboratories by Granite City Police Officers 1. In those cases in which a MEGSI Agent, ISP Meth Team or DEA Agent is unable to assist in the processing of a suspected clandestine laboratory, the Granite City Police Officer will proceed as follows with the investigation: a. Once the above initial steps are taken and the scene is secure with a perimeter in place, the Madison County Hazardous Material Team will be requested to respond to the scene. b. The officer on scene will brief the hazardous material team as to what he or she knows about the suspected clandestine laboratory. The Granite City Police officer on scene will request that members of the hazardous material team clear the suspected clandestine laboratory of all hazardous materials. For no reason will any Granite City Police Officer, who is not OSHA Certified or equipped with the proper protectvie equipment, attempt to clear a suspected laboratory of any chemical or hazardous materials. An officer may be requested to assist with the handling of articles of evidence seized from a suspected clandestine drug laboratory and in those cases, as long as the Site Safety Officer feels that they pose no threat, may a Granite City Police Officer handle those articles. c. Once the clandestine laboratory is determined to be clear of all hazardous materials by the hazardous material team, the shift commander should determine from the officer in charge or hazardous material team leader if the site is safe for standard police investigation procedures. If the site is deemed safe by the hazardous material team leader the scene can then be processed by the officers on scene. d. Under no circumstances will a Granite City Police Officer who is not OSHA certified in clandestine laboratory investigation, re-enter a secured suspected clandestine laboratory for the purpose of removing any hazardous materials or chemicals such as but not limited to , solvents, gases, acids, or any other unknown substances. When a suspected working or nonworking clandestine drug laboratory is located by a Granite City Police Officer, he or she shall not move any of the chemicals or cook ware found at the suspected laboratory, whether it be in a home, auto, barn, or rural secluded area, unless said officer is certified in the investigation of clandestine laboratories by OSHA and is equipped with the proper personal protective equipment. Officers will follow the above procedures and shall not secure any articles of evidence involved in the manufacturing of chemically derived controlled substances unless authorized by a MEGSI, ISP Meth Team or DEA Agent who is certified as a clandestine laboratory investigator or a member of the Madison County Hazardous Material Team. D. Completion of Granite City Employee Injury Report

1. In every situation in which a Granite City Police Officer feels as if he or she has been exposed to a hazardous material or suspected hazardous material at a clandestine laboratory site, he or she will immediately complete a Granite City Employee Report of Injury or Illness report along with a Departmental Memo (to-from). The form shall be submitted to the Watch Commander upon its completion. All information requested on said form that is not known by the Granite City Police Officer at the scene shall be requested by said officer or his/her supervisor from the Site Safety Officer who was in charge of the clandestine lab investigation. In those cases in which materials were not identified by the Site Safety Officer or the Madison County Hazardous Material Team, the Granite City Police Officer shall make note of such on the report. E. Safety Tips to be Followed at the Scene of a Clandestine Lab 1. Actions at the scene of a Clandestine Drug Laboratory can be life threatening, so the following actions will be followed by Granite City Police Officers while in or around a clandestine drug laboratory. a. Do not turn the electricity on or off at the site. b. Do not turn off any water supplies. Do not throw water on anything, including fires. c. Do not touch anything once you suspect a clandestine drug laboratory is present. Just being in a lab can contaminate your clothing and person. d. Never dismantle anything in a lab. e. Do not eat or drink near the lab site. f. Never smoke or ignite any flammable materials near a lab site. Do not turn flashlights on or off in a suspected clandestine drug laboratory and do not turn any electrical items on in a suspected clandestine drug laboratory, including lights. g. If you are one of the first people in the lab, make sure you do not put objects in your mouth such as pens, pencils, chewing tobacco, cigarettes, gum, etc., after leaving the suspected clandestine drug laboratory. Throw those articles away or clean them thoroughly before using them again, after leaving the suspected lab. h. Do not walk through any spilled liquids or chemicals. i. Do not re-enter the lab after the initial discovery unless authorized by the Site Safety Officer. j. Do not rescue someone unless personal safety can be maintained. k. Do not eat or drink anything within close proximity to the lab site.

l. Use disposable gloves while dealing with suspects taken out of a clandestine laboratory and any materials received from a Site Safety Officer. m. After leaving the scene of a clandestine laboratory, Granite City Police Officer(s) should decontaminate their clothing and equipment thoroughly. Possible contaminated clothing should be kept separate from other clothing and washed individually. If cleaned at a professional cleaner, the officer will make the cleaner aware of any possible contamination. The Site Safety Officer should be questioned by the officer, if he or she came into contact with any chemicals at the site, as to how to decontaminate himself/herself along with their clothing and equipment, before leaving the scene. n. Persons who have been contaminated or feel they have been exposed to hazardous materials as a result of being near the site should immediately request to be transported to the nearest medical facility for emergency treatment and decontamination. o. Officers should have as little contact as possible with the chemicals in a clandestine drug laboratory and the atmosphere within the immediate area of the suspected lab. Toxic chemicals at a lab are not easily detected, and breathing in the chemicals can be deadly.

Procedure #4.601

GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title:SELECTIVE TRAFFIC ENFORCEMENTProcedure:4.601 DateIssued: Revised:

I.PURPOSE
A. To direct police traffic enforcement activity to pre-selected times, locations and specific types of traffic violations.

II.POLICY A. Effective police traffic service requires assignment of officers at the locations and times where hazardous or congested conditions may exist. The ultimate goal of the Department's traffic enforcement policy is to reduce crashes and promote voluntary compliance with traffic laws. Selective traffic enforcement is an activity of the Patrol division. III.PROCEDURE
A. ADMINISTRATIVE RESPONSIBILITIES

1. The Patrol Division Commander is responsible for the Department's selective traffic enforcement functions. These shall include overall responsibility for analysis of traffic crashes and traffic enforcement activities. 2. Implementation of selective enforcement techniques and procedures is the responsibility of the patrol shift watch commanders. Selective enforcement action will be undertaken in those areas where analysis of traffic crashes and violations indicates, or is based upon complaints or requests from citizens. Patterns of cause and/or sudden increases in the number and severity of crashes or violations are reason for extra enforcement activity at a given location. 3. Speed detection devices (RADAR) will normally be used in the enforcement of speeding laws. 4. All new personnel will receive training in the legal and proper operation of Department radar equipment.

5. The repair and service of radar units shall be the responsibility of the Patrol Division

Commander. Officers will document any malfunctions or damage to the unit and submit a department memo through the chain of command to the Patrol Division Commander. 6. The Patrol Division Commander will evaluate the selective traffic enforcement program annually. A report will be submitted to the Chief of Police, in March, summarizing the evaluation.
B. OFFICER RESPONSIBILITY

1. Traffic law enforcement is a supplement to regular patrol duty. 2. Officers should be particularly alert for hazardous violations. The emphasis should be on high volume roadways, high crash intersections and locations within the officer's beat, or where complaints and reports indicate the need for special attention. 3. Officers shall take appropriate enforcement action whenever an enforceable violation is detected. This shall include provable violations determined as the result of crash investigations. 4. Officers may, in minor crashes, issue warning citations for those violations as permitted by ordinance or statute. This shall not apply when a crash results in extensive damage or personal injury. 5. Officers are encouraged to employ tolerance when: a. There is a reasonable possibility of human error in judgment of the officer or the citizen. b. There is a reasonable possibility of malfunction of mechanical equipment with no knowledge or intent of the driver. c. The content of the particular law which has been violated is not common knowledge. 6. These tolerances shall be uniformly applied for the purpose of affording just treatment to the public.
C. TRAFFIC ANALYSIS FACTORS

1. Analysis of traffic crashes will include geographic, temporal, and causative factors, such as: a. number of crashes; b. location; and, c. type of violation

2. Data collected on traffic analysis will be distributed to patrol supervisors monthly, for planning appropriate enforcement deployment. 3. The Patrol Division Commander shall maintain traffic enforcement data on a three (3) year experience base for a comparative trend.
D. ASSIGNING SELECTIVE ENFORCEMENT ACTIVITY

1. Selective enforcement activities will be based upon analysis of the traffic crash data compiled from the traffic crash reports to provide effective countermeasures against the factors contributing to traffic crashes. 2. Supervisors will be responsible for deployment of enforcement units and equipment. Crash location data should influence the deployment of personnel. 3. Deployment will be based on an analysis of traffic crashes and traffic related calls for service covering the most recent three (3) year period.

Procedure #4.605

GRANTIE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title:POLICY FOR ASSISTANCE FROM THEProcedure:4.605 ACCIDENT RECONSTRUCTION OFFICER DateIssued: Revised:

I.PURPOSE A. To establish a policy for criteria in calling out assistance from the Accident Reconstruction officers. II.POLICY A. It is the policy of this Department to investigate and report all motor vehicle traffic collisions that occur within the City of Granite City. Investigations are conducted to determine the conditions, causation, and contributors to promote traffic safety and prosecute violations of law. III.DEFINITION A. An Accident Reconstruction Officer is specifically trained and certified in investigating, interrogating, reporting and collecting evidence at an accident that warrants reconstruction. IV.ACCIDENTSTHATWARRANTRECONSTRUCTION A. ALL FATALITIES B. Felony Hit and Runs, Reckless Homicides, Felony D.U.I. C. Property Damage of major proportion and cause of accident cannot be determined by patrol officer. D. Major "city owned" vehicle accidents. E. Any accident as deemed necessary by Chief of Police.

V.DUTIES

A. The Street Supervisor (District Sergeant) will determine if the Accident Reconstruction Officer is needed - in the absence of a Street Supervisor the OIC will make the determination. B. The officer at scene is responsible for: 1. Care for the injured and protection of victim(s) from further injury. 2. Protect the integrity of the accident scene, as with any crime scene, securing the site from interference of onlookers, etc. Any and all physical signs, evidence of the accident including vehicles, bodies, debris, etc., should be secured and left undisturbed unless it becomes necessary to disturb these items by reasons of safety or medical care of the victims. If it becomes necessary to move or cause to be removed, any evidence of the accident the officer(s) at scene should mark/record the location of the evidence and report the removal to the Accident Reconstruction Officer or investigator assigned. 3. Obtain all witness information with accurate residency and telephone information. Request all witness(s) remain at the scene, if possible. Record any and all witness or potential witness statements. 4. Identify and record the name, address, telephone number of any person(s) taking photographs at the scene. C. The at scene officer(s) are responsible for the preparing of the initial Accident Report on the IDOT Report Form and Supplements as to their actions at scene. Fatal accident reports are to be typewritten and include a basic diagram of the accident. VI.NOTIFICATIONOFANACCIDENTRECONSTRUCTIONOFFICER A. The at scene supervisor or officer at scene in his absence, will advise the Officer in Charge of the need for an ARO(s). VII.PROCEDUREFORCALLINGOUTARO'SIFONEISNOTONDUTY A. Call the ARO(s) on regular shift day off. If not available the ARO on the oncoming shift. Then finally if he's not available the off-going shift. B. FATALITIES / FELONY ACCIDENT 1. If an ARO is On-Duty, he will be notified and respond immediately to all fatal and/ or probable fatal accidents. If no ARO is on duty, the Officer in Charge will contact the On Call Duty Officer to authorize the callout of an ARO(s) stating the need for technical assistance. If so requested, a detective may be assigned to assist in photographing the scene and interviewing witness(s), driver(s) and passenger(s). C. PROPERTY DAMAGE AND INJURY ACCIDENT

1. A request for technical assistance in major property damage and/or injury accident will be made during the ARO(s) tour of duty if necessary to determine cause, law violations or contributory factors. VIII.AVAILABILITY A. If no ARO is available to assist, the Captain of Detectives will assign a detective to the scene to: 1. Photograph and record or mark the final rest, position of all evidence at the scene, i.e.: the final position of all vehicles, bodies, tire marks, gouges, debris, parts, environment damage, etc., for later review by an ARO. 2. Obtain written statements of witness(s), driver(s), passenger(s). 3. Have all units of the accident towed to the SAME location and held pending further investigation by an ARO. 4. If a Second Division vehicle is involved, contact the Illinois State Police to request a Motor Carrier Safety Officer to do an inspection of the tractor/trailer, secure the log book, registration forms and invoice papers. IX.ACCIDENTRECONSTRUCTIONOFFICERSDUTYTOREPORT A. The Accident Reconstruction Officers assigned to investigate an accident or provide technical assistance, will prepare an Accident Reconstruction Report or a Supplemental Accident Report. The ARO(s) assigned to investigate the accident will submit a completed report within thirty (30) days of initiating the investigation to the Captain of Patrol Division for review.

Procedure #4.607

GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title: HAZARDOUS MATERIAL INCIDENT Procedure: 4.607

Date Issued: Revised:

I. PURPOSE A. To provide guidelines for response to hazardous materials incidents. II. POLICY A. Explosives, nonflammable and combustible liquids, gases, oxidizing materials, corrosive and disease causing agents that are stored or transported are a potential risk to both life and property. It is the goal of the Police Department to minimize the adverse effects of these hazardous materials upon the community. III. PROCEDURE A. RESPONSIBILITY
1. The Fire Department will be responsible for the investigation, control, removal, and reporting of hazardous material incidents to the appropriate state and federal agencies.

2. The Police Department is responsible for the investigation and reporting of traffic accidents involving hazardous materials. The Police Department will provide other such assistance, to the Fire Department, as may be required to ensure the continuing safety and well being of the community.
B. HAZARDOUS MATERIAL IDENTIFICATION

1. This is usually accomplished directly or indirectly by the descriptive data in shipping documents, container markings, package labels, and vehicle placards. 2. If this information is not readily obtainable due to an incapacitated driver or destruction of a bill of lading or other shipping papers, immediately contact the Chemical Transportation Emergency Center (CHEMTREC) 800-424-9300. CHEMTREC provides technical expertise in handling hazardous material emergencies.

a. CHEMTREC also provides additional phone numbers for emergencies such as accidental poisoning.
C. FIRST OFFICER RESPONSE

1. Officers should not enter into the area of a spillage or leak. 2. Relay the following information to the Communications Center: a. Type of incident (railway, highway, factory); b. Basic description (explosion, fire, etc.); c. Exact location; d. Name of hazardous material and class; e. Quantity involved. 3. Without risk of exposure or injury to the officer, an attempt to rescue persons in the hazard area should be made. 4. Avoid inhalation of all gases, fumes, and smoke. Stand upwind of scene. 5. Detour all traffic around the scene. Avoid the use of flares. Traffic cones and barricades are preferred for traffic control. 6. Stop all unauthorized personnel from entering the scene.
D. NOTIFICATION

1. The communications operator shall immediately notify the following when advised of a hazardous material incident: a. The Fire Department b. The Patrol Division Commander b. Additional personnel as requested by the Patrol Division Commander c. Chief of Police d. ESDA Director
E. EVACUATION

1. The evacuation of persons and protection of property should be the first priority in an effected area. Careful thought should be given to what danger or hazard is posed to the people living or working in the immediate area or its proximity. To determine the

proper course of action, a number of factors must be taken into account, including weather conditions, population and traffic patterns. 2. The decision to evacuate will be made by the ranking police and fire officials on the scene. 3. The evacuation area may be enlarged as conditions change and time permits. 4. Every effort shall be made to prevent outsiders and nonessential personnel from entering the evacuated area until an all clear is given by the Fire Department. To the greatest extent possible, this will be accomplished through road blocks and police patrols.
F. EMERGENCY FIRST AID

1. Segregate and detain those who have possibly been in contact with the hazardous materials until they can be examined. Obtain names and addresses of those involved. 2. Remove the injured from the area of the accident with as little contact as possible. Hold them at a transfer point. 3. Take measures necessary to save life, but only carry out that first aid necessary to preserve life until medical help arrives. 4. If the officer comes in contact with any of the suspected dangerous material, medical assistance should be sought immediately. 5. If clothing becomes contaminated seek medical assistance for proper disposal.

Procedure #4.608

GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title:TOWING VEHICLESProcedure:4.608 DateIssued: Revised:

I.PURPOSE A. To provide guidelines for the towing, safeguarding and disposing of vehicles. B. To establish guidelines for the inventory of property from vehicles searched incident to a custodial arrest. II.POLICY A. Officers are encouraged to provide assistance to motorists when the need arises for towing services, and institute enforcement action when they observe illegally parked vehicles, traffic obstructions and abandoned vehicles or when towing a vehicle incident to an arrest. The towing of vehicles from City streets is done in accordance with applicable State statutes (625 ILCS 5/4201 through 207, 5/11-1302) and City ordinances.
III. PROCEDURE

A. GENERAL GUIDELINES
1. When a vehicle cannot be driven from the scene of a traffic crash, the investigating officer shall utilize one of the following options. a. If the person in control of the vehicle has a preference regarding the towing of the vehicle, and if the request does not impede the officer's investigation or the clearing of the scene, the request shall be honored. b. If the person in control of the vehicle does not have a preference of a towing service, or, if the person is incapable of making selection due to injuries, the investigating officer shall request the telecommunication operator contact a towing service to remove the vehicle. 2. When a vehicle left unattended upon a street or highway is found in violation of any of the provisions regulating stopping, standing, or parking, and constitutes a definite hazard or obstruction to normal movement of traffic, officers may remove such vehicle, or require the

driver or other person in charge of the vehicle to remove it from the roadway. 3. Officers may, remove and/or impound or cause to be removed promptly to an authorized impound yard or other place of safety, any vehicle found upon a street or highway under the following circumstances: a. A report has been made that the vehicle was stolen or taken without the owner's consent; or b. The vehicle is so disabled as to constitute an obstruction to traffic and the person in charge of the vehicle is unable to provide for its custody or prompt removal i.e., wrecked, burned or partially dismantled; or c. The driver of the vehicle is taken into custody by the Police Department and the vehicle would be left unattended upon the street. d. Removal of the vehicle is necessary in the interest of public safety because of fire, flood, storm, snow, or other emergency reasons. e. Abandoned or unattended for two (2) or more hours on an interstate highway ILCS 5/4-203 (a). f. Abandoned or unattended for twenty-four (24) or more hours on other highways ILCS 5/4203 (a). 4. For every vehicle towed or impounded, a Motor Vehicle Tow and Inventory report shall be thoroughly completed unless the tow was by owners request. A copy of the vehicle registration information and title search from LEADS shall be attached to the tow report. Officers towing a vehicle as a result of a custodial arrest shall personally serve the owner of record or operator of the vehicle at the time of the tow the gold copy of the completed tow report signed by the officer and owner or operator of the vehicle as proof of service for notification of the City Impoundment Ordinance (10.50.030 B). Officers shall provide the yellow copy of the completed tow report to the tow truck operator. 5. All vehicles towed or impounded shall be checked through LEADS and NCIC. 6. All vehicles towed without owner notification shall be entered into LEADS as towed/ impounded. 7. Officers shall report to their immediate supervisor the name of any tow company who either renders poor service or is incapable of providing quality service because of inadequate equipment or personnel. 8. Tow companies that are on the Granite City Police Department tow list shall comply with all applicable State Statutes and City Ordinances governing the operation of tow trucks in the State of Illinois (City Ordinance 2.84).

IV.TRAFFICARREST A. When the custodial arrest of a vehicle operator occurs: 1. The arresting officer shall request the towing service to tow the vehicle. 2. The vehicle shall be removed to the tow service place of business unless: a. There is probable cause to believe the vehicle is evidence or contains evidence and/or contraband. b. There is reason to believe the vehicle may be subject to forfeiture proceedings. 3. If one (1) or more of the circumstances articulated in above paragraph 2(a) or 2(b) exist, the vehicle will be secured in the Police Department Sally Port or Police Impound lot, which ever is applicable. 4. The vehicle shall not be parked and left unattended on either the side of the highway or on a parking lot. 5. If the arresting officer determines that another occupant of the vehicle possesses a valid driver's license and does not indicate a lack of ability to safely operate the vehicle, the vehicle has valid insurance and the driver, and the owner, of the vehicle grants permission for the licensed occupant to drive the vehicle, the officer may allow the vehicle to be driven rather than towed. 6. When an arresting officer reasonably believes that a person under arrest for driving under the influence of drug and/or alcohol is likely, upon release, to commit a subsequent violation, the officer shall have the vehicle impounded for a period of not more than six (6) hours after the time of arrest unless: a. the elements in paragraph five (5) above are met, or b. the vehicle is owned by the person under arrest and gives permission to another person to operate such vehicle, provided the person possesses a valid driver's license and has the ability to safely operate the vehicle. c. the vehicle is not owned by the person under arrest and the lawful owner requests release of the vehicle and possesses a valid driver's license, proof of ownership, proof of valid insurance for the vehicle and has the ability to safely operate the vehicle.
V.CRIMINALARREST

A. When a custodial arrest of a vehicle operator or occupant occurs and/or the vehicle was involved in a criminal offense, the investigating officer shall impound the vehicle by use of a tow service. B. If the vehicle was not involved in a criminal offense or there is no probable cause to believe the vehicle is evidence or contains evidence and/or contraband or there is no reason to believe the vehicle may be subject to forfeiture proceedings, the officer has the option stated paragraph (five) of traffic arrest, above. C. When the custodial arrest of a vehicle occupant occurs, the investigating officer may impound the vehicle by use of a tow service, if there is probable cause to believe the vehicle was involved in the offense or contains evidence of the offense. 1. Request that a tow truck be dispatched to the location. 2. Perform an inventory search of the vehicle, including the glove compartment, any unlocked containers, and the trunk. 3. A Motor Vehicle Tow and Inventory report will be completed. 4. If contraband or evidence of a crime is found, these items will be secured as evidence. VI.VEHICLESEARCHINCIDENTTOARREST A. If the occupant(s) of a vehicle are placed under arrest, areas of the vehicle that are immediately accessible to the arrestee and that might contain weapons, contraband or evidence may be searched. B. A vehicle search incident to an arrest is limited to areas within the reach and control of the person being arrested, for this reason, the search is limited to the passenger compartment, unlocked glove compartments or other easily accessible spaces within the passenger compartment. C. Packages or other containers within the passenger compartment, whether open or closed, may be searched. VII.FULLINVESTIGATORYVEHICLESEARCHES A. A search may be conducted upon the voluntary consent of the owner or operator of the vehicle, or B. A search may be conducted after a search warrant is obtained, or C. A search may be conducted without a search warrant when there is probable cause to believe that the vehicle contains fruits, instrumentalities or evidence of a crime or contraband.

A probable cause search may extend to all parts of the vehicle; it is not limited to the passenger compartment or, D. A warrantless probable cause search may be conducted on the highway or after the vehicle has been moved to the Police Department or impoundment lot. VIII.INVENTORYOFVEHICLECONTENTS A. All impounded vehicles will have the contents inventoried. The inventory may include the opening and inventory of luggage or other containers found in the impounded vehicle. B. The purpose of an inventory is: 1. Protect the contents from loss. 2. Protect the Department against civil claims for loss. 3. Protect officer and the public by determining whether there are any hazardous substances in the vehicle. C. The inventory must be conducted without any investigatory motive. Searching for incriminating evidence of a crime does not fall within the purview of an inventory search. D. The inventory may be conducted either before or after impoundment. IX.SEARCHOFCONTAINERS A. PROBABLE CAUSE SEARCHES 1. Containers, wherever found in the vehicle, may be opened provided that they could contain the items being searched for. B. SEARCHES BY CONSENT 1. Owner or operator may limit the scope of the search. 2. Search is limited to those containers that might reasonably hold the evidence being sought. C. SEARCHES INCIDENT TO ARREST 1. Where the passenger compartment of a vehicle is being searched incident to an arrest, any container, whether open or closed, found within the passenger compartment may be searched because the arrest itself justifies the examination of such containers. D. INVENTORY SEARCHES

1. An inventory search of a vehicle may include an inventory of the contents of suitcases and other containers found within the vehicle during the inventory. E. DELAYED SEARCH OF CONTAINERS 1. A search may be delayed until the vehicle has been moved to the Police Department or impound lot but the search will be conducted within a reasonable time period.
X.MOTORISTASSIST

A. Anytime an officer encounters a motorist who requires the services of a tow company, the officer will: 1. Check with the motorist to ascertain if he has a preference for a local tow company and request the radio operator to make notification. 2. Advise the motorist that if their choice of a tow company cannot provide timely service, and the vehicle presents a hazard, the Department has arrangements with local tow companies to provide services. 3. The motorist shall have the opportunity to select the tow company desired from those authorized by the Department to tow vehicles. 4. If the motorist has no preference the officer will advise the radio operator to contact the tow service next on the list. B. While awaiting the arrival of the tow truck, the officer will provide protection for the disabled vehicle by positioning his police vehicle, with emergency lights activated, between the disabled vehicle and other traffic. C. If necessary, and time permits, the officer may provide transportation for the motorist and passengers to a place of safety.

XI.RELEASINGIMPOUNDEDVEHICLES
A. All vehicles which are impounded per impoundment ordinance 10.50 and indicated as eligible for release, may be released to the owner or his agent upon showing proof of ownership, proof of valid insurance for the vehicle, a valid drivers license, and paying an administrative fee at the police station. Vehicles towed where City Ordinance 10.50 does not apply may be released by the tow company upon proof of ownership. B. Vehicles which are impounded and indicated as NOT eligible for release, may not be released without a Towed Vehicle Release Order authorized by the officer in charge of the case, or a supervisor.

C. All owners, or agents, must sign documentation for the release of the motor vehicle at the police station records section. XII.ABANDONEDANDDERELICTVEHICLES

1. All inoperable motor vehicles, whether on public or private property, and in view of

the general public, are declared to be a nuisance (city ordinance 8.42.010) Inoperable vehicle defined: means any motor vehicle (a) from which for a period of 7 days, the engine wheels, or other parts have been altered, damaged, or (b) otherwise so treated that the vehicle is incapable of being driven under its own motor power, or (c) to which no valid, current license plate is affixed (city ordinance 8.42.030) B. Abandoned vehicles prohibited on streets: No person shall abandon a vehicle upon any street (city ordinance 10.24.030). Abandoned vehicle defined: a vehicle shall be presumed to be abandoned if it is left unattended on a street for a period in excess of 7 days, or on any public or private property without express or implied consent of the owner or person in lawful possession or control of the property for a period in excess of 7 days (city ordinance 10.24.010). C. Storing, parking or leaving junk motor vehicles prohibited (city ordinance 10.25.020). Junk motor vehicle defined: Any motor vehicle which is inoperable or which has substantial damage to its body and operable parts, including but not limited to, windshield, headlights, rear lights, bumpers, fenders, tires, chassis, motor exhaust system and other operating parts, requiring repairs of greater than two hundred fifty dollars in costs, or to which no valid, current license plate is affixed. For the purpose of this chapter, a motor vehicle in such condition is presumed to be junked, derelict, disabled, dismantled or abandoned (city ordinance 10.25.010 B D. A police officer who observes or is otherwise notified of a vehicle which is inoperable, abandoned or derelict as defined above shall:
1. Initiate an Inoperable Vehicle Incident Report which shall include the registration, VIN

and title information. 2. Complete a tow sticker and place it in a conspicuous location on the vehicle to notify the owner of the violation. When the vehicle is parked on the street, the officer shall mark the front and rear tires on the vehicle facing the street with a tire marker in the 12 oclock position.
3. Check the vehicles registration and VIN through LEADS and NCIC.

4. When dealing with inoperable boat trailers, list the trailer as the vehicle. Boats should be identified the same as vehicles: list the manufacturer, series or model, hull identification number (usually located on the right rear of the boat), and the boat registration number (number located on both sides of the boat) in the narrative of the incident report. 5. An unlocked, abandoned vehicle parked on a public thoroughfare may be searched without a warrant.

E. The inoperable vehicle incident report will be assigned to an officer for follow up investigation. 1. Upon follow up investigation (no earlier than seven days after tagging the vehicle) if an officer finds that the vehicle is noncompliant the officer will complete a supplemental report, photograph both the inside and outside of the vehicle and then send a City Administrative Court summons, via certified U.S. mail, to the vehicle owner (and property owner if the vehicle is parked on private property) for due process before an Administrative Hearing Officer or Third Judicial Circuit Judge. State laws and City Ordinances may be used in circuit court when abating inoperable vehicles. Once the Administrative Hearing Officer or judge rules in favor of the City and orders the vehicle removed, the officer will, as soon as possible, photograph and tow the vehicle as ordered. F. The Administration Division Commander will be responsible for maintaining a liaison with all tow companies and processing all Motor Vehicle Impoundment and Inventory reports. If all attempts to contact the owner fail, the vehicle will be disposed of according to State law. XIII.POLICERECORDSOFIMPOUNDEDVEHICLES A. Records of all police tows shall follow Illinois Compiled Statutes Chapter 625 of the Vehicle Code 5/4-204. B. Record Searches of vehicles shall follow Illinois Compiled Statutes Chapter 625 of the Vehicle Code 5/4-204 C. Reclaimed vehicles; expenses: shall follow Illinois Compiled Statutes Chapter 625 of the Vehicle Code 5/4XiV.DISPOSALOFUNCLAIMEDVEHICLES A. The Police Department shall follow Illinois Compiled Statutes Chapter 625 of the Vehicle Code 5/4-208 concerning the disposal of unclaimed vehicles 7 years of age or newer. B. DISPOSAL OF UNCLAIMED VEHICLES MORE THAN 7 YEARS OF AGE; DISPOSAL OF ABANDONED OR UNCLAIMED VEHICLES WITHOUT NOTICE 1. The Police Department shall follow Illinois Compiled Statutes Chapter 625 of the Vehicle Code 5/4-209 for disposing of vehicles 7 years and older. XV.MAINTENANCE OF POLICE RECORDS AND PROCEEDS SHALL FOLLOW ILLINOIS COMPILED STATUTES CHAPTER 625 OF THE VEHICLE CODE 5/4-210 and5/4-211) A. When a vehicle is reclaimed or disposed of, a report of the transaction will be maintained by the Police Department for a period of one (1) year from the date of the sale or disposal.

B. Proceeds of the public sale or disposition, after the deduction of towing and storage charges, shall be deposited in the treasury of the City of Granite City.

Procedure #4.612

GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title:RACIAL PROFILING Procedure:4.612 DateIssued: Revised:

I. PURPOSE A. The Granite City Police Department is committed to the philosophies of Community Policing. Community Policing requires that the Police and the Community enter into partnerships. These partnerships, in turn, require that the Police and the Community have confidence in each other. II. POLICY A. The Granite City Police Department is committed to serving all people with respect, fairness, and compassion. Acting in partnership with the community to protect life and property, we strive to prevent crime and help preserve peace, order, and safety. B. It is the policy of this department to investigate suspicious persons, incidents, and other activities which officers encounter on patrol. It is also the intent of the department to respect and protect the constitutional rights of all individuals during law enforcement contacts and/or enforcement actions. The department encourages its officers to initiate citizen contacts as a means to stay informed about activities and concerns of persons in the community. C. With community services as our foundation, we will address problems and seek solutions with honesty and integrity. We shall maintain public respect by holding ourselves to the highest standards and ethics. We encourage, expect, and need community involvement to work toward a mutual goal of enhancing the quality of life within the community. D. Racial profiling is perceived to be a problem that impacts minority communities and erodes the confidence needed to successfully partner law enforcement and the community. E. The Granite City Police Department does not condone profiling as it relates to the use of race, ethnicity, gender, or economic status in the performance to its duties. III. DEFINITIONS A. CONTACT: a contact is a face to face communication between an officer and a private person under circumstances where the person is free to leave.

B. FRISK: a frisk occurs when an officer makes contact with the outer clothing of a person, using a feel and/or pat down method to detect whether a concealed weapon or dangerous instrument is being carried. C. PERSONALLY INVOLVED: where the off-duty officer, a family member, or a friend becomes engaged in a dispute or incident with the person to be arrested or any other person connected with the incident. D. REASONABLE OFFICER: a reasonable officer can be defined as one who acts as other similarly trained and experienced officers could be expected to act, under similar circumstances. The reasonableness of an officers actions will be reviewed based on the facts and circumstances known to him at the time of the action. E. REASONABLE SUSPICION: a police officer has reasonable suspicion to detain a citizen briefly for purposes of investigation when the officer, in light of experience and training, is aware of articulable facts or circumstances which could lead a reasonably prudent person to believe that a crime has occurred, criminal activity is going to occur, or someone is otherwise in need of police assistance. F. REASONABLE SUSPICION TO FRISK: a police officer has reasonable suspicion to frisk a citizen during an investigative detention when the officer is concerned for their personal safety and in light of experience and training, is aware of articulable facts or circumstances which could lead a reasonably prudent person to believe that the citizen may be armed with a weapon. G. STOP: a stop is a temporary detention of a person for investigation. A stop occurs when officers use their authority either to compel a person to halt, to remain in a certain place, or to perform some act (such as walking to a nearby location where the officer can use a radio, telephone, etc.). Both pedestrians and persons in vehicles may be stopped. H. MINORITY BASED ENFORCEMENT ACTION: actions taken on part of the officer which is based on race, gender, national origin, creed, color, disability, age, religion, or any other class protected by law. IV. PROCEDURE A. For purposes beyond a mere contact, officers should realize that they must be within their jurisdiction or have statutory authority. B. For purposes beyond a mere contact, non-uniformed officers will identify themselves if circumstances require. V. CITIZEN ENCOUNTERS A. CONTACTS

1. Officers are encouraged to initiate contacts with individuals in the community in order to gain knowledge of their patrol districts and the community. 2. A contact is different form a detention or arrest in that it does not involve the seizure of a person within the meaning of the Fourth Amendment. The officer does not need reasonable suspicion, probable cause, or any other specific display of criminal activity in order to initiate a contact. 3. Officers may feel the need to investigate the activities of a person when they do not possess sufficient information to make a stop or arrest. In such case, the officer may initiate a contact with the person in any place that the officer a right to be. 4. Unless the officer concludes that an arrest should be made or that a stop is justifiable and appropriate, communications with a private person should begin with a contact. 5. Although no legal cause needs to be present for the officer to initiate a contact, the persons contacted may not be halted, detained, or frisked against their will. They may not be required to answer questions or to cooperate in any way if they do not wish to do so. If they refuse to cooperate, they must be permitted to go on their way, unless the officer has developed reasonable suspicion to escalate the contact to a stop under the circumstances, however, the person may be kept under surveillance. Since a contact is not a stop or an arrest, and those persons contacted may be innocent of wrongdoing of any kind, officers should take special care to act in a restrained and courteous manner. B. STOPS 1. If an officer reasonably suspects that a person has committed, is committing, or is about to commit any crime, the authority to stop that person exits. The officer may exercise this authority in any place that the officer has the right to be. Both pedestrians and persons in vehicles may be stopped. A stop is warranted if there is a reasonable suspicion by the officer that some activity out of the ordinary is occurring or has occurred, some indication to connect the person under suspicion with the unusual activity, and some suggestion that the activity is related a crime. 2. Factors to consider in determining whether reasonable suspicion exists for a stop. a. Appearance: does the person generally fit the description of a person wanted for a known offense? Do they appear to be suffering from a recent injury or to be under the influence of alcohol, drugs, or other intoxicants? b. Actions: is the person running away from an actual or possible crime scene? Are they behaving in a manner indicating possible criminal conduct? If so, in what way? Were incriminating statements or conversations overheard? c. Demeanor: is the person responsive to questions during the contact; were their answers evasive, suspicious, or incriminating? Were they excessively nervous during contact?

d. Officers Prior Knowledge: does the person have a prior arrest or conviction record, or are they known to have committed a serious offense? If so, is it for offenses similar to one that has just occurred, or which you suspect is about to occur? e. Area: is the person near the location of a known offense soon after its commission? Is the person in an area known for an unusually high incidence of a particular criminal activity: If so, is it the kind of activity the person is thought to have committed, be committing, or is about to commit? If reference is made to the area of the stop, officers should be able to articulate specific facts concerning that area (i.e. four commercial burglaries during the past week and within several blocks of the stop). f. Time of Day: is it unusual for people to be in the area of this particular criminal activity during the time the suspected criminal activity usually occurs? g. Prior Police Training and Experience: does the persons conduct resemble the pattern or modus operandi used in particular criminal offenses? Does the investigating officer have experience in dealing with the particular kind of criminal activity being investigated? h. Police Purpose: was the officer investigating a specific crime or specific type of criminal activity? How serious is the suspected criminal activity? Might innocent people be endangered if investigative action is not taken at once? i. Source of Information: if the basis of the officers reasonable suspicions is, in whole or in part, information supplied by another person, what kind of person was involved? Were they a criminal informant, a witness, or a victim of a crime? How reliable does the person appear to be? Have they supplied information in the past that proved to be reliable? Are they known to the officer? Did the officer obtain information directly from that person? How did the person obtain the information? Was any part of the information corroborated prior to making the stop? 3. Every officer who conducts a stop, as opposed to a contact, must be prepared to cite those specific factors which led the officer to believe that the stop is justifiable. 4. Proper justification for a stop does not permit unreasonable conduct during the stop. All police activity during a stop must be done in a reasonable manner, because each phase of the stop will be considered by the courts in determining whether the stop was reasonable and, therefore, lawful. Enforcement decisions will not be based solely on race, national origin, citizenship, religion, ethnicity, age gender, color, creed, disability, or sexual orientation; unless the officer is seeking an individual with one or more of those identified attributes. a. A person stopped pursuant to this Directive may only be detained at or near the scene of the stop for a reasonable length of time. Officers should detain a person only for the length of time necessary to obtain or verify the persons presence or conduct, or an account of the offense, or otherwise determine if the person should be arrested or released.

b. Officers must act with as much restraint and courtesy towards the person stopped as is possible under the circumstances. Non uniformed officers making a stop shall identify themselves as law enforcement officers as soon as practical after making the stop. Prior to termination of the stop, the officer shall give the person stopped an explanation of the purpose to the stop. c. Officers may direct questions to the detained person(s) for the purpose of obtaining their name, address, and an explanation of their presence and conduct. However, absent probable cause for an arrest, the detained person may not be compelled to answer these questions (even that of identity) except as required or mandated by applicable state law. d. Refusal to answer questions does not by itself establish probable cause to arrest, but such refusal may be considered along with other facts as a factor to be considered in determining whether the investigation would be continued. e. Officers shall use the least compelling means necessary under the circumstances to effect the stop of a person. The compelling means may be verbal request, an order, or the use of physical force. If circumstances exist that create probable cause to arrest, the officer may use that amount of force reasonable and justifiable to effect a full custody. The officer may use that amount of force reasonable and justifiable for self defense. C. FRISKS 1. An officer may frisk any person who has been stopped when the officer reasonably suspects that the person is carrying a concealed weapon or dangerous instrument. The frisk may be conducted immediately upon making the stop or at any time during the stop whenever a reasonable suspicion to frisk develops. During traffic stops the officer may frisk both the driver and any passengers if the above conditions are met. 2. Reasonable suspicion for a valid frisk is more than vague hunch and less than probable cause. If a reasonably prudent officer, under the circumstances, would believe that officers safety or that of other persons in the vicinity is in danger, because a particular person might be carrying a weapon or dangerous instrument, a frisk in justified. 3. An officer who conducts a frisk must be prepared to cite those specific factors which led that officer to conclude that reasonable suspicion existed before the frisk began. Factors to consider are: a. Appearance: Do the clothes bulge in a manner suggesting the presence of any object capable of inflicting injury? b. Actions: Did the person make movements as if to hide a weapon when they were approached? Are they nervous during the course of the detention? Are their words or actions threatening?

c. Prior Knowledge: Does the officer know the person to have a record for weapons offenses or assaulting behavior? Does the officer know if the person has a reputation for carrying weapons? d. Location: Is the area sufficiently isolated so that the officer is unlikely to receive immediate aid if attacked? e. Time of Day: Is the confrontation taking place at night? Does this contribute to the likelihood that the officer will be attacked? f. Police Purpose: Does the officers suspicion of the suspect relate to a serious and violent offense? An armed Offense? (If so, those same factors justifying the stop also justify the frisk.) g. Companions: Has the officer detained a number of people at the same time? Has a frisk of a companion, to the suspect, revealed a weapon? Does the officer have assistance immediately available to handle the number of persons stopped? 4. A frisk is a limited search for the purpose of protection only. Reasonable suspicion to frisk does not permit a full scale search. 5. General Conduct of a Frisk a. Items in possession of the subject to be frisked (i.e., purses, shopping bags, or briefcases) should be taken from the person. The object may then be inspected visually and by pat down of the exterior. If there is further cause to believe the object contains a weapon, then the officer may look inside. b. Prior to beginning the frisk, the officer should advise the person that they are going to conduct a frisk. The frisk should begin in those parts of the clothing most likely to contain a weapon or dangerous instrument. c. Frisks are a limited pat down of the persons outer clothing unless: (1) The outer clothing is too bulky to determine if a weapon is concealed underneath. In this case the outer clothing may be opened. (2) The officer has a reasonable belief, based upon reliable information or knowledge and observation, that a weapon or dangerous instrument is concealed at a particular location on the person, such as a pocket, waistband, or sleeve. If so, the officer may reach directly into the suspect area. (Note: the officer must be able to explain the precise factors leading to this exception.) d. The officer may also frisk or secure any areas within the detained persons immediate reach, if the officer reasonably suspects that such areas might contain a weapon or dangerous instrument.

6. When an officer conducting a frisk, feels an object which the officer reasonably believes is a weapon or dangerous instrument or may contain such an item, the officer may reach into the area and remove the object. a. Weapons or dangerous instruments: Determine if the persons possession of the instrument is licensed or otherwise legal, or if it is unlawful. If the instrument is legally possessed it should be secured away from the persons location for the duration of the detention. If a weapon, dangerous instrument, contraband, or siezable items are discovered by the officer and the possession is unlawful, then appropriated search and/or arrest procedures should be followed. b. Contraband or seizable items: The officer may seize the item and consider it in determining if probable cause exists to arrest the person. (If the person is arrested, then a full custodial search is proper.) c. An object which could reasonably contain a weapon or dangerous instrument: with reasonable suspicion the officer may look inside the container and briefly examine its contents. If a weapon, dangerous instrument, contraband or seizable items are discovered by he officer and the possession is unlawful, then appropriate search and/or arrest procedures should be followed. If none of the above are located, return the object, to the person. d. If a container could not reasonably contain a weapon or dangerous instrument, or the officer does not have a reasonable belief that it contains such an item, then the officer may not look inside it. The item should then be returned to the owner or treated as a separable item. e. If removal of the suspected object simultaneously discloses a second object that itself is a seizable item, the officer may lawfully seize the second object. The second object should then be considered in determining whether probable cause exists to arrest the person. If so, the officer should tell the person they are under arrest and proceed with a full custodial search incidental the arrest. f. Under the Plain Feel Doctrine, an officer may take reasonable steps to examine an object or article if, while conducting a frisk: (1) the properties of the object determined by plain feel through the subject clothing (such as size, shape, or consistency); and (2) the officer's experience and the totality of the current incident. g. Upon confirmation that the object or article is an illegal object the officer may appropriately seize the object, and arrest and charge the suspect. VI. COMPLIANCE

A. Violation of this policy, or portions thereof, may result is disciplinary action. VII. OFFICERS ASSIGNED TO OTHER AGENCIES A. Officers of this department assigned to or assisting other law enforcement agencies will be guided by this policy.

5 Procedure #4.613 GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title: 4.613

TRAFFIC VIOLATOR CONTACT

Procedure:

Date Issued:

Revised:

I.PURPOSE

A. To establish guidelines for stopping and approaching motorists in a manner that promotes the safety of the officer and the motorist.

B.Provide guidelines for the interaction between motorist and officer.

C.To establish procedures when stopping traffic violators.

D.To outline special processing requirements.

II.POLICY

A. Although stopping motorists on the highway for traffic violations or other purposes is often considered a routine function of patrol officers, it is one that has been demonstrated to be potentially dangerous for both officers and motorists even during apparently "routine" situations. For violators it is frequently an emotionally traumatic experience. Therefore, it is the policy of this department that motor vehicle stops shall be performed professionally and courteously, and with a view towards educating the public about proper driving procedures while consistently recognizing and taking the necessary steps to minimize the dangers involved in this activity for the officer, the motorist and other users of the highway.

III.PROCEDURE

A.

OFFICER/VIOLATOR CONTACT

1.Officers shall perform vehicle stops only when they have a legal reason to do so.

2. Once an initial decision has been made to stop a motorist, the officer shall select an area
that provides reasonable safety. Whenever possible, the officer shall also avoid the use of private drives, business locations and areas where a large volume of spectators are likely to gather.

3.When a location has been selected for the stop, the officer shall notify the communications center of its nature providing unit location, a description of the vehicle, vehicle license number and the number of occupants. At the officer's discretion or dispatcher's request, additional information may be exchanged.

4. At the desired location, the officer should signal the operator to stop at the far right side of the roadway or at the safest shoulder by activating the overhead emergency lights and siren as necessary.

a.On multi-lane roads, the officer may facilitate movement to the right shoulder by gradually changing lanes behind the violator until the right side of the roadway is reached.

b. Should the violator stop abruptly in the wrong lane or location, the officer
should instruct him to move by using the appropriate hand signals or by using the vehicle's public address system.

5. Once properly stopped, the officer should position the police vehicle about one to one and
one half car length behind the violator's vehicle and at an off set, with the front approximately 2 to 4 feet to the traffic side of the violator's vehicle.

a. At night, the spotlight should not be used to direct the violator but may be used to illuminate the vehicle's interior once stopped. The patrol vehicle should use its low beams if high beams would blind oncoming motorists.

6. When exiting the patrol vehicle, the officer should be particularly alert to suspicious movements or actions of the vehicle operator or passengers.

7. Approaching from the driver's side, the officer should be observant of the passenger compartment and stop at a point to the rear of the trailing edge of the left front door in order to communicate with the driver.

a. Where circumstances dictate, particularly where traffic is close enough to create a potential problem, the officer may choose to approach the violator's vehicle from the passenger side and stop at the trailing edge of the front door.

b. When the violator's vehicle has occupants in the rear seat, the officer should approach to a point near the leading edge of the driver door, being particularly observant of the occupants movements and choosing a path that will not allow the occupants to thrust the door open against the officer.

c. In twoofficer police vehicles, the passenger officer shall be responsible for radio communications, note taking and relaying messages to the communications center. He will also act as an observer and cover for his fellow officer.

8. Non-uniformed officers operating vehicles not equipped with emergency lights or siren
shall not make motor vehicle stops unless there is imminent danger of loss of life should they fail to act. In other less urgent cases that demand attention, officers shall contact the communications center, request that a marked patrol vehicle perform the stop, and assist in directing the marked unit to the subject vehicle's location.

9. Once the officer has stopped the violator and communications are taking place, officer/ violator relations begin. The officer should:

a.be alert at all times;

b.present a professional image, physically and emotionally; c.base enforcement action on violator's driving behavior; d.greet the violator in a courteous manner; e. ask the violator for a driver's license, proof of insurance and any other appropriate
documents;

f.inform the driver of the violation and type of enforcement action intended;

g.complete the forms for the enforcement action taken; and, h.explain the citation to the violator. 10.When issuing citations, conducting roadside sobriety tests or conversing with the violator,
the officer and other parties shall be positioned to the side of the road, clear of the motor vehicles. At no time should the officer and violator stand in front of, between or behind the stopped vehicles.

11.During the stop, the officer should instruct the violator to remain in his motor vehicle while the officer writes the citation or conducts other business. Violators shall not be permitted to sit in patrol vehicles while citations are being prepared or other police business is being conducted.

12. When preparing citations, in the patrol vehicle, the officer should position paperwork and related material in a manner that allows him to maintain observation over actions of the violator and other occupants.

13. Officers will provide motorists with information explaining his rights and responsibilities concerning his arrest or citing for a traffic violation.

14. Officers should advise violators of the location, date, time of their court appearance, and whether their appearance is mandatory.

15. Offenses not requiring a mandatory court appearance or that qualify for court supervision may be prepaid according to current Court bond rules. Officers shall advise violators of this operation and the locations and restrictions on prepayment. Officers are encouraged to provide the violator with the appropriate pre-printed court envelope for the purpose of obtaining supervision or paying the fine by mail, and avoiding a court appearance.

16.Violators shall be advised of their various bonding options by the officer.

B.STOPPING AN APPROACHING MOTORIST

1. In cases where a motorist must be stopped from oncoming traffic, the following actions may be taken:

a. Drive the police vehicle to the extreme right portion of the roadway and, as the violator approaches, signal him to stop by using hand signals and emergency lights.

b. Because of the potential hazard involved, an officer shall not leave his vehicle when attempting to stop oncoming motorists.

c. If the subject motorist complies with the instructions, the police vehicle may then be turned around and appropriately positioned to the rear of the violator's vehicle.

d.Should the motorist fail to comply with the officer's instructions, the officer should turn the vehicle around and pursue, stop and approach the violator in the prescribed manner.

C.STOPPING A FOLLOWING VIOLATOR 1.When stopping a motorist to the rear of the police vehicle, the following procedures may be followed:

a. The officer should drive to the right shoulder of the road and, as the violator approaches, signal him to stop.

b.The officer should not exit his vehicle in order to signal the subject motorist.

c. Should the motorist fail to comply, the officer should return to the roadway and stop and approach him in the prescribed manner.

D.MAKING HIGH-RISK VEHICLE STOPS

1. When planning to stop the suspect vehicle, the officer shall notify the communications center, describe the nature or reason for the stop, provide information on the vehicle, license number and number of occupants; and request appropriate assistance to make the stop.

2. An officer should not individually initiate high-risk vehicle stops unless backup units will not be available in an appropriate amount of time or the urgency of the situation demands immediate action.

3. After selecting an appropriate location and with adequate support units in position, the officer should signal the suspect to stop.

4. Officers should position their vehicles approximately 30 feet behind the suspect vehicle, in positions that will maximize opportunities for cover and in a manner that will illuminate the interior of the vehicle to the occupants' disadvantage.

5.Once the suspect vehicle has stopped, officers should assume positions of cover.

6. The primary officer initiating the stop, or the officer with the best observation point, should issue verbal commands to vehicle occupants through the vehicle's public address system, if available. Generally only the primary officer shall issue commands.

7. The primary officer shall first identify himself and then notify the occupants of the vehicle that they are under arrest and that all instructions are to be followed without hesitation or suspicious movements.

8. The operator of the suspect vehicle should be ordered to follow all commands, such as: lower his window; remove the ignition keys with his left hand; drop them on the ground; open the door from the outside; step out of the vehicle; turn completely around; face away from the officers; walk backward until commanded to stop and lay face down on the ground with hands stretched far to the sides. All other occupants should be similarly commanded until all are in position to be handcuffed and searched.

9. With appropriate cover, officers should then approach the suspect vehicle to inspect the passenger compartment and trunk.

E.

STOPPING OVERSIZE AND OVERWEIGHT VEHICLES

1. Select a location for the stop that provides enough room for the vehicle and sufficient stability to support the vehicle's weight, and allow the operator sufficient time and distance to make the stop.

2. Approach the cab from the rear, using the driver's outside mirror to observe the driver and activity in the cab.

3. Never climb onto the vehicle to make contact with the operator. Maintain a position to the rear of the driver's door and ask him to exit the vehicle, when necessary.

F.

EXEMPTIONS/SPECIAL PROCESSING REQUIREMENTS

1.State Statutes affords individuals exemption from arrest under specified circumstances. 2. The following have temporary immunity, except for cases of treason, a felony or a breach of the peace:

a. members of the United States Electoral College, during their attendance at an election and in going to and returning from;

b. senators and representatives during sessions of the General Assembly, and in going to and coming from;

c. members of the military reserve forces and the National Guard during their attendance at official meetings, and in going to and coming from; and,

d. judges, attorneys, clerks, sheriffs, and other court officers shall be privileged from arrest while attending court and while going to or returning from.

3. Officers having contact with persons claiming exemptions based on the above should attempt to verify that person's exemption through personal identification.

4. Nothing in this procedure or in the law precludes an officer from obtaining a warrant or
issuing a citation at a later time for the person released.

G.

DIPLOMATIC IMMUNITY

1. Diplomatic immunity is not a right that a foreign official has because of his position, but a privilege given by the President of the United States.

2. Diplomatic officers, their families and servants who are not nationals or permanent residents of the United States are protected by unlimited immunity from arrest, detention or prosecution, with respect to any civil or criminal offense.

3.Persons making such a claim must possess photo identity cards (not diplomatic passports) issued by the State Department and the United Nations.

4. Consuls, vice consuls, deputy consuls and some of their staff hold immunity while
specifically engaged in diplomatic work. This immunity depends upon the activity of the person at that particular moment.

5. Officers having contact with a foreign official are empowered to temporarily detain any person claiming diplomatic immunity while official status is verified by the U.S. State Department. All foreign mission members and dependents are accountable for traffic violations. Stopping a foreign mission member or dependent, and issuing a traffic citation, does not constitute an arrest or detention, and is permissible. Normal procedures should be followed in the intervention of a traffic violation, even if immunity ultimately bars prosecution or a serious offense. Levels of immunity vary depending on the individual.

6. The United States Department of State, Office of Foreign Missions can provide detailed driver and vehicle information. They can advise an officer on the scene on handling, documenting, and reporting an incident involving individuals that may have a level of immunity. The officer shall document all information pertaining to the incident. The following phone numbers can be used to obtain information:

a. Use 202-647-4570 / 1404 / 1405 (Duty hours 8-5 eastern time Monday - Friday) to verify if an individual is a foreign mission member with immunity.

b.Use 202-895-3521 for handling, documenting and reporting procedures. c.Use 202-647-7277 for all after hours questions.
H.

JUVENILES
a. If necessary, a report will be completed. The juvenile's parents will be notified if the juvenile is taken into custody.

1.Juvenile traffic arrests should be handled in the following manner:


b.If a cash bond is needed, the officer should allow the youth to make every effort to secure funds. If all efforts fail and the bond cannot be made, then on the approval of the watch commander, an I-Bond will be issued. The juvenile should not be detained for more than two (4) hours while arranging for bond.

c.Juveniles awaiting bond for FINE ONLY offenses may be placed in the lobby vestibule.

d. Juveniles arrested for traffic offenses where jail is a possible penalty may be confined in the juvenile detention room until bonding or release. The juvenile's parents will be notified if the juvenile is held in custody.

I.

NONRESIDENTS

1. The State is a member of the Nonresident Violator Compact (NRVC). These States allow drivers to sign the traffic citation, for minor violations, instead of posting the required bond. This allows a motorist to accept a traffic citation and proceed without delay, and does not burden the officer with a lengthy bonding process.

2. Drivers from all other States shall be required to deposit bond for all traffic violations pursuant to Supreme Court bond rules.

5 Procedure #4.615 GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title: 4.615

TRAFFIC ENFORCEMENT
Date Issued:

Procedure:

Revised:

I.PURPOSE

A.To establish general guidelines for the Department's traffic law enforcement program.

II.POLICY

A. The primary purpose of traffic law enforcement is to reduce crashes through active police patrol and violator contacts. Patrol visibility, consistency of effort, education, engineering and public support will facilitate the safe and expeditious movement of vehicular and pedestrian traffic.

III.PROCEDURE

A.

ENFORCEMENT RESPONSIBILITY

1. All members of the Department have a responsibility to provide for a fair and reasonable approach to traffic law enforcement, and enforce the same laws in the same manner.

2. Enforcement policies cannot and should not replace officer judgment. Officer discretion on the proper enforcement action to be taken is based on a combination of the officer's training, experience, and common sense. The intent of this procedure is to set forth general guidelines for uniform enforcement action for routine traffic situations. It is not the intent of this procedure to limit discretion, but to encourage each officer to use his/her training and experience to the fullest extent.

IV.GUIDELINES FOR ROUTINE TRAFFIC ENFORCEMENT

A.EXCEEDING POSTED SPEED LIMIT

1. Legally there is no defense for exceeding the posted limit or for driving faster than conditions safely permit. However, drivers stopped for speed violations may indicate certain factors unknown to the officer before the stop that may have contributed to the violation.

2. Officers should exercise discretion when deciding if a verbal warning, written warning or
a citation is appropriate. Consideration should be given to such factors as weather conditions, traffic volume, pedestrian traffic and location, while always being mindful that excessive speed correlates directly with high incidents of crashes.

B.HAZARDOUS VIOLATIONS

1. Hazardous violations are defined as those violations that pose a direct hazard to the safe and efficient flow of traffic. In addition, these violations contribute substantially to crashes. For the purpose of this procedure hazardous violations fall into the following categories:

2. Unsafe Behavior - driver actions that are directly related to moving violations i.e., violating
traffic control devices, signs and other crash related violations.

3. Unsafe Condition - vehicles that are improperly equipped, i.e., no headlights, worn tires,
overweight trucks and any other violation that renders a vehicle unsafe.

4.Officers are to take immediate enforcement action based on sound judgment upon viewing
or detecting hazardous violations.

C.VIOLATIONS BY PUBLIC OR COMMERCIAL CARRIERS

1. Public/Commercial carriers who violate traffic laws will be treated in the same manner as the general public. Uniform enforcement policies and procedures outlined in those traffic related procedures are applicable.

D.NEWLY ENACTED TRAFFIC LAWS

1. When new traffic laws are enacted, the Chief of Police will review them to determine the level and schedule of enforcement action to be taken by Department personnel. At his discretion, the Chief of Police, may authorize warning tickets as the Department's primary enforcement action until the provisions of the new laws are better known to the public.

E.D.U.I. VIOLATIONS

1.Refer to the Department D.U.I. Enforcement procedure.

F.MULTIPLE VIOLATIONS

1. When multiple violations are committed by a single individual and arise from a continuous activity, the enforcement action adopted will be predicated on the most serious offense committed.

2. In all cases of multiple violations, the enforcement action taken will be sufficient to support a comprehensive and complete case for the prosecution.

G.NON-HAZARDOUS VIOLATION

1.Enforcement efforts for non-hazardous traffic violations will be guided by officer discretion. Officers are reminded that voluntary compliance is the goal of enforcement actions for minor violations.

V.TYPES OF ENFORCEMENT ACTION

A. Officer discretion is important to an effective traffic law enforcement program. Emphasis should be placed on the principles of selective enforcement with resources directed toward specific areas and violations deemed important to the Department's traffic enforcement program.

B. Enforcement action shall be carried out by all Department personnel in a fair, impartial and courteous manner. The officer's actions should demonstrate a positive and professional demeanor at all times.

C. Sworn officers shall take the appropriate enforcement action for each violation of the law reported or observed. Enforcement actions will be accomplished using one of the following methods.

1. WRITTEN WARNING - A written warning may be appropriate for a minor infraction where the likelihood of causing a traffic crash is minimal or when the violator commits an act that may be due to ignorance of a local ordinance, the Vehicle Code or in the case of a condition of which the driver may not be aware.

2. CITATION - The citation should be issued to violators who jeopardize the safe movement
of pedestrian or vehicular traffic. This includes operating unsafe or improperly equipped vehicles, and serious license and registration violations.

3. CUSTODIAL ARREST - Officers will effect the arrest of any person in violation of traffic
laws of a serious nature. Officers shall use sound legal principles and comply with the provisions established in the Vehicle Code.

4. JUVENILES - If a juvenile is arrested for a jailable Vehicle Code violation the parent/
guardian will be notified as soon as possible.

a. Juvenile traffic violators will be issued "I" bonds if they are unable to post bond as set by statute.

b. Officers will advise juveniles that a parent/guardian must accompany them if they go to
court.

VI.SUSPENDED/REVOKED OR NO VALID DRIVER'S LICENSE

A. If the officer has received verification that the drivers license has been suspended or revoked, he should effect custodial arrest of the driver.

B. If the officer is unable to determine the status of the driver's license he should issue any appropriate citations. If it is determined later that the driver's license is suspended or revoked, he should

file the additional charges in court, contact the driver and ask him to voluntarily come into the station for new charges, or seek a warrant.

VII.TRAFFIC PATROL VISIBILITY / OBSERVATIONS

A. The most effective deterrent to traffic law violations is visible patrol in a marked vehicle. Traffic law enforcement activities should be directed toward education and prevention rather than apprehension.

B.Officers shall drive patrol vehicles in accordance with existing laws and in such a manner as to demonstrate exemplary driving behavior.

C. In those areas where stationary observation is necessary to maximize the effectiveness of a selective enforcement effort, officers shall park in such a manner that traffic flow is not impeded.

D. Unmarked vehicles will not normally be used for traffic enforcement activities. Any use of unmarked vehicles for traffic enforcement requires supervisory approval. Unmarked vehicles may be used for routine patrol in the same manner as marked cars if special enforcement needs exist. Officers are discouraged from enforcing minor traffic violations while in unmarked vehicles. Unmarked vehicles must be equipped with emergency lights and siren.

VIII.

SPEED ENFORCEMENT/RADAR

A.The use of speed measuring devices can be an effective means of reducing speed related traffic violations. Supervisors may assign the use of radar equipment and determine the location for enforcement.

B. Radar will be assigned to high or potentially high crash locations where speed is a factor; where speed violations are prevalent; in school zones; in response to citizen complaints; and, when conducting traffic volume and speed studies.

C.Department radar equipment shall be manufactured to meet National Highway Traffic Safety Administration specifications.

D.Officer's operating radar equipment will:

1.inspect the radar unit for visible damage;

2.check the unit's internal calibration according to manufacturers guidelines;

3.check the unit's L.E.D. diodes for proper function; and

4.by use of the tuning fork, check the unit for accuracy.

E. Officers using radar equipment are responsible for reporting to their supervisor any malfunctions, problems, or damage to the radar equipment and will forward all requests for service or repairs through their supervisor to the Patrol Division Commander.

 F. Department radar units will be inspected and certified bi-annually by the Patrol Division
Commander. If a unit has been damaged or malfunctions it will be repaired and re-certified. The Patrol Division Commander will be responsible for maintaining records of all repairs and certification reports.

G.The Department will maintain a training program for patrol officers in radar operations.

IX.

REPORTING INCOMPETENT DRIVERS

A. Routine enforcement, crash reporting and investigation activities frequently lead to the discovery of drivers who have a physical or mental condition which might prevent the person from operating a motor vehicle in a safe and reasonable manner.

B. Officers detecting a person who appears to be incompetent, physically or mentally disabled, or suffers from disease or other conditions that prevent him from exercising reasonable and ordinary care over a motor vehicle, will request a reexamination by the Secretary of State.

C. When requesting a reexamination the officer must be specific and relate the circumstances that provide the basis for the request by completing and submitting to the Secretary of State the Driver Condition or Behavior Report - Re-examination Request.

X.PEDESTRIAN AND BICYCLE ENFORCEMENT

A. Officers will take appropriate enforcement action when and where pedestrian and bicycle violations are observed.

B. The enforcement of traffic laws pertaining to pedestrians and bicyclists requires broad discretion from individual officers. To provide guidance in this discretion the following procedures are established:

XI.

PARKING ENFORCEMENT

A. All existing parking regulations will be enforced with reasonableness and impartiality in all areas of the City.

B. Street parking is restricted in various areas to ensure fair access to parking and to expedite
the flow of traffic during peak hours.

C.Special restrictions apply to weather emergencies and the type of vehicle class.

D. Officers shall enforce parking violations with discretion, taking into account the seriousness of the violation.

E.Special attention should be given to the following areas:


1.handicapped parking violations;

2.fire hydrant parking violations;

3.business areas during peak hours;

4.primary snow route violations; and fire lanes.

F. When vehicles are parked in such a manner as to require their immediate removal, officers shall attempt to locate the owner. If unsuccessful, the vehicle shall be towed according to Department procedures.

G. Permission may be granted to illegally park certain vehicles in some situations. The Patrol Division commander or the Chief of Police must approve all major requests for illegal parking in these special circumstances. The watch commander can approve minor deviations from parking enforcement.

H. Parking regulations may be enforced in private parking areas, provided there has been a contractual agreement as provided by ordinance in accordance with the Vehicle Code.

XII. OFF-ROAD VEHICLE ENFORCEMENT

A. Officers shall be alert to off-road vehicles (snowmobiles, dirt bikes, mini-bikes) which are being used in the City illegally, particularly when their use results in citizen complaints of excessive noise, trespassing and property damage.

B. Officers shall take appropriate action for violations committed by operators of off-road vehicles.

C. Officers shall enforce all applicable laws pertaining to the operation and registration of offroad vehicles.

D.Special attention should be made to the following:

1.removal of unlicensed vehicles from streets and highways;

2.violations of off-road vehicle registration laws;

3.misuse of public and private property;

4.citizen complaints of noise, trespass and property damage; and

5.juvenile offenders.

Procedure #4.616

GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title:ROADBLOCKSANDProcedure:4.616 ROADSIDE SAFETY CHECKS DateIssued: Revised:

I.PURPOSE A. To establish guidelines on the use of roadblocks in emergency situations. II.POLICY A. The Police Department may use roadblocks for checking drivers and their vehicles, controlling traffic for public ceremonies and parades, and detouring traffic from accident or disaster scenes. Roadblocks are sometimes necessary to apprehend persons fleeing from the scene of a serious crime or attempting to evade arrest. The Police Department will use emergency roadblocks as a last resort to apprehend dangerous criminals, and only when the proper conditions have been satisfied to ensure the safety of the officers and public affected. III.DEFINITION A. A roadblock is defined as a restriction or obstruction used or intended for the purpose of preventing free passage of motor vehicles on a roadway in order to effect the apprehension of a suspect.
IV.EMERGENCYROADBLOCKS

A. Roadblocks are authorized only with the expressed approval of a supervisor. B. The decision to place a roadblock will be made considering several factors. These include, but are not limited to: 1. number of officers available; 2. seriousness of the crime; 3. sufficient information available on subjects and vehicle; 4. elapsed time of the criminal act;

danger to the officer and public; and 5. that a roadblock constitutes a use of force. C. When the need for a roadblock arises, a supervisor will evaluate the available information and determine whether a roadblock is warranted and can safely be implemented. D. A supervisor must authorize, plan, implement and directly supervise roadblock operations. E. Roadblock locations shall be chosen so that the safety of officers will be maximized. There must be a clear view of the roadblock so vehicles will be able to stop. Roadblocks will be avoided on curves, hills or where the approaching vehicles are unable to clearly see that a roadblock is present. F. Officers will not remain inside a vehicle used for blocking the roadway. G. Adequate warning to approaching vehicles is a necessity, unless the only vehicle reasonably expected as the first to approach the roadblock is that of an offender against whom deadly force is authorized, and there is insufficient time to warn the offender prior to his arrival. H. If the suspect vehicle is being pursued by the police a warning must be provided to pursuing vehicles of the roadblock and the positions of officers manning the roadblock. I. The following blocking techniques will be utilized: 1. GENERAL a. The general position of the parked patrol vehicle is at a 45-degree angle to the traffic flow. This is useful when conditions do not permit bringing vehicles to a complete stop and allows the officer to check the passing vehicles because of their slowed speed. No person will be allowed to remain in a vehicle used to block the roadway. 2. TWO-LANE ROADWAYS a. On a two-lane road, to stop traffic traveling in only one direction, the vehicle will be parked at a 45-degree angle to the flow of traffic, partially on the roadway, blocking the lane used by the traffic to be stopped. The normal speed, stopping distance, and element of surprise will be considered when placing warning signs for the roadblock. In darkness the signs will be illuminated. b. A stop sign should be placed at the roadblock point. At night red lights or flares may also be necessary. There should be sufficient illumination from a light source so the police officer will be readily recognizable to the traffic. Once a vehicle has stopped, it should be approached in the manner normally used when approaching a violator's vehicle.

c. While the first officer is checking the vehicle, a second officer should take a position allowing him to cover the entire area. If a third officer is available, he should take a position of natural cover out of the firing line of the other officers. d. Light traffic may be stopped in both directions using this blocking system. Heavy traffic will require this blocking procedure on both sides of the road. The blocks should be close enough to one another to be within sight and to provide assistance as necessary.

3. MULTI-LANE ROADWAYS a. The blockade of one side of the multi-lane roadway is basically the same as that for the two-lane roadway. Additional warning signs will be necessary and if traffic speeds are high, placement must be further ahead. Flares and signs should be used to funnel traffic down to one or two lanes. J. Only marked police vehicles will be used in roadblocks. Privately owned vehicles will not be used to set up a roadblock. K. Moving roadblocks will not be used without watch commander approval. L. Safety of the officers and all civilians will be the primary concern in utilizing the roadblock. M. Supervisor's will fully inform officers manning the roadblock about the nature and seriousness of the crime, the description of the vehicle and the wanted person, a description of any weapons involved, and if possible any previous record of the suspect. N. Officers manning a roadblock will be in full uniform including the traffic safety vest. O. Roadblocks will be well lighted by means of emergency lights, spotlights, fusees, and other available lighting equipment. Special care must be taken to not blind drivers of vehicles as they approach the roadblock. P. The emergency roadblock will be conducted in conjunction with the authority granted by statute and case law, and the enforcement of state and local laws will be exercised in good faith.
V.NON-EMERGENCYROADBLOCKS

A. Roadblocks for parades, public ceremonies, the random checking of drivers, or other nonemergency situation requires prior approval from the Chief of Police or his designee. B. Supervisors will submit a plan detailing the time, location, equipment, blocking technique, purpose, and manpower required for establishing the roadblock. C. Non-emergency roadblocks will be implemented and supervised by a supervisor.

D. Procedures used for non-emergency roadblocks will follow those applicable guidelines for emergency roadblocks. E. Supervisors will submit to the Chief of Police the results, and detail any incidents that occur during roadblock operations other than for parades or public ceremonies. F. The non-emergency roadblock will be conducted in conjunction with the authority granted by statute and case law, and the enforcement of state and local laws will be exercised in good faith. VI.ROADSIDESAFETYCHECKS
A. AUTHORITY AND TACTICS

1. The roadside safety check will be conducted in conjunction with the authority granted by statute and case law, and the enforcement of state and local laws will be exercised in good faith. 2. Any tactic used by police officers in a roadside safety check will be in accordance with the following considerations and priorities: a. Enhancement of officer and motorist safety. b. Avoidance of undue inconvenience to the public. c. The deterrent effect created by the roadside safety check.

B.DETAILREQUIREMENTS
1. The Chief of Police or his designee will assign a supervisor to serve as the Checkpoint Commander who will conduct a pre-detail briefing immediately prior to the setup and activation of a checkpoint. 2. The checkpoint site selection will fulfill the following minimum requirements: a. Sufficient visibility to oncoming motorists to ensure officer and motorist safety. b. Ample space for police and subject vehicles in screening area. c. Reduced opportunity for motorists to avoid or escape from the checkpoint. d. Sufficient advance warning devices will be in place before activation of the checkpoint to ensure officer and motorist safety.

e. Uniformed officers and marked police vehicles will be in sufficient quantity and visibility to clearly indicate the presence of legal authority.

C.CHECKPOINTPROCEDURES
1. The checkpoint commander will be responsible for: a. establishing target violations; b. deploying personnel; c. obtaining necessary equipment; and, d. preparing an activity summary and submitting it to the Patrol Division Commander. 2. The selection sequence of vehicles to be stopped will be uniformly applied as prescribed. This sequence may only be altered by the checkpoint commander who will document the reason for the alteration. 3. Assigned officers will not have the authority to change the operational plan. Officer discretion will only be applied as designated by the checkpoint commander. 4. The checkpoint commander will be present on scene to guide operations. Should it become necessary to leave the scene, an acting supervisor will be appointed. 5. The checking process must be thorough while causing a minimal delay to motorists. So long as the available mobile data terminals are functioning properly, driver's licenses and registration will be routinely checked for validity. 6. Officers will be particularly vigilant for any signs of motorist impairment. If an officer detects a violation or acquires probable cause to believe an offense has been committed, appropriate enforcement action will be taken. 7. The courteous treatment of motorists by officers will be a high priority.
D. ADDITIONAL CONSIDERATIONS

1. Roadway traffic will be closely monitored to avoid excessive congestion. 2. Any police agency that assists in the checkpoint operation will be expected to abide by this procedure. 3. Roadside safety checks should be highly publicized to enhance the general deterrent effect of such activities.

3 Procedure #4.700 GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title: 4.700

INSPECTIONS

Procedure:

Date Issued:

Revised:

I.PURPOSE

A.To establish a Department Inspection program.

B. To promote standards of excellence throughout the Department and to foster the highest level of performance.

C.To ensure compliance with Department requirements in such areas as personal appearance, use and maintenance of equipment, and adherence to rules of conduct, policies and procedures.

II.POLICY

A. The Chief of Police has a responsibility to ensure that the resources of the Department are being used effectively, and that all personnel are following established rules and regulations. To meet this responsibility the Department shall have a continual inspection program.

III.DEFINITIONS

A. INSPECTION: A procedure that involves observing, inquiring, evaluating, and reporting on organizational matters.

B. LINE INSPECTION: The inspection of personnel, vehicles, equipment and facilities by a supervisor who would normally have control or responsibility over the element inspected. Line inspections can be both announced or unannounced.

C. SPECIAL INSPECTIONS: The inspection of any administrative or operational element of the Department specifically identified by the Chief of Police. Special inspections can be announced or unannounced.


D. FOLLOW-UP INSPECTION: The inspection of a previously inspected element, which required attention or corrective action, to ensure the matter has been resolved or corrected.

IV.PROCEDURE A.LINE INSPECTIONS

1. It is the responsibility of every supervisor to conduct formal line inspections of the personnel and equipment under his control.

2. Formal line inspections will be conducted semi-annually, normally during periods in May and October in conjunction with the uniform changeover. Ten (10) days notice shall be given before announced line inspections.

3.Formal line inspections will include:

a.Personnel (uniforms, appearance, etc.);

b.Equipment (procedure manual);

c.Facilities;

d.Vehicles;

e.Department Property;

f.Activities; and

g.Lockers. 4. The supervisor shall complete an inspection report on every line inspection conducted and ensure that all on duty personnel under his command participate.

5. Supervisor's shall take immediate steps to correct problems or deficiencies discovered during the line inspection.

6. When needed corrective action falls outside the inspecting supervisor's scope of authority, he will indicate this on his inspection report to the respective Division Commander.

7. The respective Division Commander shall order a follow-up inspection for deficiencies to be corrected.

8. Supervisor's are responsible for conducting informal line inspections of personnel to ensure proper appearance and that all equipment is serviceable and ready for duty. If substandard appearance is observed, the supervisor will take necessary corrective action.

9.The supervisor's concern during an informal line inspection should include:

a.uniforms

b.weapons and ammunition

c.equipment

d.vehicles

e.body armor

f.lockers

10. Informal inspections conducted by supervisory personnel during routine operations are to ensure that Department policies and procedures are observed, and that subordinates are performing their duties efficiently. These inspections are conducted in the following manner:

a.physical observations of personnel, equipment, facilities, etc.;

b.immediate examination of the handling of specific actions at the scene;

c.through subsequent review of specific actions, reports, etc.; and,

d.by regular review of overall results being achieved, such as performance levels.

11. Unannounced line inspections will involve on duty personnel, vehicles, equipment and
facilities. Unannounced line inspections shall be conducted by the supervisor who would normally have control over the element inspected, or as directed by the Chief of Police or Division Commander.

B.VEHICLE INSPECTION

1.Officers shall inspect their vehicle at the beginning and end of each shift.

2. Officers shall pay particular attention to the personal protective equipment, keys, shotgun, radar unit, fire extinguisher, and spare tire stored in the vehicle.

3. Officers shall, before use, examine their assigned vehicle and report unrecorded damage or operational defects to their supervisor, and complete any necessary reports. Failure to report damage or defect will create the assumption that no inspection was made.

4. Damage or defect discovered after the vehicle has been placed into service shall normally be construed to have occurred during the tour of duty of the officer.

5. Defects found by officers during daily inspections, or any time during their shift, will be reported to their supervisor.

6.It is the responsibility of each supervisor to see that a Squad Maintenance Request form is completed in order to service our fleet in a timely manner.

7. If the vehicle to be repaired must be towed in for service the officer initiating the maintenance request will have the vehicle towed and indicate on the Squad Maintenance Request that the vehicle was towed for service.

C.FACILITY AND EQUIPMENT

1. Supervisors are responsible for the ongoing inspection of the general condition and cleanliness of the department's facilities and equipment, and for reporting problems to the Service Division Commander.

2.Division Commanders shall, semi-annually, conduct an inspection of that part of the facility, equipment and supplies under his control. A report on the inspection will be forwarded to the Chief of Police, normally, during May and October. Hazardous conditions will be noted in the report.

3. The Service Division Officer will be responsible for a continuous inspection of the police facility for cleanliness, proper working condition of equipment and sufficient quantities of reports, forms and supplies. Deficiencies and hazardous conditions will be corrected.

4. Supervisors are responsible for the ongoing inspection of the general conditions, sanitation, cleanliness and security of the lock-up facility. Serious problems will be immediately documented and brought to the attention of the Administrative Services Commander.

5. Formal inspections of the lock-up facility are covered under the Department procedure Prisoner Detention and Holding Facility #5.100.

D.UNIFORMS AND EQUIPMENT

1.Uniforms and equipment will be inspected daily.

2.All items to be inspected must be presented in a clean condition.

3. Uniforms or equipment damaged in the line of duty will be brought to the attention of the employee's supervisor.

4. Damaged, lost or stolen uniforms or equipment will be immediately reported, in writing to the employee's supervisor.

E.

LOCKER/MAILBOX

INSPECTION

1. Periodic inspections of Department provided employee lockers/mailboxes will be conducted to check for official reports, tickets, evidence, contraband or other property not intended for storage in an employees locker/mailbox.

2.Formal inspections will be conducted during the May and October uniform inspections.

3.Lockers are to be kept locked with Department locks.

F.SPECIAL INSPECTION

1. The Chief of Police may, at any time, request a special inspection of any administrative or operational element of the Department. Personnel assigned to conduct a special inspection shall report directly to the Chief of Police with their findings.

5 Procedure 4.701 GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title:

INTERNAL AFFAIRS Procedure: 4.701

Date Issued:

Revised:

I.PURPOSE

A. To provide guidelines and procedures for prompt investigation and just disposition of complaints against Police Department personnel.

B. To establish an internal affairs component and define the basic functions necessary to ensure the integrity of the Department.

II.POLICY

A. It is the policy of the Police Department to investigate all complaints against Department personnel, regardless of the source of such complaints. Investigation of these complaints through standardized procedures will demonstrate the Department's desire to provide honest, efficient police service and will inspire public confidence in its personnel. A regulated program of complaint review will also ensure the fair and impartial treatment of all Department personnel who become subject to the internal affairs procedure.

III.DEFINITION

A. A citizen complaint is defined as that action taken by a citizen to bring to the attention of the Department any police action or inaction that the citizen considers to be contrary to the law, proper procedure, good order, or in some other manner prejudicial to the citizen, the Department, or to the community as a whole.

IV.PROCEDURE

A. AUTHORITY AND RESPONSIBILITY

1. The Patrol Division Commander is responsible for the Internal Affairs function with the authority to report directly to the Chief of Police or his designate.

2. The internal affairs function is established to provide a regulated process of complaint review and to:

a.establish an investigative process; b.ensure fair and impartial treatment of accused members; c.maintain justice; d.adhere to legal statutes; and e.maintain the integrity of the Department. 3.Activities of the internal affairs function include, but are not limited to: a. recording, registering, and controlling the investigation of complaints against Department
personnel;

b. supervising and controlling the investigation of alleged or suspected misconduct within the Department; and

c.maintaining the confidentiality of the internal affairs investigation and records.

4. While the internal affairs function is the responsibility of the Patrol Division Commander,
a first line supervisor will not look to a higher authority to initiate an investigation when the complaint is within the scope of his own authority and responsibility, except when complex investigations deem such assistance necessary.

5. Each supervisor will assume the duties and obligations of his position or rank during the investigation of a complaint against a member of this Department.

6. The type and nature of a complaint will determine whether it can be handled and resolved at the line supervisor level or referred to the Chief of Police for assignment.

7. Not all complaints can be automatically categorized. Supervisors are required to exercise good judgment and common sense when they are made aware of a complaint. The following types of complaints are examples of those which are categorized as formal and informal. Both forms of complaints require documentation and automatic referral to the Chief of Police. The Chief of Police will, after reviewing the entire incident, determine the category and delegate for investigation to the Patrol Division Commander.

a. FORMAL (Normally investigated by Internal Affairs Function)

(1)brutality; (2)misuse/abuse of force;

 (3)breach of civil rights; and (4)criminal misconduct.

b. INFORMAL (Normally investigated by the immediate supervisor)

(1) poor demeanor displayed by employee; and

(2) improper action or failure to take action.

8. A supervisor may, for a period not to exceed the member's regular or remaining shift, temporarily relieve from duty, a member because the member is unfit for duty. (Unfit for duty may include: any physical or mental condition which might, in the judgment of the supervisor, render the member incapable of adequately performing duties, or performing in such a way as to embarrass or discredit the Department, or jeopardize the safety of any person or property, or misconduct.)

9. Supervisors will conduct a preliminary investigation whenever receiving a complaint from a citizen concerning misconduct by a member of the Department. Results of the preliminary investigation will be sent directly to the Chief of Police. The report will outline the allegations, identify principals and witnesses, and provide information developed during the preliminary investigation.

10. When an employee is notified he has become the subject of an internal affairs investigation, the person in charge of the investigation will issue the employee a written statement of the allegations and the employee's rights and responsibilities relative to the investigation.

11. Any matter that arises under the Uniform Peace Officers Disciplinary Act will be processed according to the Department's Rules of Conduct, policies and procedures.

12. The Chief of Police will maintain a record of all complaints against the Department or its members. The complaints, records and results of the investigation will be maintained in a secure area to protect the confidentiality of all documents associated with the investigation.

13. Information on registering complaints with the Department will be made available to the public. Procedures for filing a complaint against the Department or a member are available through the Office of the Chief of Police or the Patrol Division Commander.

B.

COMPLAINT PROCESSING

1. All complaints made against the Department or its members will be investigated, including anonymous complaints. In person complaints will, in all possible cases, be taken by the on duty supervisor. Complaints may be made in several ways:

a.in person by the citizen, directly to a police department supervisor;

b.by telephone;

c.through a third person; and

d.by referral from some official or unofficial agency.

2. When a citizen requests to file a complaint in person the supervisor on duty will do the following:

a. Discuss the incident with the citizen. If after discussing the incident with the supervisor,
the citizen still desires to file a complaint, a Citizen Complaint Form will be provided.

b. Provide the complainant with a Citizen Complaint Form and request the citizen to complete the form in his handwriting and sign the form. The citizen will also be advised that the Uniformed Police Officer Disciplinary Act (50 ILCS 725/3.8) requires that the person making the formal complaint against an officer must have the Complaint Form notarized, and the notarized Complaint Form must be supported by a sworn affidavit. Once this is done, the notarized Complaint Form and affidavit will be forwarded to the Chief of Police or his designate.

c. The supervisor accepting the complaint will make any relevant comments on the back of the original form regarding the complainants physical and mental condition. Evidence indicating that the complainant is under the influence of an intoxicant or drug, is suffering from a mental disorder, or any evidence of traits or conditions bearing upon his credibility should be noted. The supervisor should also note the complainant's physical condition, specifically any visible marks or injuries on the complaint. When appropriate, and if possible, the supervisor will conduct a preliminary investigation.

d. The original copy of the complaint will be placed in a sealed envelope and forwarded to the Chief of Police before the supervisor ends his tour of duty.

3.Citizen complaints received by telephone will be handled in one of the following manners:

a. A Department member accepting a complaint by telephone will enter, on a Citizen Complaint form, all pertinent information and attempt to obtain the facts necessary and appropriate to complete the report. The words "Telephone Complaint" will be entered in the complainant's signature box.

b. It is essential that the complainant's name, address and phone number be included in the report. If the complainant insists on remaining anonymous, he should be advised that this may hamper a complete and thorough investigation.

c.The member completing the form will sign the form and place it in a sealed envelope and forward it to the Chief of Police.

C.

COMPLAINT ASSIGNMENT AND INVESTIGATIONS

1. The Chief of Police will assign a control number to the complaint and assign the Patrol Division Commander, or another member of the Department if more appropriate, to follow up and investigate the complaint.

2.Any member of the Department assigned to investigate a complaint will conduct a thorough and impartial investigation. Such investigation will include the taking of written statements, when deemed necessary, from all involved persons, the gathering and preservation of evidence, and the recording of all information pertinent to the investigation.

3. When conducting an internal affairs investigation concerning possible violations of criminal law, the investigating member will contact the Prosecutors Office to seek legal advice as well as assistance in case preparation. If necessary, a liaison will be established with the Special Prosecutions Division of the Prosecutors Office.

4.The member assigned to the investigation will keep the complainant informed of the status of the investigation, within certain limits. The complainant should be informed of the investigative process and time table involved. All statements regarding guilt or innocence are to be addressed by the Chief of Police. The investigating member should not offer an opinion concerning the outcome of the investigation to the complainant.

5. Personnel assigned to investigate complaints will complete their investigation within thirty (30) days of the assignment date with status reports to the Chief of Police every seven (7) days. Extensions may be granted by the Chief of Police to the thirty (30) day limit, but only in those cases involving extenuating circumstances.

6. The investigating member will only report the results of his investigation and findings to the Chief of Police. The Chief of Police may authorize the Patrol Division Commander to advise the officers supervisor of the findings. All investigations will be concluded with a recommendation by the investigating member. Complaints and disciplinary investigations can result in any of the following types of closures:

SUSTAINED: Allegation is supported by sufficient evicence

PARTIALLY SUSTAINED: Sufficient evidence exists to support part of the allegations made in the complaint.

NOT SUSTAINED: Insufficient evidence to prove or disprove the allegations.

EXONERATED: Incident did occur but the actions taken were lawful and proper.

PROPER CONDUCT: The action of the department or the officer was consistent with agency policy and applicable law.

POLICY FAILURE: Although the action of the agency or the officer was consistent with agency policy, the complainant was wronged.

UNFOUNDED: Allegation is not factual; did not happen.

SUSTAINED OTHER: Sustaining of violation or misconduct other than the allegations of the original complaint.

7. An employee under investigation cannot be compelled to submit to a polygraph, voice

stress analysis, or any other instrument designed to detect deception. However, an employee under investigation may voluntarily submit to such an examination after being made aware that such actions are strictly voluntary and refusal to submit does not imply any guilt or admission of the violation.

8. Any member or employee who is the subject of an internal affairs investigation may be required to provide or submit to any or all of the following, if materially related to the investigation:

a.Medical or psychiatric examinations;


b.Lineups;

c.Chemical tests;

d.Photographs;

e.Respond completely and truthfully to all questions; and

f.Search of Department property including lockers.

9. All records pertaining to internal affairs investigations will be kept in a secure area by the individual conducting the investigation.

Procedure #4.702

GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title:LINE OF DUTY DEATHProcedure:4.702 DateIssued: Revised:

I.PURPOSE A. The purpose of this procedure is to direct the Police Department to provide proper support and emotional care for a deceased officers family following a line-of-duty death. II.POLICY A. It shall be the responsibility of the Police Department to provide liaison assistance to the immediate survivors of an officer who dies in the line-of-duty, whether feloniously or accidentally, while an active member of the department, to include the clarification and comprehensive study of survivor benefits, and to provide tangible and intangible emotional support during this traumatic period of readjustment for the surviving family. It should be remembered that the funeral arrangements are to be decided by the FAMILY, with their wishes taking precedence over the Departments. B. Coordination of events following the line-of-duty death of a police officer is an extremely important and complex responsibility. Professionalism and compassion must be exhibited at all times as an obligation to the officers survivors and to the law enforcement community. To provide the best possible services and support for the officers family, specific tasks may be assigned by the Chief of Police to selected members of the Department. The titles of these selected members are: Notification Officer, Hospital Liaison Officer, Family Liaison Officer, Department Liaison Officer, and Benefits Coordinator. III.DEFINITIONS A. LINE-OF-DUTY-DEATH: Any action, felonious or accidental, which claims the life of a Police officer who was performing work related functions either while on or off duty.

SURVIVORS:Immediatefamilymembersofthedeceased officer:spouse,children, parents, siblings, fianc, and/or significant others.

BENEFICIARY: Those designated by the officer as recipients of specific death benefits.

BENEFITS:Financialpaymentsmadetothefamilyto ensurefinancialstabilityfollowingthelossofa loved one. OFFICER:AswornmemberofthePoliceDepartment.

IV.PROCEDURE A. NOTIFICATION

1. The name of the deceased or injured officer mustnever be released to the media before immediate survivors living in the area are notified. 2. The Chief of Police will be notified, through the chain of command, immediately whenever a member of the Department suffers serious injury or death. 3. The Chief of Police or his designee will consult the officers ConfidentialLine-of-DutyDeathInformation Sheet to determine if the officer had specified certain individual(s) to accompany the member making notification. 4. If there is knowledge of a medical problem with an immediate survivor, medical personnel should be available at the residence to coincide with the notification. 5. The officer designated to make notification shall be titled the Notification Officer. The Chief of Police or the Notification Officer and any individuals previously selected by the officer shall make notification in person. Notification will always be made in person and never alone. 6. Keep in mind, however, that if the aforementioned persons are not readily available, notification should not be delayed until these people can gather. The on-duty watch commander shall be responsible for making notification. If the opportunity to get the family to the hospital before the demise of the officer presents itself, DONTwait for the appropriate delegation to gather. 7. Most Police Officers families will know something is wrong when they see you. Ask to be admitted to the house. NEVER make a notification on the doorstep. Inform family members slowly and clearly of the information available. Make sure the officers name is used during the notification. 8. If the officer has already died, relay that information. NEVER give the family a false sense of hope. Use words like died and dead rather than gone away or passed away. NOTE:Reactionsofthefamilymayincludehysteria,anger,fainting,physicalviolence,shock,etc. 9. If the family wants to go to the hospital, they should be transported by department vehicle. It is highly recommended that the familyNOT drive themselves to the hospital. Should there be serious resistance and the family insists on driving, have an officer accompany them in the car. 10. If young children are at home and the survivors wish to leave them at home, the Notification Officer should arrange baby-sitting needs. This may involve obtaining the assistance of co-workers families, transportation of the children to a relatives home or other arrangements. 11. Prior to departing for the hospital, the Notification Officer should notify hospital staff and the Hospital Liaison Officer that a member(s) of the family is en route. 12. The deceased or severely injured officers parents should be afforded the courtesy of a personal notification if possible. 13. If immediate survivors live outside the area, the Notification Officer will direct the police dispatcher to send a teletype message to the agency in that area and request that personal notification be made.

14. The Chief of Police or a high-ranking member of the Department should respond to the hospital or home to meet with the family, as soon as possible. 15. If there is an on-duty death, the external monitoring of police frequencies may be extensive. Communications regarding notifications should be restricted to the telephone whenever possible. If the media has somehow obtained the officers name, they should be advised to withhold the information, pending notification of next of kin. B. ASSISTANCE FOR AFFECTED OFFICERS

1. Officers who were on the scene or who arrived moments after an officer was seriously injured or killed should be relieved as quickly as possible.

2. Police witnesses and other personnel who may have been emotionally affected by the serious injury or death of another officer shall be required to contact a Department designated specialist for counseling and evaluation.
C.ASSISTINGTHEFAMILYATTHEHOSPITAL

1. The first officer, other than the Chief of Police or his representative, to arrive at the hospital becomes the Hospital Liaison Officer. This officer will remain the Hospital Liaison Officer until relieved or reassigned by the Chief of Police or his representative. The Hospital Liaison Officer is responsible for coordinating the activities of hospital personnel, the officers family, police officers, the media and others. These responsibilities include:

a. Arrange with hospital personnel to provide an appropriate waiting facility for the family, the Chief of Police or his representative, the Notification Officer, and only those others requested by the immediate survivors.
b. Arrange a separate area for fellow officers and friends to assemble. c. Ensure that medical personnel relay pertinent information regarding the officers condition to the family on a timely basis and before such information is released to others. These medical personnel should make the family aware of hospital policy about visitation with the injured officer and/or visitation with the body following the demise, and explain why an autopsy is needed. d. Arrange transportation for the family back to their home. 2. If it is possible for the family to visit the officer before death, they most certainly should be afforded the opportunity. Too often, public safety officials discourage and sometimes bar the family from visiting with the injured/deceased officer. ITISTHEFAMILYSRIGHT to visit their loved one. The Hospital Liaison Officer should prepare the family for what they might see in the emergency room and accompany the family into the room if they so request. 3. Arrangements should be made for all medical bills relating to the services rendered to the deceased officer to be sent to the Department for payment. The family should NOTreceive any of these bills at their home address. 4. Do not be overly protective of the family. D. SUPPORT FOR THE FAMILY DURING THE WAKE AND FUNERAL

1. The Chief of Police or his designee will meet with the officers family to determine their wishes regarding Departmental participation in the preparation of the funeral or services. All possible assistance will be rendered. 2. With the approval of the family, the Chief of Police will assign a Family Liaison Officer and a Benefits Coordinator. 3. The selection of a Family Liaison Officer is a critical assignment. An attempt should be made to select someone who enjoyed a close relationship with the family and the deceased officer. The officer should not be so emotionally involved that he/she would become ineffective. The Family Liaison Officer must know that THIS ISNOTADECISION-MAKINGPOSITION.THISISAROLEOFFACILITATORBETWEENTHE FAMILYANDTHEPOLICEDEPARTMENT. The liaison officer will: a. Ensure that theNEEDSOFTHEFAMILY come before the wishes of the Department. b. Meet with the family and explain what his/her responsibilities will be during this time.

c. Assist the family with funeral arrangements and make them aware of what the Department can offer if they decide to have an honors funeral. If they choose to have an honors funeral, brief them on the procedure.
d. Be issued a pager and cellular telephone immediately so there is an immediate line of communication with the Department and family. e. Apprise the family of information concerning the death and the continuing investigation. f. Provide as much assistance as possible, including overseeing travel and lodging arrangements for out of town family members, arranging for food for the family, meeting child care and transportation needs, etc. g. See that the surviving parents are afforded recognition and will have proper placement arranged for them during the funeral and funeral procession. h. Notify Concerns of Police Survivors (C.O.P.S.). Members are available to provide emotional support to surviving families. i. Be constantlyavailable to the family. 4. The Assistant Chief of Police will assume the role of Department Liaison Officer. He will: a. Work closely with the Family Liaison Officer to ensure that the needs of the family are fulfilled. b. Handle the news media throughout the ordeal. If the family decides to accept an interview, the officer should attend to screen questions presented to the family so as not to jeopardize subsequent legal proceedings. c. Ensure that the home is prepared for the influx of visitors and that ample food is available. Baby-sitting needs for all family members should be met. Have someone screen telephone calls and make sure someone is always at the home. d. Make the family aware of alternative churches with seating capacities large enough to accommodate attendance at the funeral. However, any alternative churches will need to know that the family minister will officiate at the service. REMEMBER, THE DEPARTMENT SHOULD ONLY MAKE THE FAMILY

AWAREOFTHEALTERNATIVES.ITISTHEFAMILYSCHOICE. e. If the family desires a burial in uniform, select an officer to obtain a uniform and all accouterments (except weapon) and deliver them to the funeral home.

f. Arrange for the delivery of the officers personal belongings to the family.
g. Assign an officer to remain at the family home during the wake and funeral.

h. Arrange for routine residence checks of the survivors home for 6-8 weeks following the funeral. This is necessary since the survivors will be spending much time away from the home dealing with legal matters.
i. The family should have access to other survivors or support groups. Members of Concerns of Police Survivors (C.O.P.S.) make themselves available to meet with the family. E. PROVIDING INFORMATION AND ASSISTANCE ON BENEFITS

1. The Chief of Police will appoint an officer to assume the role of Benefits Coordinator. This officer should be knowledgeable as to Federal, State and other benefits available to the family of a Police Officer killed in the Line-of-Duty. This officer shall be responsible for: a. Gathering information on all benefits available to the officers family.
b. The Benefits Coordinator should be responsible for filing all appropriate forms and paperwork and following through with the family to ensure that these benefits are being received. 2. The Benefits Coordinator should visit with the family within a few days following the funeral to discuss the benefits available to them. A written list of the benefits available to the family, listing named beneficiaries, contacts at various benefits offices, and when they can expect to receive the benefit should be given to the family. The Benefits Coordinator should visit the family again within a month following the death since the initial contact is clouded by the familys emotional numbness during that first benefits meeting. The officer will periodically check with the family to make sure they are receiving or have received the benefits to which they are entitled.

a. If there are surviving children from a former marriage, the guardian of those children should also receive a list of benefits available to the children.
b. Special attention should be given to the problems with possible revocation of health benefits to the surviving family. The majority of health benefit providers allow a 30 day grace period before canceling or imposing monthly payments upon survivors. 3. The Office of the Chief of Police will maintain a file containing the officers Confidential Line-of-Duty DeathInformationSheet and beneficiary forms. The Chief of Police will direct that annually, in January, these forms are reviewed for accuracy. F. CONTINUED SUPPORT FOR THE FAMILY

1. Members of the Department must remain sensitive to the needs of the survivors long after the officers death. Realize that grief is a process and that everyone handles grief differently. The grief process has no timetable and many survivors may experience a complicated grief process. 2. Members of the Department are encouraged to keep in touch with the family. Close friends, co-workers and Department officials should arrange to visit with the family at their home from time to time so long as the family expresses a desire to have these contacts continue. 3. When plaques/memorabilia are given to the surviving spouse, consider making the same available to the surviving parents. They have lost a child that can never be replaced. 4. The Chief of Police should observe the officers date of death with a short note to the family. 5. Holidays may be especially difficult for the family, particularly if small children are involved. Increased contact with the survivors and additional support is important at these times. 6. The Department should maintain support as long as the family feels the need for the support. In time, the family will let you know when they are ready to move on with their lives without assistance from the Department. 7. If criminal violations surround the death, the Family Liaison Officer will: a. Inform the family of all new developments prior to press release; b. Keep the family apprised of legal and parole proceedings;

c. Encourage the family to attend the trial, and accompany them whenever possible; and
d. Arrange for the investigators to meet with the family at the earliest opportunity following the trial to answer all their questions.

Procedure #4.703

GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title:HONORS FUNERAL PROTOCOLProcedure:4.703 Dateissued: Revised:

I.PURPOSE A. To establish guidelines and procedures for conducting an honors funeral for a deceased member of the Department. II.POLICY

A. An honors funeral involves participation of the Police Department in honoring the officers service to the City. It is the policy of the Department to conduct and participate in an honors funeral if so requested by the deceased officers family. This request may be granted regardless of whether the officer at the time of death was an active sworn or pensioned member.
III.PROCEDURE A. REQUEST FOR AN HONORS FUNERAL

1. Upon the death of an active sworn or pensioned member:

a. The Patrol Division Commander shall consult the deceased officers Confidential Line of Duty Death Information Sheet to determine if the officer had specified if an honors funeral was desired.
b. The Patrol Division Commander or his designee will consult the officers family concerning an honors funeral. The procedure and Department participation will be explained to the family. c. Upon the familys request for an honors funeral, the Patrol Division Commander or his designee and the Family Liaison Officer will plan the funeral with the family. The Patrol Division Commander or his designee will supervise the Department members who participate. B. GENERAL FUNERAL PROCEDURES

1. All Department members will maintain the highest standard of personal appearance. Uniforms and equipment MUST be in excellent condition. The assigned supervisor will conduct a line inspection of all involved personnel and equipment to ensure that Department standards are met. 2. The uniform for sworn members will be the Department Class A dress uniform.

3. Department members who serve as pallbearers will wear white cotton gloves. 4. A black sash will be worn across the badge. 5. Neighboring jurisdictions will be requested to assist with traffic control for vehicle processions if warranted.

6. The Patrol Division Commander or his designee will direct that a message be sent to neighboring jurisdictions advising of the death of a Department member, visitation and funeral arrangements, and any requests for marked vehicles to be included in the procession.
C. WAKE AND VISITATION

1. Department members who attend the wake as part of the honors detail will report to a pre-designated assembly point away from the place of services for inspection and briefing. 2. Upon entering the building, Department members will remove their uniform hats, place them under their left arm, hat brim forward, and form a single line in preparation for filing past the casket. 3. The assigned supervisor will approach the casket, render a salute to the casket and then exit the funeral parlor. Each officer in line will do the same when it is their turn to approach the casket. If you are in plain clothes or not wearing a hat, you do not salute. D. FUNERAL SERVICES - FUNERAL HOME OR CHURCH

NOTE: The Patrol Division Commander or his designee will give bold commands. 1. Department members who attend the funeral services as part of the honors detail will report to a predesignated assembly point away from the place of services for inspection and briefing.

2. Upon entering the building, Department members will remove their uniform hats, place them under their left arm, hat brim forward, and move in an orderly manner to the place reserved for them.
3. If adequate seating is provided, Department members will remain standing until all members are in their places and the command, BESEATED, is given.

4. Department members will sit with their hats upright in their laps, maintaining a military bearing throughout
the service. 5. At the end of the service, Department members, upon receiving the command, OFFICERS RISE, will rise in unison and place their hats under their left arm, hat brim forward. The Department members will then exit the building in an orderly manner. 6. Upon leaving the building, Department members will replace their hats and assemble in formation.

a. Two equal ranks will be formed facing each other, leaving an aisle through which pallbearers and the casket may pass.
b. They will normally be dressed at extended intervals but may be dressed at closer intervals if space is limited.

c. While waiting in formation, Department members will stand at parade rest. 7. When the casket comes into view, the formation will be called to attention. The next command will be PRESENT ARMS. All Department members will salute and hold the salute until the casket is placed into the hearse. At this time the command READY,FRONT will be given and members will return their hands to their sides. 8. The last command given at the funeral home or church will be, OFFICERSDISMISSED. The Department members will break ranks and leave in a quiet and orderly manner. 9. Department members will then take their assigned places in the motorcade and proceed to the cemetery or church. E. GRAVESIDE SERVICES

NOTE: The Patrol Division Commander or his designee will give bold commands. 1. Upon arrival at the graveside, Department members will form two ranks facing each other at the rear of the hearse, leaving an aisle through which the pallbearers and casket may pass. 2. When the casket is ready to be removed from the hearse, the command PRESENTARMS will be given. All Department members will salute and hold the salute until the casket is at the graveside opening. At the command READY,FRONT, the Department members will return their hands to their sides. At the command OFFICERS DISMISSED, Department members may break ranks in an orderly manner and assume a position to observe the graveside service. 3. If indoors, Department members will remove their hats and hold them under their left arm. All Department members will sit with hats in laps, maintaining a military bearing throughout the services. If services are held outdoors, Department members will wear their hats. 4. If the casket has been draped with an American flag, the funeral home directors will fold the flag and present it to a pre-designated Department member. The Department member will then present the folded flag to the deceased officers spouse or other designated survivor. F. HONOR GUARD DURING VIEWING

1. The Honor Guard is comprised of volunteer officers from the Department. Officers who stand as Honor Guards must present an excellent uniform appearance and conform to Department grooming standards. 2. The dress uniform, including hat and white gloves, will be worn for the Honor Guard. 3. The Honor Guard will consist of two officers standing watch for 30 minutes at a time. The officers will position themselves, standing at attention, at the head and feet of the deceased officer. G. HONORS ACCORDED

1. Any Police Officer who is either an active sworn or pensioned member of the Department may be accorded full honors if requested by his or her survivors.

2. Full honors shall include Honor Guard during viewing, honors detail, pallbearers, flag presentation and motor escort. 3. The Patrol Division Commander or his designee is responsible for coordinating and directing the honors activities. 4. Pallbearers

a. If Department member pallbearers are requested by the family, they will be selected by the assigned supervisor following the familys specific request.
b. Pallbearers will be under the direction of the funeral home directors and will report to the funeral home for instructions and assignments. H. PROCEDURAL VARIATIONS

1. The procedures as outlined shall be followed in most cases. Any changes made necessary by a shortage of personnel, the unusual size of the funeral, the type and location of services, the physical arrangement of the place of service or for any other reason shall be made by the Chief of Police or his designee. 2. Any additional honors to be accorded to deceased members of the Department shall be at the discretion of the Chief of Police.

Procedure #3.200

GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title:INSUFFICENT FUND/CLOSED Procedure:4.800 ACCOUNT/FORGERY DateIssued: Revised:

I.PURPOSE A. To provide guidelines in handling check cases that are classified as insufficient funds, closed account or forgery. II.POLICY A. It is Department policy that we will not work any check cases of less than $50.00 for "InsufficientFunds." If several checks total $50.00 or more, then they will be worked up as one (1) case, providing they are signed by the same maker. We will continue to work "Account Closed" or "Forgery" on any amount. If the check is Insufficient or Account Closed, it must be presented to our Department no later than six (6) months from date of issue. If the check is a case of Forgery, there is no Statute of Limitations, and therefore no time limit on taking reports.

Procedure #3.200

GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title:DAMAGE TO AUTOS

Procedure:4.801

DateIssued: Revised:

1. PURPOSE

A. To provide guidelines for preparing reports involving damage to autos.

2. POLICY

A.Our Department will leave DAMAGE TO AUTO reports on our standard offense report forms with line number in cases concerning the following or like instances: 1. Damage to Autos caused from potholes or other road defects. 2. Reports will also be taken when the complainant may involve City property or City vehicles. B. This policy in no way effects the use of accident report forms concerning traffic accidents or Criminal Damage reports on deliberate criminal acts.

Procedure #3.200

GRANTIE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title:LATE CALLS/OVERTIME Procedure:4.802 DateIssued: Revised:

I.PURPOSE A. To establish proper procedure for handling late calls and avoiding unnecessary overtime. II.POLICY It is the policy of the Police Department to handle all calls in an efficient manner. Due to the changing of shifts, it may become necessary to hold a call from one shift to the next. III.PROCEDURE A. The following rules are to be followed involving overtime: 1. All calls (minor), received within ten (10) minutes until the end of shift are to be held for the oncoming shift. The oncoming shift will handle the late call before the officer goes to Roll Call. All 10-50's, disturbances, crimes in progress, will be taken when they come in. When in doubt, check with the OIC for final decision. 2. The OIC will ensure that only the necessary amount of men work overtime to do any reports, complaints, etc.

Procedure #5.000

GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title:MEDIA RELATIONS ANDProcedure:5.000 PUBLIC INFORMATION DateIssued: Revised:

I. PURPOSE A. To establish guidelines for the release of information to the news media. 1. To provide the news media and public with timely and accurate information regarding Department activities. 2. To ensure that a police investigation is not jeopardized by the premature release of information. II. POLICY A. The Police Department actively seeks to establish a cooperative climate in which the news media may obtain information on matters of public interest in a manner that does not hamper police operations. The Department is committed to informing the community and the news media of events within the public domain. However, certain information must be withheld from the media to protect the constitutional rights of an accused, to avoid interfering with a Department investigation, or because it is legally privileged. III. PROCEDURE
A. PUBLIC INFORMATION FUNCTION

1. The Assistant Chief of Police is designated as the Public Information Officer and is responsible for the public information function of the Department. This function will include, but is not limited to: a. assisting news personnel in covering routine news stories, and at the scene of incidents when so required; b. being available for on-call responses to the news media;

c. preparing and distributing formal news releases; d. arranging for, and assisting at news conferences; e. coordinating and authorizing the release of information about victims, witnesses, and suspects; f. assisting in crisis situations within the Department; and, g. coordinating and authorizing the release of information concerning confidential Department investigations and operations. 2. When the Assistant Chief of Police is unavailable, the Watch Commander on duty at the time will provide any basic information for an initial press release that has been previously approved by the Assistant Chief of Police. 3. Police Officers who are approached by members of the news media for information concerning official activities of the Department are to refer all such inquiries to either their supervisor or the Assistant Chief of Police. 4. Department personnel authorized to release information to the news media under the following categories are: ATTHESCENEOFANINCIDENT Chief of Police Assistant Chief of Police Patrol Division Commander Administration Division Commander Watch Commander FROMAGENCYFILES Chief of Police or his designee CONCERNINGANONGOINGINVESTIGATION Chief of Police Assistant Chief of Police Patrol Division Commander Administration Division Commander Person in charge of the investigation INTHEABSENCEOFTHEASSISTANTCHIEFOFPOLICE Chief of Police Detective Division Commander Patrol Division Commander On Duty Watch Commander

FORMALNEWSRELEASE Chief of Police Assistant Chief of Police Patrol Division Commander Administration Division Commander EMERGENCYNEWSRELEASE Chief of Police Assistant Chief of Police Patrol Division Commander Administration Division Commander On Duty Watch Commander
B. NEWS MEDIA / AT SCENE ACCESS

1. The Department does not issue Press credentials. However, the Department will deny access to the scene of an incident or its reports to any news media member who cannot present positive identification as a representative of a public news service. 2. Police lines may be established to prevent persons from entering the area of a serious incident or crime scene. Dependent upon the tactical situation and the likelihood of jeopardizing police operations, members of the news media may or may not be allowed in such area. 3. While members of the media may be permitted in the area of a crime or serious police incident, they do not have the authority to be within a crime scene or area which has been secured to preserve evidence or at any location where their presence jeopardizes a police operation. 4. Supervisors may allow access to news media representatives, including photographers, at the scene of major fires, natural disasters, or other catastrophic events; and the perimeter of crime scenes depending on the need to preserve evidence and maintain order.
C. NEWS RELEASES

1. News releases are divided into three (3) categories (ongoing investigations, public relations, and emergency news releases). The frequency and content of the release depends upon the objective desired. Normally releases will be provided to those media agencies that have a direct relationship with the service community. The three types of news releases are: a. ONGOING INVESTIGATION - Any information provided to the news media by the Assistant Chief of Police will be documented and provided to the Watch Commander as soon as possible. It is important that all releases contain the same information. If possible a printed release will be prepared for distribution to the media. The Chief of Police, Assistant Chief of Police, Detective Division Commander, Patrol Division Commander, or the person

in charge of the investigation, MAY RELEASE the following information: (1) The type of crime or nature of incident. (2) The location (certain restrictions apply), date, time, injuries sustained, damaged property and a brief description of the incident. (3) Amount and type of property taken, including value if known. (4) The name, age, and address of any adult charged with a crime. (5) The fact that a juvenile has been taken into custody, including sex, age, and general area of residence. (6) The nature, substance, or text of the charge. (7) The facts, time, and place of arrest. (8) The next step in the judicial process. (9) Requests for aid in locating evidence, a complainant, or a suspect. The identity of a suspect before arrest will not be disclosed except to the extent necessary to aid in the investigation, to assist in the apprehension of the suspect, or to warn the public of any danger. A person's race may be released as descriptive information in such cases. (10) Available photographs may be released only if they serve a valid law enforcement function such as the identity of the victim or to enlist public assistance in the apprehension of the offender. (11) In situations where multiple jurisdictions or agencies have participated in the case, all inquiries by the media should be directed to the Major Case Commander or Assistant Chief of Police. Supervisors from these jurisdictions should be consulted to plan and authorize a joint release, if required. b. PUBLIC RELATIONS - The Assistant Chief of Police or his designee shall be responsible for issuing public relation news releases. Information should be provided on a regular basis to all media agencies that have contact within the Departments service area. The content of the news releases may include: (1) Department accomplishments. (2) New program announcements. (3) Crime prevention information. (4) Relevant crime problems and statistics.

(5) Appointments and promotions. c. EMERGENCY NEWS RELEASE - Whenever there is an immediate need to inform the general public concerning an emergency, any supervisor on duty may contact the news media and issue a press release. The need for such release will depend upon the severity of the situation and the need for the public to be informed. In special situations of public concern such as natural disaster (tornadoes, severe wind or rain storms, etc.), a major fire or a chemical spill, any supervisor on duty may issue a press release at his discretion. Comments to reporters should be comprised only of factual, on-the-record information. In general, comments to the news media concerning investigations, indictments, arrests and criminal incidents should be minimal, consistent with the responsibility of keeping the public informed without jeopardizing the rights of individuals.
D. WITHHOLDING INFORMATION

1. The following information WILL NOT be released: a. Any victim, complainant, or witness information such as identity, address, phone number, age, etc., in the following instances: (1) The information is contained in an on-going investigation whereby release of such information may jeopardize successful resolution and/or prosecution of the case. (2) The information is contained in any sex offense or sex related investigation which, if divulged, would tend to lead to the victim's identification. (3) the information could result in situations in which reprisals or intimidation could be employed. b. Law enforcement officers may not disclose the identity of any juvenile in releasing information to the general public as to the arrest, investigation or disposition of any case involving a juvenile; c. The identity of any critically injured or deceased person prior to notification of next of kin; d. The specific cause of death, until determined by the Medical Examiner; e. Exact information concerning an on going investigation, whether it is a crime or traffic accident, will not be released if the information would jeopardize the investigation or prosecution of a subject; f. The existence or contents of any confession, admission, or statement given by the accused, or the refusal or failure of the accused to make any statement;

g. The performance of any examination or tests, or the refusal or failure to submit to an examination or test by the accused; h. Any prior criminal records, including arrests, indictments, and other charges of crime, or the character or reputation of the accused; i. Statements concerning the testimony or credibility of a prospective witness; j. Any reference to the possibility of a plea of guilty or the possibility of a plea to a lesser offense; k. Personal opinions as to the accused guilt or innocence, or to the evidence or merits of the case; l. The identity of suspects that are interviewed but not charged will not be released; m. The identity of any informant; n. Confidential intelligence or operations will not be disclosed except by express permission of the Chief of Police; o. Sensitive or investigative information concerning internal investigations except by express permission of the Chief of Police. Public statements must conform to the labor agreement; p. Any information strictly prohibited by federal or state law.
E. MEDIA REVIEW

1. This department will involve the news media in the development of changes in policies and procedures relating to the public information function by allowing them to review and comment on this procedure.

13 Procedure #5.100 GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title: 5.100

PRISONER DETENTION

Procedure:

AND LOCKUP FACILITY Date Issued: Revised:

I.PURPOSE

A. To provide for the administration, processing, supervision, security, and inspection of prisoners and the lockup facility.

II.POLICY

A.It is the policy of the Police Department that any person incarcerated in the temporary lockup facility will be afforded their rights under the law, will be treated humanely, and will be provided with proper food, shelter, and if required, medical treatment. Procedures will comply with State law and the Department of Corrections Municipal Jail and Lockup Standards.

III.PROCEDURE

A. MANAGEMENT AND ADMINISTRATION

1. The Chief of Police is responsible for the management and operation of the lockup facility. Quarterly prisoner population reports will be filed with the Department of Corrections, and full cooperation will be afforded the detention consultant during the inspection of the lockup facility.

2. The Chief of Police is responsible for ensuring that arrest records are stored in a secure area, and will ensure that records are only released in accordance with the Freedom of Information Act, laws of privacy and confidentiality of records.

3. The Chief of Police is responsible for the maintenance and inspections of the lockup facility.

4. The on duty watch commander is responsible for the direct supervision and care of prisoners detained in the lockup facility.

5. No unauthorized or nonessential persons will be allowed access to the lockup facility.

Maintenance workers or outside contractors required to work in the cell areas will be checked, by the on duty Watch Commander, to ensure that no tools are left behind in the cell area.

6.All supervisors will ensure that all reports, records and documents pertaining to an arrestee are maintained in a secure area, and checked for accuracy and completeness before forwarding them to the Records unit.

B.

TRAINING

1. All Department personnel will receive the appropriate level of training in lockup operation procedures. The following training will be provided at a minimum:

a. All sworn personnel will receive instructions in prisoner processing and lockup facility operation;

b. Non sworn members of the Department who provide matron duties will be trained in the correct techniques, when dealing with and searching prisoners;

c. Telecommunicators will receive instructions on monitoring prisoners with the audio visual equipment and their responsibilities for prisoner inspections

C.

PRISONER PROCESSING

1. The maximum period of detention should not normally exceed 48 hours, except with permission of the judicial system.

2. All prisoners will be properly searched before entering the lockup facility. A search will
be conducted of the prisoner and his property at the start of the booking process. The department's metal detector will be used whenever possible on all prisoners before the prisoner is placed into a cell.

3.Strip searches must conform to State law. 4. Property taken from the prisoner will be inventoried on a Prisoner Property Receipt form
(including any property stored elsewhere). Special attention will be given to removing and inventorying the following items:

a.belt and drawstrings

b.ties and scarves

c.shoes and shoelaces

d.jewelry


e.keys

f.matches, lighters, smoking materials

g.personal property

h.medication

i.coin, currency, checks, credit cards;

j. any article determined to be potentially dangerous to the detainee or a Department member, or that may compromise the security of the lockup facility.

5. Prisoner property will be secured in a locker for safekeeping until release or transfer. The officer inventorying the property and the detainee will sign the Prisoner Property Receipt form to acknowledge items that were inventoried.

a. Officers must, as soon as reasonably possible, submit a written report to their immediate supervisor of any discrepancy involving adetainees property

6. Persons arrested and booked by members of this Department for intake to the lockup
facility will be processed and the following reports will be completed, when required:

a.Offense Report b.Booking Sheet c.Prisoner Property Receipt form d.Arrest Fingerprint Card if applicable e.Madison County Jail Intake form f.Cell Check Card g.Juvenile Contact Report h.Other forms or reports may be applicable depending on the specific circumstances of the
arrest, i.e., DUI.

7. If a prisoner refuses to cooperate with the booking process, i.e., fingerprinting and photographing, or the prisoners physical or mental condition inhibits processing, allow the prisoner a reasonable period of time to calm down, become sober or rest. If the prisoner still refuses to be processed, the prisoner will be taken before a judge and ordered to submit to processing.

8. All persons charged with a criminal offense will be photographed. If unable to use the mug camera because of a malfunction, or because of the offenders condition, officers may use their

digital camera. The position of the digital camera should approximate that of the mug camera. The sequential arrest booking number should be written on the front bottom of the disc containing the digital photograph. Those individuals detained for investigation of a felony offense, (burglary, auto theft, theft over, etc.), and not charged should be fingerprinted and photographed, for Department records, for later comparisons and investigations. Major case prints will be taken from offenders arrested for burglary and related offenses.

9.Arresting Officers will fingerprint all arrestees for felony and Class A misdemeanor charges on both F.B.I and Illinois State cards. Class B misdemeanor charges require Illinois cards only. City ordinance charges will be printed on City cards only. Persons arrested for traffic violations designated by the Secretary of State Code will be printed on Illinois card only. Fingerprints may be taken for employment and record inquiries when submitted by the individual to be printed.

10. The apparent physical condition of all prisoners placed into the lockup facility will
be indicated on the Booking Form. Apparent physical condition of the prisoner will include such comments as; violent, suicidal, injured (describe injury), intoxicated, normal, or other conditions as, determined by the booking officer.

11. All prisoners placed in the lockup facility will be logged on the proper Department cell
check card. Separate cell check cards for the adult male cell block, adult female cell block, holding cells, and juvenile cell shall be maintained. All required information is to be completed by the booking officer. The releasing officer will complete that part of the lockup book concerning release information.

12. When placing a prisoner into the lockup facility or detention room the officer will start a cell check card. When filling out this card, the officer will indicate the cell number or room where the prisoner was placed and the card will be time stamped.

13.A cell check card will be completed whenever: a. an adult detainee is held over 30 minutes in the lockup facility or temporary detention
room;

b. a delinquent juvenile detainee is held over 15 minutes in the juvenile cell or temporary detention room.

14.Adult male prisoners will be segregated from females.

15. Juvenile prisoners will be held in a room separated by sight and sound from adults and without bars.

16. The officer placing the prisoner into a cell is responsible for notifying the telecommunicator that a prisoner is in the cell. The officer will also notify the Watch Commander that a prisoner is in the cell.

17. When a detainee is placed into a cell, the detainee shall be provided with toilet tissue, a mattress, and a clean blanket.

18. Prisoners who are under the extreme influence of alcohol or drugs, or who appear to be suicidal, violent, or prone to acts of self abuse may pose special security problems. Physical restraints will not be placed upon a prisoner to confine his movements other than for the specific purpose of preventing the prisoner from injuring himself or others, or from damaging property. A notation on

the Cell Check Card will be made whenever a restraint device is used. The following guidelines are established for these special situations:

a. ARRESTEE UNDER EXTREME INFLUENCE OF ALCOHOL OR DRUGS - A prisoner who appears highly intoxicated, disoriented, or appears to be suffering some form of physical or medical problem should be evaluated by Granite City Fire Department Paramedics and transported to the Gateway Regional Medical Center Emergency Room and examined by a physician, if deemed necessary.

b. PRISONERS WHO APPEAR SUICIDAL OR SELF DESTRUCTIVE - The telecommunicator and Watch Commander will be notified of the potential problem with the prisoner to ensure closer monitoring with the audio and video equipment. If necessary, leg and hand restraints may be used for the protection of the prisoner and the officer. Information regarding the prisoner's tendencies will be documented and provided to other agencies that will later take custody of the prisoner. The Watch Commander will make more frequent inspections of the prisoner.

c. PRISONERS WITH MENTAL DISORDERS - Prisoners with a known history of mental disorder or mental defect, or who show evidence of such condition, will be detained only temporarily. The proper mental health agency will be contacted to determine if arrangements should be made for the commitment or transportation to a mental facility.

d. VIOLENT PRISONERS - Violent prisoners will be placed in a cell immediately after their personal property has been removed. Leg and hand restraints may be used for the protection of the officer. Arrest processing should be completed only when it can be done safely. Sufficient personnel should be available in these situations. The nature of the prisoners' actions will be transmitted to any receiving agency upon transferring the prisoner.

19. Before releasing a prisoner from custody the releasing officer must positively identify the prisoner as the one authorized to be released. Officers will verify prisoner identification by examining the Booking Report, Arrest Fingerprint Card, identification in the personal property of the prisoner, or if necessary speak with the arresting officer if there is any question to the identity of the prisoner. 20.The officer releasing or transferring the prisoner shall instruct the prisoner to flush the cell toilet, deposit all garbage from the cell into the waste basket in the cell block, and place the blanket into the laundry bin. The releasing officer will inspect the cell for damage. Any damage done by the prisoner will be reported to the Watch Commander who will ensure that an additional offense report covering the damage is completed and charges filed, if necessary.

21. Prisoner property, except those items being held as evidence, will be returned to the prisoner upon his release. The prisoner and officer are required to sign the Prisoner Property Receipt form. The property of a prisoner who is released to another jurisdiction shall accompany that prisoner. The appropriate jurisdictional personnel shall sign the Lockup Record form.

22. If there is an arrest that exceeds the maximum capacity of the lockup facility the watch commander will contact a neighboring department and request assistance in housing the excess prisoners. Whenever possible, prisoners should be processed at the Police station before being transported. Arrangements should be made by the Watch Commander and the Watch Commander from the other agency to handle the feeding, bonding or other necessary requirements of our prisoners.

D.

SECURITY AND CONTROL

1.Officers will ensure both sally port doors are closed before a prisoner is allowed out of their squad car.

2. Officers will secure their firearm in the gun lockers provided before entering the lockup facility. Firearms will also be secured in the gun lockers while processing the prisoner and before entering the cell area. Exceptions for entering the cell area with a weapon are warranted under the following conditions:

a.building fire and evacuation is necessary;

b.weather related hazard; c.suicide attempt; d.other life threatening emergencies e.at the direction of a supervisor.
2. Entering an occupied cell is sometimes a dangerous situation. In an emergency it may be necessary for an officer to enter the cell alone to evacuate the prisoner. Depending on the circumstances, and considering why the prisoner is in custody, an officer may enter the cell to check the well being of the prisoner. However, before entering the lockup facility, the officer should request the communication center monitor the cell camera. When dealing with a prisoner being held for a serious offense, or who is considered dangerous, an officer should not enter an occupied cell without the assistance of another officer.

3. The lockup facility doors will remain closed and locked always. The entrance doors to the secure area will never be propped open, or in any other way compromise the doors proper functions. Cell block and cell doors will be left open when the cells are unoccupied.

4. A security check including searching for weapons and contraband will be made of each
unoccupied cell before its use by the officer who will secure the prisoner in the cell. The releasing officer will also check the cell for weapons and contraband upon releasing the prisoner.

5. Officers will inform the communications center whenever they enter the station, booking room or lockup facility with a prisoner.

6. Whenever an officer enters the lockup facility he should have his portable radio with him. Whenever an officer enters the lockup facility, he should check the audio system to ensure its proper operation.

7. After placing a prisoner in a cell, the officer should request that the telecommunicator check that the video monitoring and video recording equipment in the cell that the prisoner is occupying is operating properly.

8.Due to the temporary nature of the detention, personal items such as mail, money, checks, food, smoking materials, or other personal items will not be accepted for delivery to the prisoner. The watch commander should accept fresh clothing for the prisoner, if needed. These items will be properly searched and logged on the prisoner property receipt form, if they are not distributed to the prisoner.


E.

PRISONER SUPERVISION

1. Prisoners detained at the Police station lockup facility will be under constant twenty-four (24) hour supervision. The on duty Watch Commander is responsible for ensuring that telecommunicators are informed that a prisoner is being held in the lockup and that the telecommunicator monitors the video activity of the prisoner. Supervisors are also responsible to see that the proper security checks are conducted.

2. Watch Commanders will conduct a prisoner count check when starting their tour of duty. The number of prisoners in the lockup facility will be logged.

3. Juveniles accused of status offenses, i.e., running away, underage drinking, truancy, etc., under State or Federal law, or municipal ordinances, and non-offenders cannot be securely detained in a cell or detention room. Juveniles, 10 years of age or older, accused of delinquent acts may be securely detained for a maximum of six (6) hours in a juvenile cell, locked detention room, or handcuffed to a stationary object. Juveniles must be under continuous supervision when placed in a locked room, cell or handcuffed to a stationary object. If housing over six (6) hours is required for a juvenile prisoner, he will be transported to the JuvenileDetentionCenter.

4.A personal inspection of each adult prisoner will be conducted every 30 minutes. High risk
prisoners may require more frequent observation. A personal inspection of each juvenile prisoner will be made every 15 minutes. The following responsibilities apply to the inspection of prisoners:

a. PATROL - Officers that place a prisoner into the holding facility will initiate a Cell Check Card. The Cell Check Card will be time stamped every time an officer does an inspection of the prisoner, or in some other way encounters the prisoner, i.e., feeding, telephone calls made or attempted, contact with attorney or family member, processing, etc. The watch commander is responsible for ensuring that each prisoner is checked at the required time intervals. The time of this observation will be time stamped on the cell check card.

b.COMMUNICATIONS - In the event the telecommunicator must conduct a prisoner check, the telecommunicator will first use the video monitor to check for potential problems or dangers. In the case of an emergency the telecommunicator will notify the watch commander.

5. Video cameras and audio speakers may be used to monitor the activity of prisoners in the lockup facility. When in use, these electronic devices will not be used in a way that will not violate the personal privacy and dignity of the prisoner.

6. Whenever possible, Department members charged with the visual inspection of prisoners will be of the same sex as the prisoner. When this is not possible, Department members will take the necessary precautions to ensure the privacy of the prisoner. Supervisors will ensure the privacy and dignity of the prisoner.

F.FIRE PREVENTION, INSPECTIONS, AND SANITATION

1.Fire prevention practices will include the following, at a minimum:

a.no smoking in the cell area by prisoners or officers

 b.flame retardant mattresses and blankets for each cell c.all lighters and matches are confiscated from prisoners during search procedures; d. officers will be familiar with the location and use of fire extinguishers near the holding
facility

e.exits clearly indicated. 2. Fire extinguishers are located in easily accessible locations that afford the least
opportunity for tampering. The location and type of fire extinguisher used in the holding facility meets applicable state and local standards. To ensure reliability, each fire extinguisher is equipped with a charge gauge and inspection tag.

3. The Service Division Officer will conduct semi-annual inspections, during January and July, of the lockup facilitys fire equipment and sanitary conditions. The fire equipment will be tested and results of these tests will be documented and placed in the master file for the lockup facility. Arrangements will be made with a pest control company to fumigate the lockup should any breeding insects or rodents be discovered. Preventive checks by a pest control company will be arranged, as needed.

4. A daily inspection of the detention facility will be conducted by Watch Commanders. Problems or discrepancies with safety and sanitation, including control of vermin and pasts, will be reported to the Assistant Chief of Police.

5.When unoccupied, cells shall be cleaned daily.

6. Areas adjacent to cells shall be maintained in a clean and orderly condition. Walkways and corridors shall not be used as storage areas.

G.

PRISONER ESCAPE

1. If there is an escape by a prisoner being held in custody by this Department, immediate efforts will be made for recapture. The following steps will be initiated after an escape:

a.The officer discovering the escape will immediately notify the communications center and the watch commander;

b. Determine the number of escapees and if there is a risk of additional prisoners escaping custody. Sufficient personnel will be dispatched to secure the lockup and search the building, if necessary;

c.Complete description and identity of the escapee and escapees offenses will be provided
to on duty personnel on the main police radio frequency.

d. The Watch Commander will determine if other area departments, Sheriffs Department, State police, etc. should be notified.

e.Make emergency notification to the Chief of Police through the chain of command;

f.Contact additional personnel, oncoming patrol personnel and on-call investigator, to assist
in searching for the escapee;

g.Check to see that all security doors and cell doors are functioning properly. Steps should be made to repair malfunctioning doors or locks as soon as possible.

h. The Watch Commander will initiate an investigation into the circumstances surrounding
the escape and make a full report and recommendation to the Chief of Police through the chain of command.

2. All extraordinary or unusual occurrences which involve or endanger the lives or physical welfare of officers or detainees shall be reported to the Division of Support Services, Jail and Detention Standards Unit of the Department of Corrections by the Assistant Chief of Police within 72 hours of the occurrence or its discovery. The Department of Corrections form, Report of Extraordinary or Unusual Occurrences, will be used. Extraordinary or unusual occurrences include:

a.deaths, regardless of cause; b.attempted suicides, if hospitalized or medical treatment is required; c.serious injuries; d.escapes or attempted escape; e.serious fire resulting in property damage, personal injury or evacuation; f.riots; g.battery on an officer, visitor or volunteer by a detainee; h.battery on detainee by an officer; i. battery on detainee by another detainee if hospitalization or extensive medical treatment
is required;

j.sexual assaults; k.occurrences of contagious or infectious disease or illness within the holding facility; l.use of chemical agents; and, m.major property damage.

H.

HEALTH/MEDICAL SCREENING REPORT AND HEALTH CARE SERVICES

1. Before being confined in a cell, each prisoner will undergo a health/medical screening interview. The purpose of this interview is to obtain information about the prisoner's health, medical status and parental responsibility. The screening interview is the responsibility of the booking officer and will be conducted during the booking process. Information will be completed on the Booking Form, and will include:

a.Current physical and mental health of the arrestee including communicable diseases;

b.Medication taken by the arrestee; c.Behavior, including state of consciousness and mental status; d.Body deformities, trauma markings, bruises, lesions, jaundice, ease of movement, etc.; e.Suicide attempts or recent traumatic experiences; and,
If the arrestee has any children under the age of 18 that live with them who may be neglected as a result of the arrest.

2. Obtaining a current health assessment of a female arrestee should take into account the special needs of women. Specific conditions such as pregnancy should be identified.

3. The following are guidelines to be followed in the event a prisoner is in need of medical
assistance:

a. Prisoners who are ill or injured, should be treated by Granite City Fire Department Paramedics. The paramedics will examine the prisoner and determine whether their condition warrants transportation to the Gateway Regional Medical Center Emergency Room to be examined by a physician.

b. If the prisoner needs to be transported to a medical facility the on duty Watch

Commander will determine if an officer should accompany the paramedics or, if the hospital will be informed of the need to place a "hold" on the prisoner.

c. Whenever there is a doubt about the health or medical condition of a prisoner the officer
should summon the paramedics. The final decision to transport to a medical facility rests with the paramedics.

4.If medication is needed by a prisoner, the following guidelines will be followed: a. If the prisoner has prescription medicine on his person at the time of booking, the
prescription should be verified prior to administering

b. Medication prescribed by a physician is to be administered as prescribed. The Watch

Commander, or his designee, will witness the prisoner actually taking the medication and will properly record on the prisoner medication form the time and the medication administered. Refusals will also be noted

c. Officers should use the Physicians Desk Reference book to check on questionable pills. A pharmacist should be consulted if the officer is unsure or has a question regarding the medication.

I.

USE OF FACILITIES BY OUTSIDE AGENCIES

1. The Police lockup will not normally be used by officers from other law enforcement agencies. The use of the lockup may be granted due to exceptional circumstances by the Watch Commander. Lockup procedures for exceptional circumstances are as follows:

a. Communications personnel will obtain approval from the watch commander before making any arrangements for use of the lockup facility by another agency.

b. If the Watch Commander authorizes the use of the lockup, an officer will be assigned to assist in the safe intake of the prisoner. The officer will verify the position and authority of the person presenting the prisoner for detention. If the presenter is in civilian clothes positive identification will be required. A telephone call may be necessary to verify the identity and authority of the presenting person.

c. The assisting officer will document on the Cell Check Card the required information concerning the prisoner and the arresting agency, and indicate on the Jail List the prisoner's name and the name of the transporting officer, identification number, Department name, and a telephone number where a person familiar with the prisoner can be contacted.

d. The agency requesting to use the lockup facility is responsible for the medical attention, feeding, contact with attorney, and release or bonding out of the prisoner.

J.

PRISONER RIGHTS
1. Persons held in custody at the Police Department will be granted all rights and privileges provided for by Federal Law, State law, and in judicial orders originating from the Courts.

2. Detainees constitutional rights of access to the courts will not be inhibited. Persons arrested, with or without a warrant, will be taken without unnecessary delay before the nearest and most accessible judge.

3. Persons held in custody will be given every opportunity to make bail and members of this Department will not impede this right. The following is applicable for the bonding of prisoners:

a. Persons detained and charged with a misdemeanor or violation of a local ordinance will be permitted to post bond.

b. Persons detained for felony charges and domestic violence will be taken before a judge without unnecessary delay for a bond hearing.

c.During weekends, holidays, or after normal work hours, special bond procedures apply.
4. One phone call will be allowed at the first practical opportunity beginning with the booking process. If the prisoner is physically or emotionally unable to complete a call, a department member may provide necessary assistance.

5.Prisoners have the right to communicate with an attorney and family members by making a reasonable number of telephone calls or in any other reasonable manner. This will be done using the phone inside their cell.

6. Prisoners have the right to consult with an attorney except in cases of imminent danger of escape. The prisoner and attorney will consult alone and in private, as many times and for such period each time as is reasonable. The Watch Commander will determine whether the meeting between the prisoner and attorney will take place in the cell or interview room. The watch commander will ensure the right of the prisoner to have confidential access to his attorney.

K.PRISONER MEALS

1. When an adult prisoner is held in the lockup facility food will be provided. Feeding times will conform to normal eating times; morning breakfast (0830), noontime lunch (1230), and evening dinner (1730).

2. Juvenile detainees will be provided with a meal when they are detained during the normal meal period.

3.The Watch Commander will ensure that prisoners are fed. Feeding times will be logged on the Lockup Record form by the officer feeding the prisoner. A prisoner has the right to refuse a meal. Refusals will be entered on the Cell Check Card.

4. Food must be of sufficient nutritional value and provide a daily minimum of 1,800 to 2,000 calories for adults and 2,500 to 3,000 calories for juveniles. Food quantity must be sufficient to satisfy, within reason, the detainees needs.

5.A drink other than water shall be served with each meal.

6.Of the three daily meals provided, at least one shall be a balanced and complete hot meal.

7. Every Reasonable effort shall be made in consideration of detainees with special diets when prescribed by a physician, clinic, or hospital.

8.Detainees shall be served meals in their cells.

9. The Watch Commander will ensure that the garbage is cleaned up from the cell area, as soon as possible, and deposited in a waste basket.

L.

VISITATION RIGHTS
1. Persons arrested have the right to communicate with an attorney or family member, and they have the right to consult with an attorney.

2. Visitors are restricted to detainees immediate family (mother, father, wife, husband), clergy, and attorney.


3. Visitation hours are between 1300 hours and 1400 hours, and shall last no longer than 10 minutes.

4.Attorneys will be allowed to meet with detainees at any time for a period of time necessary to conduct business.

5. Attorneys will be allowed to consult, alone and in private, with their client. However, attorneys are subject to a search before any meeting with a prisoner. A refusal to be searched is grounds to deny the visit.

6. Visitors must provide full identification and register their name, address, birth date, and relationship with the prisoner.

7.All visitors will sign in and out on the Detainee Report Ledger. 8. Authorized visitors will be allowed to speak with the prisoner through a phone provided in
the lobby area. The prisoner will be transferred to the designated interview room with the phone that is connected to the lobby phone.

M.LOCKUP FACILITY DEATHS

1.Upon discovery that a person confined in the lockup facility has apparently died, the officer will notify the telecommunicator and request an ambulance and the Watch Commander.

2.The officer will check for vital signs of life and, if applicable, provide emergency first aid. 3.Every effort will be made to protect the scene for investigative purposes. 4. If the paramedic determines that the prisoner is dead, the body will not be moved. The
Coroners Office will be immediately notified. Cell deaths are under the jurisdiction of the Coroners Office and an investigator will respond to the scene and take command of the investigation.

5.The Watch Commander will contact the Chief of Police through the chain of command and
brief him on the circumstances surrounding the death.

6. Care will be exercised in removing an individual who has apparently died of hanging to avoid any additional injuries to the body, or destroying physical evidence.

7. The Detective Division Commander will immediately initiate a Department investigation to

include the following, at a minimum:

a.name, address, and birth date of victim;

b.reason for detention; c.time placed in detention;

d.time of last visual and personal check;

e.property taken from prisoner; f.apparent cause of death; g.any individuals present immediately prior to or following finding the victim; h. names of individuals who were detained in the lockup facility with or adjacent to the
victim;

i.any notification made to other agencies or family, time of notification; j.findings and recommendations for avoiding future occurrences; and, k.save the video and enter it into evidence.
8. The victim will be transported to the Madison County Morgue. Care should be made to avoid post mortem injuries during removal.

9. The Detective Division Commander will complete the Report of Extraordinary Occurrences form required by the Department of Corrections.

N.

EMERGENCY EVACUATION OF PRISONERS

1.If there is an emergency, prisoners will be evacuated from the cells through the closest and safest exit. Emergency situations that may require evacuation of prisoners include, but are not limited to:

a.fire

b.natural disaster, building damaged by weather c.a major electrical or plumbing malfunction d.a riot e.any other serious emergency or condition which would endanger the prisoner 2. The telecommunicator will immediately notify the Watch Commander in the event of any
emergency and the Watch Commander will determine the level of response required.

3. Notification to other occupants in the building, if the emergency is one that threatens their safety, and requests to the various emergency services will be made as soon as possible.

4. The nearest available sworn officer will be ordered to remove the prisoner(s) from the cell area and secure the prisoner(s) in a safe location. Prisoner(s) may be temporarily secured in

a marked police squad car or the prisoner transport van, depending on the circumstances, until arrangements can be made for more permanent facilities. If necessary, the Watch Commander will post an officer to guard a prisoner placed in a temporary detention facility.

5. In the event of an emergency, which requires the evacuation of prisoner(s), the following evacuation procedure will be followed:

a. The Watch Commander will assign an officer to respond to the lockup facility and, if necessary, evacuate the prisoner(s). The Watch Commander will also respond to the station and supervise the evacuation.

b. An evacuation route is posted in the main corridor of the Lockup facility. Officers should follow the planned route depending on the location of the emergency. Alternate routes are provided should an exit be impassable. The closest and safest exit should be considered first.

c. The offense or reason the person is detained will be considered when evacuating the
cell. The following guidelines should be considered when evacuating prisoners:

(1) A person considered dangerous, or alleged to have committed a forcible felony will be
moved after he has been handcuffed. Two officers should be present for this type of prisoner.

(2)A person detained for a minor offense or violation of traffic laws, quasi-criminal offenses,
or one known to be of good character who does not pose a potential danger or threat to the officer or the community may be evacuated from the cell without the use of handcuffs.

d.Juveniles will not be transported with adult prisoners. e. The prisoner should be immediately secured in a marked police squad car, with
protective cage, the prisoner transport van, or other secured temporary location.

f. The Watch Commander will contact a nearby police department and request the use of their lockup facility.

g. Prisoner property will remain at the Police station. Arrangements for the release or transfer, if necessary, will be made by the Watch Commander at a later time.

h. All rules, regulations, policies and procedures at the other police department's lockup
facility will be followed upon transfer of the prisoner.

i. Injured prisoners will be examined by Fire Department paramedics who will determine whether the prisoner should be transferred to a medical facility.

j. Prisoners being detained for a serious felony, or considered dangerous, will be accompanied to the medical facility by a police officer.

k. The safety and well being of the general public, police Department employees, and the prisoners will be the primary consideration.

O.

TEMPORARY DETENTION


1. The primary purpose of the interview room is for conducting interviews. However, due to the unpredictable nature of daily police operations this room may be used for the temporary holding of detainees.

2. When the interview room is being used as a temporary detention room, the following
provisions shall apply:

a.The arresting officer will supervise and be accountable for the detainee.

b. Authorization to use the interview room for temporary detention will be approved by the
Watch Commander.

c. When left unattended, detainees will not be handcuffed to any movable object. If
necessary, the detainee will be handcuffed to the retaining ring.

d.Adults will be kept separate from juveniles and males kept separate from females. e. The temperature and lighting in the room shall be consistent with other areas of the
station. Access to water and restroom facilities will be made available to the detainee.

4. The following safety and security precautions will be followed by officers using the
temporary detention room:

a.Telecommunicators will be notified when the detention room is occupied.

b.Access to the detention room and detainee will not be blocked. c.Detainees will be searched for weapons or contraband. d.Detainees will be secured to prevent escape. e. Security inspections of the room will be made before and after placing a detainee in the
room.

f.A visual check of the detainee will be conducted at least every 30 minutes for an adult and
15 minutes for a juvenile.

P.CONCLUSION

1. Any officer or staff member who intentionally prevents the exercise by a detainee of any right conferred by this policy or who intentionally fails to perform any act required of him by this policy shall be subject to disciplinary actions.

Procedure #5.101

GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title:EmergencyRestraintChairProcedure:5.101 DateIssued: Revised:

1.

PURPOSE:

To set policy for proper use of the restraint chair and safely containing prisoners who repeatedly attempt to self mutilate and /or repeatedly attempt suicide.
2. PROCEDURE:

All employees of the Granite City Police Department will be required to watch the training video provided with the restraint chair before being allowed to use the chair. Officers using the restraint chair should review the instruction manual attached to the chair. 1. It will be the decision of the OIC to place a prisoner in the restraint chair. The decision will be based on personal observation and collected data, and /or the reports from the Officers who had contact with the prisoner, consisting of past behavior as well as threats and/or attempts of self harm or suicide made while in custody. 2. If the OIC deems it necessary to place a prisoner in the restraint chair for any reason other than suicidal or self mutilation, there will be no deviation in the observation and examination protocol. 3. An official memo to the Chief of Police will be generated detailing the need for the use of the restraint chair in all cases. 4. An official restraint chair log will be maintained at all times and will be located in the booking area.
3. OBSERVATIONANDEXAMINATION:

The prisoner will be visually and verbally observed every (15) fifteen minutes. He/she will be offered water at least every hour. He/she will be released every two hours for approximately ten minutes and encouraged to use the bathroom facilities and walk a short distance. This will be in the accompaniment of at least two officers.
1. If the prisoner is so violent it would be hazardous to both the prisoner and the staff to

release him/her an explanation of this will be included in the memo written to the Chief and documented on the restraint chair log sheet.
2. The OIC will review his decision to restrain the prisoner in the restraint chair every six

hours using his and officers visual observations.

3. If a prisoner is in the restraint chair longer than eight hours the OIC will contact GCFD

EMS for vital signs to be taken to ensure the safety of the prisoner.
4. HOUSINGOFPRISONERINRESTRAINTCHAIR:

The prisoner will be placed in an area where constant and unobstructed view will be maintained such as the Bull Pen. The (15) fifteen minute rounds will be done by opening the door with the Officer entering the Bull Pin and physically observing and getting a verbal response from the prisoner.
1. Absolutely no rounds will be made simply by looking through the cage of the Bull Pen. 2. The OIC will use the Restraint Chair log sheet to document the daily activities and

observations of the prisoner while in the restraint chair. The OIC will make an entry every time the prisoner is checked and attended to by EMS.
3. If it has been determined the prisoner has mental health issues, the OIC will contact

Chestnut Health Services so that the prisoner can be evaluated.

3 Procedure #5.106 GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title:

PRISONER TRANSPORTATIONProcedure: 5.106

Date Issued:

Revised:

I.PURPOSE

A.To ensure the safety of officers and prisoners.

B.To prevent the escape of prisoners in police custody.

II.POLICY

A. The Police Department is responsible for the welfare and safety of its employees, persons in its custody and innocent citizens. This responsibility has been confirmed by Supreme Court rulings that agencies and individual officers are subject to civil and/or criminal liability if an employee, prisoner or innocent citizen is injured as a result of negligence or unwarranted excessive force. This responsibility should not be viewed casually. Officers will be alert and adhere to precautionary measures to reduce the probability of injury to employees and citizens and injury or escape of prisoners. Negligence or excessive force will constitute grounds for disciplinary action.

III.PROCEDURE

A.

SEARCHES

1. Officers shall inspect their vehicles at the beginning of each shift to ensure that their vehicles are free of illegal weapons and contraband, are mechanically safe, are free of damage or defect and that they are properly equipped.

2. The officer shall search the transporting vehicle for any illegal weapons, contraband, or evidence before and immediately after transporting any prisoner.

3.Prisoners shall be handcuffed according to department procedure 5.105.

4. Prisoners will be searched each time they come in to a transporting officers custody. When searching a prisoner the following will apply:


a.Searches should be conducted by members of the same sex when feasible.

b. An officer may conduct a search of the outer garments of a member of the opposite sex, unless a threat to the officer's safety is suspected.

c. An officer may conduct an inventory search of the prisoners property as outlined in department procedure 5.100.

d. Officers should exercise caution during searches to avoid contracting communicable diseases, parasites, or injury from hidden items such as needles, etc.

e. If an officer suspects that he may have been infected or is injured from contact with a prisoner, he will report it immediately to his supervisor and seek medical attention.

B.

RESTRAINTS

1. Whenever an adult is placed under arrest, and is to be transported, that person will be handcuffed as outlined in department procedure 5.105. 2. Juveniles will be handcuffed in accordance with special consideration given to the juveniles age and size, the offense committed, potential for escape, and the physical safety of the officer, public, and juvenile.

3. Mental patients, sick, injured or disabled prisoners should be restrained when necessary. The use of soft restraints may be used instead of handcuffs. Soft restraints are available.

4. Prisoners will be handcuffed with their hands in back and the cuffs double locked when possible. An officer has the discretion of handcuffing a prisoner with hands in front in certain situations such as age, obesity, physical impairment, injury, or prisoners in long term transport situations using a vehicle with a protective barrier.

5.Prisoners will not be handcuffed to any part of the vehicle.

6.Male prisoners will not be handcuffed to female prisoners.

7.Juveniles will not be handcuffed to adults.

C.

PRISONER SEATING IN VEHICLE

1.All prisoners will be transported in a vehicle equipped with a prisoner restraint shield.

2. All prisoners will be seated in an upright position and secured with a seat belt to avoid injury and to eliminate the possibility of positional asphyxiation.

3. Provisions may be made for transportation in an ambulance of mental patients, sick, injured or disabled prisoners.

4. When transporting prisoners of the opposite sex, the starting and ending mileage will be transmitted through the radio to communications.

5.ONE PRISONER: The prisoner will be placed in the passenger side of the rear seat. 6.TWO PRISONERS: When two prisoners are to be transported in a squad car, they will ride in the rear seat.

7. The only exception for not securing a prisoner with a seat belt would be an officer safety issue; i.e., the offender is so combative that it would put the officers safety in jeopardy if he were to try to seat belt the prisoner in the vehicle.

D. TRANSPORT VEHICLE OPERATION

1.Transporting officers will not lose sight of the prisoners under their control.

2. Transporting officers may not engage in pursuit, high speed, or erratic driving while transporting prisoners.

3. Transporting officers shall not stop or cause a delay in the transportation of prisoners, and should only respond to a law enforcement need for a life threatening situation.

4. Requests by the prisoner to communicate with family, attorney, or use of a restroom while being transported will be denied until the destination has been reached.

5.In the event of a need to transport a prisoner for an extended period of time, such as in an extradition, the officer should: Allow prisoners reasonable time to use toilet facilities without compromising security.

E.

PRISONER ESCAPE
a.Notify the communications center and the watch commander.

1.Should an escape occur during transport, officers will:

b.Directly notify State Police.

c.Notify local units..

d. Broadcast a physical and clothing description of the escapee, advising the last known direction of travel and charges against the escapee.

e.Make an effort, when possible, to recapture the escapee.

f. Have all the information regarding the escapee entered into law enforcement communications networks as may be appropriate.

g. Submit a written report explaining the details of the escape to the chief of police through the chain of command.

F.IDENTIFICATION AND DOCUMENTATION

1.Officers transporting prisoners to court or another detention facility should verify the identity of the prisoner. Booking records, photographs or fingerprint records of the prisoner should be used to confirm the persons to be transported.

2. The transporting officer shall be made aware of the potential security problems, including escape or suicidal tendencies, and this information shall be relayed upon delivering the prisoner to the proper security personnel or judge.

3. When transporting a prisoner from one facility to another the officer shall, at the destination:

a.Secure his firearm.

b.Transfer custody to receiving officer.

c.Deliver all documents and prisoner property to receiving officer.

4.All rules in effect for security, at any facility, shall be adhered to by the transporting officer.

G.

SPECIAL TRANSPORT SITUATION

1. Sick or injured prisoners requiring medical attention shall, whenever possible, be transported by ambulance. At least one officer should be assigned to ride with the prisoner and provide security. Generally restraint devices shall be used unless they interfere with the medical treatment.

2. Whenever a prisoner is admitted to a hospital the officer will notify the watch commander. The watch commander will determine the need for continuing security at the hospital, seeking a no body bond hearing or relinquishing custody of the prisoner to the County Sheriffs Police.

3. Elderly, physically and mentally disabled prisoners present conditions for their transport that dictate special care and attention. The safety of the prisoner and transporting officer requires due care when transporting disabled prisoners. Officer discretion shall be used in determining whether restraints are required. Officers should take into account the prisoners' mobility, strength and crime committed.

4.Transportation of mentally ill subjects shall be in accordance with procedure #4.407.

Procedure #5.300

GRANTIE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title:Radio Communications, Operations, Procedure: 5.300 And Telecommunications DateIssued: Revised:

I.PURPOSE A. To provide and establish uniform radio procedures and terminology for the exchange of information involved in routine inquiries; to conserve radio air time, and to assure understanding through uniformity. To provide operational guidelines for telecommunicator emergency operations for public safety and emergency response. II.POLICY A. Members will adhere to the standard communication procedures of this policy and utilize the terms in their daily operations. Members operating the police radio, either from the Communication's Center or mobile units, will strictly adhere to and observe regulations for such operations as set forth in this policy, department orders and FCC regulations. III.PROCEDURE A. All officers are to remain in radio contact with the Communications Center at all times during their tour of duty. 1. Each officer is responsible for ensuring that their communication equipment, mobile and portable (walkie) units are in proper working order at the beginning of each shift. 2. All officers will notify the Communications Center: a. Upon arrival at an assignment or incident which takes them out of the patrol unit. b. When ever out of the patrol unit for any reason on portable unit (walkie), providing the Communications Center of their location. c. Upon completion of an assignment and/or return to patrol unit. d. Whenever leaving their patrol district. 3. Officers and Telecommunicators will monitor the Department radio frequency at all times during their tour of duty.

4. Officers and Telecommunicators will monitor the Illinois State Police Radio Network (ISPERN) during their tour of duty. 5. Patrol officers are encouraged to monitor the Illinois Radio Emergency Assistance channel (IREACH) and may monitor other radio frequencies as dictated by necessity and at their discretion during their tour of duty. 6. The police radio frequencies are for police business communications. Unnecessary and improper use of the radio is unprofessional operation and is a violation of this policy and standards of operation. IV.PHONETICALPHABET A. It is often difficult to understand the similar sounds of unusual words, proper names and addresses. Therefore, it is frequently required that such words be spelled for clarification. The following phonetic alphabet will be used to ensure understanding and accurate interpretation. A-ADAM J-JOHN S-SAM B-BOY K-KING T-TOM C-CHARLES L-LINCOLN U-UNION D-DAVID M-MARY V-VICTOR E-EDWARD N-NORA W-WILLIAM F-FRANK O-OCEAN X-XRAY G-GEORGE P-PAUL Y-YOUNG H-HENRY Q-QUEEN Z-ZEBRA I-IDA R-ROBERT 1. The proper method of using the phonetic alphabet will be employed, stating the Alpha character followed by the phonetic word. a. If two (2) or three (3) identical alpha characters appear consecutively, it is appropriate to use "double" or "triple" as a preface to the phonetic (e.g. "double A-Adam). V.WORDCHOICES A. Effective and authoritative communications are the goal of all two (2) way radio operations. Correct word choices promote professionalism, enhance understanding and encourage brevity. Officers and Telecommunicators shall eliminate as many words as possible from a transmission without deprivation of meaning, and avoid uncommon words and phrases that are difficult to understand. 1. Members shall use both formal and impersonal third person language in transmissions. 2. Contractions, such as don't, can't, couldn't, etc., should be avoided for clarity.

3. Radio communications shall be brief and concise. Members will avoid being verbose or long winded, presenting the most direct communication as possible. VI.USEOFTENSIGNALS,"10-CODE" A. The 10 codes were developed to achieve reliability of content and speed; a condensation of several words allowing for brevity and reduction of confusion. The proper use of these signals contribute significantly to the conservation of radio time by restricting the free choice of words to prescribed forms when transmitting information and should be used by members when appropriate. In some situations, plain language should be used. B. The Department recognizes the listed thirty-one (31) common use 10-codes as acceptable communications form, to be used for brevity, in the listed context. An approved 10-code is complete in itself, additional words are seldom necessary and should be avoided. 1. 10-4: Acknowledgement (Okay), use instead of "I understand" or to indicate a positive response to information given. 2. 10-6: Busy, unless urgent: used by officer or telecommunicator to indicate they are not available for further traffic unless of an emergency nature. 3. 10-7: Out of Service: used to indicate officer is "off the air" on an official break from duty. 4. 10-8: In Service: officer is back "on the air" and available to receive calls.

5. 10-9: Repeat: used to indicate a message or information was not understood, say again. 6. 10-10: Fight in Progress: give location and if known, the number of subjects involved and if any weapons are evident. 7. 10-19: Return to: 8. 10-20: Location: request for officer's exact location. 9. 10-21: Call...by telephone: give name and phone number of person to call. 10. 10-22: Disregard: used to indicate the officer/telecommunicator should disregard the message or assignment given. 11. 10-23: Arrived at Scene: officer has arrived at the assignment given. 12. 10-24: Assignment Completed: Officer has completed the assignment and is available for calls. 13. 10-25: Meet with/Report in Person: Report to a specified location in person.

14. 10-27: Driver's License Information: used to request or disseminate information from a person's driver's license. 15. 10-28: Vehicle Registration Information: used to request or convey information regarding vehicle registration, owner, vehicle information. 16. 10-29: Check the Wanted/Stolen: request check to determine if any warrants or stolen reports have been issued for subject, vehicle or articles of property. Check may be automated through the computer system hot files or records of the department. 17. 10-32: Man with Gun: used to alert officers that the subject he may be dealing with is armed with a firearm. 18. 10-33: Emergency Maximum Priority Call: should be used to indicate radio traffic pertaining to danger to life or property. All units not involved in the emergency should maintain radio silence until the emergency is under control or over. 19. 10-46: Assist Motorist: used to indicate a motorist has had a vehicle breakdown and needs help. Give location. If called in by officer, the vehicle registration should also be given. 20. 10-50: Traffic Crash/Accident: (PD: property damage only; PI: injury(s); F: Fatal). 21. 10-55: Suspected DUI: description of vehicle, direction of travel, last known location, time. 22. 10-57: Hit and Run Traffic Crash: give time of occurrence, location, vehicle description, direction of travel. 23. 10-61: Isolate Self for Message: used to indicate the need to convey confidential information to the officer. 24. 10-76: Enroute: going to 25. 10-78: Officer Needs Assistance: request for help, used by officer in requesting help in handling a possibly violent subject or situation, and by the Communication Center as to alert others that an officer needs help as soon as possible. 26. 10-79: Notify Coroner: request coroner be dispatched to specified location and to indirectly report that there has been a death. 27. 10-95: Suspect/Prisoner in Custody: to notify communications of an arrest/person(s) in custody and officer is secure.

28. 10-96: Mental Subject: used to alert officer that subject he is dealing with is a mental case. 29. 10-99: Wanted/Stolen indicated: used to indicate that a wanted or stolen report is on file. *Should not be used as an alert during a Hit procedure. 30. 10-101: Status Check": used by the Communications Center to check the status of an officer(s) on an assignment or traffic stop - "are you okay?" 31. 10-106: "Secure": used by officer in response to a status check, "10-101", to indicate he is secure/busy with assignment, Okay at the time. a. "10-106" is the only appropriate response to a status check. Any other response may generate a dispatch of assistance. C. Other 10-signals should not be used. Officers and telecommunicators will use the equivalent text of other 10-codes when communicating or plain, brief description of problem/assignment.

VII.INQUIRIES:OFFICERINQUIRIESOFTELECOMMUNICATIONS A. Officers shall be familiar and knowledgeable of the telecommunication's requirements for standard inquiries into the Law Enforcement Administration Data System (LEADS) and shall adhere to the standard communications procedures, requests and responses as established in this policy by providing the required information. B. The standard LEADS formats, with the required information fields, are as follows: 1. Registration/License plate information requests: (10-28's) a. Registration/License: _____ b. Registration/License State _____ (if other than Illinois) c. Registration/License Year _____ (if other than Illinois) d. Registration/License Type _____ (if other than a passenger plate. 2. Personal information/Driver's license information requests: (10-27's) a. Name: Last name, first name, middle initial. (Jr-Sr-status not required). SEX: RACE: DATE OF BIRTH: STATE: (if other than Illinois)

b. Driver's License number: _____ State: _____ (if other than Illinois). c. Social Security number: ______ (for wanted inquiry and some states file number). 3. Vehicle: (10-28) a. VIN/vehicle identification number: __________ b. Vehicle year (if other than Illinois) c. Vehicle make (if other than Illinois) d. Vehicle registration State (if other than Illinois) e. owner applied number (personal identifier) 4. GUNS: (for Want/Stolen only) a. Serial number: b. Make/Manufacturer: c. Caliber d. Owner applied number (Personal identifier) 5. ARTICLES: a. Serial number b. Type c. Owner applied number (personal identifier) 6. BOATS: a. Hull number b. Registration number Each inquiry will generate an automated search and response from the computerized "HOT FILES" of LEADS and NCIC. VIII.CALLING/ANSWERINGPROCEDURE

A. When communicating by radio, officers will use their Department service number (DSN) as their designator/call signal and may refer to their district assignment as a second identifier. B. INITIAL CALL-UP 1. For clarity and uniformity, the initial call up will be formal. The calling procedure shall be in the "TO-FROM" format, using the DSN or call station to identify each. EXAMPLE: Charles 101 is calling David 102. The format will be "David 102, Charles 101" 2. Telecommunicators, when dispatching units, the initial call up sequence will be to: a. give location/address of call/incident. b. give the nature of the call, the problem, etc. c. close the dispatch by repeating the location/address. C. CALL ANSWERING 1. For clarity and uniformity, the call answering will be formal and consist of repeating the caller's designator/DSN followed by the respondent's designator/DSN. EXAMPLE: "Charles 101, David 102" the David 102 car is responding to/answering Charles 101. a. The term "go ahead" may be included in the response along with the answering designator/DSN. "Charles 101, David 102, go ahead." D. MULTIPLE CALL UP AND RESPONSE 1. If a multiple call up is broadcast from the Communication Center, the telecommunicator will call up the district of occurrence unit first, followed by the assist units, when the district of occurrence unit is available. 2. If a multiple call up is broadcast, the respondents will answer in the order of the call up. EXAMPLE: A large disturbance is received in the Adam district. The telecommunicator will dispatch: A-101, C-103 and the south Sergeant in G-107. In response, the call will be acknowledged in order by "A-101 then C-103, then G-107." 3. If an "all cars" information is broadcast (missing person, officer safety, etc) the response will be from the district assignment order of A, B, C, D, south, north... E. ACKNOWLEDGEMENT TO THE COMMUNICATIONS CENTER

1. Acknowledgement from a mobil unit will be formal; an acknowledgement by repeating the respondent's designator/DSN and the signal "10-4". F. ACKNOWLEDGEMENT FROM THE COMMUNICATIONS CENTER 1. The telecommunicator will acknowledge the mobile unit's message by the signal "10-4" and the unit's designator/DSN. IX. TELECOMMUNICATOR'S STANDARD RADIO RESPONSES FOR INQUIRIES A. The following steps outline the standard responses to inquiry: 1. Brevity of Response: only essential information will be given initially, with full information available if it is needed. 2. Use of the Word "Clear" will indicate a negative response to a 10-29, check for wanted/ stolen. Clear replaces the varied responses of no wants, no warrants, no stolen, etc. 3. Absence of negative stolen/wanted response on 10-27 and 10-28 inquiries. On these inquiries, the LEADS/NCIC response will not be mentioned unless there is a "Hit", a positive response, or unless one of the hot files is down/slow. a. Even in those cases where there is no indication given of a hot file check, LEADS/NCIC inquiries are automatic. b. If LEADS/NCIC is down or slow, that will be indicated in the response by stating which file was checked (e.g. "Clear LEADS"). B. The three (3) computerized Hot Files which may be checked, depending on the type of inquiry are LEADS, NCIC and REGIS. 1. Illinois vehicle registrations are automatically checked in LEADS and against NCIC records. 2. Out of State vehicle registrations are checked by both LEADS and NCIC. 3. VIN's are checked by both LEADS and NCIC. 4. Names are checked by both LEADS and NCIC. 5. Illinois Driver's License are checked by LEADS/NCIC. C. The following are various response procedures by inquiry.

1. Clear: this term will be used by the Communication Center to indicate a negative response in the computerized hot file(s) inquired on, "NO HIT". If an inquiry normally yields a response from both LEADS and NCIC, "Clear" will indicate a negative response from both files. a. If NCIC is down/slow, the response will be "Clear LEADS". b. If LEADS is down/slow, the response will be "Clear NCIC". c. The use of the term Clear is limited to initial traffic stops, motorist assist and 10-29 only inquiries. 2. Wanted/Stolen 10-29 Responses: a. for Illinois registration request, the telecommunicator will repeat the registration given along with "Clear" or Clear LEADS. b. for Out of State registration request, the telecommunicator will repeat the registration number and state for verification along with "Clear" or "Clear LEADS". c. VIN's will be repeated by the telecommunicator for verification along with "Clear" or "Clear LEADS". d. for Names, the last name of subject will be repeated by the telecommunicator along with "Clear" or "Clear LEADS." 3. Vehicle Registration or VIN 10-28 Responses: On 10-28 responses, the LEADS/NCIC response will not be mentioned unless there is a Hit, stolen/wanted indicated. The standard 10-28 responses will be: a. the vehicle registration, and state if other than Illinois, will be repeated by the telecommunicator for verification, along with: (1) The Name (first, middle, last). (2) City. (3) Vehicle description. (4) The officer must request further if needed. b. Only expired registrations will be indicated including the month/year of expiration after the registration number. c. Only suspended or canceled registrations will be indicated. d. Valid status registrations will not be mentioned.

4. Driver's License, 10-27 Responses a. On 10-27 responses, telecommunicators will not mention the LEADS/NCIC response unless there is a "HIT." The term clear will not be used in 10-27 response; however, clear LEADS or Clear NCIC would be given if a file is down/slow. b. The standard 10-27 response by the telecommunicator will include: (1) Last name of subject for verification. (2) Status of driver's license (valid, suspended, revoked, no valid, etc). (3) License State if other than Illinois) (4) Type/Class (5) Restrictions if indicated (6) Convictions if any,including if a "stop in effect" with the date and reason for stop.

c. A complete 10-27 response is available on request from officer, stating what is needed. d. Traffic Stop/Motorist Assist Response
1. A traffic stop or motorist assist vehicle registration given by the officer will yield a

response from telecommunications indicating the registration for verification along with "Clear" or "Clear LEADS" and the vehicle description. Officers will request additional if needed. X.HITPROCEDURE A. The purpose of this directive is to establish a uniform procedure governing the exchange of wanted/stolen information between the telecommunicator and patrol officer(s) to enhance officer safety. B. DEFINITIONS 1. HIT is a positive response message to an inquiry producing a record from the computerized HOT files of LEADS/NCIC or Department record which is identical to some or all of the identifiers submitted. a. A "HIT" is an investigative tool/information only, which may be used by officers as reasonable grounds for detention of a person or property at the scene. However, only after documented confirmation with the originating agency/authority is probable cause provided

to effect an actual arrest or recovery/seizure of property. 2. VALID HIT contains the identifiers that are an exact match or reasonably close match to the identifiers given in the inquiry. 3. CONFIRMATION is when the originating/authority has been contacted and verified the status. 4. ALERT is either an electronic or verbal signal which indicates to the officer that the telecommunicator has critical information regarding the inquiry and that the officer should isolate himself from the violator to receive further information. The Alert itself does not mean to initiate arrest, but simply that communications has critical information to convey to the officer(s). This will allow for safe and uninterrupted communications between the telecommunicator and officer(s). C. TELECOMMUNICATOR HIT PROCEDURE 1. Upon receiving a positive HIT in a hot file or department record, the telecommunicator will compare the inquiry information with the hit to verify that the identifiers are an exact match. 2. Examine the message key or record label, offense code, miscellaneous field and disposition field to determine the type of hot file, if caution is given, nature of offense, extradition limits and if the hit has been located/flagged by another agency. 3. Alert the officer using the Hit procedure steps. D. HIT PROCEDURE STEPS 1. The telecommunicator will alert the officer executing the following steps if the officer's location is known. If the location is not known, obtain it before preceding with: a. Alert tone (3 seconds) b. Officer designator/unit # c. Location d. Officer designator/unit number e. Location 2. No further information is given to the involved officer until he advised to "go ahead." 3. If no response to the alert is received within twenty (20) seconds, dispatch assistance and generate a second alert using the same procedure.

4. If the officer advises with "go ahead" or the secure signal of "10-106", disseminate the hit record by: a. repeating the inquiry identifiers b. type of hit c. cautions d. offense e. weapons f. visible identifiers (height/weight/hair, etc) g. extradition h. additional information if available, then end the initial hit dissemination by advising "go ahead." 5. The telecommunicator will then confirm the hit information with the originating authority; verify validity of record. E. OFFICER'S HIT PROCEDURE 1. The officer receiving the hit alert should secure/isolate himself from the violator/subject.

2. If the subject(s) are in a position where they can overhear, advise telecommunicator to "standby" until isolated. 3. If subject is secured or officer is isolated, advise the telecommunicator to "Go ahead." 4. Acknowledge receipt of message and provide the telecommunicator with information as to apparent validity of the hit, request assistance or other pertinent information. 5. Keep the telecommunicator informed of your status, advise if subject is in custody (10-95) or if secure (10-106) so the radio can be cleared for other traffic. F. RADIO PRIORITY 1. Other officers should remain attentive and be prepared to respond to the location of the hit to provide assistance if necessary. 2. Radio traffic will be restricted to emergency traffic only to ensure a clear channel for the officer receiving the hit. 3. Officers will refrain from advising their location, asking if help is needed, etc.

4. The area supervisor will respond to the "hit" to provide assistance if available. if the supervisor is unable to respond, the adjoining district assignment, closest unit will respond. XI.STATUSCHECKS A. During high risk calls, fights, disturbances, etc., the telecommunicator shall check the officers status using the code "10-101" at intervals of no longer than five (5) minutes. B. During traffic stops, the telecommunicator shall check the officers status using the code "10101" at intervals of five (5) minutes. C. During other assignments the telecommunicator shall check the officer status using the code "10-101" at ten (10) minute intervals. D. Status checks may be made at more or less frequent intervals depending on the nature of the call/incident, number of officers, etc. E. Officers will respond to the "10-101" status check with "10-106" for secure, or the appropriate 10-signal/message for assistance, situation. The signal "10-106" is a required response to a status check for secure. Any other response may generate an alert for assistance. F. BUILDING SEARCHES 1. When officers enter the building to conduct a search in response to an alarm, open door, etc., they will advise "hold traffic." 2. Radio traffic from other officers should be held or transmitted on another channel. 3. If no further communications other than another "hold traffic" from the search officers occurs within the next ten (10) minutes, the telecommunicator will give the "10-101" status check. 4. With each "hold traffic" broadcast by the search officer(s), the telecommunicator will restart the ten (10) minute time limit. 5. When search officers clear the building, they will notify the telecommunicator so other radio traffic can be cleared to go ahead. XII.ISPERNBROADCASTS A. The officer(s) at the scene for the incident shall transmit the initial ISPERN broadcast request, follow-up and/or additional information from the mobile unit. B. The telecommunicator, as soon as possible, will follow up the broadcast with a teletype hard copy administrative message, an "L-11" ISPERN message, with all pertinent information.

XIII.DOMESTICDISTURBANCES A. Telecommunicators/officers receiving reports of domestic violence shall make every effort to obtain the listed information and include that information to responding officers. Questions to be asked by the call taker: 1. Address/location of disturbance. 2. Name of caller. 3. Where calling from. 4. Telephone number of caller/where call is placed from. 5. Who is involved, causing the disturbance, and the relationship. 6. What is occurring - what is happening. 7. Is there weapons involved, weapons in the house or accessible to the combatants, where are the weapons at. 8. Are there other people involved beside the combatant(s), how many. 9. Does the troublemaker know you are calling the police. 10. Has the combatants been drinking or using drugs. 11. If possible obtain full name and date of birth of troublemaker, if there is an order of protection or if troublemaker is known to be wanted. XIV.SIMULCASTDISPATCHING A. To insure the quickest and safest response of both the police and Fire Department personnel, the telecommunicator will simulcast the broadcast, assigning the patrol unit(s) during the broadcast. B. Immediately following the simulcast message, the telecommunicator will confirm the assignment of the police patrol unit(s). C. Only the patrol unit(s) dispatched will respond to the incident/scene. XV.FIRE/EMSDISPATCHING A. During times when dispatching EMS units for any type of call, the telecommunicators will follow the EMD protocols per their training. Telecommunicators will ascertain as much information as possible, dispatch the EMS units, and where practical and feasible continue

speaking with the caller and updating EMS until their arrival. B. When dispatching fire units, the telecommunicators will try to ascertain basic information, as in confirming the address if different than the 9-1-1 screen, if fire or smoke is visible, if any persons are trapped inside, if hazardous materials are present, or any other information as may be deemed pertinent. Where practical, the caller will be kept on the line and additional information relayed to the responding fire units. XVI.EMERGENCYWARNINGSIRENSYSTEM A. Telecommunicators and Watch Commanders are to provide for alerting of the public in times of severe weather and or dangerous circumstances. 1. The Emergency Warning Sirens will be sounded if any of the below conditions arise: a. If the National Weather Bureau or local television or radio stations issue a tornado warning for Madison County without any further specific information. b. If the National Weather Service Alert radio, at the OIC desk, activates with a warning applicable for our area. c. If seventy (70) mile an hour winds are forecast by the National Weather Bureau or local television or radio. d. If a tornado, funnel cloud, is sighted by a patrol officer or reported by a citizen within ten (10) miles of Granite City. e. If directed by the mayor, Director of ESDA or other competent authority, should conditions or circumstances arise. 2. When it becomes apparent that weather conditions are no longer severe and/or the dangerous circumstances have passed, the OIC will give the "All Clear" notification to the public. This will be done as follows: a. Press Warning Tones Button b. Scroll to "Public Address" c. Select "ALL" Key (or address for individual siren) d. Press SEND e. TALK (Speak slowly) (1) Give "ALL CLEAR ALL CLEAR" FOUR (4) TIMES

WAIT ONE (1) MINUTE (2) Give "ALL CLEAR ALL CLEAR" FOUR (4) TIMES WAIT ONE (1) MINUTE (3) Give "ALL CLEAR ALL CLEAR" FOUR (4) TIMES f. SCROLL TO "CANCEL" g. PRESS SEND 3. The first Tuesday of every month is designated as a test date for the emergency siren system. The test is to be conducted at 10:00 a.m. Consideration shall be shown to current weather conditions and the testing may be held in abeyance if inclement weather is present.

2 Procedure #5.308 GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title:

REVIEW OF RADIO AND TELEPHONEProcedure: 5.308 TAPE RECORDINGS Date Issued: Revised:

I.PURPOSE

A.To provide guidelines for review of radio and telephone tape recordings.

II.POLICY

A.All telephone calls into the CommunicationsCenter and voice communications on the police
radio frequencies will be recorded on a tape logging device. These tape recordings will be retained for at least 20 days before being recycled.

III.PROCEDURE

A. All communications center personnel will be familiar with the operation of the Communications Recording System and the Call-Check Recording System.

B.The Communications Recording System is recorded to hard drive. The following information is recorded:

1.time

2.date

3.telephone conversations of each dispatch position 4.main police radio frequency transmissions 5.alternate police radio frequency transmissions
C.A Call Check System is used at each dispatch position. This system records up to one hour of conversation at each position before the tape is automatically reused. The primary use of this system is to allow immediate recall of any telephone or radio conversation.


D. All tapes, the contents of recorded tapes, or recordings from tapes will be treated as department property and will not be released to any member of the public without permission of the Chief of Police or Assistant Chief of Police.

E. The Assistant Chief of Police will randomly review portions of taped conversations of telephone and radio transmissions. These reviews will check for proper procedure, clarity of recording, and verification of the logs and operation.

F. Any supervisor may request a copy of a recorded telephone or radio transmission. All requests will be made in writing to the Assistant Chief of Police. The request will contain the date and time of the transmission, and a full explanation of the reason for the request.

1. No tape recordings will be made from the call check device without the approval of the Chief of Police or Assistant Chief of Police.

G. Any malfunction of the Dictaphone Communications Recording System or the Call Check System will be reported to the Assistant Chief of Police.

H. Any request for a copy of any recording by an attorney will only be granted with a Court Subpoena. A fee for the cost of the tape may be charged.

Procedure #5.309

GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title:COMMUNICATIONS CENTER SECURITY, Procedure:5.309 EQUIPMENT FAILURE AND ALTERNATE DISPATCH AND POWER CAPABILITIES DateIssued: Revised:

I. PURPOSE A. To provide guidelines for the security of Communications Center Personnel and its components. B. To outline procedures to be followed if there is a failure or malfunction of telephone, radio or computer components of the communications system. C. To outline Alternate Dispatch and Power capabilities of the Communications System. II. POLICY A. The Communications component of the Department is essential in providing quick, effective and efficient service to both the civilian population and Department employees. Maintaining physical security is an important component of every employee's job responsibility. Proper security measures cover the physical facility as well as authorizing individuals to enter the building. Maintaining communications center equipment at peak operating levels is imperative to the safety of officers and citizens. Malfunctions are to be addressed quickly and effectively. Provisions for alternate power and telecommunications capabilities in the public safety building and at an alternate communications center are in place. III. PROCEDURE

A. SECURITY 1. Access to the Communications Center is restricted. Personnel authorized to enter the communications center are: a. On duty Communications Center personnel. b. On-duty watch commander.

c. Employees performing desk relief. d. Persons approved by the Chief of Police or Assistant Chief of Police. e. Outside vendors performing maintenance. f. Employees who have a necessary immediate need to access information in the Communications Center that cannot be obtained by contacting the telecommunicator over the intercom or telephone. 2. The Communications Center is not to be used for completing reports or personal business of any kind. 3. Communications Center personnel shall not let unauthorized individuals past the front security door. Other City employees or elected officials may be allowed into the public safety building. Any other person must be accompanied by a Police Department employee. A visitors tag will be issued if that person is allowed free access to the building. An exception can be made for those persons recognized by Communications Center personnel known to have legitimate business in the police building provided they are wearing a recognizable company uniform, and police officers in uniform or displaying a badge. Anyone waiting to talk to a police employee will wait in the outer area.
B. ALTERNATE DISPATCH CENTER-BUILDING EVACUATION

1. The Emergency Operations Center (EOC) is located in the Fire Department Facility. This center allows for duplicate dispatching capability in the event the police department communications center becomes inoperative because of a problem with the Police Departments console and not the radio system. Anytime the EOC is activated the Chief of Police, Assistant Chief of Police, and the Fire Chief will immediately be notified. 2. In the event of a malfunction that affects both the Fire and Police Departments consoles, but not the radio system, a portable radio can be used.
C. ALTERNATE POWER SOURCE

1. If there is a loss of commercial power to the public safety building the emergency power generator will start automatically. The telecommunicator should be prepared to do the following: a. Reset equipment that was temporarily without power. b. Notify the watch commander that the public safety building is operating on emergency power.

2. The emergency power generator is located in the rear of the Police Department. This generator will supply emergency power to all emergency lighting, communications and telephone equipment until normal power can be restored. 3. If there is a loss of commercial power and the emergency power generator should fail, there will be temporary power supplied by battery. This power will be limited to approximately 30 minutes for emergency spot lights, telephones and computers. 4. When a total loss of power occurs, the telecommunicator will: Use the portable radio located in the communications center. a. Notify the watch commander b. Notify the Fire Department.
D. EQUIPMENT FAILURE

1. Routine malfunctions of communications center equipment which are not of a critical or urgent nature will be documented and reported to the Assistant Chief of Police. 2. For urgent or critical malfunctions notify the Assistant Chief of Police immediately during his normal tour of duty. If he is unavailable notify the service providers as outlined below.
3. The telecommunicator at the beginning of every shift will test the E911 lines at the Public

Safety Answering Point (PSAP). The test involves pressing the first E911 button, if a fast busy signal is heard, this indicates that the line is functioning properly. The remaining E911 lines should be tested in the same fashion. If a problem is detected on any of the E911 lines, Ameritech must be contacted by the telecommunicator conducting the test. 4. Critical malfunctions of communications center equipment are to be immediately called in to the proper service provider. A critical malfunction is one that affects the E911 equipment, incoming E911 calls, ANI and ALI display and transfer, E911 printer, Police Departments radio console affecting high and low bands and fire band. 5. If E911 system becomes inoperative, the E911 computer should automatically re-route E911 calls. The calls can be manually routed. The manual transfer would be done if the automatic transfer fails or the police station has to be evacuated.

Procedure #5.311

GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title:RADIO, TELEPHONE, DATAProcedure:5.311 AND ALARM MONITORING DateIssued: Revised:

I. POLICY A. To outline the various components of the police communications function. B. Radio communications, telephone use, and data communications are essential components of the public safety dispatch process. The Department will maintain a system that uses all components in providing efficient and effective service to citizens. II. PROCEDURE

A.RADIO COMMUNICATIONS
1. The Department maintains a communications unit that is responsible for the radio communications functions. Radio communications is a key component of the Departments communications system. 2. The radio communications function will be conducted in accordance with Federal Communications Commission (FCC) procedures and requirements. 3. Two-way radio communications will be maintained with officers on duty on a twenty-four (24) hour basis. All field units will be equipped with multi-channel portable or mobile units. The dispatch center will monitor several frequencies and maintain the ability to communicate with municipal public safety units regardless of Department, if there is an emergency. The frequencies monitored are: a. Main Police Frequency b. Alternate Police Frequency Main Fire Frequency c. State Police Emergency Frequency (ISPERN)

d. IREACH
B. TELEPHONE COMMUNICATIONS

1. The Department maintains a communications unit that is responsible for the telephone communications function. Telephone communications is a second key component of the agency's communications system. a. The Department maintains twenty-four (24) hour telephone communications service through its 9-1-1 enhanced telephone system. Access is available within the municipal jurisdiction toll free. Misdirected 9-1-1 calls are rerouted to the proper agency through fast transfer buttons. b. In addition, the Department maintains twenty-four (24) hour telephone communications service through a secondary emergency telephone number. Non-emergency calls, if received on emergency lines, are referred to the proper telephone number or agency. c. Non-emergency telephone inquiries are received or made through a separate telephone number to aid in keeping emergency lines available. d. Emergency calls which are received by this agency but intended for another agency will be accepted, the information obtained from the caller and then promptly relayed to the appropriate agency. Non-emergency calls will be referred to the proper agency but that department will not be contacted by dispatch center personnel. e. Emergency notifications will be accepted and delivered to individuals within our jurisdiction when: f. There is the need to check on the well being of any individual who has not had contact with family or close friends for an extended period of time. g. The request is from another public safety agency, or medical facility and they have been unable to contact the individual through normal channels. h. The situation requiring notification is of an emergency or critically important nature and requires the person to be notified immediately and in person. i. The department maintains access for hearing impaired individuals on a twenty-four (24) hour basis. This line is connected to special keyboard equipped phone instruments for communication with hearing impaired individuals.
C. DATA COMMUNICATIONS

1. The Department maintains a communications unit that shares the responsibility for data entry with the records unit. Automated data communications is a third component of the communications system. a. The Department maintains data communication on a twenty-four (24) hour basis. Field units equipped with mobile data terminals have direct access to LEADS and NCIC through the Department operated dispatch computer staffed 24 hours by LEADS certified personnel. b. Articles reported as stolen will be entered into the state LEADS and national NCIC computer system as soon as sufficient information is available from field units. The proper control number verifying entry will be placed in the proper area on the report form. Entry will follow the guidelines established by the state LEADS System. Recent stolen vehicle information will be disseminated by watch commanders during roll call. c. Access to CHRI, LEADS and NCIC data is limited to criminal justice agencies and for criminal justice purposes only. These networks shall not be used for personal reasons and not disseminated to any individual or organization that is not legally authorized to have access to the information.

3 Procedure #5.312 GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title: 5.312

COMMUNICATIONS CENTER

Procedure:

OPERATIONS AND RESOURCES

Date Issued:

Revised:

I.

PURPOSE

A. To establish the authority and responsibility of personnel assigned to the communication component for dispatching of radio calls. B. To provide guidelines to department personnel on radio operations and communications center procedure.

C.

To provide documentation on the operations and activities of the communication center.

D. To provide information on non-departmental resources available to communications center personnel including duty rosters. II. POLICY

A. Department personnel shall utilize the police radio system only for the proper transmission of department information and in accordance with FCC regulations. Messages should be kept professional, concise and as complete as possible. The basic function of communications is to satisfy the immediate information needs of the police department during its normal daily activities and during emergencies. It is the latter situation that places the greatest demands upon the communications system and tests the capabilities of both the equipment and personnel. Department personnel will not misuse or disrupt the radio system by transmitting unauthorized or unprofessional messages. III. A. PROCEDURE FUNCTIONS

1. The Communications unit is part of the Patrol Division. This unit is composed non sworn personnel under the supervision of the Patrol Division Commander.

2. The Communications unit is responsible for radio communications, telephone communications, operation of automated data systems, and monitoring the burglar and fire alarms connected to the Department's alarm board. 3. The basic functions of the communication unit include: receipt of emergency requests for service, dispatch and monitoring of police and fire units, recording of incident data, transmission and reception of data to and from the automated state information file, monitoring of the alarm board, handling walk in complaints and other such duties as assigned by the Patrol Diivision Commander. B. AUTHORITY AND RESPONSIBILITY

1. The communications unit is responsible for all department radio communications including reception, coordination and dispatching of radio traffic. 2. The telecommunicator has the authority to use any available officer, regardless of beat or assignment, to meet the primary objective of rapid delivery of emergency services. Use of the most available officer is based on the premise that the telecommunicator is in the best position to make an immediate determination of officer availability and the seriousness of the call. 3. Geographic beats are to be respected so long as they do not hinder service response in emergency situations. 4. The authority exercised by the telecommunicator is not to be debated, on the radio or by other means, in such a way as to interfere with the delivery of service. Anyone having objections to a particular dispatch is to relay their objection to their immediate supervisor. 5. The foregoing is not intended to prevent or interfere with a watch commanders exercise of their position, authority and responsibility. The watch commander in charge of the shift will have the final determination of which and how many officers will be assigned to answer a call. 6. Normal communications center shift activities and decisions are the watch commanders responsibility. The watch commander is the telecommunicators immediate supervisor.

C. RADIO PROTOCOL 1. Telecommunicators and all other department personnel using radio communication will strive to adhere to the following protocol: a. Telecommunicators, when dispatching a one unit call will call the unit number, wait for the unit to verbally respond, advise the unit of the location, nature of the call and the complainants name. The unit will acknowledge. b. For a two unit call, the telecommunicator will call the primary unit number first and the secondary unit number next. The primary unit will respond and then the secondary unit will respond. The telecommunicator will then advise the units of the location and nature of the call. After the primary unit has acknowledged, the secondary will acknowledge.

2. When officers are called by the telecommunicator over the radio, they will promptly reply. If after several attempts, a unit fails to acknowledge, the telecommunicator will notify the watch commander. 3. Officers assigned to a patrol unit are required to carry their portable radio with them, turned on, at all times while on duty. 4. Investigators are responsible for maintaining contact with the communications center at all times during their tour of duty. 5. Each officer is assigned a personal radio call number. Radio call numbers will be used to call personnel over the radio. Names will not normally be used. 6. The main police frequency is commonly referred to as high band. The alternate police frequency is commonly referred to as low band or band two. The proper procedure for switching frequencies is to call on the main frequency for a frequency change. 7. Officers initiating traffic stops will inform the communications center of the traffic stop by radio. The telecommunicator will note the location, license number or vehicle description, unit number and time of the stop for officer safety purposes. 8. When there is heavy high band traffic, telecommunicators will more closely monitor band two for officer radio traffic. D. MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION

1. An information binder(s) and/or computer file will also be maintained in the communications center concerning information on: a. b. c. d. e. f. the current officer in charge of the Department; a current duty roster (schedule) for all Department personnel; a current listing of the telephone numbers of all Department employees; a listing of telephone contact numbers for local Police and Fire departments; contact listings for animal control or other similar type problems; and, other emergency service agencies that are important to provide service to local citizens.

E. Dissemination and Use of CHRI (Criminal History Record Information) LEADS(Law Enforcement Agency Data System) and NCIC (National Crime Information Center)inquiries a. access to CHRI, LEADS and NCIC data is limited to criminal justice agencies and for criminal justice purposes only. These networks shall not be used for personal reasons and not disseminated to any individual or organization that is not legally authorized to have access to the information.

b. Violations of this policy may result in disciplinary action, civil proceedings and criminal prosecution.

Procedure #5.313

GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title:INITIAL INCIDENT RECORDINGProcedure:5.313 AND OFFICER STATUS TRACKING DateIssued: Revised:

I. PURPOSE A. To outline an incident reporting system to be used by communications personnel. B. To provide for a method of tracking and reporting officer status. II. POLICY A. The Department will maintain a comprehensive reporting system to record requests for police service. Part of that system will include the continual monitoring, through NWS program, of the status of field units to ensure both officer safety and prompt delivery of police services to the public. III. PROCEDURE A. Certain information will be recorded for all requests for police service. There will be times when this information will be reorded by the Officer on their Mobile Unit with the NWS. All information will include, but shall not be limited to: 1. the name and address of the complainant (if known); 2. the nature of the service request; 3. the location of the reported incident; 4. the primary officer assigned; 5. the identification of all assisting units; 6. the time the officers returned to service; 7. the Incident Number assigned to the service request; and,

8. the disposition of the call which will be entered by the Officer in NWS. B. This information will be entered into the Computer database (NWS) by communications center personnel. These recordings will help evaluate non-patrol time for planning purposes. C. Each service request will be assigned a unique incident number. This incident number will serve as the basis for the filing of reports associated with the incidents. D. As much relevant information as possible should be obtained by communications center personnel to enhance officer safety and assist officers in anticipating the conditions to be encountered at the scene. Careful attention should be paid to obtaining information during inprogress or potentially serious incidents and such information shall be promptly disseminated to responding units. Procedures for obtaining such relevant information are available in the Communications Operations Manual. E. Communications center personnel will monitor officer status. They will verify and update each officers status as often as necessary depending on the type of call, by use of a status check. F. A map, detailing the jurisdiction of the Department, including the outline of the patrol zones, will be displayed in the dispatch center for operator reference. This map may be used to aid operators in determining the proper units to be dispatched.

4 Procedure #5.400 GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title: 5.400

RECORDS ADMINISTRATION Procedure:

Date Issued:

Revised:

I.PURPOSE

A. To document the responsibilities of the records and communications units basic to meeting the needs of the department for records management.

B.To outline audit and retention schedules of police records.

II.POLICY

A. The Police Department maintains a comprehensive reporting system to record all requests for police services. The records system will record actions taken by law enforcement personnel whether in response to a request for service or for self initiated actions.

B. Communications and records personnel will share the responsibility for data entry, distribution and filing of department records.

III.PROCEDURE

A.

RESPONSIBILITY AND FUNCTION

1. The communications unit is a component of the Patrol Division and is under the direct supervison of the Patrol Division Commnder. The communications unit is responsible for all data entry and recond keeping with respect to the LEADS system.

2. The records units is a component of the Service Division and is under the direct supervision of the Assistant Chief of Police. The records unit is responsible for the records function of the Department.

3. The Assistant Chief of Police is responsible for developing and modifying all department forms. The forms will be reviewed on an as needed basis to ensure that they are still consistent with

department needs. The review process will include personnel in the units that will use and process the forms.

4. The Assistant Chief of Police is responsible for inspecting the overall operation and administration of Departmental records to ensure all units are performing properly. This includes the complaint control recording and field reporting process to ensure that the original report is maintained and that the correct control number is assigned and accounted.

5. The records function is responsible for reviewing, controlling, maintaining, retrieving, and auditing department records and reports. These functions include:

a. The review of reports for completeness, accuracy, and to verify that all documents are accounted.

b. The responsibility for security, confidentiality, routing of records to units or individuals,

and ensuring that a record will be made of each request for police service.

c. The responsibility for keeping records current and purging records according to the retention schedule developed for the Department by the Local Records Commission.

d.The retrieval of reports or documents to be copied and distributed.

e. Once filed, no original report or any attachments thereto shall be removed from the file room without the permission of the Assistant Chief of Police.

6. The Records unit will maintain a repository of original records, including offense reports,
adult arrest reports, criminal history information, and traffic crash reports. These reports will be filed separately by number and kept active for at least two (2) calendar years. Reports will then become inactive and placed in storage. Records will be available to all authorized operations personnel at all times.

7. The Records unit will maintain the case and arrest records needed for court of all persons arrested by the Department. When a case has been adjudicated the final court disposition will be recorded.

8.Records maintenance for other operational components of the Department is as follows:

a. The Criminal Investigations Unit will maintain a secured original file regarding the Department's intelligence and organized crime files, a secured file on informants, and juvenile arrest reports.

b. The Patrol Divisoin Commander will maintain a file on personnel training, and other administrative areas.

c. The Office of the Chief will maintain the Departments personnel records, grievances, citizen complaints and completed internal investigations.

d.The Patrol Division Commander will maintain a secure active internal investigations file.

e. The Administration Division Commander will maintain files on equipment and property, and accreditation. 9.Every incident in one or more of the following categories, if alleged to have occurred within the jurisdiction, will be reported:

a.citizen reports of crime

b.citizen complaints

c. citizen requests for services when an officer is dispatched, and an employee is assigned to investigate, or an employee is assigned to take action at a later time

d.criminal and non-criminal cases initiated by police officers

e.incidents involving arrests, citations (specific offenses), or summonses

10.Reports and records that document police activity will include the following information:

a.date and time of the initial reporting

b.name, if available, of the citizen requesting the service, or victim's or complainant's name

c.nature of the incident

d.nature, date, and time of action taken, if any, by the Department member

11. A single numbering system will be used to document all incidents of law enforcement service, including traffic crash investigations and miscellaneous calls for service. Complaint Report (CR) numbers will be assigned by the telecommunicators for all requests for police service. The number will be assigned chronologically with the first two digits representing the current calendar year followed by a hyphen then the individual chronological number. Each service request will receive only one number and each number will be different.

12.Each person who is custodially arrested by a member of the Department will be assigned a Department arrest number. Each person will receive only one number by New World System and each number will be different.

13. All crimes and service call information will be properly coded by Communications unit personnel. All arrest information will be properly coded by Records unit personnel The coding will be done according to Uniform Crime Reporting standards. All call records and crime data will be transmitted to the state for inclusion in state and federal crime reporting programs.

14.Records on juveniles will be maintained separate from adults.

B.

TRAFFIC RECORDS

1.The Records unit shall have the primary responsibility for the processing, maintenance and distribution of traffic records. Monthly traffic crash data and enforcement activities will be distributed

as a part of the Department report. Traffic crash information collected will be sent to the Department of Transportation to ensure the Department's participation in Local Area Reference System (LARS).

2. Retention and purging of traffic records will be determined by the retention schedule established by the Assistant Chief of Police and State and Federal Law. Crash reports will be released to the insurance company or vehicle owner upon request, or when subpoenaed by the court.

3.The traffic record system will contain the following:

a.traffic crash data reports, investigations and locations

b.traffic enforcement data citations, arrests, dispositions and locations

c.roadway hazard reports

d.traffic crash and enforcement analysis reports

4. The format for summary reports should identify traffic problem areas, type of problem and counter measures suggested to relieve the problem.

5. The Department maintains a computerized system for the recording of crash and citation locations. This information will be periodically forwarded to Patrol Division supervisors for planning and appropriate enforcement action.

6. Supervisors will review traffic crash reports to ensure they are submitted in a timely manner and contain complete and accurate information.

C.

MASTER INDEX

1. The Department maintains a computerized master index file. This file contains the names of persons identified in field case reports who meet the following criteria; a.arrestees

b.witnesses

c.suspects

d.complainants

e.victims

f.missing persons

g.drivers involved in traffic crashes

2. The Department maintains an automated index of incidents and arrests by location and type. This index can provide summaries of all verified offenses and services by beat and sub beat through the location codes.

D.CRIME AND INCIDENT REPORTING SYSTEM MANUAL

1. Specific forms are used to document incidents and investigations. A Crime and Incident Reporting System Manual is provided for detailed instructions on the completion of the following case report forms:

a.General case report;

b.Worthless document report;

c.Missing person report;

d.Juvenile contact report;

e.Traffic crash report;

f.Evidence/Property inventory report;

g.Motor vehicle theft report;

h.Vehicle recovery report;

i.Use of force report;

j.Supplementary report;

k.Motor vehicle impoundment and inventory report

l.Victim information notice.

E.PRIVACY AND SECURITY

1. The Records unit has the responsibility and is accountable for ensuring that records are properly secured and the privacy of individuals is maintained according to the law and as provided for by the Freedom of Information Act.

2.Records will be properly secured when not being used.

3. Access to data within the Records unit is accessible to operations personnel through the computer terminal. During normal work hours operations personnel have access to the Records unit as authorized by the supervisor, after normal working hours operations personnel have access to central records through the authorization of the Watch Commander.

Procedure #5.406

GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title:

BOND PROCESSING - CASH RECEIPTS Procedure: 5.406

Date Issued: Revised:

I. PURPOSE A. To provide accountability for all cash bonds received by sworn officers of the Department. B. To document a chain of custody for all bond receipts from acceptance to transmittal to the Court. C. To provide a guideline in the handling of funds by Department employees. II. POLICY A. Police employees will, generally, not handle monetary funds as a matter of their job responsibilities. The Police Department will, however, safeguard the legal rights of all persons in custody including their right to bond. Members of the department will handle bond money in such a manner as to ensure accountability from the time it is received to the time it is transmitted to the Court. III. PROCEDURE A. Police employees will generally not handle monetary funds. However, the Supreme Court Rules provide for bail schedules for traffic offenses, ordinance offenses, business offenses and misdemeanors. Only sworn officers of the Department are allowed to accept cash for bonding procedures. B. Sworn officers of the Department should be familiar with Practice Rules for the proper application of the bail schedules. C. A prisoner may be released from police custody when an appropriate cash bond is posted. Officers will ensure that cash bonds are properly handled. An officer who receives a cash bond will complete the appropriate bond forms. One copy will be given to the prisoner as a receipt. 1. The remaining copies of the bond receipt and the cash bond will be secured in an envelope, labeled for court, and secured in the court lock box that is located in the OIC area.

D. Officers will never void a Bond Receipt/Sheet without permission of the watch commander. If a Bond Receipt/Sheet is voided Officers must mark the Bond Receipt/Sheet with VOID across it and send it to the Clerk of the Circuit Court.

Procedure #5.407

GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title:ARREST WARRANTS AND OTHERProcedure:5.407 LEGAL PROCESS PROCEDURES DateIssued: Revised:

I. PURPOSE A. To outline a procedure for arresting a person wanted on a warrant. B. To document and control warrants received for service by this Department. C. To outline responsibilities of certain personnel as they pertain to the administration and delivery of legal process services. D. To outline a procedure for the expungement of arrest records. II. POLICY A. The Police Department will maintain accurate records of persons wanted and arrested on warrants. The Department will take an active role in serving its warrants as well as those from other law enforcement agencies for persons believed to live in the City. It is the policy of this Department to support the judicial system and efficiently process the legal documents delivered for service. B. DEFINITIONS 1. A warrant of arrest is a written order from a court directed to a peace officer, or some other person specifically named, commanding him to arrest a person. 2. A summons is a written order issued by a court that commands a person to appear before a court at a stated time and place. 3. A writ is an order issued from a court requiring the performance of a specified act, or giving authority to have it done. 4. A subpoena is a command to appear at a certain time and place to give testimony upon a certain matter.

III. PROCEDURE
A. ADMINISTRATION AND RECORDS

1. The Assistant Chief of Police is responsible for maintaining an accurate and up to date file system for warrants, summons, subpoenas, and other legal documents received from the courts. 2. Warrants will be maintained in a file in the communications unit and will be accessible to Department personnel on a twenty-four (24) hour basis. 3. Information from warrants will contain the following information: a. date of issuance b. type of legal process c. nature of document d. source of document e. name of plaintiff/complainant or name of defendant f. officer assigned for service g. date of assignment h. court case number i. date of service j. bond amount k. geographic limits 4. The records clerk will attach the original warrant to the warrant control card and place it in the master file. 5. The Department participates in the Law Enforcement Agency Data System (LEADS) and the National Crime Information Center (NCIC) which have computerized wanted persons files. These wanted persons files contain descriptions and identifiers for persons who are being sought by the law enforcement agencies. The criteria for entering notices into these information systems are provided in the LEADS and NCIC Operations Manuals.

6. All warrants received from the County Clerks office by the records unit will be forwarded to the communications unit for entry into the LEADS system. Communications unit personnel will enter the LEADS number on the warrant control card, and initial it. 7. Warrants will not be removed from the communications unit except, as listed in this procedure, or with the permission of the Assistant Chief of Police. 8. When a request is received from another agency to serve their warrant, subpoena, summons, or notice to appear on a resident, the records unit will forward the request to the. This department will attempt to serve criminal warrants from other jurisdictions provided the warrant is entered in the LEADS system, and/or is active in the County Clerks data base. 9. Property received by this department pursuant to delivery of legal process services will be accounted for by the completion of an Evidence/Property Inventory Report. 10. Property acquired through the legal process will be disposed of by the Department pursuant to court order and state statute.
B. ARREST WARRANTS

1.Only sworn officers of this department will serve arrest warrants or other legal process documents. 2. Officers may not leave the city to serve a warrant without the watch commanders approval. When entering another jurisdiction to serve a warrant, the officer should notify that Department and, if necessary, request assistance. 3. Watch commanders will check the warrant clipboard before the start of each shift and assign an officer for warrant service. Watch commanders will assign officers for warrant service baseduponstaffing and type of warrant for service. 4. Officers will verify a warrant with the originating law enforcement agency before attempting to serve it. Officers shall reasonably guarantee the identity of arrestee by sufficient identification documents. LEADS will be checked to verify that the warrant is still valid, the warrant number, bond amount, and issuing judge. 5. If an arrest is made, a warrant arrest report will be completed for each arrest warrant under the original case report number. It will be used to describe the following: a. date and time served b. name of officer c. name of arrestee d. method of service

e. location of service f. name of person from originating agency notified g. date and time of cancellation and notification h. if arrestee was bonded out from here or another agency 6. If an arrest is made on a warrant from another law enforcement agency, and that person posts bond, the telecommunicator will send a LEADS message to that department advising them of the arrest and requesting bonding information. This message should be complete so the originating agency may cancel their warrant from LEADS.
C. ARRESTED SUBJECT WITH OUT OF STATE WARRANT

1. If a subject is arrested and it is determined that there is an out of state warrant for him the following procedure should be followed: a. If felony charges are going to be requested, the normal procedure for handling felony cases should be followed b. If the subject was arrested for a misdemeanor, traffic or ordinance violation and the out of state warrant is for a felony, determine if the out of state authority will extradite. If they immediately advise that they will not, then proceed with the local charge. If the out out state authority will extradite, the arresting officer will obtain the necessary information from the out of state authority so that a fugitive from justice warrant can be obtained, and the appropriate report will be completed. The subject will be placed on felony hold per normal procedure.
D. WARRANT CANCELLATION

1. Upon confirmation that a warrant has been served by our officers, as evidenced by a completed warrant arrest form, the telecommunicator will cancel the LEADS wanted message and record the date and time of cancellation on the printed LEADS sheet. 2. Any warrant executed by another agency will be canceled when our department is advised the subject has bonded out or when our department has custody of them. 3. The telecommunicator is also responsible for canceling the warrant in the master LEADS file in the communications room. LEADS/NCIC cancellation or LOCATE should include time, date, and operator's initials.

4. When notified that another agency has arrested a person on our warrant, and that person has posted the required bond with that agency, the officer will forward to the records unit the warrant arrest form including cancellation, bond receipt number, and court date. 5. When an arrest warrant is quashed in court we will receive a recall notice from the court and the warrant will be cancelled in LEADS. 6. A request to purge warrants that can no longer be executed because of various reasons can be accomplished by completing a request for warrant recall and case dismissal form. This form is prepared by records for each warrant, signed by the Assistant Chief fo Police and forwarded to the District Court. The following reasons are justifiable: a. case was previously disposed of in court b. victim does not wish to prosecute c. victim cannot be located d. arresting officer died, retired or moved away e. police report is unavailable f. evidence was destroyed g. defendant is deceased
E. CIVIL PROCESS

1. Sworn officers of the Police Department will not generally serve or enforce documents of civil process absent the specific direction of competent and applicable authority. As a matter of routine the County Sheriff's Department will fulfill all civil process requirements and responsibilities. 2. Requests for civil process service must be reviewed and approved by the Assistant Chief of Police prior to service. 3. Civil process documents that do not mandate service by officers of this Department are to be referred to the County Sheriff's Department. 4. Property, real or personal, seized pursuant to a court order will only be seized by a sworn officer. The officer will generate an offense report and complete an evidence/property receipt. F. ORDER TO EXPUNGE

1. An adult (or a minor prosecuted as an adult) who has been arrested may petition the circuit court, where the charge was filed, to have the arrest record and the circuit courts records relating to the arrest expunged from the Police Departments official records and the clerk of the circuit courts records under the following circumstances in accordance with State law:

a. The individual must not have a previous conviction for a criminal offense or a municipal ordinance violation and, b. The individual who is petitioning the court must have been acquitted or have been released without having been convicted on the charge he is seeking to have expunged from the official records.

Procedure #5.500

POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title:COLLECTION, PACKAGING ANDProcedure:5.500PRESERVATION OF EVIDENCE PRESERVATION OF EVIDENCE DateIssued: Revised:

1. PURPOSE: 1. To increase the effectiveness of the Department's evidence processing and collection. 2. To establish procedures for the proper packaging of evidence. 3. To ensure the proper control of all evidence and inventoried property. 4. To establish procedures for maintaining integrity in the chain of evidence. 2. POLICY:
The Department recognizes that successful prosecution of criminal offenders, and other police related matters are directly linked to a thorough evidence collection and preservation process. Our responsibility in the evidence chain requires that personnel be properly trained in evidence recognition and collection procedures, and certain items collected during an investigation should be forwarded to the proper agency for testing and identification. Research has clearly shown that physical evidence must be identified, collected, preserved and transmitted properly if laboratory support resources are to be used effectively. This Department will ensure that evidence in its custody be properly secured, stored, readily retrieved and that all changes in custody have been properly and fully documented.

3. DEFINITIONS:
CHAIN OF CUSTODY: The continuity of the custody of physical evidence -- from time of original collection to final disposal. IMPOUNDING OFFICER: The officer who initially receives the evidence and initiates the chain of custody. PHYSICAL EVIDENCE: investigation. Any substance or material found or recovered in connection with a criminal

EVIDENCE CUSTODIAN: A member of the Police Department, typically within the Administrative Services Division, accountable for control and maintenance of all evidence and property submitted. EVIDENCE/PROPERTY ROOM: Facilities utilized by this Department for the storage of evidence property.

4. PROCEDURE:
CRIMESCENERESPONSIBILITY

1. The primary officer assigned to the call is responsible to secure and protect the crime scene. When processing consists only of the physical inspection and evaluation of the scene or the collection of an obvious item of evidence, this task will be the responsibility of the primary officer. In more serious cases, crime scene processing will be the responsibility of an investigator.
2. The investigator responding to a crime scene or incident will be responsible for photographing, video taping, collecting, preserving, documenting, transporting, inventorying, and securing all evidence. 3. Officers will only use those methods and procedures that have been established and recognized in the field to process physical evidence, preserve the condition of evidence, perform the collection of evidence, and ensure as complete a sample as possible and practical. Specific guidelines that govern the processing of physical evidence in the field and conditions for packaging and submission are covered in the Evidence Technician Manual.

4. Non-perishable evidence will be secured in the property lockers until the evidence custodian transfers it to
the property room. All evidence must be properly secured in the property lockers by locking the locker, removing the key and depositing the key in the evidence custodians drop box. Property receipt forms must be filled out by the processing officer, approved by a supervisor and placed with the evidence. If the evidence requires further forensic processing or testing the officer will note this in their report. An Investigator will then be assigned to insure the evidence is properly transferred to the appropriate lab for processing.

5. Perishable evidence collected at the crime scene will be properly packaged, sealed, marked, tagged, and
placed in the evidence refrigerator. 6. Special considerations are necessary for certain items taken into police custody. The following will apply whenever an officer comes into contact with the following items:

5. WEAPONS 1. Any weapon that could possibly need processing at the crime lab will not be unloaded. Loaded firearms will
be hand delivered and clearly marked that the firearm is loaded. The transmitting officer will also advise the lab technician receiving the firearm that the weapon is loaded.

2. All firearms not intended for the crime lab will be unloaded and placed into the evidence

locker. The unloaded ammunition from the weapon will stay in the same container.
3. All weapons will be checked for stolen by the submitting officer. The NCIC printout should be made part of
the original case report.

4. A Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco, Firearms, and Explosives gun trace form will also be completed by the
submitting officer, for each firearm. This form will also be made part of the original case report.

5. Weapons and unloaded ammunition will not be packaged with other evidence. 6. DRUGS 1. Any large quantity of drugs submitted will be weighed by the submitting officer. Each separate bag will be
properly marked with the weight or count, if applicable.

2. Pills or capsules will be counted, unless there is an excessive amount (determined by the officers
supervisor).

3. The property receipt will list the type of dangerous drug, the number of bags submitted, along with the
weight and count. The officer weighing the drugs should indicate whether the drugs were weighed with or without the bag or container.

4. Only drug evidence that is necessary to support the elements for an arrest or anticipated arrest will be
processed by the lab. Officers will not submit evidence obtained from concerned parents, schools, organizations, or in which an arrest will not be made, and evidence found which has no prosecutable value.

5. Guidelines established by the State Crime Lab will be strictly followed. 6. Drugs will be packaged separate from other evidence. 7. MONEY 1. All monies submitted will be counted by both the submitting officer and his supervisor. 2. All money will be submitted in a sealed green envelope and initialed by both the submitting officer
and his supervisor.

3. Money will be packaged separate from other evidence. 8. EXPLOSIVEORHAZARDOUSMATERIALS 1. Volatile fluid of evidentiary value will be stored in the Fire Departments volatile fluids

evidence locker. If more than one gallon is recovered, the submitting officer should attempt to receive authorization from the Prosecutor to store only a sufficient sample.
2. The property tag should indicate the type of fluid, total amount of fluid taken, the amount retained for
evidence, and the amount disposed.

3. Fireworks, railroad flares, fuses, or ammunition less than 50 caliber may be submitted as with other
evidence. All other explosives will be considered unsafe. Such materials need to be discussed with the Prosecutor to determine whether only a sample is required and special consideration for storing and disposing of these items. The total amount of these items will be photographed.

4. The Secretary of State Bomb Squad will be contacted to identify or disarm any explosive material. If they
are not available contact Scott Air Force Base.

9. BIOHAZARDOUSITEMS
Any item of evidence that may be contaminated with a bodily secretion such as blood, semen, urine or feces requires special precautions and packaging. Every department vehicle is supplied with personal protective equipment. Officers should follow the universal precautions described in procedure 5.800. Hypodermic needles and syringes will be placed in plastic tubes. All packages submitted into evidence will be marked with the biohazard label. The property receipt will be marked clearly that the items submitted are to be treated as biohazardous items.

10. LIQUID

1. Any container containing a liquid that may evaporate or leak will be heat sealed in a plastic bag, i.e., alcohol. 2. When the following types of physical evidence/trace evidence are collected from a crime

scene, a known source standard must be collected for comparison by the crime lab:
blood;hair;fibers;paint;glass;wood;metal;soil;toolmarks;footwear impressions; and,elimination prints.

3. The location from which the samples are taken is critical for analysis by the crime lab and

should be thoroughly documented on the officer's supplemental report or property receipt.

4. Investigators are responsible for crime scene sketches and photographing the crime scene, and will follow
established guidelines as outlined in The Evidence Technician Manual.

5. The responsibility for requesting laboratory examination belongs to the officer who collected, packaged and
completed the property receipt. An investigator will be assigned to a case where it is necessary for an item to be submitted to the crime lab for analysis, he will be responsible for monitoring the progress of the evidence through the lab analysis, adjudication and property disposal.

6. When a stolen vehicle is recovered by this Department from another jurisdiction the

originating agency will be contacted by phone and a directed LEADS message. That agency will be asked if the vehicle should be held for processing by members of their department, or be released to the owner.
7. When a vehicle is stolen from our jurisdiction and the occupants were also involved in a more serious
criminal act this information should be included in the LEADS message and our intention to process the vehicle when recovered. 11. PACKAGING,REPORTSANDEVIDENCERECORDS

1. Physical evidence collected by patrol officers or investigators will be properly tagged as evidence as soon as possible.
2. The officer will seal the evidence in a proper container with evidence tape, placing his initials and date across the tape and packaging. If not already pre-printed, a property stamp or tag will be affixed to the container and all requested information will be completed. 3. All evidence will be documented on a property receipt. This form will be completed in its entirety and approved by a supervisor. 4. The officer assigned to the call and preliminary investigation is responsible for documenting any crime scene search and evidence collection he initiated and performed. This information will be included in the narrative of the case report that he is required to complete. 5. Investigators requested to process a crime scene are required to submit a detailed report on their efforts in processing the crime scene. An accurate record of events and all items recovered or processed will be documented. Information in this report should include:

1. date and time of arrival at the scene; 2. location of the crime;

3. names of victim; 4. if a sketch of the scene was made; and 5. action taken at the scene, including the number of photographs taken or videotapes.

6. If an investigator is called to the scene of a serious crime and decides that no evidence can be collected or photographs taken the assigned investigator will submit a supplemental report explaining the reasons.
7. When photographs or video recordings are made the following information will be documented:

1. date and time of incident; 2. nature of incident; 3. location of incident; 4. location where photos were taken;and 5. name of photographer.
8. Video may supplement, but should not replace, still photography. Videos will be clearly marked with the incident number, date, time, location, nature of incident, and officer who operated the camera. 9. A record will be made each time a custodial transfer of physical evidence takes place. All evidence will be stored under the direct control of the evidence custodian. When an officer is required to take evidence to court he will sign the property receipt. Evidence will be returned to the evidence custodian, or will be placed in the evidence lockers. 10. When evidence is retained by the Prosecutor, the officer will complete an evidence receipt in court and have the Prosecutor sign the receipt indicating that he has taken possession of the evidence. The court officer will approve the receipt and submit it to the evidence custodian. 11. When returning evidence after a case has been adjudicated, the court file will indicate the disposition of the evidence. Officers will immediately obtain an order from the judge before leaving court directing the disposition of the evidence. 12. To maintain a record of physical evidence submitted to a laboratory for examination, the submitting officer will complete the crime lab manifest report. The following minimum information is required:

1. name of the officer last having custody of the item; 2. date and time of submission or mailing and method of transmission; 3. date and time of receipt in the laboratory; and 4. name and signature of the person in the laboratory receiving the evidence.

13. The crime lab provides a written report of their findings on all requests for examination. Some cases can be disposed of by the prosecutor or arresting officer by calling the crime lab and getting an oral lab result. However, in all cases, the officer should indicate that a written lab result is necessary for our records. 12. TRAINING 1. Recruit police officers, as part of their basic law enforcement curriculum, are trained in crime scene processing. Additional training in crime scene processing and crash investigations is provided through the Field Training Program for new police officers. 2. Specialized training is provided to personnel assigned duties as an investigator. Training provided for crime scene processing will assist officers in developing the following skills:

1. recovery of latent fingerprints and palm prints; 2. recovery of shoe, tool, and tire impressions; 3. photographing/videotaping crime or crash scenes; 4. preparing crime or crash scene sketches; and, 5. collecting, preserving, and transmitting physical evidence, including biological materials.
3. Investigators will be provided with refresher training in crime scene processing as a component of the inservice training program. 13. INVESTIGATORRESPONSIBILITIESANDRESPONSE 1. The Department will maintain a specialized assignment call out list in the Communications Center to contact an investigator if one is not working and a scene needs to be processed. The Chief of Detectives must authorize the call out of an investigator.

2. The investigator will determine if the services of a State Evidence Technician is warranted.
3. When contact is made with a State Evidence Technician a summary of the events and description of the crime should be explained and if necessary instructions will be given by the State Evidence Technician on how to proceed until arrival. 4. When at the scene of an incident that requires the identification, collection, and preservation of physical evidence, certain functional relationships exist between the State Evidence Technician and others involved in the investigative process. Each person has certain responsibilities and is accountable for the following:

14. PATROLOFFICER 1. Emergency response procedures; 2. Preliminary report and investigation, initial scene protection; and, 3. Support role, if requested, for follow-up investigation. 15. SUPERVISOR

The street supervisor on the scene is responsible for the direction and supervision of all crime scene personnel until relieved by an investigator.

16. INVESTIGATOR 1. Follow-up investigation. 2. Direct control of the crime scene. 3. Collection and preservation of physical evidence. 4. Processing, photographing and videotaping sketching. 5. Packaging and inventorying evidence. 6. Report detailing the crime scene processing, activities and results. 7. When a State Evidence Technician is requested, b through f will become the responsibility

of the State Evidence Technician.

17. STATEEVIDENCETECHNICIAN 1. Direct control of the crime scene during the investigation. 2. Collection and preservation of physical evidence. 3. Processing, photographing and videotaping sketching, 4. Packaging and inventorying evidence. 5. Report detailing the crime scene processing, activities and results. 18. EQUIPMENTANDSUPPLIES
1. Equipment and supplies provided to investigators will be stored in a designated locker. Care and maintenance of the equipment and supplies is the responsibility of the investigator specifically delegated this task. This investigator will ensure that enough supplies are on hand to handle any call to process a crime scene and the designated evidence case is appropriately stocked and ready for use.

2. Whenever equipment needs repair or supplies need to be replaced the investigator assigned to maintain the supplies will submit a request to the criminal investigations unit supervisor.

Procedure #5.501

GRANTIE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title:EVIDENCE POLICY Procedure:5.501 DateIssued: Revised:

I. PURPOSE A. The purpose of this policy is to establish guidelines for maintaining the integrity of the evidentiary chain of custody. II. POLICY A. It is the policy of the Granite City Police Department to ensure that evidence in its custody can be properly secured and stored, readily retrieved, and that changes in its custody have been properly and fully documented. III. DEFINITIONS A. CHAIN OF EVIDENCE: The continuity of the custody of physical evidence -- from the time or original collection to final disposal -- which may be introduced in judicial proceedings. B. IMPOUNDING OFFICER: The member of the Granite City Police Department who initially receives the evidence and initiates the chain of custody. C. PHYSICAL EVIDENCE: Any substance or material found or recovered in connection with a criminal investigation. D. EVIDENCE CUSTODIAN: Granite City Police Department member accountable for control and maintenance of all evidence accepted by or stored in the Police Department's evidence rooms. E. EVIDENCE ROOMS: Facilities utilized by the Granite City Police Department to store evidence. IV. PROCEDURES A. PROCESSING EVIDENCE 1. Any member of the Police Department who has evidence to be placed in the evidence room shall include in their written report the location it was found or recovered. The inventory sheet shall be approved by a supervisor and shall include the following information for all

items of evidence: a. Description of the item (including make, model number and serial number, if any). b. Storage location for each item of evidence. c. Name of person primarily responsible for collecting the item or items. 2. The impounding officer shall properly handle, mark, and package all evidence and transport all physical evidence to the evidence room, or other authorized secure location as soon as practical. 3. Evidence of a hazardous nature shall be appropriately packaged and stored in accordance with established agency policy. Such substance includes, but not limited to, items which may have been exposed to or contaminated by communicable diseases, hazardous chemicals or waste products, or explosives or highly combustible products. Where appropriate, the evidence custodian will make arrangements and assume responsibility for storage and control of such substances outside the evidence rooms. B. RETAIL THEFT EVIDENCE 1. When officers are handling retail theft investigations, the evidence should be seized at the scene and retained by that officer. 2. The suspect shall be positively identified and a criminal history obtained via computer and Granite City Police Department records. 3. Should the case constitute possible felony charges (eg: amount over $150.00 or second subsequent arrest) the evidence shall be packaged properly and retained by the Department. 4. If the case will be prosecuted as a misdemeanor, the evidence may be photographed and returned to the merchant. This can be done when the complainant signs the complaint at the station. 5. In cases where the suspect was not apprehended at the scene, officers shall use their discretion on what to do with the evidence. Retain or return it. C. Any time an officer brings any property to the station for holding, be it lost, abandoned, recovered or evidence, an evidence sheet is to be made. 1. Example: a. Officer picks up item. b. Item brought to station and either tagged or placed in evidence bag and properly marked.

c. Officer then enters the item into New World Systems as property, whether there is a report or not. The item is barcoded and an evidence sheet is printed. If evidence is accepted from Fire Department, they must sign the evidence sheet (OIC to insure this is done). d. Evidence is then secured in a temporary evidence locker, located in the hallway between he booking area and the cell block. The Officer places the evidence in a locker, places the evidence sheet in with the evidence, locks the locker, and drops the key into the lock box located to the left of the temporary lockers. Evidence officer will then pick up the key and take evidence to a permanent room. We will properly secure and store evidence until proper disposal. e. Lockers will be cleaned out approximately twice a week. f. Anything larger than the two (2) lockers may be secured in an interview room within the Detective Division. g. If there is an extra large item, it may be secured in the small garage or at the Annex Building. The evidence sheet should be marked accordingly. Evidence should not be placed in the sally port. h. We have seven (7) storage areas, although only #1 will normally be used by patrol. (1) Evidence Room #1 = temporary lockers. (2) Evidence Room #2 = Downstairs front of building. (3) Evidence Room #3 = upstairs in building addition. (4) Evidence Room #4 = located in computer forensics lab. (5) Evidence Room #5 = downstairs front of building (across from Evidence Room # 2) (6) Annex Building (7) Department Safe NOTE: Bloody clothes will be locked in the Janitor's room under special lock. D. IMPOUNDING EVIDENCE 1. The evidence custodian shall be responsible for receiving, storing, maintaining, releasing and accounting for all evidence in compliance with established Department policy. 2. When evidence is deposited with the evidence custodian or in an approved holding facility, AN EVIDENCE RECEIPT SHALL BE COMPLETED BY THE IMPOUNDING OFFICER. The evidence receipt shall include all information necessary to both document

and ensure the integrity of the chain of custody. All monies shall be counted by the evidence impounding officer, packaged separately and recorded on the evidence receipt. Monies are to be secured in a green evidence envelope. Firearms also should be packaged separately and UNLOADED. 3. The evidence custodian shall be responsible for developing and maintaining a master file of all evidence invoiced and evidence tags completed. This file may either be manual or automated and shall be cross indexed with the chain of evidence custody file. E. STORAGE OF EVIDENCE 1. The evidence custodian shall assign a storage location to each item of evidence and record this information on the evidence receipt and evidence tag. 2. Evidence requiring added security, to include money, precious metals, expensive jewelry, gemstones shall be stored in a safe. 3. Perishable items shall be stored in a refrigerator or other suitable container. 4. Blood evidence should be stored in the evidence refrigerator. F. ACCESS TO THE EVIDENCE ROOM 1. Only members of the Granite City Police Department authorized and accompanied by the Evidence Custodian shall enter the evidence room. G. INSPECTIONS OF THE EVIDENCE ROOM 1. On a bi-annual basis the evidence room will be inspected by the Chief of Police to ensure adherence to appropriate procedures and policies. 2. There will be an annual inventory of the evidence rooms. H. RECORDING TRANSFERS OF CUSTODY 1. The evidence custodian shall be responsible for developing and maintaining a file that documents all changes in custody of physical evidence. The file shall be capable of readily identifying the individual or organization currently maintaining custody of all evidence. 2. A written record of all transfers of physical evidence shall be made. 3. Members of the Granite City Police Department who assume custody of evidence from the evidence rooms bear full responsibility for ensuring its security, proper storage, and maintenance, and for the ready retrieval of such evidence upon demand. I. DISPOSAL OF EVIDENCE

1. When no longer needed for evidentiary purposes, all evidence, with the exception of firearms and contraband, shall be returned to its lawful owner (unless title to the evidence is transferred to the jurisdiction by court order) or the lawful owner fails to claim the evidence. In such cases the Granite City Police Department may, as permitted under State law: a. Destroy the item. b. Dispose of the item by public auction. c. Retain the item for use by the jurisdiction. 2. Firearms and other non-drug contraband shall be physically destroyed unless: a. Court order authorizes use of items by the Granite City Police Department; or b. The firearm is required by State Law or court order to be returned to its rightful owner; or c. Remanded to State Police Lab. 3. The Chief of Police or his designee shall designate an investigator to monitor the entire drug destruction process and: a. On date of destruction, monitor the loading of the items to be destroyed, accompany the items to the destruction site, and observe the destruction process. b. After the completion of the destruction process, submit a report to the Chief of Police which will include: (1) The date, time and location of the destruction; (2) An inventory of items destroyed. (3) A list of those present at the destruction.

Procedure #5.900

GRANITE CITY POLICE DEPARTMENT

Title:Small Arms RangeStandardProcedure:5.900 Operating Procedure DateIssued: Revised:

I. PURPOSE A. The purpose of this policy is to govern the use and management of the Granite City Police Department Small Arms Range. II. POLICY A. It is the policy of this Department to provide a safe firearms training facility and govern the use of the facility by Department members and outside agencies requesting access to the Granite City Police Department Small Arms Firing Range. B. This SOP governs operation of the Granite City Police Department Small Arms Range. III. APPROVAL FOR USE OF SMALL ARMS RANGE A. Any unit/organization (including military units/organizations) desiring to use the range will send a one time request through the Granite City Police Department for approval. Once an organization receives approval they will schedule the range through phone or written letter to the Granite City Police Department. B. Use of the Small Arms range is limited to those organizations who have been approved by the Granite City Police Dept. The Granite City Police Department has priority of range use at all times. C. The approval to use the Small Arms range by Granite City Police Department will not constitute approval of any activities that violate this existing policy. D. The Granite City Police Dept. will:
1. Maintain the range 2. Issue the range SOP, and range flag.

IV. REQUEST FOR RANGE

A. All requests for the use of the range will be submitted in advance in writing to the Granite City Police Department. Allow adequate time, thirty (30 days), to process the request, particularly if it is a first-time request, and to allow the Granite City Police Department to schedule firing times. B. All requests for ranges will include the following (See ATTACHMENT A for range request form): 1. Name and Rank of the Range Master in Charge (OIC). 2. Name and Rank of the Range Officer/Firearm Instructor. 3. Unit, Date and time of utilization. 4. Number of personnel firing. 5. Type of weapon to be fired. (Note: the range is certified only for .45 pistol ammunition and smaller, to include 9 mm and shotgun firing number 7 1/2-9 field load from a distance not to exceed fifteen (15) yards. Rifle firing/ammunition, fully automatic firing, slugs, or 3 round burst firing is not authorized. 6. Attach a copy of instructor certification to all requests, unless already on file. V. PRE-FIRE BRIEFING A. The Range Master responsibilities: 1. The Range Master will be responsible for everyone within the range area. 2. The Range Master will be completely familiar and comply with all range safety procedures. 3. The Range Master will be responsible for designating assignments for firearm instructors/ range officers. 4. All personnel will wear proper safety protection, including hearing and eye protection during firing. 5. Using units will make a thorough police call at the termination of firing and will remove all trash, place unserviceable target frames in dumpster, and remove all cartridges and expended brass from the range area. 6. Once the range is closed, the Range Master will insure that all equipment and personnel are out of the range area and that the building and gates are locked and keys returned to the Granite City Police Department, as appropriate.

7. Using units are responsible for providing all materials needed to ensure the successful training/qualification of their personnel, i.e.: targets, ammunition, weapons, etc., except as specifically outlined in this SOP. 8. The requesting unit may cancel range reservations and should do so as soon as possible to facilitate the use of the range by other organizations. Requesting units may cancel by calling the Granite City Police Department. 9. Use of steel targets is strictly prohibited, unless authorized by the Chief. VI. RANGE PERSONNEL A. Personnel required for conducting small arms firing are: one (1) Range Master, one (1) Range Officer/Firearms Instructor; one (1) Assistant Firearms Instructor for every five (5) firing points used. B. During live fire at least one (1) certified firearms instructor will be on the line at all times. C. The Range Master is responsible for the implementation of all policies and procedures described in this SOP. He/she will be personally responsible for the conduct of all personnel on the range, enforcement of applicable safety regulations and police of the range after firing. He/ she will insure that range equipment is not damaged and the range is run properly. Under no circumstances will range firing be conducted without the presence of a Range Master/instructor on the premises. D. If none of the above personnel are present or all depart the range for any reason, firing will cease. VII. DUTIES OF THE RANGE MASTER A. The using agency/unit must have some type ofcommunications (cell phone, radio, etc) in the event of an emergency. B. Those departments/agencies using the range are responsible for making arrangements for medical/ambulance support. C. Insure all weapons are checked as soon as they arrive on the range to see that none contain live ammunition. Consider every weapon as being loaded until it is examined and cleared. D. Instruct all officers/agents regarding safety regulations and other pertinent information prior to firing. E. Insure policing of range at the end of firing day. F. After locking the range, return the range flag to the Granite City Police Dept.

VIII. DUTIES OF THE RANGE OFFICER A. Directly represents the Range Master. B. Responsible to the Range Master for insuring safety on the range at all times. C. Notify the Range Master when range is safe for firing. D. Display a red range flag during firing. E. Carry out any additional duties given by the OIC. IX. SAFETY A. Safety is a responsibility of all concerned and cannot be assumed as the sole responsibility of any single, designated individual. All personnel will take every precaution to prevent accidents. The twenty-four (24) hour Granite City Police Department/EMS number is 9-1-1. 1. During firing, personnel will stay on the range and use only the range road to enter and exit the range. At no time will personnel pass over the top of the berm from the firing line or from behind the berm. 2. Personnel will not be permitted to move forward of the firing line until the Range officer has declared the range clear. In the event of an emergency, the Range Master will be promptly notified. The Range Officer will order a cease fire and clear all weapons. 3. Personnel will not be permitted to enter danger zones and/or impact areas, during live firing. 4. A red danger flag will be flown from the range pole near the front gate when firing is conducted. X. Any abnormalities, equipment malfunctioning, or Range maintenance problems are to be reported to the Granite City Police Department as soon as is practical. A. Point of contact is Lt Werths and Sgt Merz, Granite City Police Department, 451-9760, or his designee.